JP6702274B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that the light emitting means and the displacing means overlap each other when viewed in a predetermined direction (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-159178, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the effect of rendering is insufficient. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first light emitting means capable of irradiating light visible in a predetermined region of the transparent member fixed at a predetermined position, and the transparent member disposed on the back side, and a displacement means adapted to said predetermined region and Naru heavy first position is included in at least part of the displacement interval in a predetermined direction as viewed, the transmission member, the first A plate-shaped member formed so as to diffuse the light from the light emitting means in a direction intersecting the plate thickness direction and capable of directly receiving the light from the first light emitting means; and the predetermined direction. A second region that does not overlap with the first light emitting means when viewed, the first position is a position that overlaps with the second region when viewed in the predetermined direction, and the displacing means emits light to the predetermined region. a second light-emitting means capable of irradiating, the predetermined direction when viewed in the shiftable to the first position by the parallel movement and rotational movement from the second position located outside of the predetermined area, the predetermined region includes a region configured to be visible in multiple types of state-like corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a board box .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the effect.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1, the board can be housed in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6B is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of an operating device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device when viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a XIVc- of FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18A is a side view of the left disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 18B is a side view of the left disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a releasing member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a releasing member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a side view of a tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operating device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. 59A is a side view of the lower frame member, FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A, and FIG. 59C is FIG. 59A. FIG. 6 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as seen in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59A and 59B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a), FIG. 65C is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66A. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of Fig.6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in arrow LXVIIb direction view of Fig.67 (a). Is. 6A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 6B is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. Is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG.6(a). (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74A. Is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of a ring member, (c) is a side view of the ring member in the arrow LXXVIc direction view of Fig. 76 (a). 77A is a front view of the engaging member, and FIG. 77B is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77A. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78(a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78D is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78C, FIG. 78E is a front view of the right disc cam, and FIG. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e). (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section figure of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state where the inner frame was opened (developed) with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the inner frame is closed with respect to the outer frame and the front frame is opened (developed). It is a front view of a pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members disposed below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in Fig. 94(a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (A) is a schematic back view schematically showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) shows the binding movable member and the harness. FIG. 96 is a schematic back view schematically shown, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which illustrates typically a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an expansion front view of the 1st bending field. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a weight plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a weight plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a weight plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a weight plate unit. 112A is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 112B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112A. FIG. 11A is a side view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 11B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A. (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A. It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front side assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear side assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) of FIG. 124(a). FIG. 124 is a top view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as seen in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper side frame member, the main body frame, and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front side assembly, a rear side assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the board surface support device and the game board which showed the board surface support device and the game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a board|surface support apparatus. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a board|surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board|substrate support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board|substrate support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is a disassembled front perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a sphere launching unit which shows a sphere sending-out situation by a sphere sending device in time series. It is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting. FIG. 14A is a front view of the ball launching unit, and FIG. 14B is a partial top view of the ball launching unit when viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146A. (A) is a front view of a ball firing unit, (b) is a front perspective view of a cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a performance operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 157 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operation device taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a central axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance/retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance/retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operation device, (b) is a front view of a petal operation device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device without the central axis rotation device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operation device, (b) is a front view of a petal operation device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device without the central axis rotation device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a petal operation device, (b) is a front view of a petal operation device, (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device without the central axis rotation device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operation device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operation device. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device in a 12th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a partially expanded front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a 12th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operating device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the arrow CCIIIb direction view of (a) of FIG. 203, (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203A. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). It is a partial expanded perspective view of a light guide member, and (c) is a partial expanded perspective view of a light guide member which represents typically the downward concave part recessed in the light guide member in area|region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part provided in the light guide member in the area|region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. 207. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of a lower plate unit, (b) is a front view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a bottom view of the lower plate unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit. (A) is a right side view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left side view of the lower plate unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a), (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 229 is a sectional view of the lower plate unit taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper performance device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper performance device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper performance device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper performance device. (A) is a front view of a rear unit, (b) is a front view of an electric decoration board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rear unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rear unit. (A) is a partial sectional view of a partition member, an illumination substrate, a back support member and an acoustic device in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241, and (b) is a partition member in the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination substrate, a back surface support member, and an acoustic device in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a partition member in the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio device. 24A is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member, an illumination substrate, a back surface support member, and an audio device in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241, and FIG. 24B is a partition member in the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a decorative substrate, a back support member, and an audio device. It is a side surface schematic diagram of an upper production device. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of a partition unit and a guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partition unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a partition unit, (b) is a rear view of the partition unit. (A) is a front view of a plate guide unit, (b) is a rear view of the plate guide unit. 251(a) is a sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit along the CCLIVa-CCLIVa line in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 25(b) is a partition unit and guided unit in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 25C is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit taken along the line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251B. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is a rear view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit and the outer frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is It is a right view of the transparent cylindrical member as seen in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of an optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of an optical transmission unit, (d) is an optical transmission unit. FIG. 4B is a right side view in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, the acoustic device, and the light transmission unit taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination section, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of light visually recognized through the light transmission unit. .. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral effect device. (A) is a front view of a base member and an illumination board, (b) is a left side view of a base member, (c) is a right side view of a base member, (d), It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the decorative substrate taken along the line CCLIXIXf-CCLXIXf of FIG. 269(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a covering unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of a light receiving member, (c) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member. FIG. 27A is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272A, and FIG. 27B is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272B. (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is sectional drawing of the horizontal production|generation apparatus in CCXLXXVa-CCLXXXVa line of FIG. 274(b), and (b) is sectional drawing of the light-receiving member in CCXLXXVb-CCLXXXVb line of FIG. 274(b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illuminated substrate, and the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b), and FIG. FIG. 27C is a cross-sectional view of the decorated substrate and the light-receiving member, and FIG. 27C is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the decorated substrate, and the light-receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. FIG. 280 is a schematic view of a base member, an illumination substrate, and a light receiving member that schematically show the cross section of FIG. 280(a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the effect device taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 28B is a schematic view of the decorative board of the effect device when viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. It is a side view of the cover in a 19th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in 20th Embodiment in the line corresponding to CCXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line of FIG. 229. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower plate unit in 21st Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a lower plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibrating device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibrating device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. It is a front view of a covering cover member. (A) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). It is a rear view of a lower plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the lower plate unit in CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of FIG. 296 (a). (A) is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates typically a lower plate unit, (b) is a partial side schematic diagram of the lower plate unit in the arrow CCXCIXb direction view of FIG. 299 (a). is there. (A) is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower tray unit which illustrates typically a lower tray unit, (b) is a partial side surface schematic diagram of the lower tray unit in the arrow CCCb direction view of FIG. 300 (a). is there. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower plate unit which illustrates the lower plate unit typically. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state where the front frame was opened (developed) with respect to the inner frame. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. (A) is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a lottery unit. FIG. 3A is a side view of the engagement member viewed from the rotation axis direction of the engagement member, and FIG. 3B is a front view of the engagement member as viewed from the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. FIG. 312C is a cross-sectional view of the engagement member taken along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312B. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a main body member, an engagement member, and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the lottery unit in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line of FIG.312(b). (A) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 302 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and operation unit taken along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front cover. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of the decorative board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative board and the board fixing board taken along the line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb in FIG. 331(a). (A) is a front view of an electric decoration board and a board fixing board, and (b) is a sectional view of the electric decoration board and the board fixing board in the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line of Drawing 332 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front side unit and rear side unit of a 1st operation unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st displacement member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st displacement member. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of a front side unit, (b) is a rear view of the front side unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of a front side unit, (b) is a rear view of the front side unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (A) is a front view of a front side unit, (b) is a rear view of the front side unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. It is a rear view of a front unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a). is there. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of a gear with a pin and an in-phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the gear with a pin and an in-phase member on the left side, and is a right side of the gear with a pin and the in-phase member on the right side It is a rear perspective view. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear unit. FIG. 356 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX of FIG. 356(a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the gear with a pin, and the same phase member on the basis of an initial angle. It is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd operation unit and a back case. It is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is the front exploded perspective view of the production unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body of the effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body of the effect unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotation member. (A) is a front exploded perspective view of a support part, (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a 2nd support part. (A) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion, and (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-shaped part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a top view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of an upper lid part, a box-shaped part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotating member, (b) is a top view of a 1st rotating member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 376 (a), (c) is a 1st rotating member FIG. 37D is a front view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376C. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotating member, (b) is a top view of a 1st rotating member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (a), (c) is a 1st rotating member FIG. 37D is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377C. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotating member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotating member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 378 (a), (c) is a 1st rotating member. FIG. 3D is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotating member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotating member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 379 (a), (c) is a 1st rotating member. FIG. 37D is a front view of FIG. 379C, and is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379C. (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow 380 (a) in FIG. 380, (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (D) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (A) is a front view of the production unit, (b) is a top view of the production unit in the arrow D direction of FIG. 381 (a), (c) is a front view of the production unit, FIG. 38D is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of the arrow D in FIG. 381C. It is a front view of an annular front cover and a rotating body. It is an upper surface schematic diagram which shows typically the 1st rotation member in 23rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the front side unit in a 24th embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing in the line corresponding to CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of FIG. 339(a) of the 1st operation unit in 25th Embodiment, (b) is CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line of FIG. 344(a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation unit in the line corresponding to. (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement device in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b), It is a rear view of the back side unit in a 27th embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear unit.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 44, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down in front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side so that the rear surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are provided. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray (not shown) is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. (See 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by using an LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by a lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device provides a round of jackpots. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 4R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  The "high probability state" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot is finished, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (probably changing), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of jackpot is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probable change or during the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is generated by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") which performs variable display, and an LED which variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling the third symbol for each symbol column. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, whereas the first The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

  In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability variation or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The through gate 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls emitted to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Two second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of the through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetric, so that the player can aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is during a probable change, during a shortening of time, or during a normal time), how to shoot a ball to the player. It is not necessary to change from "left-handed" to "right-handed". Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times as a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The outlet 71 is arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device, by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open/close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center part in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center part in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed by a player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. It is arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) when the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310.

  A space is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a mode in which the fingertip is arranged on the inner side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6A, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (the initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the up-down direction, and in FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 moves from the first state. The state where the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and backward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that, in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, performed by the player when a specific display (for example, “press button” display) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of dropping the hand vigorously like pushing in a button that moves up and down, for example, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves to the front side depending on the degree of tilting. It is in a mode in which the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed with each other. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness, and it is possible to prevent the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping the hand down vigorously.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damaging the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 when viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 when viewed in the direction of arrow IX of FIG. 7. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to operate is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the player's point of view to the extent that it is invisible in the first state and invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased, and accordingly, the LED device 341f arranged inside the operation device 300 (see FIG. 12)), the difference in the amount of light that can be visually recognized by the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of light and darkness) becomes large, and the first state and the second state Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm side is lowered with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. By this (by rotating the wrist about the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Therefore, the player can be guided to perform an operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damaging the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that gives a shock in the straight direction to the tilting device 310, and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state, move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

  In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor for giving the driving force, etc. on the outer side of the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used and the tilting is performed. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. This makes it possible to secure a large movable amount of the tilting device 310.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR1 arranged at left and right end portions on the back side end portion (the end portion on the back side of FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and that defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side. Is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a mode in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320. Along with the upper frame member 330 that determines the disposition of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the tilting device 310 via the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A drive device 340 that transmits a drive force and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and that protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from the left and right directions and the rear side are mainly provided.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and includes a bottom plate portion 321 inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321. Of the tilting device 310, which is a horizontal portion 322 formed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the tilting portion, and a semicircular receiving portion that is opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, a left detection sensor 324L that is arranged in a left and right pair below the bottom plate portion 321, a right detection sensor 324R, and a horizontal center position of the bottom plate portion 321 in the horizontal direction. An opening 325, which is an opening that is opened by cutting a portion arranged below the portion 322, is mainly provided.

  The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by contacting the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. It

  The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a formed in the front center portion, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right sides of the opening 325. Mainly provided are insertion holes 321c that are formed symmetrically.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at the front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in such a size that the overhanging protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 can pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear movement direction.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. By disposing the detection pieces 311gL, 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L, 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c has a size such that the shaft portion 311c provided on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, is extended upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the front side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. Since the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) of the lower frame member 320 from the bottom plate portion 321 is equal on the left and right.

  Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting portion that projects light and a light receiving portion that receives light from the light projecting portion, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the drive device 340 has a configuration in which the LED device 341f is arranged so as to project to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), and therefore the drive device is provided after the LED device 341f has passed through the opening 325. By pushing 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 is smaller. The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331 that is an opening of a size that catches the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 configured to have a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically dividable so as to cover three directions except the front side, and a main body cover 351 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side. The detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

  Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L to the left-right center visible.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 is arranged such that the vibrating surface thereof is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 projects the protruding projecting portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. The disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged in a manner arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in a specific phase. You can

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2. It becomes a kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is It is sectional drawing of the tilting device 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having a side-fan shape and an opening at the top and the bottom, and a lid that covers the opening on the upper side of the case body 311. A lid 312 that is fastened and fixed to the case main body 311, a spherical lens member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a mode in which the lid is sandwiched at the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. And a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and a ring shape for fixing the case body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear end portions of the case body 311 and the lid 312. The ring member BR1 is mainly provided.

  In the first state, the case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a which is inclined downward from the back side toward the front side, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. And a columnar shaft portion 311c extending from the flange that extends downward along the edge toward the center in the left-right direction, and a recessed portion 311d that is a recess having a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. And an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , A left side detection piece 311gL, a right side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, and a right side detection piece 311gR extending from the front side end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a by a predetermined amount. The installation portion 311h, the protective lens member 311i formed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and formed along a circular arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and formed of a light transmissive material; and the bottom plate portion. 311a is mainly provided with an overhanging protruding portion 311j protruding downward from the center portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a columnar member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits a driving force to and from the driving device 340. Equipped with.

  The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are portions which are inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311gL about the shaft portion 314 is about 3° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left side detection piece 311gL is protruded in comparison with the right side detection piece 311gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 23).

  The extended portion 311h is a portion protruding from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked in the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is composed of modes.

  Since the protection lens member 311i has a curved shape in a top view (see FIG. 14A) and a curved shape in a left-right direction (see FIG. 14C), the player can It is configured so that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). As a result, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging protrusion 311j is formed at a right angle from the bottom surface of the bottom plate 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. The player operates the tilting device 310 by pushing it. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a, and the tip thereof is projected below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape of a size that surrounds the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312c emits light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310. While being retained inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and the extending ends thereof have a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. A spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape is provided in the center.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 in a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the paired twisted portions. , Is provided.

  Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17A is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18 is a driving device 340. FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a framework by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a drive force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (a left disc cam 344L and a right disc cam that are non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343. 344R), the arm member 345 axially supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second portion of the disc cam 344. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotation direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is axially supported coaxially with the release member 346 and that relatively moves as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary claw member 347 fall down. The first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-shaped spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of making the releasing member 346 and the rotation claw member 347 have a torsion spring shape that generates an urging force in the direction of separating them from each other. A second spring SP2, which is a spring member, is mainly provided.

  The main body member 341 is formed in the same position as the motor housing portion 341a that is bent leftward and rightward rearward and formed in a U-shape in a top view, and the plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a that is arranged to face the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that is provided to project in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side in a mode having an axis parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b. , An extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending from the motor housing portion 341a toward a front upper direction, and the lighting support portion 341e. An LED device 341f, which is arranged at the upper end portion and in which an LED light source is arranged, is mainly provided.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly emitted upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing portion 341a inside the U-shaped portion of the motor housing portion 341a.

  The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

  The arm member 345 has a perfect circular shape at one end thereof, a shaft support hole 345a axially supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a rectangular shape at the other end. In addition, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the disc cam 344 makes one rotation or more. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a columnar member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is axially supported by the columnar member 343a and meshes with a rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the columnar member 343a by axial movement, and a coil spring 343d for pressing the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly equipped with.

  The columnar member 343a is provided with fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 having a D-shaped section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. It Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed in such a length that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c. And a portion 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the columnar member 343a even when the columnar member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c is formed with an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the columnar member 343a is inserted, and a concavo-convex shape along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the shaft center from a surface arranged to face the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having a top angle of about 100°.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the columnar member 343a is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. Thus, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the columnar member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

  The movable clutch 343c is usually arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when a load is applied to the movable clutch 343c in the axial direction, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 in a manner separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The left and right disc cams 344L and 344eR are different from each other only in the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. The description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

  20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L viewed from the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L viewed from the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. is there. 20(a) and 20(b), the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a true circular disc, and is located at the center position of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a that is convexly formed inward in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b that is convexly formed inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b are formed. An engaging rib 344c having a portion that protrudes inward as a rib having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding outward in the radial direction at two locations, and an outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d that is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding in the direction and that is connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL that is formed near the outer periphery.

  The right disc cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. ..

  The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting hole 341b.

  The circular rib 344b is provided so as to project to a position where it can be brought into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disk cam 344 is axially supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c is a first protrusion that extends outward in the radial direction at a position displaced by 80° in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed. From the overhanging portion 344c1, the first retracting portion 344c2 retracting radially inward at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1=50° in the present embodiment), and from the first overhanging portion 344c1. At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in the present embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that is again bulged outward in the radial direction and an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, an angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3). θ3=20°) and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction is mainly provided.

  In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

  21A and 21B are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. 21A, the rotation claw member 347 is rotated with respect to the releasing member 346 to the urging direction end position of the second spring SP2, and the large angle state is shown. In FIG. 21B, the releasing member 346 is shown. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

  The state in which the release member 346 rotates by being brought into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the elongated guide hole 347b). State) (see FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a axially supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From the shaft support hole 346a, the protruding pin 346b is formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and is protruded in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted. An engagement portion 346d configured as a portion protruding with the maximum diameter is mainly provided.

  The engagement portion 346d is a portion configured to be capable of contacting the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In this embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly brought into contact with the engaging rib 344.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, has a shaft support hole 347a that is axially supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), and has an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide elongated hole 347b formed along the release member 346 such that the protruding pin 346b can be guided (a size that includes the movement locus of the protruding pin 346b inside) and the end of the second spring SP2. The insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d that is protruded downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end portion of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is arranged at the end position in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotation pawl member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 integrally rotate in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion 346d When the load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs a pushing operation in the state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 22, and FIG. 23 illustrates the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand that repeatedly operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 maintains its posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) always acts on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 may be repeated depending on the time interval at which the player continuously hits. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable because the player will not be able to return in time, and he/she will have to push in at a halfway position.

  In the past, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, if the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that is pushed down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost increases and space saving cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by a vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the overhanging protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310. It

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the restoring operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed quickly without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, if the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 will be driven and the player will be instructed. Since an unnecessary load is given, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state during a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation. This allows the player to comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  Note that FIG. 25 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 27 shows a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned, and in FIG. 28, 29 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocally rotates, FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state of FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 illustrates a circle from the state illustrated in FIG. 29. A state in which the plate cam 344 has rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes in the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, a large amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be secured. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c can exert the effect of improving the strength as the rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). Direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, whereby the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

  The posture change of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises due to the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is in an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, The releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) by the biasing force of the first spring SP1, and the rotating claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 27). 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper side angle in FIG. 27), so the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

  In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's point of view increases as compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. The light from the LED device 341f can be emitted in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

  In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in accordance with the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visually recognizable through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-back direction. Not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 28).

  According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward and its irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This can improve the degree of attention of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the state in which the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c). Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed from being applied to the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of pushing of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating the member 347 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and then pushing the tilting device 310, the rotary claw member 347 moves to the tilting device 310. It returns to the engageable position (rotates in the forward direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

  Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down, when the player releases the hand, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state. ..

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs an oscillating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). Thereby, after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end, the player can keep the hand on the tilting device 310 and transmit the vibration to the player.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 has a purpose of generating a driving force for assisting the ascending of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24) and a purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing-in end position. Can be used for.

  As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his/her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 causes the lower frame member 320 to move. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and pushes it to the end.

  Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, whether or not vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the end of pushing when pushing the tilting device 310 is pressed, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 to operate. Can only be grasped.

  Whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means becomes low.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only by pushing the tilting device 310.

  Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when a big hit is determined, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310. The value as a pre-reading means of can be improved. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating unit can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is moved in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 reverse direction) until the second projecting portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346. The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

  From the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then reversely rotates. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotating claw member 347. it can.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, in the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (stirring motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (raising operation) through the second state.

  31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). 32 is shown. FIG. 32 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and in FIG. 33, the state shown in FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 33, the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. 33. Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 34, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 to operate is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 causes the disc cam 344 to pass through the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with a low resistance without being pulled by, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released). It is possible to set the posture in which the 310 can be arranged in the second state (the posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disc cam 344 interferes with the state change (the disc. It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

  As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 with respect to the player can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player with respect to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in accordance with the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visually recognizable through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the degree of attention of the player to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 33, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-back direction. And not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33).

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This can improve the degree of attention of the tilting device 310.

  The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the vertical movement mode of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (a tilting movement), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. This can be performed immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 is released. Therefore, it is possible to create two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

  As a result, compared to the case where the operation member 310 makes the same motion every time, it is possible to give a different meaning to the motion mode (for example, a difference in expectation of a big hit), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state in which the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion). 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

  Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed from being applied to the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process in which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotation pawl member 347 to move the rotation pawl member 347 backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing in the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

  Therefore, when the player releases the hand after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation of setting the disc cam 344 in the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. To do. By this method, it becomes possible to perform two types of vertical movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310 alternately or continuously one of them.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 35 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotation cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35, and then the forward rotation direction is reached until the disc cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346. (Counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 35) is illustrated, and in FIG. 37, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 36) from the status shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. Note that, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated rearward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c causes the engaging portion of the releasing member 346 to move. It abuts 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the releasing member 346 to change the posture of the releasing member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the releasing member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide elongated hole 347b of the rotating claw member 347. The rotary claw member 347 remains and is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotation claw member 347 is used. It is possible to maintain the regulation of the rising of the tilting device 310.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotation cam 344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

  In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to stop the disc cam 344 accurately in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the second initial state shown in FIG. 36 is used. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (raising movement) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

  Here, a player who pushes in the tilting device 310 can perform an operation of leaving his/her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. is there.

  This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that pushed the surplus tilting device 310 that concentrates on the production, but in this case, even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released, the tilting device 310 rises. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs the reciprocating operation (forward/reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (shaking motion) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350. In a first initial state of the drive device 340 in which (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward due to the player's hand being above the tilting device 310. In this case, therefore, the state from the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change occurs by rotating drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the drive motor 342 reciprocates (forward/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. It is possible to avoid the operation), reduce the load on the drive motor 342, and extend the life of the motor.

  Note that when the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction so as to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state quickly, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  A device for preventing the drive device 340 from being destroyed will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. 38 is a sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. Note that, in FIG. 38, a player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, an upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player holds and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be free to rotate with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving while the disc cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are passed. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Accordingly, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disc cam 344 once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned on while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°) (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state). In addition, the player is determined to intentionally perform an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and to stop the gripping operation, for example, by displaying it on the third symbol display device 81, the notification is given. At the same time, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally makes an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify that the erroneous operation should be stopped, and at the same time, stop the drive motor 342 to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are deviated. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be accurately operated (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with the state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, The control can be performed in the state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are matched again.

  As a result, when performing the effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a gap between the operation that the tilting device 310 attempts to perform by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation that the tilting device 310 actually performs. It is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to have a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and in FIG. 41, the disc cam is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 40. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is illustrated. Further, FIG. 42 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and in FIG. 43, the disc cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. The state in which 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 stands up toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG. 42.

  This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 42 toward the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c contacts the releasing member 346, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted up by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotation claw is rotated. No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, from the player's point of view, from the first state shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. Is different from that of FIG. 41 or FIG.

  For example, a difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 is generated. Due to the difference in change, the player becomes aware of the mode of control that is being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load imposed on the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and then the operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is prevented. Since the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the direction of rotation in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves from the first state to the first state or when the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 moves toward the first state when the expectation level of the effect changes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. As a result, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises up or maintains the first state, so that the player can achieve the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can move the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and the drive motor 342 moves toward the first state. Can be directed to watch over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310, and therefore, the tilting device 310 and the driving device are driven by the player's erroneous operation when the drive motor 342 is driven. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

  Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. Therefore, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 performs the vertical movement without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode) explain.

  FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 44) by a predetermined amount from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, and the first The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. By reciprocally rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not to pass the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocally moved up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) in accordance with the change in the posture of the release member 346. In the case of vertical movement, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. When the pawl member 347 engages with the tilting device 310, an operation mode can be performed in which the tilting device 310 moves above a position where the raising is restricted) and the vertical movement is continued.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, by providing a difference in performance between the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether or not the robot is moving up and down in the third operation mode.

  As a difference in performance, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues the up and down motion even if the hand is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed and operated). Assuming that the expectation of a big hit is high, the expectation of a big hit is recognized not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain an opportunity, it is possible to provide the operating device 300 with many timings when the player pays attention. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described. However, in the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 causes the slide claw member 2348 to move. The slide claw member 2348 is configured to slide when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45B is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45C is a side view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

  46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

  46(a) shows a state in which the rotation plate member 2347 has rotated to the urging direction end position of the second spring SP2 with respect to the releasing member 2346, and in FIG. 46(b), with respect to the releasing member 2346. A small angular state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates by being brought into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the elongated guide hole 347b). State) (see FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and a rotation member thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 sandwiched therebetween and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate path centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , Is mainly provided. It should be noted that, in the releasing member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, configurations having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45( a ), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348 a formed in a curved shape in such a manner that it is slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347 f and a front portion at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348 a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b protruding in the shape of a hook to the left (FIG. 45 left) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap with each other in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a and a protruding pin 2348d that is provided in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly included. Prepare

  The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the spacing width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and the magnetic material is disposed on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface that faces the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

  The protruding pin 2348d is a columnar member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. By the relative rotation of the release member 2346 with respect to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed by the side surface of the functional elongated hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. And a support elongated hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotary plate member 2347, and the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions that are arranged to face each other have the rotary plate member 2347 in the forward rotation direction (see FIG. In the state of being arranged at the end position of (46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

  The support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), similarly to the rail portion 2347f. When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the projecting pin 2348d is inserted in the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348g. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

  The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional long hole 2346e which is a long hole formed in the thickness direction. ..

  The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second slot 2346e2 extending from one end of the first slot 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the releasing member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

  Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 does not change and the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d does not change. Reflected in speed.

  That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also slowed down.

  As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft supporting hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

  That is, in this embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide due to the release member 2346 rotating, the slide claw member 2347 is slid when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled when the angle is large. It never moves. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310, the rise of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted.

  47 to 49 are views showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A. Note that FIG. 47 illustrates a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and in FIG. 48, the disc cam 344 changes from the state illustrated in FIG. 47. Is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (see FIG. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by 48 clockwise and returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. There is no need to be.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force, when the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

  Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 moves in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved up at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released (the fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the rising direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the operation mode increases, the operation mode and the expectation degree of the jackpot are associated with each other, so that the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means. The degree of attention can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, a large magnetic force is applied to the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand is lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in this manner.

  Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the ascending direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his or her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

  For example, by associating the difference between the loads and the degree of expectation of jackpots, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for prefetching. Therefore, the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be increased. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the player is pushed in by the player. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state in which it is pushed in by the player, or whether it is pushed in by the player. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a position which is a surface perpendicular to the axis and which is arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction, and which is a position opposite to the right side detection piece 311gR. The left-side detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right-side detection piece 311gR, and has an extension length shorter than that of the left-side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state where the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap each other are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. No (left detection sensor 324L is OFF and right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being pushed in from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state in which it is pushed to the pushing end, it is not in the pushing state. Can be detected.

  That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being in the middle of the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the push-in terminal. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being pushed.

  52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. Note that FIG. 52A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, and FIG. 52B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the pushing end to the first state. . Further, in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap each other are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

  As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which it is disposed at the pushing terminal, the left side detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being in the middle of the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

  Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 descends. It is possible to effectively apply a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves upward, rather than by causing a collision.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3310 rises slowly after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the raising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the consecutive hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 can be operated as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the tilting device 4310 detects an operation speed during the change from the second state to the first state and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is provided in a plate shape from the front side of the projecting protruding portion 311j of the case body 4311.

  The front face detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper side detection sensor 4321d and the lower side detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection This is a portion for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operating device 4300 in time series. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to detect the front detection piece 4311k on the lower side. The state where the sensor 4321e is passed downward is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photo-coupler type sensors, and are arranged with the detection groove oriented such that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player pushes the tilting device 4310 to change the state from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to the state shown in FIG. 54(b), the front detection piece 4311k includes the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. 4321e and so on. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

  Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing-in length becomes long (because the acceleration period is long), so the tilting device 4310 is shorter than the operating button having a short pushing-in length. The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the end of pushing, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak force or a player who decides to gently push in, the fact that the reaction force is always large in the vicinity of the push-in position imposes a burden on the push-in operation and makes it easy to feel tired. Therefore, the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined by the interval of the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thus, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the intervals between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state are longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period while not being driven, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to be driven.

  As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

  Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pushing is used as the reaction force against the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 extends below the lower frame member 4320. Every time, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled so as to be pushed out in advance to the side closer to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide with each other while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

  55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. Note that FIG. 55(a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing terminal end, and FIG. 55(b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing terminal end. ..

  Further, in FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55( a ), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at high speed, the tilting device 4310 is projected while the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The installation portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

  By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the overhanging protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, rather than a structure in which a load is frictionally applied as in a disc brake, so that damage to members is suppressed and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), since the overhanging protruding portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted, the state shown in FIG. 55(a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is The reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased by gradually increasing the current flowing from the ON state) to the voice coil motor 352.

  Accordingly, while suppressing the reaction force that the player feels at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 is decelerated on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55( b ), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and the lowering stops. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thereby, after pushing down the tilting device 4310 and pushing it to the terminal end, it is possible to perform the effect of transmitting the vibration to the player who continues to put his/her hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56 to FIG. 68, an operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit the vibration to the player who operates the tilting device 310 by pushing it. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment has the lower frame member 5320. , A drive motor 5411 that rotates a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and is configured to transmit vibration to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

  FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configurations as in the first embodiment.

  The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, a vibrating device 5400 accommodates a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. A flexible member 5420 and a bottomed dish having an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately stored in the partition and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 is mainly provided.

  The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 which has a fan-shaped outer shape and which has a rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 axially supporting a portion corresponding to the point of the fan. And mainly.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixing portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft extends.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body portion 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and having a bottom on the side opposite to the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the shape of a rib and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other in the left and right direction and below in the radial direction. An attitude maintaining unit 5423 in which the fixing unit 5411a is embedded and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body unit 5421 are columnar.

  The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth that is the same as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the shaft-side end surface of the drive motor 5411 and the opening-side end surface of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixed portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421. However, the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger than the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

  Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is formed in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310, which will be described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the deformation degree of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made fine.

  The housing member 5430 is, in the assembled state, a first housing portion 5431 housing the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and housing the weight member 5412. 5432 and a recessed groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432 are mainly provided.

  The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is from the upper surface when the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 reaches the bottom and the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load release state). The depth is such that the protruding leg portion 5424 projects.

  The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load released state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. When 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412.

  The groove 5433 has a width dimension that is slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension that extends slightly below the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. It

  59A is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59B is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59A, and FIG. ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 59( a ). Note that in FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Further, in FIG. 59(a), a first area S51 that is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the player is pushed into the player from the first state by three times. An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is arranged at the end position of pushing, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 59( a ), the protruding leg portion 5424 is protrudingly provided in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 with respect to the change in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load released state in which the projecting leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

  As shown in FIG. 59C, the protruding leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the horizontal center line of the lower frame member 5320 as a reference when viewed in the extending direction. Therefore, the convex leg portions 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from leaning leftward or rightward (inclining leftward or rightward in the plane of FIG. 59B) when pushing. Therefore, the protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

  As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d in which the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is set to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portions 5424, the lateral deformation of the protruding leg portions 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, the deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the protruding leg portion 5424 can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

  60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. It should be noted that FIG. 60(a) shows the assembled load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows that the projecting leg portion 5424 is in a state in which the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second storage portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load released state and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are formed. As 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at a high speed.

  Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in becomes slow. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the raising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the consecutive hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 can be operated as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembled load released state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

  Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state in which the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, the lower rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421, and are evenly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the left and right pairs are arranged, the flexible members 5420 move downward, so that the radially outer ends of the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 move outward in the left-right direction (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422). It deforms in such a manner that it moves to a smaller resistance (see FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the protruding direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged below the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially divided by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

  61(a) and 61(b) show an assembled load state, and FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis. In b), the state where the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is shown. 61(a) and 61(b), the state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the end region S52 is illustrated.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the gravity center position of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembling load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is set to a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 contacts (rubs) the second accommodating portion 5432. Therefore, compared with the assembling load released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and different kinds of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 generates a repulsive force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61B). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) Can be easily aimed at. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves upward in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It can reinforce the force to push back in the

  In this way, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separated into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. With the combination of the generated forces, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

  That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the time when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the protruding leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A). After the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be lightened and the impact during the pushing operation can be mitigated. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is unnecessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311gL is different from the length of the right side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) due to the difference in detection timing. It is determined whether or not the operation speed of) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/hour), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operation speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 applies the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

  Accordingly, the end of the descending operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation shaft is raised from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 upward by the radius Ra. Accordingly, in comparison with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61A) (when the weight member 5432 can be moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 61A), the drive motor 5411 is provided on the upper side. The movable region of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although not described in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and not between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 and to widen the vibration transmission range. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of pushing and a part of the side surface of the hand can be transmitted. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the player. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the weight member 5412 is set only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms the assembled load state. And the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Therefore, the pushing operation by the player is detected. It is possible to easily transmit the vibration to the player, as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from.

  That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 and immediately after pushing the tilting device 310, the vibration is generated after the tilting device 310 is detected. Therefore, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his/her hand (the start of vibration cannot be delayed), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated before the tilting device 310 is pushed, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time when the tilting device 310 is pushed. This allows the player to experience the effect of vibration.

  Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed and operated.

  Therefore, the state in which the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as those of the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

  63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L have symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right circular plate cam 5344R and the right circular plate cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged in a connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

  That is, the right disc cam 5344R has, at the center position thereof, a support cylindrical portion P1 extending cylindrically from the disc portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is disposed, and an axial direction of the support cylindrical portion P1. Along the position of about half of the extending distance, a long hole concave portion C1 which is concavely formed from the disc portion in the shape of an axially symmetrical long hole, and a shaft of the support cylinder portion P1 which is concavely formed by the long hole concave portion C1. A pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portions in the direction toward the disc portion side along the axial direction is mainly provided.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that is arranged in the same axial direction as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1 and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rods arranged with the elongated hole recess C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part.

  The elongated hole concave portion C1 is formed such that the concave cross section has a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the sandwiching arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the elongated hole recess C1.

  Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole recess C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixed portion 5343a1 of the columnar member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the columnar member 5343a. As a result, the columnar member 5343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

  The sandwiching arm portion A1 includes an engaging convex portion A1a protruding from a surface of the pair of arm portions, which is opposed to the other arm, toward a direction closer to the other arm portion. .. The engaging convex portion A1a engages with the tip end portion of the columnar member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the columnar member 5343a from coming off from the disc cam 5344.

  The tip shape of the engaging protrusion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the columnar member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state in which the engaging protrusion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is greater than that in the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured long.

  The engaging convex portion A1a is a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R and is concave along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

  As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engaging protrusion A1a can be completed on the side of the supporting cylinder portion P1 (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the columnar member 5343a on the outside of the recessed surface C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), the length by which the columnar member 5343a extends from the recessed surface C2 is determined by the e-ring. Can be shortened by the thickness (see FIG. 65(b)).

  In addition, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring by contacting the surface with the e-ring) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

  The cylindrical member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and the fixing portion 5343a1 sandwiching the fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section, a fitting groove 5343a3 for fitting the e-ring, and an axial positioning of the disc cam 5344 by the e-ring, and the fitting groove An engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the engagement protrusion A1a of the holding arm A1 engages when the disc cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, Prepare In the assembled state, the fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, the movable clutch 343c slides by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

  Since the e-ring is used to form a part of the columnar member 5343a in which the diameter is partially increased by later fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3, before the e-ring is fitted, The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  With this diameter being uniform, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a relative to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. It is possible to prevent the positional displacement along the axis and the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 by the e-ring.

  With the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 described above, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is defined as the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to a position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before inserting the engagement protrusions A1a into the engagement grooves 5343a4 to the position where the engagement protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip end of the columnar member 5343a is inserted between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The holding arm portions A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the mutual distances can be pushed apart. After that, when the tip end portion of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a fits into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the sandwiching arm portion A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 65(a). 65C is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. 66A is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66A. It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  In FIG. 66, the right disc cam 5344R after deformation when the player gives an overload to the right disc cam 5344R in the unloaded state shown in FIG. 65 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end side portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 at a position separated from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R, In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement protrusion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the columnar member 5343a or the right disc cam 5344R, the columnar member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting about the extended distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 as an axis.

  As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the columnar member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the columnar member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the and are in contact with each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a against the axial tilt displacement increases.

  Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 to give an overload to the right disc cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). (When a load that restricts the load is applied), the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be limited.

  That is, since the right disc cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of low resistance, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), On the plane parallel to the plane of the disc portion, the disc portion is tilted and deformed about the support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support tubular portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

  67A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67A. FIG. 27 is a partial rear view of device 5300. 67(b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where the right disc cam 5344R is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line. The outline of the completed state is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. ..

  In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player is restricted from displacing the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in the place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

  In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67(a), when the outer periphery of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the axial support of the arm member 345 by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and in order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

  Due to the axial tilt deformation, the connecting pin 344d is tilted with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67(a), so that the center Pb of the connecting pin 344d on the base side and the center Pt of the protruding tip side are on the right circle. The plate cam 5344R is displaced along the circumferential direction. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the size Rd of the right disc cam 5344R, so that the drive motor is held while the tilting device 310 is gripped. When driving 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67B, when the disc cam 5344 is tilted and deformed, the disc cam 5344 and the releasing member 346 come into contact with each other with a surface contact. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 with the tilting device 310 held and fixed. In such a case, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in the direction of repulsing it, the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotary claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pressed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repulsed in that direction. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the releasing member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the releasing member 346 operates along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased. Can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line-symmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole concave portion C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be deformed by resistance.

  68A is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68A. FIG. 27 is a partial rear view of device 5300. 68(b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state where it is vertically inserted through and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to the shaft and the shaft falls. The outline of the completed state is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In FIG. 68A, the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and tilted downward by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. A player's hand grasping is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 5344R regardless of whether or not the tilting device 310 is in the second state. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right circular plate cam 5344R by the tilting of the shaft, and thus the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right circular plate cam 5344R can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L in the same manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disc cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disc cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R, and the right side detection sensor Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that overload has occurred.

  In this case, until the occurrence of overload is detected, it takes a period for rotating the right disc cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs, so that the detection of overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload is not detected. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylindrical portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66(a)). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object contacts the input portion, and is arranged in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect each other. In addition, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the unloaded state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overloaded state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. 65). 66(b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether the disc cam 5344 is overloaded.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, an operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment is the disc cam 344 and the engaging rib. 344c is a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, a difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

  69 is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of a disc member 6344L1, a ring member 6344L2, and a second transmission member 6348 of a left disc cam 6344L. Is. Although the right disc cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured as a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L, and therefore the description of the left disc cam 6344L will be given. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  The left circular disc cam 6344L is provided with the circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and the detection hole 344eL similarly to the first embodiment, and the circular disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a, and the circular disc member 6344L1. And a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and that rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

  The disc member 6344L1 has a central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is annularly axially arranged at a position spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to protrude along the annular rib 6344f.

  The ring member 6344L2 has an annular main body 6344g having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c of the first embodiment, and an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end portion of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And a receiving gear tooth 6344i which is formed on the outer side in the radial direction at the thickened portion.

  The inner diameter of the annular body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. Therefore, when the annular body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, the central shaft portion 344a is prevented. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the center.

  The end face of the annular body 6344g on the side of the circular disc member 6344L1 contacts the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface abuts the disc member 6344L1. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disc member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disc member 6344L1 (while the disc member 6344L1 makes one revolution while the ring member 6344L2 makes three revolutions). , The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a side by side with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a and its auxiliary column. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c and mainly.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the raising operation of the tilting device 310 after removing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

  71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and in FIG. 72, the posture (correctly, the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71. A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) and is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) after rotating more than one rotation Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state illustrated in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has moved upward.

  Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It instantly rises and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position in the case where the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released and the tilting device 310 is moved up instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is a supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. It is possible to change the relative relationship of the tilting device 310 and to increase the types of reaching positions of the tilting device 310.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously (disc cam) when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to change the position where the position is reached (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and reached.

  Thus, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the expectation level of the effect due to the difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantaneously rises from the first state, the attention power of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 that rises higher or the degree of expectation of the one that the tilting device 310 lowers in the ascending position is higher.

  However, by keeping the normal rising position of the tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, Can be associated with the magnitude of the displacement amount by which the player pushes in the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be directed to do so. Therefore, regardless of the presentation mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the game method of randomly operating the tilting device 310.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, an operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is the disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged in separate members, and the separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can rotate relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74A. The right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and the disc member 7344R1. Ring member 7344R2 that is inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member, and the engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and that fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engaging member 7344R3 having

  The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and is provided with a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the radially outer side, and the engaging rib. 344c is a member that is configured so as to be partially omitted (a portion between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 by a surface in the assembled state and is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a first circular recessed portion 7410 thereof. The first circular recessed portion 7410 has a diameter smaller than that of the second circular recessed portion 7420 which is a circular recessed portion that is deep in the axial direction, and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be bored, and a fixing projecting radially outward from the back side surface (outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) of the second circular recessed portion 7420 in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430. And a protrusion 7440.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a rectangular oblong hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at a position displaced from the intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The long hole 7431 and the second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1 from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. And a return portion 7433 formed by projecting toward the second elongated hole 7432 side with the first elongated hole 7431 side at the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.

  The dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 in the width direction (shorter direction) is smaller than the dimension of the first elongated hole 7431 in the width direction (shorter direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (transverse direction).

  The return portion 7433 is elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76(a). It is a side view of ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape on which the connecting pin 344d is provided in a convex shape, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. A thick-walled portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along with and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension that is equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. It Accordingly, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of relative rotation from becoming excessive while making the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 coincide with each other.

  The thick portion 7520 has a length that extends from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75( a )). However, it is made slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the resistance of relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick-walled portion 7520 has irregular shaped through-holes 7521 bored along the axial direction, and the irregular shaped through-holes 7521 are recessed radially outward at equal circumferential intervals (in this embodiment, five equal portions). And an equally divided recessed portion 7522 that is provided.

  The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. Composed.

  77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engagement member 7344R3 is located outside the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)). Arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed in one direction, an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 77(b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and the extension thereof. The engaging portion 7630 that extends in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extending distal end of the portion 7620 and the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 that faces the engaging portion 7630. A coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring is mainly provided.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip end portion of the engagement portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extended portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction so as to face the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extended distal end thereof is The ring member 7344R2 has an extension length that extends inward from the inner peripheral surface.

  The engagement portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

  As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 also has a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as seen from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78C is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 78D is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78C, and FIG. FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as seen from the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

  78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 78(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted in the disc member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d) and 78(f).

  As an assembling method of the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 in the width direction is made shorter than the dimension of the engaging portion 7630 in the width direction, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, an assembly error can be prevented.

  Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, slide the engaging member 7344R3 in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d) to a position where the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 are in position. Moving.

  At the position after this movement, the fixed protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 is prevented from being displaced in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction in FIG. 78(d)) of the disc member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  The engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, when the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is elastically restored to the second position. It enters into the inside of the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

  In a state where the return portion 7433 enters the inside of the second long hole 7432, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large. (FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be limited, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during the operation.

  After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disc member 7344R1, insert the ring member 7344R2 from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1. To do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the direction D7 that is directed outward in the radial direction. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1.

  The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the steps described above. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are shown as the center, and others. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b serves as the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

  The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

  79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abuts the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79(b), FIG. ), the state where the right disc cam 7344R is further rotated is illustrated, and in FIG. 80(a), the state where the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 and pushed to the end is shown. 80B shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 further rotates in the rearward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80A. In FIG. 81, the state of the right disc cam from the state shown in FIG. 80B is shown. The state after the 7344R rotates in the rearward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), and 80(b), the state in which the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary pawl member 7347 ( The small angle state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 79(a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. To be done.

  In the present embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. They are arranged (see FIG. 80(a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disc cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member is released. A load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344 is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 from the 7346.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engaging member 7344R3 is bulged outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the rearward rotation direction cannot be continued. Therefore, based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344, The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the smallest diameter portion of the odd-shaped through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the circumferential load is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b), by rotating the disc member 7344R1 from the state shown in FIG. 80(a). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 7522 to another different equally divided recessed portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2. The phase of and is relatively rotated by the amount of one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is housed is displaced.

  That is, by passing through the process shown in FIG. 79A to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging ribs 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pins 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into concave portions 7522. It is possible to relatively shift the concave portion by the arrangement interval (72 degrees).

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as the centers, and the illustration of other unnecessary portions is omitted.

  82(a) to 83(b), the manner in which the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 82(a), the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R contact each other is shown, and in FIG. 82(b), the engaging member 7344R3 is placed above the releasing member 7346. FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). In (b), the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (see FIG. 82(a) clock). When rotating in the rotation direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347, and the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. It will only be done.

  Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 stays radially outward from the time when the engaging member 7344R3 abuts the release member 7346 until it is separated. Maintain the overhang condition. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

  With these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 ), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, while Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they coincide with each other, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is kept constant).

  As a result, a state in which the player is not paying attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 where the player cannot see them. be able to.

  With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disc cam 7344). ) A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced is shown. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 84 through the process described in FIG. 79. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is relatively rotated by one of the equally-divided recessed portions 7522 is illustrated. In both of FIGS. 84 and 85, the second overhanging portion 344c3 contacts the engaging portion 346d. The contacted state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. 84. It moves to the state where it sinks below 2 states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 reaches immediately (without the rotation of the disc cam 7344) from the first state by the ascending operation can be changed. As a result, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device can be improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

  Although the case where the front side of the operating device 300 is exposed has been described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG. 86.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the inner pack 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (developed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 90, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with wooden plate members as upper and lower sides and aluminum plate members as left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In addition, in the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and has the outer frame 11 or the same inner shape as the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11 are provided. The members that the player has may be provided in the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side in front view. It is possible to rotate forward (opening and closing tip side).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation side in a front view. The movable front end side (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable rearward.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating front end, and functions to lock the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 such that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform the unlocking operation as shown in FIG. As a result, they are released.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion, and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having holes, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is provided with a fitting size. Further, the front door mounting member 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which columns having different diameters are vertically arranged, the diameter of the upper column is smaller). Is supported by being externally fitted to a support pin 19a having a small shape.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having a smaller opening than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in front view (see FIG. 86). By covering the window portion 14c with the glass unit 16 from the rear side, almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 is covered with the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window 14c and transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And are equipped with. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin in a ring shape that is slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are bonded to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 becomes an integrated double-glazing unit. Has been done.

  The glass unit 16 is formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b so as to be colorless and transparent. However, the glass unit 16 is not limited to this, and may be formed as transparent and colorless with a synthetic resin. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored and transparent instead of being colorless and transparent.

  Around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of electric decoration portions 8029 to 8033 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated are provided. In these illumination parts 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed in accordance with a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, the light decoration unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c includes a light emitting unit that is turned on when a predetermined error occurs such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting unit that is turned on during payout of prize balls.

  Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) that covers the speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect according to the gaming state is provided. .. As shown in FIG. 86, an upper plate 17 and a lower plate 50 are arranged below the window portion 14c so as to bulge toward the front side and arranged side by side vertically.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launch unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53, which is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the balls to the lower plate 50, is formed on the side surface of the lower plate 50 on the back side.

  In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 into a plurality of portions for storing the game balls, and to dispose the lower plate 50 and to have only one storage portion including only the upper plate 17 Is also good.

  An operating device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (a storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 other than the upper tray 17, or may be provided in a plurality of locations, and is a push button type switch as an operation method. Alternatively, information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is made of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicating with the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145( 92)).

  At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), there is formed a payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is open upward. The partition wall 144 divides the wall 143 into right and left portions to form a passage entrance of the front door-side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front-door-side lower tray passage portion 142, respectively.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a part that forms a passage for discharging the game balls, which have not reached the game area, among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a, to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) and is then discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17.

  In addition, the foul ball passage portion 145 joins with the ball passage passage 147 (see FIG. 92) which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by the player performing a ball removing operation. Is formed as.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171, 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the upper left and right corners and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171, 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrate and one end of the illumination portions 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

  In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunction cover members 171, 172, the wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right electric decoration portions 8031, 8032, and the electric decoration portion 8031 passing through the wiring through groove 14h, An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Be done.

  Therefore, if the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103 ), electricity is supplied to the decorative portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the rear side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89). It is possible to easily insert and remove the connector of the wiring which is conductive and the connector of which one end is connected to the internal boards of the decorative portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic board 14i.

  The multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the turning front side of the front frame 14 are arranged in a pair above and below the turning front side of the inner frame 12, and hold a base plate 60 of the game board 13 to support a board surface supporting device 600 ( (See FIG. 126 ), the positional relationship is such that it is opposed to the front and rear of the upper device, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material, the front side of which is open, is formed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating the wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a cross-sectional area that decreases as the front end of the front frame 14 moves from the pivoting tip side to the pivoting base end side. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and faces the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, is flush with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. Composed of shapes.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173a. An upper extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved semi-circularly in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

  That is, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It is projected to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and thus it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

  On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a, which is the front frame. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion formed of a resin material and is opened downward, is arranged between the vertically long plate portion on the side of the rotation base end of 14.

  The reverse cup portion 178, for example, illegally spreads the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and enters a game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, when the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

  In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire having a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat can melt the reverse cup portion 178 and allow the reverse cup portion 178 to pass through. It also melts 173. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is possible to detect the disconnection of the wiring. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the long cover 173 side is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (approaches) each other on the surface. Further, since the normal line of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 of the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, the misconduct can be easily detected.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcibly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire is It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Further, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire will advance to the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14 in the space below the lower wall portion 173a (progress in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip end of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits the misconduct through the piano wire from increasing. By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to easily find the person who commits the misconduct by discovering the misconduct before the escape of the person who commits the misconduct. ..

  That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the misbehavior cannot discriminate it, so he assumes that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window 14c), the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply into a person who commits misconduct (piano wire Can be done without the suspicion that the plugging in is not working. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the person who commits the misconduct realizes that the misconduct is discovered and tries to escape.

  The detection device may be a device including a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged in the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for the determination of the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launch unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 is an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is provided with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward a region between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

  The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one onto the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

  On the left side of the inner frame 12 and the left side of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction. The dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and the body-side lower dish passage portion 162 are opened toward the back side so that one end can communicate with a through hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the vertical direction) is formed so that the end portion of is opened downward. In this configuration, the balls delivered from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through holes of the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end. It

  When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161, and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is provided in the lower portion of the tray passage forming member 160. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the outlet portions of both passages to block the outflow of the game balls and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game balls.

  A biasing member (a coil spring or the like) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the biasing member is biased when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 stays in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 or the main body side lower dish passage portion 162, the disadvantage that the storage balls will spill out is avoided. There is.

  On the other hand, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the allowed position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the flow of the game ball is reduced. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, a part where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and a part where the connector CN3 is arranged are formed by different boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control unit 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the voice lamp control unit 113 so that the transmission target is different, so that the circuit board is different. This is due to the intention to prevent malfunction in advance.

  A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members arranged below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 92 is a window part of the front frame 14. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are disassembled and shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, on the front side of the upper plate 17, and on the diagonally right upper side of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship of covering the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illumination portions 8031 and 8032.

  The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and a main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions project to the front side, and the main body bending portion 371. The body 371 extends downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right direction end portion of the portion 371 toward the sides that are close to each other in the width direction, and joins at the extended lower end. A hanging portion 372 configured in a V shape, a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. Of the light-transmitting portion 373, which is fastened and fixed to at least one of the two, the left-side flat surface support portion 374 which is formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the flat surface of which is formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. The right flat surface support portion 375 and a support groove 376 which is a groove recessed from the rear surface side of the right flat surface support portion 375 and whose recess width increases toward the rear surface side (tapered). Prepare for

  The main body curved portion 371 is configured such that the front side edge portion has a rounded curved shape, and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper tray 17 as a back side edge portion. The rear left edge 371a that abuts the front side edge of the front side 17 in the front-rear direction, and the shape that is continuous with the rear left edge 371a and matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a shape that is continuous with the rear middle edge portion 371b on the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a and matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation portion 40. A rear right edge 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state is mainly provided.

  The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion that supports the operation handle 51, and is between the right corner cover 380 that is arranged in the right corner portion of the front frame 14. It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). In the hanging portion 372, at a position on the front side of a recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, a screw inserted from below is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the formed bottom plate.

  The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows light emitted from the operation device 300 to be transmitted to the front side and can be rendered by light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320 are disposed close to each other.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is a matter that is arbitrarily determined, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are six LEDs that illuminate upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support 341e) and two LEDs that illuminate downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support 341e). , Respectively.

  The light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373. To do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32 ), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downwardly passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310, and then transmits the light. Pass through section 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the light amount of the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the light amount of the light that is visible through the light transmitting portion 373 is smaller than that when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the light amount of the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the light amount), and according to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of visible light through the light transmitting portion 373.

  Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, while the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed in accordance with the change from the 1st state to the 2nd state, the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change of the state of the tilting device 310 is detected. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the light amount of (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

  In the assembled state (FIG. 86 ), the left-side plane support portion 374 vertically contacts the lower end of the decorative portion 8031. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illumination portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illumination portion 8031.

  In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right side flat surface supporting portion 375 comes into contact with the lower end of the lighting portion 8032 vertically. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illumination portion 8032 and the illumination portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illumination portion 8032. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illumination portion 8032.

  Note that, although details will be described later, the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, from the illumination portions 8031 and 8032. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the decorative portion 8031, the decorative portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end of the decorative portion 8032 from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right flat surface support portion 375 are formed. The positions of and match.

  Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the decorative portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the covering state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the decorative portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. It is possible to eliminate the need for a separate fixing portion that fastens the covering cover 370 and the lighting portion 8032 to each other.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d on the back surface of the body frame 14a is attached to the body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) provided on the front side of the body frame 14a. Is fastened to the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or the front side of the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed to another member (such as the member constituting the upper plate 17) by sandwiching the main body frame 14a, and covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member forming the upper plate 17 or the like) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  The sheet metal member 150 has a front frame even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a wire or piano wire having a heated tip is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry preventing member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, the metal plate member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire whose end is heated is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed in such a manner as to cover the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the front view left side, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 that is fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 from above and below, the lower end portion of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145, but when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

  The plate portion 152 covers the back surfaces of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball passage passage 147. Therefore, when the wire illustrated in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower tray 50, a through hole is formed. However, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. In the case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operating device 300 is removed, and the wire illustrated is pressed against a portion where the front and rear thickness becomes thin accordingly (a portion diagonally above and behind the recess 15a). As a result, a case where the through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion rear member 155 which is fastened from the rear side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the above position.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back surface member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed in the front-rear direction mainly from the outer edge of the left and right elongated plate member. The through hole 156 is formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough, and the screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion rear surface member 155 is inserted into the body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 that are vertically formed in a portion (left end portion) that is overlapped with the rear surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end that is larger than the through hole 156. And an opening/closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes to the rear side on the side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction and is provided on the rear side. A projecting portion 148a and a screw insertion portion 148b formed as a hole into which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position that matches the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation portion back surface member 155 is placed on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation portion rear surface can be formed by passing the protruding portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. The operation portion rear surface member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw passing through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screw insertion portion 148b. be able to.

  An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion rear surface member 155 having the connecting insertion hole 158 and the lower edge thereof at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to define a region. In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that is capable of contacting the wall portion 158a vertically and horizontally.

  Therefore, in order to align the operation portion rear surface member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved vertically with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By making the left and right surfaces contact with each other, the position and the posture of the operation portion rear surface member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

  The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion which is arranged to face the front and rear of the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged in the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Under a predetermined condition, the front surface frame 14 is brought into contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13 to thereby prevent the front frame 14 from being closed.

  In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restriction portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear surface side of the operation portion rear surface member 155 and is made of synthetic resin, and is a cross-section viewed in the extending direction to ensure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity compared to when it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped opening. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other parts of the operation portion back surface member 155 (for example, the strength can be dependent on the main body frame 14a, so there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the thickness of the portion formed as thin as possible). Since it can be formed with a plate thickness), the strength of the opening/closing restriction portion 159 can be secured while improving the formability.

  The cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restriction portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can ensure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, a curved (wave)-shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used as compared with a flat cross section.

  Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not provided as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155 but is bent and extends from the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side, or from another member fixed to the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a to the rear surface side. You may comprise from the metal part extended to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing restriction portion 159 is made of synthetic resin, when the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member comes into contact with the board surface supporting device 600, It is possible to prevent chipping or denting. As a result, it is possible to reduce a risk that an operator who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 and attaches/detaches the game board 13 to the chip surface supporting device 600 is injured by touching a chip or a dent.

  Here, since the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 or the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotating front end side is accidentally locked while the open/close restriction unit 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

  As a path for allowing foreign matter such as wire to enter, for example, a path that passes through the gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable from the front side of the main body frame 14a as a whole. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 follows the gap.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. The harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  As a result, even if a foreign material such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as wire from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

  Liquid may be considered as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 in a convenient position is likely to be a prey to which drinking water is applied, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) fails. May occur.

  Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water enters the back of the main body frame 14a, the electronic board or the like may be damaged. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separable and independent structure, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

  The bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) is provided with a recessed portion 15a having a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, refer to FIG. 13, the transmission holes 321a and the openings 325 correspond to the gaps), pass through the inside of the operation device 300, and go downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)), and is further connected to wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent breakdown.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, liquid such as drinking water may be splashed, but since the other portion is covered by the bottom plate portion 321, the voice coil motor 352 is protected from drinking water and the like. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down to the front side downward due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

  With the above-described configuration, even if a player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as long as he wipes off the touching portion on the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from pressing business hours.

  Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. 93 to 96, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 is illustrated as in FIG. 91.

  FIG. 93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are illustrated side by side. is there. In FIG. 93(b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86 ), and binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

  In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable members 180, respectively.

  On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is a relay board once disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. Are connected (assembled) to each other, a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 goes from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotatable about a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 that is rotatably supported, and one side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the other side surface of the movable arm 182 and the other side surface of the movable arm 182 in the rotation direction (the side opposite to the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions when viewed from above and which are capable of locking the binding arm portions 183. A temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and has an opening is mainly provided.

  In the binding movable member 180, the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have high flexibility, while the other portions are formed to have lower flexibility (high rigidity) at least than the binding arm portion 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center and a cross section in which the upper side is formed into a substantially horseshoe shape, and the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a respectively project toward the plate member 14d side. A pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b provided and an intermediate stop portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and has its extended tip curved in proximity to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96(a)), and a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, the through hole having an arrangement corresponding to the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation stopping portions 181b.

  When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of rotation preventing convex portions 181b should be fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d at the time of fixing.

  The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between itself and the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding down by narrowing the gap between the extended end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, and the center of the harness HN1 to HN3 on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is secured in a region (a region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stop portion 181c) that houses the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a flat surface that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181e has its outer peripheral surface fitted inwardly at the base end side portion of the movable arm portion 182, so that the movable arm portion 182 is fixed. The shaft is supported (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is externally fitted and axially supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, and a base end portion that is smoothly connected to the plane OS1 that is offset from the axially supported position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the axial support position.

  The base end portion 182a includes the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the rear end portion (the plane OS1 and the outermost portion of the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion that is fitted on the cylindrical fastening portion 181e). Side walls in the rotational direction are respectively extended from the approaching portions). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of the radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them is gradually shortened as they approach the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b is formed. It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept that does not intend elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate part 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity). ..

  Since the pair of binding arms 183 are configured to have the same shape, only one will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip end portion with a width equal to the width of the root and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening portion 184a, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening portion 184a. Mainly includes a small small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that does not allow passage (locking).

  According to the present embodiment, the binding arm 183 is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (on the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller) when it is desired to move the binding arm 183 relative to the locking portion 184. By arranging the binding arm portion 183 on the side of the small opening 184b when it is desired to lock the binding arm portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which a binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arms 183 are broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, by inserting and fixing a commercially available binding band into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185, The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound together.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross-section of the front frame 14 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). 95A is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95B is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95A. 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

  94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95( In b), the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically elongated metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing the up-down direction). This angle is normally used from the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and rotate 90 degrees or more to collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). This is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for opening and closing the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not exceed the range in which the movable arm 182 can rotate with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since the movable arm 182 is absent, it is possible to reduce the risk of the movable arm 182 being deteriorated and broken by elastic deformation.

  Next, the support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the bundling movable member 180, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and broken.

  96(a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

  96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 from the opening which is opened leftward at the upper end portion of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, it is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and can be supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the axially supporting position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c. ~HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have curved shapes, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation.

  Further, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arms 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, particularly in the state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. This can prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97(a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97(b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  Further, in FIGS. 97A and 97B, a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematic. The member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically shown by a solid line in phantom lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also centered on the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12 like the front frame 14. Rotate.

  From the one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b), the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates by rotating around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since it corresponds to opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, whereby durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b) and also FIG. 96(d)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 have the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the opened/closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of a vertically elongated metal portion (a portion where the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 contacts in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end side of the front frame 14 by routing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 so as to bypass them.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator during the work performed by opening and closing the front frame 14, and at the same time, to store the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the degree of curvature that can be bent only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). According to the support mode in which the intermediate stopper portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. As a result, it is possible to take measures against misconduct in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 and melted to penetrate the wire and the wire is advanced to the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  By controlling the harness HN1 to HN3 to be disconnected, the error signal is output and the alarm is sounded (the error screen is displayed), so that the fraud can be quickly detected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 burns out, the ball can be fired even by rotating the operation handle 51. Disappear. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent activity is discovered after the fraudulent activity is performed (it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity early).

  In this case, after inserting the wire into the game area and playing around with the game area (for example, after bending the nails to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to disable the firing of a ball to a person who conducts an illegal act to illegally obtain a prize ball by winning the prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal profit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 burns out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, there is a possibility that a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the banknotes inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the balance of the card due to the fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against cheating.

  Furthermore, in the case of carrying out fraud by eliminating the possibility that banknotes inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and balls corresponding to the balance of the card cannot be collected, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even if the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine store side can easily notice the cheating.

  In the first place, if the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, check the disconnection error (CR error). By doing so, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. Note that, in FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door-side lower dish passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages that extend from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. And S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension directions are directed (switched) at least once to the left and right sides respectively.

  The S-shaped path SL1 allows the passage length of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the passage stays inside the front-door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86), so that the vertical dimensions of the game area and the effect area can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower plate 50 (and the upstream side thereof), the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when there are no balls for the lower plate 50 minutes, remove the ball from the thousand boxes). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress due to being required to be replenished.

  The front door-side lower dish passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are provided with bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, which are regions in which the extending direction can be bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is provided with the first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and the second bending region on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed. And a region NEa2.

  Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 in which the right and left of the characteristic portion are reversed. , Is provided. In the description of the characteristic part, the characteristic of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and being closer to the side wall Na toward the extending end. The adjacent walls Nc, Nc, and Nc are mainly provided, and each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The surface Nc1 of the proximity wall Nc functions as a guide surface for the sphere because the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb is formed by being curved along the S-shaped path SL1. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the wire HM (wire or a thin metal typified by a piano wire, etc.) that is illegally inserted. Function as a surface to be processed, which will be described in detail later. The proximity wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the adjacent lower end and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the incorrectly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, a path that advances to the upstream side of the front door side lower dish passage section 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is considered as an entry path of the wire HM that is illegally inserted. The person who commits the wrongdoing advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by a person who commits cheating, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in the case, the wire HM moves rightward by the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 so as to be laterally reversed, the wire HM can be inserted into the gap Nin without omission.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (sandwiched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held and to detect fraud promptly. it can.

  On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further advances, when the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects in a posture in which the tip faces downward. Therefore, the wire HM is advanced further. Even if it does, the tip of the wire HM will move downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from gaining an illegal profit by, for example, obtaining an illegal payout ball by forcibly opening a movable device such as to make it easy to illegally win a prize.

  It returns to FIG. 98 and demonstrates. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball passage passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (twice or more in the present embodiment). Accordingly, when the spheres flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the spheres flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the merging passage CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are caught by the upper and lower wall portions and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the downward flow of the spheres from being obstructed in the downstream portion from the merge area CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a which is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and which vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The passage portion 145a is set such that the left-right width is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage-forming unit 140 is formed so as to project toward the front side as it goes downward.

  In a region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is located at a surface position with the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 is formed. The bottom plate portion on the back side is located on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a.

  That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the front-rear width of the upstream region of the passage portion 145a is set to be larger than that of the downstream region of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front-back width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when the balls are retained in the foul ball passage portion 145, upstream of the passage portion 145, the plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted front and back, so that the number of retainable balls can be increased and Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly deviated to the left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from simultaneously entering the passage portion 145a.

  In other words, the entry of the balls into the passage portion 145a can be regulated one by one. Accordingly, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being caught by the upper and lower wall portions.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left side end portion is connected to the left side wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball faces rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downwardly, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. A curved guide plate portion 146c is mainly provided, which extends in a plate shape toward the rear surface side and is curved in a manner in which the extending direction is directed upward toward the rear surface side.

  While the sphere is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c toward the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), the slant plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b cause the foul ball receiving portion 146 to move toward the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be brought close to the right side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the sphere that rolls down on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the sphere from passing the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. You can

  This makes it possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 can be reduced. While the width of 145 is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

  In the foul ball passage portion 145, the passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). The tool can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

  Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. It should be noted that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 forming the electric decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit that is formed to be long in the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front surface side is provided at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted into the left and right claws that form the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 do not need to be directly fastened and fixed, but can be coupled and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is assembled and fixed to the body frame 14a after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500, which are divided into the left and right, are provided with the left and right claws that form the supported groove 417. With the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other in the left and right directions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, on the front side of the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) in the front and back, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frame. The state disassembled from 14a is shown.

  The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is provided in the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. A columnar fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

  The fastening portion 14e1 includes a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side, and the upper frame is fastened by fastening the screw passing through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIG. 104 illustrates a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into an insertion hole formed in the body frame 14a, is disassembled from the body frame 14a. The upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are not shown, while the cover cover 370 is shown as a reference.

  In the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left weight plate unit 500L and a right weight plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the weight plate units 500L and 500R that are fastened and fixed together with the main body frame. 14a (see FIG. 104) and a vertically long and long plate-like support plate portion 510 are mainly provided.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws that are inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the rear surface side to the front surface side, and in this state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the rear surface side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right side edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and is in the assembled state. 86 (see FIG. 86), a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extended portion 511a abuts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514 is mainly provided.

  The fixing plate 511 has a shape overlapping with the board member 512 in a front view, and a board member 512 side portion has a base portion 511b that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the base member 511b faces the front surface of the base member 512b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b can contact the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). Can be prevented from falling. That is, the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extension portion 511a. While the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, on the left side surface of the fixed plate 511, the rear side end portion is formed as a surface that is substantially flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear end of the support plate 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 has the support plate 510. A left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on the front side of which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged adjacent to each other at a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, an interval of 11 [mm]) in a row that curves in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the LEDs 512a are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed to be wider than the width of the LED 512a (width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide member 540 and is emitted from either surface of the light guide member 540. The entrance and exit of light and its path will be described later.

  The cover-side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and inserting a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening a screw to the back surface fastening portion 527.

  The lens-side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and inserting a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 from the back side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening a screw to the back surface fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole into which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a top-bottom width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed, while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate unit 510 in the fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R come into contact with the support plate unit 510 from the front side (the protrusion 566). Even if the position is vertically displaced by about the diameter of (1), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. As a result, the protrusion 566 is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are moved up and down with respect to the support plate 510 by an amount corresponding to the positional deviation, thereby eliminating the positional deviation and easily fastening. Fixation can be done.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left weight plate unit 500L constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that does not transmit light, and its inner cover member 520. And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is made of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

  The right weight plate unit 500R is provided with a light guide member 540 which is arranged to face the left weight plate unit 500L, and a surface contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 which are disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and which are formed of a non-transparent resin material. An outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed is mainly provided.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown, respectively, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L, 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 arranged at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. A lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 530. A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525. A plurality of long fastening portions 526 that are screwed into the inner cover member 520 to fix the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520, and project from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the back side. Mainly includes a plurality of back surface fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The main body plate 521 has a front end 521a having a wave shape, and a connecting plate 521c that connects the front end 521a and the back base 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. Equipped with.

  The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that is in surface contact with (matches with) the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in a posture that it is inclined to the left as it goes toward the back side, and the connecting plate portion 521c defines the opening 524.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals gradually increase from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect effect by light can be made different for each opening 524.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and the left outer surface is recessed in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions of the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw that fastens and fixes the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two locations at the upper end and one location at the lower end.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions of the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are provided side by side at four upper and lower positions and function as a window for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that projects rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design in the present embodiment, the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the rear-side base portion 521b has a design shape and is concavely curved to the right between the above-described boundary portions. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a corrugated shape that corrugates left and right as it goes up and down.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the projecting portion is conversely formed with a recess that easily becomes a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side of the inner cover member 520 (inner lens member 530 side). The efficiency can be improved.

  The inner lens member 530 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear ends thereof follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 has a corrugated shape in which the front end 531 a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520. To be done.

  The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is bored in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. In addition, it is provided with support holes 531b and 531c through which the protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in the corrugated rear portion of the front end 531a, and on the back side thereof, an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can contact the light guide member 540 is provided. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c. be able to.

  In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the up-down direction and having a size capable of inserting the long fastening portion 526. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned with each other.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and has a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward as it goes to the back surface side, like the inner cover member 520, a shape in which the left and right width becomes longer as it goes to the back surface side (front end portion in top view). It has a triangular shape with a tip).

  The inner lens member 530 includes a projecting portion 533 formed by projecting leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, the light scattering portion 533a having a wavy convex shape and having a wavy curved surface formed to scatter light.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and is formed as a halftone dot pattern in which concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right are formed on the left and right side surfaces. The so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. It The light guide member 540 is heat-bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105 and FIG. 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed in a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processing portion for converting light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in this embodiment) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a and emits it from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed of a thermoplastic template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are dispersedly arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a resin having transparency is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, an amorphous olefin resin is used. Examples thereof include resins, polystyrene resins and AS resins (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compounds). Among them, particularly by using the acrylic resin, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.

  In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the end portion on the LED 512a side is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve the shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain a practical strength.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wavy shape in which the shape of the front end portion is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 to the rear side, and the light guide member 540 is laterally moved. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

  The right and left corrugations are not strict in the present invention. The degree of corrugation is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design in which distortion after thermal bending is small and practical mechanical properties are kept good, and three-dimensional freedom can be imparted. ..

  Although the details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114 ), the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. The wave shape is such that it is located to the right at a position between them (positioned away from the inner cover member 520).

  The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by heat-bending the base material in which the concave portion is formed, as described above. As the method of hot bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40° C. It is made by pressing the base material against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin has an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

  The heating temperature of the base material at this time is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to a deflection temperature under load of +40°C or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed and the light source light is before and after the heat bending process. It is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the reflection angle of the. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

  The light guide member 540 has a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and screws that extend vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and that are fastened to the outer cover member 560. The fastening portion 542 is mainly provided.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect produced by the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 is provided with a main body plate portion 551 vertically formed in a long plate shape, and the fastening portions 542 of the light guide member 540 are fitted in and supported by the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551. The inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which the screws to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and the area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 is projected to the right to form the outer cover. An overhanging portion 554 visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a rear surface side of the main body plate portion 551 protruding from the rear surface side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear surface fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the front and rear ends thereof follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front end 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front end of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a wavy shape, and is disposed with a slight displacement on the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. It

  The front-side end portion 551a is provided with a convex shape on the front side at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the corrugated shape, and a plurality of convex portions that are fitted into the support holes 531b, 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The installation portion 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulges in a semicircular shape in a side view is vertically formed on the surface of the front-side end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540. It is formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined distance, The light emission on the front end face can be made into a strip-shaped light emission mode that is vertically continuous.

  The insertion hole 553 is provided in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the protruding portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the rear surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer side edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). As a result, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) arranged to face the player can be enlarged.

  The main body plate 551 has a surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 that is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The surface 540 and the main body plate 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 faces the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned with each other via the main body plate portion 551.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a provided on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being displaced from the light guide member 540, and the light is accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a. Can be made.

  The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a vertically long plate and a receiving surface at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, the fastening portion 522a has a long hole slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole and a long hole formed in an oval shape having a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastening target portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a screw receiving portion 563a into which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main plate portion 561. At the front end of the inner cover member 520, which is a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526, and which has a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and its vertical width. And a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. An opening 565 and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the body plate 561 to the back side are mainly provided.

  The upper fastening target portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions of the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower tightened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions that form the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86 ), the cover panel 370 has a shape in which the right panel unit 500 projects to the front side. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be stably supported, and the stably supported right panel unit 500 can support the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, and thus fraudulent act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  A method for assembling the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. FIG. 113A is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113A.

  Note that FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), the protruding portion 551b is shown. The state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left weight plate unit 500L and the left end of the front end 551a of the right weight plate unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), the left weight plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right weight plate unit 500R from the front side, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the left and right heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fixed by inserting the protruding portions 551b, 551c into the support holes 531b and fitting them together. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are arranged at the front end (the front side of the light guide member 540) of the right panel unit. Since it is possible to reduce the number of screws for fastening and fixing the light, it is possible to reduce the area where the light is blocked by the screws, so that the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is spread in the vertical direction. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize it as a band.

  In addition, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the guide plate is incorrectly introduced at the time of fastening. It is possible to reduce a range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the optical member 540. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged up to the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end) can be expanded. This can prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  In addition, when the left weight plate unit 500L is brought closer to the front side of the right weight plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left rib plate unit 500L and the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 are inserted. The light guide member 540 of the right weight plate unit 500R constitutes surfaces in a relationship parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship capable of abutting. That is, since the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the left weight plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right weight plate unit 500R, the right side The panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two procedures can be considered for the assembly procedure. ..

  The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing the same to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right weight plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, then the left weight plate unit 500L is brought close to the right weight plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left weight plate unit 500L is right weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

  As described above, since the assembly and the disassembly can be performed by the two procedures, the operator who performs the maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 by the procedure of the part where the replacement is required. It is possible to select whether or not to reduce the work time.

  Whichever procedure is used for disassembling, in order to disassemble the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are slid in the surface direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protruding portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. Then, when the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R are slid in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the protruding portions 551b and 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted to each other, the right panel unit 500 is pry open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). This helps prevent fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of 500.

  That is, when fixing the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 by fastening the screw, by removing the screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled and fraud can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left weight plate unit 500L and the right weight plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front surface. The left panel unit 500L and the right panel unit 500R are difficult to disassemble unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), so that the right panel unit 500 is viewed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 along the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, in FIGS. 114A to 114C, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

  Light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. It can be turned around. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). Light emitted from the light member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 side to the outer lens member 550 side is located at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to can be diffused and used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (whether the light is condensed or diffused) of the light effect performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

  It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are illustrated. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 into regions or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 into regions, the aspect of light production on both the left and right sides can be made different. .

  The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, regarding the upper three openings 524, the upper and lower widths of the openings 524 increase as the openings 524 move upward, so that the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is the second opening from the top. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is smaller. , Radius of curvature R2 is made shorter (R1>R2>R3).

  As a result, even when there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emits the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a is visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of the emitted light can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to this embodiment, the amount of visible light in the upper opening 524 can be larger than that in the lower opening 524.

  The radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal line is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be strengthened, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the opening 524 at the bottom can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114C, the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as the length connecting the midpoint of the upper side of the opening 524 and the midpoint of the lower side in a side view. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the portion having the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the size relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 is related to the size relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased at a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the portion having the radius of curvature R1) so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection is performed. In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent light from excessively entering the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to uniformize the light emission mode for each opening 524.

  The center points of the respective radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) are points corresponding to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a leftward convex shape in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is a band-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacently provided above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE adjacently below the opening 524. Matches the top edge of. Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a advances to the region KE while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that the player can visually recognize the light even if the light condensing action is reduced. The difference in the amount of light is small.

  On the other hand, by making the region KE convex rather than flat on the left side, the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Therefore, the light guide member 540 can be prevented. The durability of can be improved.

  Further, by making the region KE convex to the left, it is possible to form a concave to the right, and a portion where the light is diffused and a portion where the light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the light effect visually recognized through the opening 565.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

  For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate light inside the openings 524 and 565 without a gap. At this time, the right-side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted from the upper and lower positions of the area KE to the right intersects with the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed darkly in the region KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in the shape of an edge, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. Can be made

  In the area KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the amount of light is weak. You may perform an effect using the light which reaches this front end part.

  That is, an effect of light that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but can be visually recognized through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared. However, by setting the jackpot expectation degree of the effect to be high, the position of the eyes of the player can be moved to the side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes are tired can be reduced, and the player can play the game for a long time without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side surface, and is viewed by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and is not visually recognized by the player playing the pachinko machine 8010, and who is visually recognizing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  This makes it possible for the clerk to carry out an error notification that the clerk can easily notice while the kidnapping player is not aware of it. Can be prevented.

  It should be noted that, by reversing the right and left shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the region KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

  115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A.

  The light guide member 540 has a shape in which the end surface (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side is gradually tapered toward the front side. In addition, the maximum end portion on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion most distant from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire vertical region. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a side than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face becomes long, the width becomes thinner and the width becomes thinner. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and is disposed at the position depressed toward the back side, so that the difference in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b are provided. Due to the shadow formed by, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface of the light guide member 540 facing the support hole 531c is smaller than the end surface of the light guide member 540 facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of the surface which receives the light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

  Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531c is larger than the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531b. This can reduce the difference in the distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. Accordingly, with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is easily made uniform in the vertical direction (the difference in strength is small). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that, in FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of the curved formation of the light guide member 540, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is spread and progresses to the outside.

  On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curvedly formed. Therefore, the light emitting modes (rough and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate the light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant. In other words, the player can visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not right next to the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved and formed as shown in FIG. 115(b). (Refer to the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and can improve the effect of the light emission effect.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e, and the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. The unit that is fitted to the front frame 14 and is supported from below is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e by sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. And a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the rear side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , Is mainly provided. Note that the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The lighting unit 401 is a unit that is decorated on the front side surface to indicate the model name and the like, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light to produce a light effect.

  The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmissive resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 corrugated on a back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and the corrugated wall portion 403. A plate-shaped portion 404 that extends in a laterally long plate shape from the lower edge to the back surface side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that cylindrically projects from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back surface side, and is a tubular inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted in the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Is mainly provided.

  The main body 402 is formed in a box shape in which front and rear dish-shaped members are overlapped with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. The LED included therein is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body 402.

  The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the horizontal mounting position, and the work of mounting the lighting unit 401 on the upper frame member 410. This is the part that improves the sex.

  The plate-shaped portion 404 is a portion that is formed so as to be capable of contacting the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and that suppresses vertical displacement of the lighting unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a laterally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed as a recess.

  The tubular portion 405 has a function as a wiring through hole for passing the wiring of the electronic substrate on which the LED included in the main body portion 402 is arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The lighting unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 14e and the upper side plate member 14e, and the inner side is not accessible. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the lighting unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , A left corner support member 430L that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and the rear side of the main body member 411 to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side. The lens member 440 that is inserted and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back surface side is restricted from falling off to the back surface side, and at the same time, the lens member 440 that constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033.

  The main body member 411 is a long member on the left and right sides in which openings for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on the left and right sides, and the speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. Then, on the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape in a top view, and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 opposite to the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 are arranged to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction in the upper right corner.

  The corrugated wall portion 412 is formed in the same corrugated shape as the corrugated wall portion 403 of the lighting unit 401. This makes it possible to easily perform lateral alignment when fitting the lighting unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thereby, the wiring extending through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the rear surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the lighting unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the rear surface side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

  The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Accordingly, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the lighting unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized in a front view. The upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with the LED 14e2 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, and the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a corrugated side portion 416 formed in a wave shape in a top view on the rear surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the rear surface side on the lower right corner surface, and a supported groove 417 recessed from the rear surface on the lower left corner surface. A supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 that is arranged in a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a screw formed so that the screw can be screwed in a vertically closer position. The fastening part 419b is mainly provided.

  The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposing position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front side end portion). As a result, when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, the horizontal positioning can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape such that the left and right claw portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (see FIG. 86). 8), the load (weight or the like) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the decorative portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86 ), the upper panel unit 400 is provided via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. A load (weight, etc.) given from the electric decoration 8031 can be applied.

  The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where the screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and projects in a rib shape from the base portion to a position where the tip portion does not reach. The enlarged rib 419a is provided.

  As will be described later, the enlarged rib 419a is configured such that the screws inserted in the through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. It is a portion sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125(a)), but the details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with three ribs of the same shape at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) includes the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122) at the lower position of the main body member 411. It is formed at a position corresponding to the position of the main body member 411 and at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450, which will be described in detail later.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape at a lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421 in a bottom view, and After extending from the upper edge of the corrugated wall portion 422 to the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 formed to have an L-shaped cross section and extending upward from the extending end portion of the main body plate portion 421. An opening 424 is mainly provided, which is arranged at a position spaced apart from the left-right center position (upper end position of the curved shape) to the left and right at equal distances and which is formed of a plurality of small-diameter through-holes penetrating vertically.

  In a state where the corrugated wall portion 422 and the corrugated side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and rear contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 contacts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the corrugated side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 extending upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on each other in the vertical direction, and it is possible to improve the strength.

  The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) that allows a vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 to pass through (release to the outside). The right-corner support member 430R and the left-corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings that allow vibration generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 to pass therethrough.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

  121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469, and at the left and right ends, The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  In the speaker assembly 450R, a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an audio device that converts an electric signal into an audible sound wave to be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted into the through hole 466 to form a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. The front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side is formed to have an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and a space is formed between the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). The side assembly 480 is mainly provided.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front side assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front side assembly 460, and emits a performance sound in connection with a game. One end of the speaker 451 is connected and extended. The speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire including a copper wire and a covering portion that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the speaker connection wire 453 is terminated. When the connector is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 is squeezed. It can be reproduced and output with high sound quality. Further, the protective cover 454 can favorably protect the front surface of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 which is long in the left-right direction and is formed in a cup shape with an open rear side, and a plurality of semi-circular recesses formed from the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the vertical width. Of the recessed portion 462 and the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 from the rear side edge toward the outer side in the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 in the form of a plate. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end of the main body 461 to the front side; a light passage through hole 465 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461; A circular through hole 466 that penetrates the speaker 451 in the right side portion, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body portion 461 to the rear side, and A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the screws inserted into the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and a connection hole 469 into which the screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the rear surface side to the front surface side at the lower end portion of the front end side main body portion 461T.

  The main body portion 461 is a region that is divided in the left-right direction, and the base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and the center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 121). The main body mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M continuously provided on the left side) and a front end side main body portion 461T continuously provided on the center side in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body portion 461M (left side in FIG. 121). The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between them and the rear assembly 480.

  The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire outer shape of the main body portion 461 in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that does not have a barb inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. To be done.

  The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 463a is inserted from the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a into the co-fastening hole 14a2 and the co-fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched therebetween (the resin material is sandwiched and fastened to a hard material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage concave portion 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 is inserted. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wiring passage recess portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the wiring passage recess portion 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to the sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. 121 and 122, the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed not in the rear side assembly 480 but in the front side assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, It is possible to easily pass the speaker connection line 453, which is connected to the speaker 451 in advance, through the wiring passage concave portion 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passage through hole 465 is a through hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is directed toward the lens member 440.

  The passage-forming ribs 467 come into contact with the passage-forming ribs 487 of the rear assembly 480 in the front-rear direction without a gap, and bend a plurality of times in a space formed between the front-side assembly 460 and the rear-side assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). Is a rib that forms the. This curved passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed with a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outwardly protrudes from the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a body portion 481 that is long in the left-right direction and is formed in a cup shape with the front side open, and a semicircular tip recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate extending in a plate shape from the rear side edge of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 toward the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outer side in the vertical width. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 convexly provided on the front side of the main body portion 481, a light passage through hole 485 penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction in the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 481, and a cup-shaped portion of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (back side plate) to the front side, and a through hole formed as a through hole into which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Mainly, a plurality of through holes 488 and a rear recess 491 that is recessed from the front side to the back side at a position corresponding to the front recess 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

  The main body portion 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body portion 461 of the front side assembly 460 with respect to the outer shape of the rear side plate, and the front side assembly 460 is provided. The front side wall portion 481H is formed in a shape to be fitted into the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H.

  Since the speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall portion which is fitted to the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the speaker assembly 450R, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the acoustic effect is reduced due to the sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

  The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are protruded toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at positions where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right with an interval that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass therethrough. It is equipped with 481 Ha.

  The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha have a tapered shape that widens to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 453 is separated from the wiring passage concave portion 464. Even if it comes off and is displaced to the left and right, the displacement can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage concave portion 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as that of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

  The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted into the co-fastening hole 14a2 and the co-fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a, and the penetration hole 483a and the front side assembly 460 are passed through. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear surface side of the main body frame 14a by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 so as to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passage concave portion 464, and has a depth smaller than the concave depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464. The speaker connecting wire 453 is provided with a protruding length that is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453.

  That is, by inserting the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion are formed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening formed by being surrounded by 464. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the acoustic effect is deteriorated due to the sound leakage from the opening for passing the speaker connection line 453.

  The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole for passing the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), the light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same positions as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, abut on each other without a gap in the front and rear, and form a plurality of spaces in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib that forms a bent passage (see FIG. 123) that bends once. This curved passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is formed at the front and rear end portions of the front side wall portion 481H and the surface position. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear side plate of the main body 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed in such a size that the front end contacts the passage forming rib 467, but at that time, a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is loaded with a compressive force directed rearward from the passage forming rib 467, and the compressing force closes the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124(b)).

  At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming ribs 487 in the left-right direction is weak and the passage forming ribs 487 may be bent leftward or rightward, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is set to the strength of the front side wall portion 481H. The strength can be strengthened by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming ribs 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming ribs 487 can be prevented from bending to the left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming ribs 487 can be closed well. You can

  The rear recessed portion 491 is formed in a shape that is reversed from the front recessed portion 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outwardly protrudes from the outer shape). It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

  FIG. 123A is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123B is a front view of the rear assembly 480. 123(a) and 123(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, face each other. Is shown in a state of being unfolded toward the front side of the drawing. That is, by folding FIG. 123(a) and FIG. 123(b) around a line (not shown) vertically drawn to the left/right center of the paper surface, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100 ), inside the speaker assembly 450, an acoustic chamber is provided on the back side of the base end side main body portion 461 B of the front side assembly 460. Has been formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. The acoustic passage is formed as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are staggered vertically toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

  By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and The wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e strengthen the rigidity of the main body portion 461. You can

  The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e cooperate with the passage forming ribs 487 of the rear assembly 480 to form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 is passed.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 travels linearly. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided by avoiding the passage forming rib 467. It will proceed.

  That is, as illustrated as an example of the traveling path in FIG. 123A, the vibration wave Ws has a left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

  On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 on the lower side, and the rib portion closest to the left and right direction (for example, When the rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (arrow L, D direction).

  Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are alternately arranged vertically as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that is bent vertically. It is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws as compared with the lateral width of the space.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be produced by the recessed portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is passed in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately adjacent to the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the directions of arrows L and U.

  Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect of assembling.

  As shown in FIG. 123( b ), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring pressing convex portion 484 that presses the wiring, and are vertically staggered toward the left side at a plurality of locations (main). Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e arranged at five locations in the embodiment are provided.

  Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e strengthens the rigidity of the main body portion 487. You can

  Here, the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are formed in a shape that matches the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 in the front-rear direction, and are assembled (see FIG. 100). (See), they are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction.

  Note that the action of each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is similar to the action of the rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same action as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be produced by the recessed portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is left on the upper left side between the recessed portion 482 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). It is possible to proceed in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in vertical width with increasing distance from the speaker 451, and is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are vertically aligned. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a distance at a position further away from the speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (voice) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420. Thus, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back surface of the speaker 451 has an inner path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491 and an opening 424 ( (See FIG. 120 ), since it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to reproduce and output the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 with high sound quality. You can

  The bass reflex-type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, so that the sound output from the front surface of the speaker 451 has the same phase as the recessed portions 471 and 491. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex-type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out of phase with the sound output from the front side, but can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect that is full of a sense of reality, and can enhance the player's interest and excitement in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91 ), so that the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is generated by the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). This makes it possible to appropriately provide the player with the low-pitched sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side of the game to the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  The sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is used as a path to avoid the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is prescribed. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (voice sound) is set by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction. ) You can tune the sound.

  In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front side assembly 460 and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear side assembly 480, in addition to the above purpose, The speaker assembly 450 is arranged at a portion to which a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being disposed near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed in.

  Further, the extended plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged ribs 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e and pressed in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)), and the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing a screw into the fastening portion 468, the fastening portion 419 that is inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d are brought into contact with each other so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 The deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can reinforce the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.

  Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions to which the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downwards in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied from the fastening portion 14e1 to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

  Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portion from the fastening portion 14e1 is recessed. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

  The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

  Note that in such an illegal act, a wire or a piano wire is illegally intruded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, however, the speaker assembly 450 has the front concave portion 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear concave portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring box is formed into a closed box shape, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is introduced into the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the entry location. It is possible to make it difficult to get the tip of the wire or piano wire to reach the game area through the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e from the tip of 450.

  In addition, since the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 in the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451, the wire or the piano wire is provided. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which is a place where the above components enter the speaker assembly 450.

  Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent activity from being generated.

  124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124A is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124A, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124A. is there. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Are not shown.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 has a taper shape that inclines inward toward the rear side. The outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface of FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 has a taper shape that inclines inward toward the back side and fits with the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that. Accordingly, the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which abutting rib portions generate a compressive load.

  As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the front end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass in the intermediate main body portion 461M can be made smaller (thinner) than that of the tip-side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is ensured to be large in a manner that it bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws reaching the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and can be emitted at a low speed. As a result, the acoustic effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

  125(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124B is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e taken along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the rear assembly 480 formed by fastening and fixing the screws inserted in the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. The upper side plate member 14e is a portion sandwiched between the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a. That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125( b ), the second fastening portion 419 b is fastened to the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410 and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without coming into contact with each other in the fastening direction). It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without the side assembly 480.

  The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper side position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower side position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, but the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

  In the present embodiment, the left and right separate speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, so that the reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the partner speaker assemblies 450R and 450L. It is possible to avoid a conflict with the played sound, and to play back the played sound with high quality as a transparent sound without damaging the played sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extended plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)), while the speaker assembly 450 In the lower portion, the rear surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface portion of the upper side plate member 14e is provided so as to project to the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480, The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. In other words, the speaker assembly 450 does not have a structure in which the entire surface of the speaker assembly 450 abuts (sticks) to the upper side plate member 14e, and particularly in the lower end portion, a line contact is made.

  In this case, since the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin), but is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done.

  For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be arranged, or a glass member may be arranged. Alternatively, a concrete member may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that it has a high specific gravity. For example, it is desirable to adopt cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel or the like. By using these metals, the sound can be made thicker.

  Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Also, regarding the shape, it may be provided in the form of an elongated plate, may be provided in the form of a spike, or may be provided in a manner that is scattered in the shape of a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, but may be connected in a floating manner.

  The arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, in the case of arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by that. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear side assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the tightening condition of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the acoustic effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) and the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a screw inserted into the through hole provided in the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction and the through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side in addition to the screw inserted in the through hole 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to be fastened and fixed. As described above, when the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419 are fastened and fastened, the speaker assembly 450 is configured so that no load is applied. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

  Further, the same relationship as the above-described relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e can be applied to the relationship with the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  FIG. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127(b) illustrates the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

  First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support part 12a and a left end rear support part 12b are spaced apart from each other in order to support the left end part of the game board 13. It is arranged.

  The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward as it moves to the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact with each other.

  The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the front end surface is formed on one surface so that the back surface of the game board 13 can come into contact with the back surface, and the central portion is formed in a cup shape. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end portion disposed inside thereof and having a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture in which the elastic support portion 12b1 projects to the front side toward the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction to the side (rightward) on which the game board 13 is arranged in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

  128(a) and 128(b) are sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b) are board surface supporting devices 600. It is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 that schematically shows the game board 13. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 whose left end has been pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129(b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding, the configurations of a part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted.

  When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are aligned to some extent, and then the left end of the game board 13 is set. The part is slid between the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis oriented in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is supported. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left end front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is centered around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged so as to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is restricted by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion that is formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in a layout and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is assembled in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 are provided in the left-right direction, the guide ribs 12c1 being supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly progressed by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the leftward position. .. Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15°, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game shop. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation, so that the game does not depend on the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination when the game shop is installed. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface supporting devices 600 that are arranged vertically and in a released state described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the released state, the board surface support device 600 has the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the regulation front claw member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to be retracted from the path, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface supporting device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

  The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600, the board surface supporting device 600 does not contact the lower end portion of the game board 13 (game). The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached/detached by changing the state of the board support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the back side, since the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, the lever claw member 640 is rotated via the game board 13 by the lever principle. The force required when applying a load to the game board 13 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left front front support portion 12a and the left rear rear support portion 12b at two positions (see FIG. 126). When the front end frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of 13 is not fixed sufficiently (when at least one of the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 is not in a fixed state). Also, the extent to which the game board 13 tilts forward can be lowered.

  For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface supporting device 600 from changing due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board surface support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and that is supported by the game board 13 so that the position thereof can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is disposed in the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface supporting device 600. Wirings connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like are connected to the receiving side connector 12d connected on the back side in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is oriented along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of connection in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower parts are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged face to face, one board surface supporting device 600 will be described and the other board surface supporting device 600 will be omitted.

  130(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131( b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface supporting device 600. 130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the board surface support device 600 is used. The release state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface supporting device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 600 is rotatable about a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed in the frame member 610. A rotation front pawl member 620 that is axially supported, and a regulation front pawl member that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is disposed on the front side of the rotation front pawl member 620 and that is inserted and fixed to the front rotation pawl member 620. 630 and a post-rotation pawl member 640 that is rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 that is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of body plate portions 611 that are part of the body plate portion 611 and are arranged to face each other on the left and right. A pair of support holes 612 penetratingly formed in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the support hole 612 on the front side. , A circular arc recess 614 which is recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed in the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A rod-shaped restricting rod 615 and a pair of flanges extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). And a fixing plate 616 of.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member whose end on the insertion base end side is expanded, and is inserted into the support hole 612, and then the end on the insertion tip side is pressed. , Fixed to the support hole 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 at the same time.

  Like the frame member 610, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are penetratingly formed in the plate portion 621a that is arranged to face left and right and that are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrating in a straight line at the front-side upper corner portion of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of supports through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed while penetrating in a straight line at the back side portion of the plate portion 621a. The hole 624 is mainly provided.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation claw member 640.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed so as to be opposed to each other on the left and right, and includes an elongated portion 621a1 that is long in the front and rear and an extending portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the elongated portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view, a connecting plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the rear end of the connecting plate portion 621b. And a rear side extending plate 621c extending downwardly by about 45 degrees and extending from the rear side end of the extending portion 621a2 toward the opposite side plate portion 621a perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a. The pendant back plate portion 621d to be installed, and the front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end portion of the pendant back plate portion 621d at an angle of about 45 degrees to the front side with respect to the surface of the pendant back plate portion 621d. And mainly.

  The drooping back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a surface orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. An angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and a lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and a back side surface of the drooping back plate portion 621d are formed at right angles to each other.

  The back side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb comes into contact with the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb away from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)), while the torsion spring is changed in the fixed state. By retracting above NBb, the torsion spring NBb begins to contact the body plate portion 611.

  Accordingly, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board surface supporting device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface supporting device 600. Immediately before the end, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the worker side. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is lowered, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface supporting device 600.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d come close to each other. The torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction of separating the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

  The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a main body plate portion 631 formed in a letter shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at right angles, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 that is opposed to the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are penetratingly formed through the plate portion 631a and that are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portion 631a is inclined from the lower end to the front side. An inclined extending plate 633 that is extended by the above, and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a are mainly provided.

  The inclined extending plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed so as to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126 ), and thus the free posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 is a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at right angles, and is a part of the main body plate portion 641 and is disposed so as to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are penetratingly formed in the plate portion 641a that is linearly formed and that is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 to the rear side. An inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in a released state (see FIG. 129(a)), at an inclination angle that comes into surface contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

  FIG. 134(a), FIG. 134(b), FIG. 135(a) and FIG. 135(b) are side views of the board surface support device 600. Note that, in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), a process in which the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. In addition, in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the multifunctional cover member 171 and the panel surface supporting device 600, which are arranged close to the panel surface supporting device 600, are fixed. The arrangement of the game board 13 is shown in phantom lines.

  That is, the released state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 134(a), and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135(b). In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thereby, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by merely performing a simple work of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 through the game board 13 to the back side (third part). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

  Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when another external force does not act, the regulation front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 come into contact with each other, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the front rotation pawl member 620 is rotated. While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, the front regulation side claw member 630 rises on the front side in a state of being separated from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with a resistance portion 634a that is a front surface side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects with a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. Up to 135 (a)), the front end portion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises as the pre-rotation claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the restriction rod 615, When the restricting rod 615 and the curved surface 634 no longer come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is canceled, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 on the inclined extension plate 633 side. The tip end portion is arranged in proximity to the drooping back plate portion 621d (see FIG. 135(a) to FIG. 135(b)).

  In the angular range (the range between FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)) in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves, the front end portion of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, the change in the posture of the regulation front pawl member 630 when operating with the downward load changes the posture toward the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). Since the posture change), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the posture change of the regulation front pawl member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

  In addition, by contacting the game board 13 with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotation front pawl member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 without the game board 13 being pushed inward.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-rotation pawl member 620 from rotating due to the downward load applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied from the front frame 14 to the pre-regulation claw member 630, it is possible to prevent the pre-rotation claw member 620 from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship of abutting the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board support device 600. The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length of the inclined extension plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that the back side extension plate is moved when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front surface frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface supporting device 600, in the case where the front rotation pawl member 620 is rotated by the load from the front surface frame 14, the front surface frame 14 is arranged on the front surface frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front pawl member 630, the case where the board surface supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board surface supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle There may be cases where

  If the board surface support device 600 stabilizes at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13. The distance will become shorter, which may hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the front rotation pawl member 620 is prevented from rotating due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunction provided in the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to make a clerk who is working to close the front frame 14 notice that the board support device 600 is not fixed.

  If this is noticed, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface supporting device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135A, in the state immediately before the rotation front pawl member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulation front pawl provided on the front frame 14 are provided. Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the board surface supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and that the board surface supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively, The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The front regulation claw member 630 is configured such that the posture thereof is not regulated by the regulation rod 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front pawl member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulation front pawl member 630 immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

  As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface supporting device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of pushing the game board 13 by the store clerk is slightly insufficient, 90% stable). The case where the front frame 14 is not closed, and in this case, a load is applied to the board surface supporting device 600 from the multi-function cover member 171 arranged in the front frame 14. In addition, the board surface supporting device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board surface support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (see FIG. )), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the claw member 640 after rotation is displaced by the game board 13, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated accordingly, and the board surface support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the front regulation claw member 630, the board surface supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, since it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate 621d, the front rotation pawl member 620 is rotated via the post-rotation pawl member 640. The biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to is given as a resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side. This can reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged so as to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotation front pawl member 620, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistive portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

  This can reduce the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases is formed.

  Accordingly, from the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the multi-function cover member 171 pushes the inclined extension plate 633 toward the back side, and the front rotation pawl member 620 rotates, whereby the second shaft member P62 is displaced. The non-resistive portion 634b and the restriction rod 615 are separated from each other for a moment. Therefore, the resistance applied from the restriction rod 615 to the pre-regulation claw member 630 is reduced for a moment, so that the pre-regulation claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which it is separated from the front regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the multi-function cover member 171 is provided with the front regulating claw member 630 and the inclined extending plate 633. After that, the board surface supporting device 600 can be fixed.

  In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface supporting device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface supporting device 600. That is, in the state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front rotation pawl member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is provided with the multifunction cover member 171. The operation can be performed while avoiding the interference of (1) (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134A to the state shown in FIG. 135A). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when the board surface is replaced). The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is to be released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled to the upper front side, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotating direction), so that the regulating front pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into a released state.

  When the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, workability of the work for removing the game board 13 can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the risk that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

  In addition, the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, as in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are misaligned up and down. The load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 that are operated when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state. And do not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135(a) and FIG. 135(b), compared with the amount by which the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared. The amount of displacement of 640 is smaller.

  Therefore, when displacing the pre-regulation claw member 630 to the extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the regulation rod 615 regulates the return), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the portions supported by the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, the same effect can be obtained. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the release state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 resists the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and the pre-rotation pawl member 620. And the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle.

  Therefore, as compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out to the post-rotation claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at a portion supported by the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of 13. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. Note that, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

  Further, in FIG. 136, the released state of the board surface supporting device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface supporting device 600 is moved from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle (about 25°). ) In the rotated state, in FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is illustrated, and the board thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line. To be done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the open/close restriction unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. Note that, for ease of understanding, the opening/closing restriction portion 159, which is shown in cross-section in FIGS. 136 and 137, is illustrated in phantom lines in FIGS. 138 and 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136 ), interference between the opening/closing restriction portion 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 interferes with the operation section rear member 155 above the opening/closing restriction section 159. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but in the state where the game board 13 is arranged, the front frame 14 should be closed. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board surface supporting device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface supporting device 600 is in the released state, so that the interference between the game board 13 and the operation portion back surface member 155 above the opening/closing restriction portion 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the front pawl member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The open/close restriction unit 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation pawl member 620 by applying a load to the inclined extension plate 633 in the rear side direction, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the rotation direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 to rotate. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the front regulation claw member 630 (Fig. 138 counterclockwise direction) are opposite to each other, so that the reaction force becomes excessive. This is as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the front lower end of the game board 13 and the rear extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138), so that the front surface is more frontal. The action of restricting the closing of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front rotation pawl member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is formed. The inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes with each other.

  Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the front rotation pawl member 620 by applying a load to the inclined extension plate 633 facing the back side, the rotation of the front rotation pawl member 620 is caused by the action of the restriction rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the regulation front claw member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) are not opposite to each other, and as described above, they can be easily pushed in under normal load. Yes (see FIG. 135(a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board surface supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 is pushed through the opening/closing regulating portion 159, and the board surface supporting device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, it is allowed to close the front frame 14.

  FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. It should be noted that FIGS. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surfaces of the ball firing unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143(a) illustrates a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143(b) illustrates a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then reversed. .. That is, in FIG. 143(b), only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting, and a base member 711 mounted on the base member 710, centered on the right side of the base member 711. It is pivotally supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) that partially covers the front surface of 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) that opens the front surface of the base member 710. Mainly, a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to control the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A fastening portion 716 cylindrically protruded toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a bulging straight from the base member 710 to the front side, into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed, The mounting hole 718 and the positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 into which the rod-shaped portions 722 are inserted at the right corner, and locking portions 713 formed on the opposite sides of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so that the hook portions 723 can be locked. , A convex portion 714 that is convexly provided on the front side in the vicinity of the right side of the locking portion 713, and is arranged so as to face the attraction force generating solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)). A defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided is mainly provided.

  The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), and is inside the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing flat surface 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface that is on the left and right side of the facing flat surface 714a and that slopes to the right as it goes toward the back surface side. And a surface 714b.

  When the attraction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generation solenoid 741 but loosely tightens the attraction force generation solenoid 741 ( The cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 when the cover member 721 is in a floating state, and is formed with a protruding height that restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed in a state where the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely connected, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the attraction force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the engagement of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the attraction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed in advance.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably axially supported by the base member 711, a restricting state that restricts the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144). The switching device 740 is controlled so as to change its state depending on whether it is allowed to flow down to the launch rail 730 or not.

  The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper in the posture of FIG. 143(a)) is opened from a light-transmissive resin material and is loosely fitted in the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. Rod portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 to the rod portion 722 side. A sphere passage opening 724 that is bored in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 that is arranged in a positional relationship that protrudes slightly upward from the lower edge of the inner end portion of the sphere passage opening 724, The switching device 740 mainly includes a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742.

  The switching device 740 is a suction force generation solenoid 741 that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a synthetic resin member whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726. The suction force generation solenoid 741 generates a magnetic force. Whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 rotates and its posture changes, a metal plate 743 that is a metal plate member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the sphere passage opening 724 and is inclined downward as it is farther from the sphere passage opening 724, and the sphere P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. A restriction overhanging portion 745 that is extended by a certain distance, and has an extended end that projects toward the ball passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to the shaft rod portion 726.

  The sphere passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided, and a falling plate portion 724a that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction, A rib portion 724b that is disposed above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to extend in a rib shape downward from the upper surface of the sphere passage opening 724, and the extended front end surface inclines downward as it goes to the rear side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c which is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and toward the right.

  When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), the sphere P8 abuts the inclined surface 714b and the inclination of the inclined surface 714b. Runs down to the back side while shifting to the right along. Therefore, the sphere P8 flows down in a manner that the sphere P8 is separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, and thus the sphere P8 and the cutting metal are disposed while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged to project inside the sphere passage opening 724. It is possible to prevent the collision with the member 725.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with a space shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A straight line (a straight line that passes through the through hole 731a and extends in the long hole direction of the through hole 731a) and a through hole 731a that is formed as a long hole along the direction and through which the fastening screw passes and the bulging portion 716a. And a regulation groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716 is selected, the ball receiving member 731 is swollen by the swollen portion 716a. It can be slid along the straight line that is drawn out, whereby the standby position of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) (distance from the plunger 702) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is provided with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left and a rolling plate portion 730a. The mounting plate portions 730b and 730c are hung from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) mounting holes 732 are formed in the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to form a base with screws. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided along the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by the contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is generated. It is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, contacts the front and rear two points on the peripheral surface of the sphere P8 (see FIG. 146(b)), and moves the sphere P8 upward. Configured to guide.

  FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball delivery status of the ball delivery device 720 in time series. Note that in FIGS. 144A to 144C, the cover member 721 is not shown for easy understanding.

  In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144(a), the switching device 740 is in the restricted state (the supply of electric power to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped, and the ball guiding arm member 742 is descending by gravity). When it is, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissible state (the state in which the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is supplied with electric power and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restriction overhang portion 745 is generated. Moves above the sphere, and the downward regulation of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows in above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 comes into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent the sphere P8 from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, and the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. To be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730.

  Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 is also shown. Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86) and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 is formed, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and a lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b. And an upper blade part 725c extending from the main part.

  The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side with respect to the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side is projected above the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

  The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, a description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixedly attached to the ball P8 and made to enter.

  146(a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the ball launch unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). ) Is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 is fired. Note that, in FIGS. 146 and 147, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of some of the constituent members of the ball firing unit 112a is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 remains in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs to give a firing force to the ball P8 and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (FIG. 147(a). )reference).

  Here, the one end of the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, the ball P8 is hammered out, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved by pulling the yarn Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It is known that a loosening action causes the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected at the winning opening by loosening it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere P8 is configured to be cut by using the momentum of the sphere P8 to fire. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in a posture in which the yarn Y8 is closer to the right side toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

  When the ball P8 is hammered out in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the firing rail 730 passing under the falling plate portion 724a, and the intermediate portion of the yarn Y8 is located in the falling plate portion 724a. Since the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c protruding above the falling plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. ..

  While the player grips the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 that is fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected at the winning opening.

  If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not sufficiently pulled and the yarn Y8 is not cut, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, and thus it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. Note that the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 mainly in that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The configurations are substantially the same.

  On the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, the performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged. The production operation unit 1000 is configured to include a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing/retreating operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

  The advancing/retreating operation unit 900 moves up and down the petal operating device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancing/retreating operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in at least one of the operation of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. Of the drive side arm member 910 pivotally supported by the rear plate 1100 and the driving force of the drive motor 921 is transmitted through the arm gear 924, and the drive side arm member 910 is driven. A drive motor 921 that generates a drive force, a transmission unit 920 configured by a plurality of gears that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910. On the left and right opposite sides of the driving side arm member 910, and the thin plate-shaped second slide member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930. A long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal movement device 800 is mainly provided.

  Next, the structure of the petal movement device 800 will be described. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 taken along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. Note that, in FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting members such as petals 802 supported by a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central body of the supporting base material 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 passes through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 to the front side. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156) described later is fixed to the end of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body portion of the supporting base material 801, and the opening 801P is arranged to the right of the opening 801P and extends rearward to form a pair of cylindrical shapes. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. A donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a circular arc plate 880d for detection of a loose fitting device 880 described later can pass is provided around the screw insertion portion 801S. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

  On the front side of the support base 801, a decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed so as to open a vertically elongated generally oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper part that constitutes the upper end region and a generally U-shaped lower part that constitutes the region below the upper part.

  In the present embodiment, the supporting base material 801 has a shape that extends vertically slightly longer as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction as described below, The operation space can be reduced when the 801 is formed in a vertically long shape rather than in a horizontally long shape.

  At this time, since the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked and linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap with the position of the opening 801P as described later, respectively. The outer circumferences of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be arranged at arbitrary positions as long as they do not interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, they can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged on the right side (see FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, the weight is collected in the right half of the petal movement device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, whereby the left half on the opposite side can be prevented from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801, and the drive-side arm member 910 is used. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. Note that in FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base material 801 is not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals that are separated from each other and that constitutes a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

  FIG. 157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803, and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction when arranged, and has a shape that curves so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  Irregular irregularities including many wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge is also irregular in a front view irregular shape. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and are formed in approximately the same shape although there are slight differences in the unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is darkened without forming a boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole therein at two locations, namely, in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of each petal 802 and in the radial center. There is.

  The petals 802 are from the rear side portion 802a rather than the rear side portion 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side in front view, right side in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp-edged shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side in FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

  The front side portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the rear side portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side portion 802a is stacked on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side, and thus five sheets are formed. Petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front-rear direction at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationships can be matched, the difference in shape (the difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

  The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (donut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to each of the five petals 802 and is separated from each other.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape that extends from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion that extends forward.

  Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 (in the vicinity of the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S having a cylindrical hole extending rearward and having a screw hole inside are formed in the circumferential direction (flat plate). The member 803 is integrally formed at a position separated in the short side direction).

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be positioned substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short side direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to a straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. Thus, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear surface of each flat plate member 803, there are internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the threaded portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 of the petals 802 are located on the front side. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

  The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 from the front, and the screw is screwed from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is attached to the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. Note that in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. On the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin-made plate-like member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

  Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in front of and behind each of two adjacent locations out of five locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and one location in the middle of three locations excluding the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having an internally extending screw hole is integrally formed, and the positioning boss 813a is extended from the tip edge of the above-mentioned five locations where the threaded portion 813S is not formed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 814 is angle θ11 (about 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  The both-side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space.

  In this way, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Each end of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) or a rectangular shape in a front view.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits is the side slit. 815 has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction and extends slightly (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extending portion (break) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portions of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  As a result, the circular arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed can be suppressed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  In addition, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set including the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 that is inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other and are arranged more densely, which also makes the outer shape of the slit member 810 compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that the five sets of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are arranged so as not to be inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 but to extend radially along the radial direction D11. Also, as described above, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the side slits 815 can be arranged more densely when arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and has a small thickness at both end portions of the slide member 820 and a front end portion having a semicircular shape in front view. The extending portion to be formed, a central portion having a thickness larger than that of the effect portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 projecting from the front to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state; and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate in the front and rear direction so as to project from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side, Equipped with.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extension direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 820 and the longitudinal direction intersect at a right angle. And the slits 815 on both sides are arranged.

  On the other hand, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. In a fully fitted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw insertion portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

  As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no clearance, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are almost along the corresponding outer edges of the both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 does not rotate about the guide pin 822 but is oriented in a certain outward direction. It is regulated by a slide rib 803a so as to slide with.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that, in FIG. 161(a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. Note that in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotary plate 830 is disposed from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotary plate 830 is a resin disc having a circular pivot support opening 831 in the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 on the front side, the peripheral wall of which extends forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and which is formed around the peripheral wall.

  The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall that extends forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the peripheral wall has a shape that extends along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830 so as to close in a slender loop shape in a front view. It is formed integrally with the rotary plate 830.

  The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance such as play. The ridge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled off.

  The guide rail 832 extends from the position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivotal opening 831 to the clockwise direction in the front view along a direction approximately midway between the tangent line of the pivotal opening 831 and the normal line, and thereafter Further, it extends to a position in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving in an arc shape further toward the clockwise direction in front view than the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175(a)).

  An end portion of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, a peripheral wall of a portion circumscribing the peripheral edge portion of the pivot support opening 831 at the center side end is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot support opening 831. The front end of the peripheral wall of the pivotal opening 831 projects toward the front side of the front end of the peripheral wall.

  Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals, and the guide rails 832 are spaced apart from each other. It extends so as to spiral out from the outside.

  On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G is integrally formed so as to extend rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivotal support opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and have teeth on its outer periphery. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivotal opening 831 is fitted onto the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, it is not a surface planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot support opening 831 of the rotary plate 830, but a linear shape. , And thereby, the pivotal support opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is rotatably and smoothly pivoted.

  On the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the second gear 830G and larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric. , The oil damper 805 is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G.

  A circular pivot support opening 810a is formed at the center of the third gear 810G, and three pivot support openings 810a are formed around the pivot support opening 810a at three positions in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156). A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw insertion portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap with the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c for positioning, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw insertion portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 through the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G prevents the rotary plate 830 from coming off. Are held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to separate.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotation device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotation device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154) and a loose fitting device 880 that is loosely fitted so as to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for

  FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of a peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. A flange 855 that is formed in a disk shape so as to expand its diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming an inner cavity portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the inner cavity portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front left screw-in portions 857 having screw holes therein and two front and rear screw-in portions 857 to the inner cavity portion 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend in a slightly shorter shape toward the front in a cylindrical shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, a columnar shape is extended along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, and extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, A rear threaded portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear side positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear side screwing portions 853 so as to project rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851. The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board having a diameter slightly smaller than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  The LED board 861 is provided with a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 at positions corresponding to the front threaded portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 and the front positioning boss 854, respectively.

  By inserting the front side positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning and screwing a screw into the front side screw-in portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  Further, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED substrate 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and having a size such that the threaded portion 869 of the central decoration member 868 can be fitted therein.

  On the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, as shown in FIG. 162, one central portion and a large number of concentric circles that are spread in multiples (double) around this one portion and are arranged at equal intervals are forward-facing. The LEDs 865 are arranged and fixed so that they emit light toward the front.

  Lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edges on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865 alternately. A connector connecting portion 867 is arranged and fixed rearward on the rear side surface of the LED board 861.

  A central decoration member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. The central decoration member 868 is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, is extended from the long plate-shaped base in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the central portion. It is provided with a pair of screw insertion portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

  The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. The screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 is brought into contact with the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 across the LED substrate 861 from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855. As a result, the central decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decoration member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

  The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter A cylindrical member with a flange that is sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, and a main-body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with screw-in portions 883S that extend in the front-rear direction in a cylindrical shape and have a screw hole inside thereof at two positions separated by one from among four positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed portion, of the above-mentioned four portions, where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the threaded portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is protruded like a rib in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding intermediate positions in the circumferential direction at the four circumferential positions with the same projecting length as the threaded portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, and is axially formed. A sliding rib 883b that extends over the entire surface is formed.

  The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decoration member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side and the decoration member 884 are outside. The rear cover 886 is fastened and fixed around the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and also comes into contact with the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side to be fastened and fixed. , Are provided.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on the front and back surfaces (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-like. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform a light emission effect.

  The decoration member 884 is a member that produces a light emission effect by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, and constitutes a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a light-transmitting property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall on the back side thereof rises to the back side. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion so that the central decoration member 868 can be inserted therethrough.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 configured as described above is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and larger than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric. It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 which are rotatably supported by the support base 801 and mesh with each other.

  In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot support opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and screw insertion holes are formed around the pivot support opening 880a at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are formed in the 880b at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotation device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c for positioning, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw insertion portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b to be fixed.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 through the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and the slit. The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to be detached.

  The fourth gear 880G includes an arc plate 880d for detection that is extended in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c so as to extend rearward. As the circular arc plates for detection 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection circular plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152), and is arranged to detect a member that passes through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by the coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, no matter which posture the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72°) of the detection circular plates 880d can be detected (minimum angle). Detection of 72° can be performed, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

  Assembly of the central shaft rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the respective rear ends thereof project slightly rearward from the pivot support openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear side positioning boss 854 that projects further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and similarly from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw-in portion 853 protruding further rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

  At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out rearward (not shown) through the inner cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801.

  With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the slit member 810 is attached to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 locally bulges at the eight locations along the circumferential direction by the screw-in portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b. The inner peripheral surface of the slit 810 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of the slit 813, not the surface of the slit member 810. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate smoothly.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the driving side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 is moved up and down (advancing and retreating) by being applied with a vertical load from the drive-side arm member 910. In the description of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures, FIGS. 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back face of the game board 13, and is located at the lower left corner of the front view. A support pillar 1110 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, a gear housing portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed from the front side so as to be housed above the support pillar 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position in the left and right direction. A rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the right side, and a support long hole 1140 formed as a long hole that is inclined downward as it gets closer to the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly equipped with.

  The support columns 1110 are cylindrical portions that pivotally support the drive-side arm member 910, and are a pair of left and right holes near the outer periphery of the front-side end portion thereof, into which screws can be screwed. It includes a threaded portion 1111 formed, and a pair of upper and lower positioning bosses 1112 on the same plane as the tip edge of the threaded portion 1111 and extending toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is bent in a V shape when viewed from the rear, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and also has a support column. A rotation shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110; a connecting projection 912 that is provided in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member; The petal movement device 800 is supported by the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the lengthy main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 and the other end of the elongated main body member. The support part 914 is mainly provided.

  The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 protruding radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. Interlockingly, the support column 1110 rotates about an axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are continuously arranged while intersecting slightly, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. A first housing portion 1121, a second housing portion 1122 that is provided continuously with the first housing portion 1121, and a driving-side arm member that is arranged diametrically opposite to the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 interposed therebetween. Mainly includes a third accommodating portion 1123 that accommodates the arm gear 924 that is fitted with the armature 910.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked in front and back and is slidably supported in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the rear plate 1100 is formed, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R are provided. Placed on the line. The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R maintains the posture of the petal motion device 800 constant.

  The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined and arranged so as to descend to the left at an inclination angle of about 50° in front view, and from the vicinity of the outer periphery. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear, and has one end that is cylindrically protruded toward the back and has a spine shape. A supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the supporting elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a supporting portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end are mainly provided.

  A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted to the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is internally fitted in the supporting elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is formed slightly smaller than the width of the support elongated hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the lateral base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of a long hole extending left and right. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 provided in the front-rear direction in the form of a vertically extending elongated hole provided on the left end side, and is provided on the right end side. The front end side insertion hole 933 formed in the front-rear direction is connected to the second effect member 940.

  The proximal end side long hole 932 is provided with a retaining portion 932a formed along the trajectory of the connecting convex portion 912 rotating around the support column 1110 at the upper end portion, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the retaining portion 932a. The displacement part 932b is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in front view on the left side in front view of the back plate 1100, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150, which is arranged at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has a through hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. In the positional relationship (three positions) corresponding to the positional relationship of the supported long holes 931, the supporting convex portion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude toward the back side, and the supporting convex portion 1002S is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the front right corner. At the same time, a shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S similarly. And a convex strip portion 1005S that is convexly provided on the front side along an arcuate shape having the same center.

  The supporting convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange from the tip of the supporting convex portion 1002S and the supported long hole 931. It is arranged in a gap between them, and in that state, a retaining screw is screwed into the tip of the support projection 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arcuate concave portion 1004S and the ridge 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotating operation of the second effect member 940. It is the part that It should be noted that the ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at the regular position, but is formed at a convex height that allows the ridge portion 1005S to abut when displaced or bent from the regular position. To be done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose bottom end is formed in a bifurcated manner and whose top end is formed in a circular shape centered on the shaft-supported strut part 941. A columnar support portion 941 that is provided in a columnar shape and is axially supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is arranged in the vicinity of the shafted support portion 941 and has a columnar shape protruding toward the back side. The unit 942 is mainly provided.

  The shaft-supported column portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an insertion portion 941a (see FIG. 152). With the shaft-supported column portion 941 inserted in the shaft supporting hole 1003S with the collar sandwiched between them, the disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft supporting hole 1003S is arranged at the tip. The lid member 945 plays a role of preventing the lid member 945 from coming off when a screw is screwed into. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported on the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the front end to prevent the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the front end side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced in the vicinity of the center of the width of the circular arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 abuts the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to be screwed therein when the plate-shaped support plate 921a supporting the drive motor 921 is fastened, and radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. A detection sensor 1162 that detects a flange portion 926 that projects to the upper side, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in a direction to lift the petal operation device 800, and a support long hole. A cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of 1140, and a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged near the cover support portion 1164 and hidden in the substrate cover 1000C in a front view, It mainly includes a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even when the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is restricted, the screw-in portion 1006S causes The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted.

  As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixed to each of the lateral base material 1000S and the back plate 1100 that are stacked and attached to each other in the front and rear, and are fixed to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when the petal movement device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S. You can

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising/lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advancing/retreating operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operating device 800, the advancing/retreating operation unit 900 and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171, and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advancing/retreating operation unit 900.

  Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connecting position of the retaining portion 932a and the displacing portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end side of the movement range. The closed state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 has the inner fitting protrusion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151 (see FIG. 151) as a base point, and extends in a tangential direction of a circle around the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced, and a range (idling range) in which the drive-side arm member 910 maintains its posture is generated, so that the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 is reduced. can do.

  In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  170 to FIG. 171 to FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, it is visually recognized that the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked. Can be made

  Here, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged in a manner to project toward the position where the second effect member 940 operates as if the second effect member 940 follows the petal operation device 800. Can be visually recognized as if

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174(c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 174 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

  175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. 176 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

  177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 177( d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. 178 is a front view showing the petal movement device 800 in a transparent manner, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

  179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. Yes, FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 descends due to the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 expands from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to the expansion shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. After the middle position, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and further the rotating operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position, and then the concentrating operation (third operation). It is configured to be able to return to the initial position (concentration position) by performing the operation.

  At the initial position (concentration position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is located inside the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 (on the side of the circular opening 811). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the central portion, and the flower petals of the hibiscus in the blooming state as a whole. It is in a gathering state that composes flowers.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c). When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with, the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A10.

  At this time, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivotal opening 831 with a small frictional resistance, as described above, the rotary plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably externally fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811, as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the oil damper 805 is held so as not to rotate with a small torque that allows the rotating plate 830 to initially move.

  Therefore, when the first motor 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on the front side surface thereof rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) so that the slide pin 823 is guided by the guide rail 832 and is pushed outward in the radial direction.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 is linearly moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. Move to be guided.

  Further, at this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, torque is applied to the slit member 810 to some extent, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 held in a stopped state, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding from the gathering position to the outside. In this expanding operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined in the counterclockwise direction from the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 by the angle θ11 as shown in FIG. 177. Since the slide pin 823 extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves to the outside. On the other hand, due to this inclination, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively large. Get faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the rotation amount (angle) of the rotary plate 830 is relatively small. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the expansion operation of the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 does not have this inclination and extends radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11 in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. Any decline is even more pronounced.

  Further, at this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the center side end portion to the clockwise side in the front view along the direction D15 which is an intermediate point between the tangent line of the pivot support opening 831 and the normal line, as shown in FIG. 177. After this, the guide rails 832 extend outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc shape toward the clockwise side when viewed from the front, and extend so as to spiral outward as a whole by the five guide rails 832. ..

  As the guide rail 832 inclines toward the clockwise side in the front view as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape from the direction D15 toward the clockwise side in the front view, the reduction in the load on the slide pin 823 and the reduction in the moving speed become more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining it in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining to the clockwise side in the front view and further curving in an arc shape.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape by the peripheral wall extending from the front side surface to the front side, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while lowering the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

  On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 is configured to penetrate therethrough, there is little risk of deviation, and therefore the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

  In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a defect such as deviation and ensure the reliability of power transmission, while the central slit 814 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823. , Has a structure in which the roles are divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five petals 802 reach the fully open position. It spreads out radially and becomes a fully open state, and the spreading operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the position where the five petals 802 are radially dispersed to be continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in a front view. A petal 802 is arranged at. As a result, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174(b)), the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 are visually recognized integrally as a flower of a hibiscus that is slightly larger (FIG. 174). 178(b)).

  In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814 and cannot move further, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814 thereafter. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before due to a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully opened state after the expansion operation is completed.

  After the expanding operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member is formed. 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as shown by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in the fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

  At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the expanding operation is immediately followed by the rotating operation so as to be continuous. Can be transferred.

  When the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13, the decoration member 884 moves in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes large, and thus the petal 802 is moved. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the rotating operation is completed and the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), the slit member 810 is removed. While being held in a stopped state by being braked by the oil damper 805, first, only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as indicated by an arrow A15 in FIG. Is subjected to a converging operation in the opposite direction.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement in the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement, and along with this, the five petals 802 move from the fully open position to the central decoration member 868 at the center. Then, they gather and return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 to return to the gathering state, and the gathering operation ends.

  After that, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When operated again, the first motor 804 further rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b), and the petals 802 are moved as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate clockwise in the front view in the gathered state.

  When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view in the gathered state as shown by the arrow A16, the decoration member 884 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in the front view) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 becomes large, and thus the petal 802 is moved. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  Also from the concentrating operation to the rotating operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above, it is possible to stop the operation once and then make an interval, or to make an immediate transition so as to be continuous without any interval. You can also

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection circular plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), it is possible to control the rotation angle of the central motor 804. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotating operation.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145, which is closed on all sides with walls, is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment is described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 according to the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 is provided with a notch 9145b which is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. .. The sheet metal member 9150 is provided with a thin plate blade portion 9153 having a thin plate shape in which the portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent and formed to the front side in a manner of covering the cutout 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper stopper convex portion (not shown) provided on the rear surface side of the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91), and is directed upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Configured to withstand load.

  This thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145, and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. And is arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

  Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 in order to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the sphere by using the momentum of the firing of the ball. However, when the momentum of the firing is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. Without a chance, the ball was shot.

  On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, is discharged to the lower plate 50 through the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, considering a case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the sphere P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly struck, and when the sphere P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the sphere P8 is attached to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (the firing solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725. Therefore, even if the ball P9 is strongly driven, Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is slammed out, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, a person who commits an illegal act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 is won. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like repeatedly, and illegal profits can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the illegal action is performed by using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin blade is provided in the foul ball passage portion 145 that the yarn Y8 inevitably passes through. By disposing the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  That is, when a person who commits an illegal act pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, which damages the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed on the front side, that is, on the side on which the yarn Y8 is pulled when pulling the yarn Y8 from the front side. When the yarn Y8 is pulled, the yarn Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

  In addition, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance force to the upward load by contacting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. Accordingly, when the yarn Y8 is pulled, it is possible to prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

  Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the payout ball. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of detecting fraud, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being injured, the ball P8 is close to the body (for example, a pocket of pants or the like). ), it is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the yarn Y8 travels on the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (abuts on the upper surface) and extends to the player side is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is stretched through a position which is about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  When the prize balls are paid out in this state, the balls discharged from the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 collide with the lower plate 50 and bounce around. The bottom opening which is arranged behind the ball removing lever 52 by stepping on the yarn Y8 arranged on the front side of 53 and hitting the yarn Y8 to flow the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) rightward. Flow through. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing), the front door side lower tray portion It is possible to increase the possibility that the balls discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 come into contact with the yarn Y8 and damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 so as to incline downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

  As a result, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower plate 50 is reduced. That is, since the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give the velocity component in the right direction (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged to the lower plate 50 along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be paid out, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53. The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53, and at the boundary thereof, the riding control step portion. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the riding restraint stepped portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat surface portion that connects to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and that extends in the vertical direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed above the riding control step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower dish passage 9142 and the foul ball passage. 9145 is communicated. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the front-door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 before it has passed through the sphere guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, it is possible to easily bring the ball closer to the yarn Y8.

  The vertical width of the riding restraint step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the riding restraint step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restraint step portion 9053a allows passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on four sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

  184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as seen from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as seen from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 as left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is provided with a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 that extend toward the front side in a manner of covering the lower portion of the cutout 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the end portion of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the recessed depth thereof is about the same as twice the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere (diameter). It In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) has the outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 that is disposed inside the notch 10145c and before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to project from the side surface on the rear surface side toward the rear surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and the illustration is omitted in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided in a convex shape so as to fill the notch 10145c partway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-back direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154 are exposed is the sphere. It is set to a radius Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped due to collision with the sphere P8. This can be prevented, and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 becomes wider as it gets closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily inserted into the gap on the back surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is the first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion, and extends leftward in a manner that the first thin plate blade portion 10153 slightly inclines upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, an acute-angled concave portion 10155 having a deep concave portion is formed between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.

  The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front surface side of the rear surface side edge of the notch 10145c. Accordingly, when the yarn Y8 enters the back surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angled recess 10155 to easily damage the yarn Y8.

  Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged higher than the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 that is pulled obliquely downward by the front person by a person who commits misconduct Can easily enter the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155.

  The plate-shaped portions continuously provided on the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 contact the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and are configured to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged facing the left and right opposite sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. It That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the right and left reverse directions.

  For example, the person who commits the cheating attempts to avoid the discovery of the cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that had come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 is applied with a load in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught by the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

  Thereby, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the time in which the thread Y8 is exposed in the game area is lengthened, whereby the improper activity can be detected faster.

  An adhesive member (such as glue or trim stick) may be provided in the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155 so that the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155 is bonded. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the person who commits the misconduct is cut, the thread is bonded to the adhesive member provided in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to speed up the detection of the illegal use of the yarn Y8.

  Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a ball (foul ball) that has a low firing strength and has not reached the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment is a foul ball. A foul ball receiving port 2164 for receiving is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is made of a resin material so that the outer rail 2062 is arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and has an arc shape similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member that is formed to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 that allows the sphere to flow down between the tip member 2062a that is formed and is disposed in the vicinity of the sphere firing unit 112a, and the tip member 2062a. 2062b, and.

  A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass the adjustment, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

  In the present embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and Formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the rear surface side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the main body side upper plate passage portion 161. Then, when the balls of the upper plate 17 exceed the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the balls on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls, and the dispensing device. It is configured to stop the payout of the balls from 133.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the balls that are paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act of adhering the balls to both ends of the yarn Y8 and passing one ball through the foul ball passage 2062c to cause the yarn Y8 to enter the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c, as described above. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by applying the payout ball to the yarn Y8 can be produced regardless of the degree of accumulation of the balls of the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. Note that, in FIG. 189, a spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed on the upper portion of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is illustrated side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 with the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilted gate member 68a being arranged on the front side.

  Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which is provided in a cylindrical shape from the back side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side and has a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is abutted against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 contacts the front side of the closing plate 2062b4 with the base member 68b1 in advance. The long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as an attachment hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 by aligning the position with the through hole, and in this state, the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is screwed. By being inserted, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  The obstruction plate 2062b4 is formed such that the upper surface and the left surface that are in contact with the guide member 2062b have the same shape as the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) that is recessed to some extent is formed as an inclined surface having the same slope as the slope increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The slope increasing portion 2062d has a slope that is downwardly inclined toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending to the tip member 2062a side along the surface of the slope increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, in this embodiment). , About 1/3 of the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when the ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. You can avoid that. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the slope increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball moves to the left and right of the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through to the ball firing unit 112a side through the tip member 2062a.

  The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the slope increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 between the closing plate 2062b4 and having a width (approximately 2 [mm] in this embodiment) smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter. It is recessed to the back side to a certain position. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is where the ball path driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is provided with a semicircular cutout 2062b3 on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. The notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

  In this way, since the long screw B11 screwed into the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cut 2062b1 is formed, like the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The yarn Y8 can be rubbed against the long screw B11 in the case of an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep portion of the notch 2062b1 when receiving the load of pulling both ends from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1 (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the yarn Y8 rubs against the long screw B11 and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side with respect to the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the sphere) where the shot sphere abuts the outer rail 2062, and therefore the cut sphere 2062b1 collides with the shot sphere. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

  In addition, a person who conducts an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 on the side projecting toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed. Since the end on the side where it is located (see FIG. 182) is pulled to the front side to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, the yarn Y8 comes close to the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player side. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c toward the front, the yarn Y8 can be made to enter the cut 2062c more easily than when the cut 2062c is arranged near the rear side.

  A button-type switch SW11 including a detecting portion protruding downward is provided in the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates by the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is arranged to be switchable between ON and OFF when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.

  190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190(a) shows a state in which the weight 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side by the weight of the weight 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68, and in FIG. 190(b), The state where the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted to the foul ball passage 2062c side is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the yarn Y8 used in the misconduct is shown as a reference and the button type switch SW11 is turned on, and in FIG. 190(b), the button type switch is shown. It is shown that SW11 is OFF.

  As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives a resistance enough to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing part 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is returned by the time when the ball is next guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (minimum 0.6 seconds later). This is because it is possible.

  On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 has a great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that advances while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is made to travel through the foul ball passageway 2062c in the direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, reach the inside of the game area, and try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bend a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (eg cutting nails) is possible.

  FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally enters is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  When the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the downward direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is advanced while being repulsed. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (state in which the weight 68a2 is rejected by the tip of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. 190(a), it is connected to the tip of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a2 is maintained in the pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the opening/closing portion 68a1 and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further inward.

  Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed to enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraudulently as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, it is possible to control so as to sound an alarm when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Can detect fraud early.

  Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the balls from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the button-type switch SW11 is turned off only when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, the period during which the payout of the balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain the state in which the dispensing of the balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped.

  The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in the present embodiment, when the return ball prevention member 68 on the side disposed on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it is possible to quickly Can be exchanged. As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect that it can play the role of preventing fraud before replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage location can be saved. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the structure may be such that the gate member 68a is pivotally supported by the fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided).

  Further, whether the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and is replaced, and whether the above-described effect of preventing fraud is exhibited depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. , The person who commits the misconduct does not know whether the exchange has been done or not, and even if it is exchanged, the extent of the damage cannot be known, so that the deterrence of the misconduct can still be maintained. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operation device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully open position has been described, but the petal operation device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanding position. It is composed of modes. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 is different from the back cover 886 of the eighth embodiment in that the flange portion 2887 that extends radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and its rear edge are formed. The restriction portion 2888 is provided so as to project from the extending front end of the flange portion 2887 to the rear surface side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the back cover 2886, and is provided with the same parts as the loose fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

  The restricting portion 2888 is provided so as to project to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restriction portion 2888 is provided so as to project to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the single flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 are arranged will be described, but they may be scattered at a plurality of positions on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal operation device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. .. Note that in FIGS. 193 and 194, an operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and simultaneous points are shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 194(a), 193(b), and 194(b), respectively. Is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b), for convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed, and in the same cross section, the pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the pair of screw insertion portions 2803S disposed inside the both-side slits 815 are formed on the surfaces facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. The inclined surface 2803T is provided so as to incline away from the 2803S.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The effect of the restriction portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petals 802 are slid in a posture in which the restriction portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 ( When the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

  When the petal 802 is further loaded from the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 that is fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a) (the posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194( b ), it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the central slit 814 and the side slits 815. The posture of the petal 802 changes as much as possible.

  By changing the postures of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this way, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received and the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 has the narrow slide rib 803a only in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the friction resistance is suppressed and the slide member 2820 has the slits 814, 815. It is possible to move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the both side slits 815, the slide rib 803a being in contact with the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T being in contact with the inner inner wall. (Pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner side wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the lateral direction of the both-side slit 815, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 against the movement of the slits 814, 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814, 815. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in the normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the oil damper 805 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture).

  In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in front view is started from the state shown in FIG. 193(b). This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 separate from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petals 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 illustrates the state after the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal movement device 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise direction in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. Note that in FIGS. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the manner in which the petals 802 move from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in time series.

  In FIG. 196(a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b and the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are brought into the normal posture. Will be returned.

  Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 from the slide pin 823, so the petals The rotation operation of 802 is stopped, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petal 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petal 802 toward the gathering position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the front side portion 802b abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view). Therefore, since the front side portion 802b and the regulation portion 2888 can be prevented from contacting each other, the petal 802 can be moved to the fully opened position and rotated at the fully opened position in this embodiment.

  As for the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888, the petal 802 slightly changes its position even if it comes into contact with the petal 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position or does not come into contact with the petal 802 rotating at the fully open position. By setting the position where the restriction portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be received, the restriction portion 2888 can be prevented from obstructing the rotation of the petal 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restriction portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it is used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern. It is possible to make the difference between the petal 802 being expanded to the maximum and performing the rotating operation, or the expanding operation halfway to perform the rotating operation due to the difference in perspective.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the rendering device.

  Note that the restriction portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 in a front view. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, so that the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  At the fully open position, the petals 802 may come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and slightly change their postures, which may be used as an effect (for example, an effect that indicates the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, the meaning of the petal 802 can be changed depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating, or is rotating while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flickering). ..

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position, but if the position where the petal 802 comes into contact is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), then the posture of the petal 802 changes. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes by a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case in which the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 in the expanding position has been described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  198(a), 198(b), 199(a), and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) is illustrated in time series. Further, in FIG. 198(a), FIG. 198(b), FIG. 199(a), and FIG. 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. It is the same as in the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together with each other in excess of the resistance that is applied, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

  Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

  Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). Then, in this embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.

  That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that, of the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the slit member 3810 is recessed in a wall portion on the clockwise side in front view so as to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side in the front view of the central slit 814, the both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view. Of the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in a manner to widen the width in the lateral direction and the side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view. A counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in a wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view so as to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the lateral direction is mainly provided.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from the position opposite to the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (downward in FIG. 198(a)). Formed in.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is located on the rotation center side (lower side in FIG. 198(a)) of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803. Are continuously formed.

  The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotary plate 830 of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in the front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), when the rotary plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (the slide rib 803a at the right end is clocked). It moves in the direction in which it enters the rotating side recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198(b)).

  As a result, the contact between the wall portion of the both-side slit 815 on the counterclockwise side in front view and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). With respect to 3810, the first contacting portion) is used as a fulcrum to rotate counterclockwise in a front view (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

  Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessed depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 described above. And the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwed portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are prevented from coming into contact with each other.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recess depth such that the rotating tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not come into contact with the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-described rotation. The rotating side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199(b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screw-in portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal, a front view The slide rib 803a on the center side in the radial direction housed in the slits 815 on the clockwise side comes into contact with the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise-side recessed portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in a state of moving in the radial direction (see FIG. 194(a)), by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and The flat plate member 2803 can be moved to the center side in the radial direction.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, when the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 after the state shown in FIG. The case where the rotary plate 830 independently rotates and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained can be switched.

  As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be caused to perform an operation that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanied by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in a front view (FIG. 194(b). )), the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) that are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotate along with the slit member 3810) before returning to the changed posture. Rotation operation) (see FIGS. 195, 196(a) and 196(b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed in the middle of the expanding operation accompanied by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 ( By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, the rotation operation of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (the rotation operation of rotating along with the slit member 3810). It can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expanding operation accompanied by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198(a)), by rotating the rotary plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in a front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are obtained. From the position of the petal 802 that is fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 195(a)) while expanding (see FIG. 195), and then move to the gathering position. Since it is possible to diversify the arrangement of the petals 802 when performing the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197), it is possible to diversify the operation of the petal operation device 3800.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described. However, in the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment, the lower frame member 8320 is curved. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 200 and 202(a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) shows the tilting device 310 at the first state. A state in the middle of changing from one state to a second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment is not described in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments regarding the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to a slight supplementary explanation.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left-right center position. The first through-hole 8326a and the left and right of the vibrating device 5400 are inclined to the upper surface of the bottom plate part 321 in a laterally long rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate part 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b that are provided along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and are connected at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes that are formed in the left and right corners in a vertically elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. A through hole 8326c is mainly provided.

  Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c is for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the above-mentioned drinking water downward and for the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for a player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is an obstacle to forcefully stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the player of interest, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but the possibility of foreign matter being inserted into the gaps V13, V14 is increased.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate about a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the rear end, that is, is supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction is, the more easily it is displaced (deformed) in the left-right direction near the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation that utilizes rattling that occurs due to the sum of design errors that are incorporated between members during the design stage, or positional deviation that occurs when each member is slightly deformed. (Transformation) is included.

  Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 is designed so as not to be the gap V13 for inserting a coin-shaped foreign substance (for example, a 1-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right (for example, the left side), the gap V13 that can be formed on the other side (for example, the right side) has upper frame members 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a total size of the gaps V13 formed between and, and may have a size in which a coin-shaped foreign substance can be inserted.

  That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be half or less of the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign substance may be inserted.

  In addition, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also set in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play in the vicinity of the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310. The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load to the back side and shifting (deforming) the position, so that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts when a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 or the longitudinal gap V14, the coin -Shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 202(a) and FIG. 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that is narrowed inward in the lateral direction toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers While a good feeling of operation can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320 so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated in the state where coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance may become excessive, and a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. Moreover, the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i rub against each other, so that the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign substance is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300. Therefore, the coin-shaped foreign substance is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove the operation device 300 as soon as it is detected, but in the state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 needs to be disassembled in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  203(a) is a front view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operating device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(c) is 203(d) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along the line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is of FIG. 203(a). It is sectional drawing of the operating device 8300 in a CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through hole 8326a has the same horizontal center as the horizontal center of the vibrating device 5400, and is formed with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (first housing portion 5431, see FIG. 58). It Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right in the second state when viewed in the up-down direction). Inclining device 81 is inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved, and inclination device D82 is inclined toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is inclined. 201), it is possible to facilitate removal of coin-shaped foreign matter through the first through hole 8326a.

  As a result, the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a can be suppressed to the necessary minimum while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign substance in a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. The size is larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits the light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are continuously provided on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (members that have been mirror-finished). Is fixed) to reflect the light passing through the spherical shell 313.

  With this arrangement, by using the first through hole 8326a, there is a difference in the light amount of the light that is transmitted through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light by the first through hole 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be made bright and visible.

  Note that when a coin-shaped foreign object is arranged at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign substance (the coin-shaped foreign substance becomes a shadow). That is, the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter can be used as a clue to make it easier to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320. The possibility of continuing to remain in the member 8320 can be reduced. It should be noted that this effect is the same not only when viewed through the first through hole 8326a but also when viewed through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through hole 8326b is configured as a through hole capable of discharging coin-shaped foreign matter that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left and right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size capable of discharging the largest possible coin-shaped foreign substance (for example, a 500-yen coin). The width in the normal direction of is about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the left-right center of the bottom plate portion 321, even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy to Can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing through the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be utilized for discharging outwardly.

  The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310, It is formed as a through hole that can be removed in the upright state (posture).

  That is, the length in the lengthwise direction of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed in such a size that coin-shaped foreign matter can be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the lateral width is formed to be about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw that is vertically inserted. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the cover cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

  The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4 ).

  Therefore, even in the unlikely event that the coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353, the operation can be easily performed. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, by preparing a replacement for the normal operation device 8300, it is possible to quickly replace the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is sandwiched with the normal operation device 8300.

  As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped because a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the normal operation is not performed, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment does not receive the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner that the load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 which is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line in FIG. 86. Note that, in FIG. 204(a), a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 is shown (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is shown as the inner frame 12. Is shown closed. Also, the shape of the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(a) and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (a plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12. A front-rear displacement member 2652 which is disposed so as to be able to contact the lower end of the up-down displacement member 2651 and is supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652, and a front-back displacement The front side of the front-rear displacing member 2652 that abuts on the support portion 2654 that is a portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from the top and bottom at two front and rear positions so that it can be displaced, and that is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. And a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward

  The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which the vertical displacement member 2651 is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface supporting device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position shown in FIG. 204(b) (position displaced upward from the lower position), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is slightly spaced apart from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. Is set.

  The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655 (see FIG. 204(a)) and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. And a rear position (see FIG. 204(b)).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and is inclined downward toward the tip side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front/rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in a front position to a vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front/rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in a rear position. , An inclined surface that is continuously connected.

  The inclined surface 2652a has a tilt angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a lower position in the front position of the front-back displacement member 2652 and the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a rear position of the front-back displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

  This makes it possible to increase the load applied to the game board 13 from the back side by the rotating claw member 640, and facilitates maintaining the state where the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate 621d of the pre-rotation claw member 620. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board surface supporting device 600 according to the eighth embodiment and the board surface supporting device 600 according to the present embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. At the time of fixing, the board surface supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and presses and fixes it to the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, so that the torsion spring NBb has a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than that of the spring employed in the eighth embodiment. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600 can be reduced, and is required when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface supporting device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force to be satisfied, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selection by the operator and the workability.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment, the harness HN1 to HN3 is crawled above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegality of melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire and intruding into the interior as it is, and the harness HN1 to HN3 is heated. The case of detecting burning by a piano wire that has been burned and trying to detect fraud early has been described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by a heated piano wire, The heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are prevented from burning.

  FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 205B illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. 205C illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is returned to the tensile shape (stored shape) by heat application. To be done. Further, in FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally seen at the front-rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  The fraud detection device 2280 includes a main body box portion 2281 that is formed in a box shape with the rear surface side and the lower surface side opened and is stacked above the reverse cup portion 2178, and the rear surface side so as to cover the rear surface side opening of the main body box portion 2281. And a back cover member 2282 attached from the main body box part 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and extends from the lower right corner portion and extends toward the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the inverted cup portion 2178. The extension portion 2283 and the opening are narrowed upward from the lower corner portion. A narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 protruding upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284, and a recessed portion from the rear side in the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. The first conducting portion 2286, which is housed in the concave portion and has one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a concave portion that is recessed from the back side, one end projects outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conducting portion 2286. The second conducting portion 2287 formed to have a contactable length, the torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conducting portion 2287 against the first conducting portion 2286, and the protruding portion that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284. The shape memory spring 2288 is provided below the second conducting portion 2287 while being supported by the portion 2285.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287, one end of each wiring is connected to a portion protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main controller. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released from the state where the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205(b)) (see FIG. 205( As a result, the conduction is cut off, and the disconnection is controlled so that an error signal is output.

  When an error signal is output from the main control device, an alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120) at a high volume, the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. Then, the game is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

  Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205(a) to 205(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left cup portion and the upper portion of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, as compared with the eighth embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the elongated cup member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire will still cover the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further, reaches the shape memory spring 2288 which is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 and arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. Be guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, has a characteristic of maintaining a shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and returning to a shape stored in advance by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to a temperature about the melting point of the inverse cup portion 2178 (about 80°), and the tension shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conducting portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2286. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud early.

  The extended portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back lid member 2282 in the longitudinally elongated shape in the front-rear direction, and is extended to the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tensioned state, the worker pushes the extending portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the state (see FIG. 205(b)). ) Can be returned to again. That is, even after fraud is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of fraud.

  Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, when the light guide member 540 is curved to form a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted to both sides, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform. However, the right panel unit 2500 according to the sixteenth embodiment includes the recessed portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave shape that is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C shows a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. 206D is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrated, and FIG. 206D schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543d that is provided in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVId of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) is a schematic view of the light guide member 2540 showing an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially expanded perspective view. Note that the support plate portion 510 is not shown in FIG. 206(a).

  As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically and vertically in line with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  Where the concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is defined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530, a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a lower and inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between the area CCVId arranged on the side and the area CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the region CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ parts is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface arranged on the lower side and a front surface side (the opposite side to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear surface side. The convex portion used for is formed.

  Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is It is difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

  As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the region CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ parts is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side, and the heat press is performed. The convex portion used for is formed.

  Here, the plane on the upper side is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the plane on the front side is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Therefore, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is located at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction inclined downward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

  As shown in FIG. 206(d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d which is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts is formed. The downward recessed portion 2543d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex portion used for is formed.

  Here, the plane on the upper side is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the plane on the front side is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Therefore, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is located at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, the emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined downward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

  As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e that is concavely formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape in which a sphere is divided into ⅛ is formed. The upward recessed portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and the curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. The convex portion used for is formed.

  Here, the plane on the upper side is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the plane on the front side is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Therefore, the light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is located at this position. It is difficult to reflect in the left and right directions. Therefore, when the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light exclusively in the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, the emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG. 206(a).

  In addition, the concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (inclination angle to the bottom surface is 45° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately 45°). 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly vertically refracted and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made That is, since the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to make a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof, so that the light emission effect is produced while suppressing the right and left width of the right panel unit 2500. The effect can be improved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat has been described, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower plate unit 6400 is improved. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  207 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that, in the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure respectively indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010.

  As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 10300 in which the swinging device member 10310 is arranged in an upward position in FIG. 207, and a front surface arranged below the operation device 10300. The lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, the left and right portions of the front frame 10014, and the horizontal rendering device 6700 that mainly performs the light emission effect, and the upper portion of the front frame 10014 that mainly emits the light emission effect. An upper effect device 6500 that executes an audio effect is mainly provided.

  In addition, the above-mentioned glass unit 16 is arranged in an area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16 as described above. It is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid making the drawing complicated, in FIG. 207, illustration of the state of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted, and in FIG. 208, illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is shown. It is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) is visible from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

  FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that, in FIG. 209, a directional view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300 (a radial direction view of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operation device 10300) is illustrated. It

  The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 that are formed in a thin plate shape and have flexibility such that they can be flexibly deformed. As shown in FIG. 209, the accommodating recess 17a is formed as a recess having a substantially symmetrical shape in which the degree of depression toward the back side increases toward the center of the left and right, and the left and right center of the accommodating recess 17a and the operating device. It is arranged so that the center of the left and right of 10300 coincides.

  The rear side end portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the back side as it gets closer to the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014a) side of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the center in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmission during operation of the operating device 10300 is likely to be large, the vertical position of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-rear position from the metal body 10014a to the fitting position. Thus, it is possible to suppress the operation device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

  On the other hand, at the left and right positions (positions left and right from the center) where the amount of load transmission during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, even if the front and rear positions from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened, the operation is performed. Since there is no hindrance to the effect of suppressing the vertical displacement of the device 10300, and by disposing the fitting position in this manner, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body 10014a. It is possible to secure a wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17, the frame buttons 22, and the like.

  FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that FIG. 210 illustrates a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11 around the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19.

  The front frame 10014 includes a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the hinge 19. The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 by removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19. Since the configurations to be newly described are respectively arranged in the front frame 10014, the description will be given below by focusing on the front frame 10014.

  FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that FIGS. 211 and 212 show a state in which the lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014.

  The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body 10014a configured integrally with the front door mounting bracket 58. The lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 include the metal main body 10014a. It is fastened and fixed to. That is, the lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 each include a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens to the metal body 10014a side (back side), and the metal body 10014a has a fastening portion. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to. The lower plate unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting a fastening member (male screw) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a and screwing and fastening the fastening portion.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 holds the operating device 10300 from the upper rear of the operating device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the lower front of the operating device 10300. Hereinafter, the configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

  FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower plate unit 6400 are omitted. Further, in FIG. 213, the operating device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a, and is shown in a directional view from the back side, and the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L are provided for easy understanding. The assembly direction line that connects the fastening point is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  When assembling the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 has a plate shape protruding in a plate shape on the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts on the upper surface of the convex portion T10 so as to ride over it.

  A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged below the operation device 10300. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting concave portion De1 (see FIG. 212) formed to be open to the front side, and a concave portion De2 whose opposite side (lower side) to the inner case member 10330 side and the rear side are opened. Prepare

  The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear and is open downward, and is formed in a size that can fit into the plate-shaped protrusion T10, that is, the recessed portion De2 and the plate-shaped protrusion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. Further, since the plate-shaped convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the rigidity of the plate-shaped convex portion T10 can maintain the vertical position of the operation device 10300. The fitting here means that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of a gap.

  At the tip of the plate-shaped convex portion T10, a pair of left and right columnar projecting portions projecting in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a fastening screw can be screwed at an intermediate position between the pair of columnar projecting portions. A female screw hole is formed.

  The pair of columnar protrusions are inserted into the recesses formed in the corresponding wall portions (front side wall portions) of the recessed portions De2 to align the plate-shaped protrusion T10 with the bottom member De. The fastening screw screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole formed at a corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and the fastening screw is tightened to form the plate-shaped convex portion T10. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

  As described above, while the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-shaped protrusion T10, the opposite front half (see FIG. 215(a)) supports the plate-shaped support. The portion 6426 is disposed above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is vertically opposed to the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be able to contact the resin member 6427.

  It should be noted that the abuttable state here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operating device 10300 may be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be separated from each other while a load is applied to the operating device 10300. A mode in which the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De contact each other when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by performing a vibration effect may be used.

  After the operating device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by fastening a fastening screw inserted into the front frame 10014 from the back side.

  That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 is provided so as to cover a plurality of (three places in the present embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein and one of the fastening portions 10333. And a metal plate portion 10334 which is capable of receiving a compressive force when the fastening and fixing are performed.

  The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a that is formed in the metal body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows the fastening screw to pass therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is arranged on the front side of the metal main body 10014a, but by forming a through hole in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, the fastening portion 10333 is passed through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body 10014a.

  Here, in the periphery of the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of this through hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is provided on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

  Accordingly, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a as the operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014. That is, the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected to each other, so that the metal plate portion 10334 can have the same role as a so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

  Further, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 between them, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a washer function. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal body 10014a.

  The shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of forming the through hole, a pair of claws that straddle the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed to be displaced in the front-rear direction, the function of a spring washer can be provided, and the fastening strength can be increased.

  The places where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the parts necessary for fastening on the back side, the degree of freedom in design on the front side can be improved, and the designability can be improved.

  On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem because the operating device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operating device 10300 in the direction of depression (downward). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the subsidence displacement of the operating device 10300 on the front side while concentrating the fastening points on the rear side. This will be described below in order.

  First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower side of the front surface fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the front side portion of the operating device 10300 is restricted from moving in the vertical direction by the fitting portion 6426d, and the subsidence displacement is suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include a plate-shaped protruding portion on the rear side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the rear side of the swing operation member 10310.

  That is, the left front cover 10321 has a plate-shaped projecting portion 10321c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion, and a plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d that further projects from the plate-shaped projecting portion 10321c. Mainly equipped with.

  Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-shaped projecting portion 10322c that projects in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion. The right front cover 10322 does not have a portion corresponding to the partial protrusion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-shaped protrusion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

  The plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c and the partial projecting portion 10321d are configured as portions that are inserted into and fitted into the accommodation recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge overhanging portion 10017b whose lower edge extends to the front side with a substantially equal overhang width across the left and right of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left and right sides of the accommodation recess 17a. On both sides, below the lower edge overhang portion 10017b, at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-like overhang portions 10321c, 10322c, the lower edge overhang portion 10017b is arranged to face the lower edge overhang portion 10017b. A plurality of opposed overhanging parts 10017c forming a groove between the lower edge overhanging part 10017b and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d formed in the front-rear direction as long holes whose upper sides are the surface positions of the lower edge overhanging part 10017b. And an escape hole 10017e formed in the front-rear direction at a position laterally aligned with the right facing overhanging portion 10017c.

  When assembling the operation device 10300 into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c, so that the plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d. Are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recess 17a.

  In this case, the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are fitted into the groove between the lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the facing projecting portion 10017c, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are displaced in the vertical direction. Is suppressed.

  In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be suppressed from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Further, the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that is open on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated in the inside of the arch by abutting on the surface, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated. Can be restrained from displacing in the left-right direction or the back side direction.

  With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is set to the upward position, and the displacement of the operation device 10300 when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310 is suppressed. (It can be returned to its original position early).

  Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is operated mainly by the left hand. However, in a general game posture (a posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the pachinko machine 10010 is centered in the left and right direction. When operating the operating device 10300 arranged, the left hand is extended obliquely to the front right, so that the load during the operation rarely has a left-right component.

  For this reason, a backward load is applied to the swinging operation member 10310, and at the same time, a leftward and rightward load is applied, so that the operating device 10300 may be displaced in the rearward and leftward and rightward directions.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped portion of the housing recess 17a and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged between them, when the operation device 10300 is displaced. The possible restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is generated in the left-right direction and the front-back direction in the direction of returning the operation device 10300 to the original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be restored early.

  From each of the above configurations, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the housing recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating device 10300 with respect to the housing recess 17a.

  The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole into which a later-described fixed assembly portion 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be arranged at a position projecting outward from the plate-shaped projecting portion 10321c.

  Next, the operation device 10300 and its surroundings will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operating device 10300 will be described. 215(a), 215(b), 216(a), and 216(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 taken along the line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207.

  FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged at the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and in FIGS. 215(b), 216(a) and 216(b). The state in which the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position (the pushing-down position in this embodiment) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft in which a lever member 10340 that pivotally supports the swing operation member 10310 by a shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is centered on the displacement along with the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on an arc locus around the lever support shaft 10331d1. The displacement in the rotational direction is combined with the displacement, and the displacement is generated by the operation of the player.

  That is, by grasping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load to the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement about the shaft support rod 10363. (Pushing operation).

  Further, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load downward to the front side, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a mode of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. It is possible (pushing down operation).

  When the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation is performed by the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of applying a load to the swinging operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b). The member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (post-rotation posture, a posture rotated backward from the initial position by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340). Therefore, since the angle of the posture change of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. ..

  Further, when the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 that is displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 (push operation) in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 10310 swings due to the load during the operation. The operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support rod 10363 and is displaced in a manner of falling forward, whereby the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 can be changed to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216(b)).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to apply loads for operation from a plurality of directions, and if the load mode is different, the displacement mode of the swing operation member 10310 is also changed. It can be configured differently.

  The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by the drive motor about the lever support shaft 10331d1. As a result, even if the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down and disposed at the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

  A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is arranged at the tip of the lever member 10340. The vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is directly or indirectly abutted on the lens member 10317. Configured to be transmitted.

  The vibration device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a bobbin member (arranged on the lever member 10340 side) that is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound. Member), a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member, and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged in a disc-shaped plate. A pressing member (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side) to be connected is mainly provided. The inner surface of the pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction.

  The vibrating device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along the direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the shaft support rod 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the displacement direction of the lens member 10317.

  Thereby, the lens member 10317 can be vibrated (displaced) by maximally utilizing the vibration energy of the vibrating device 10366, and the effect produced by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

  Next, the details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be sequentially described. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of operating device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of operating device 10300.

  As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are provided behind the swinging operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved at the outer ends (ends on the opposite side of the swing operation member 10310), and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. It As a result, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that a movable range of the swinging operation member 10310 can be secured and the player can grip the swinging operation member 10310. You can secure a space for your fingers.

  Further, since the bending of the end portion is formed in a series so as to surround the swinging operation member 10310, the designability can be improved, and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be generated as a whole. It is possible to widen the allowable width of deformation of the curved portion.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L formed in the front-rear direction so that the fastening screws that are fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted. And a fixing assembly portion 6802 for fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 inseparably from the inner case member 10330 with a fastening screw.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a by insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. The left and right ends are the most distant locations from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly in the direction passing through the center in the left-right direction and along the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws that are inserted into the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed in the housing recess 17a.

  The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the formation position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 is the center of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction ( The plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are located on the right side of the rear surface). That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left-right center, but the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left-right center. Stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider area than the right front cover 10322.

  In the present embodiment, the boundary between the rear sides of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (book) is provided in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a. In the embodiment, since the alignment with the accommodation recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), the assembling can be facilitated as compared with the case where the alignment is performed with both members.

  Further, by displacing the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300. Here, the swinging operation member 10310 as a place operated by the player may be arranged in close proximity to the positions on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (particularly in the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Since it is a place, the fastening screw may be loosened due to transmission of a load when the operation device 10300 is operated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is arranged so as to be displaced to the left and right from the left-right center where the load during operation becomes maximum, so that the transmitted load can be reduced compared to the load during operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802.

  In this way, by shifting the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right and by similarly displacing the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved and the loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented. It can be made difficult to occur.

  Note that both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 at the fixed assembly portion 6802. That is, in the fixed assembly portion 6802, the fastening screw inserted in the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

  However, with respect to the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion thereof is formed. The fixed assembly portion 6802 is sandwiched between both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330, the fastening positions formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced.

  Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a large number of fastening points, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 difficult to bend and may be easily damaged.

  On the other hand, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be made thin in order to make it easy to bend while maintaining the fastening position, but in this case, durability may be deteriorated and fraud may be caused. There is a risk that

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by reducing the fastening points, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

  219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured so as to be disassembled into the left and the right in an integrated state with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively.

  221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is fastened to the left cover member 10323, the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point in the front-rear direction (adjustment elongated holes 10323a, 10324a). To be done.

  Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is movable relative to the left cover member 10323, and the right front cover 10322 is movable relative to the right cover member 10324. It is possible to easily adjust the assembly position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This will be described below.

  The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. A left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the left-right direction.

  The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with adjusting elongated holes 10323a and 10324a which are formed in the front and rear direction and extend in the left and right direction at the outer upper end portion.

  The adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the left-right position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and also fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is provided with a fitting recess 10322a recessed in the right direction from an end surface of the right front cover 10322 that abuts the left front cover 10321, and the fitting recess 10322a is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction. In the state where the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), the wall member 10322b mounted in an aspect is provided, and the movement to the left is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 10321. The member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

  With such a configuration, when the wall member 10322b is replaced, the wall member 10322b can be replaced by only removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b is a load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215)). Is a place to receive repeatedly). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  First, the procedure of the assembling work will be described. The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (corresponding to shifting from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). , The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

  Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10322 are purposely corrected when the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is corrected. It is necessary to loosen the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shift the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to make a correction.

  Further, in consideration of this, when the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330 but are weakly fastened and fixed to determine the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 After the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 (the upstream side of the assembly procedure), which causes a return of the work procedure. However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the work.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be attached to the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, position adjustment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be performed. Therefore, the assembling work can be simplified.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 respectively include the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R whose front edge portions are arranged to face each other. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing a gap formed between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and a piano wire is inserted into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. The gap between the guide portion 10344a and the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small as a countermeasure against an attempted fraudulent act or a mischievous act of pouring a liquid (in the present embodiment, a clearance of 0.3 mm is designed).

  On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a shifts due to the influence of a load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion when the operation device 10300 operates. The 6803L and 6803R may rub against each other to generate resin shavings. The resin shavings have little effect when they are small, but if a large amount of resin shavings are clogged in the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler type, the shavings may block light and cause erroneous detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in selecting a switch that can be adopted is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixed assembly portion 6802 as the fastening portion of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is located at the left and right center position (the place where the load during operation and the load during operation occur at maximum). Since they are arranged at positions left and right from, the impact and load transmitted to the fastening location can be reduced, and the loosening of the fastening screw can be made less likely to occur.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a from deviating, prevent the generation of resin shavings, and prevent erroneous detection. In this embodiment, the photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

  The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation in the backward rotation direction of the swinging operation member 10310, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

  Then, when the pushing operation in the backward direction is performed on the swing operation member 10310, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded, so it is determined that the pushing operation is performed. be able to. In this embodiment, since neither the detection switch FC nor the metal plate MB is loaded, it is possible to improve durability as compared with the case where a load is applied.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side of the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and a fan-shaped front view below the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. Mainly includes lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R that are continuously formed as the plate portions.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have curved surfaces (that is, the lever support shafts 10331d1 (see FIG. 215) that can be brought into contact with the curved surfaces of the front cover upper side of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 at their rear surfaces. (Refer to FIG. 4) as a center and has a central angle of about 90 degrees).

  The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R each include a protruding interference portion 6805a that protrudes from the rear surface to the rear surface. The protruding interference portion 6805a is disposed slightly inside the inner edge portion Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and is a front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. Is formed so as to project to the back side.

  As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a is displaced to the left and right outside by the inner edge portion when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220). Regulated by Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, and thus it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being disassembled in a manner of separating from each other.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and expand toward the outer side in front view, and the ends of the expansion are curved toward the front side. Equipped with curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

  The left front cover 10321 is provided with fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L that are formed in the right end portion so that fastening screws can be screwed in and that are arranged in plural vertically. Further, the right front cover 10322 includes a plurality of insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, 6808R that are vertically arranged at the left end portion and are formed so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough.

  The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by the plurality of fastening portions and the insertion holes that are distributed in the vertical direction (the direction along the operating direction of the operating device 10300). This makes it possible to disperse the load and shock associated with the operation of the operation device 10300 to the respective fastening portions, and suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the positional deviation from occurring at the position of the break between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, a design portion that is easily visible to the player (particularly easily visible in front view) It is possible to prevent the performance of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R (see FIG. 207) from decreasing. The fastening portion and the insertion hole have different roles. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

  The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that the insertion hole H23a that is bored in the left-right direction is sandwiched in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and the inner case member 10330 is sandwiched and fixed by a fastening screw. .. Note that, instead of the so-called "co-fastening" mode, the tip of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner of abutting the left surface of the plate portion in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. .. In other words, the fastening does not cause a compressive load on the portion of the insertion hole H23a that is formed.

  In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even when the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to a load applied to the operation device 10300, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can independently operate within the above-described gap range. Therefore, when the minute displacement that can occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be prevented from being similarly displaced.

  In addition, the extension length of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compressive load is applied to the portion of the insertion hole H23a formed at the time of fastening. .. In this case, the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, so that the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be prevented from loosening.

  The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole H23b formed in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by inserting the fastening screw. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portions 6807L and the insertion holes H23b.

  The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole into which a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a that is formed so as to be screwed in the left-right direction in a portion protruding to the front side of the inner case member 10330 is inserted. The right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portions T23b and the fastening holes 6807R.

  The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In this embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed only to the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the formation direction of the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, but at each location, the target combination to be fastened is determined. It is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so that the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure will be described below.

  First, if either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and is fastened and fixed at one place, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

  In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw in the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening and fixing the fastening screw in the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

  Next, if the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened and fixed at one location, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. it can.

  After that, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing a fastening screw in the fixing assembly portion 6802 and fastening and fixing. In addition, by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R and fastening and fixing, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other.

  In this way, by forming a portion for fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to each other, as compared with a case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, all fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left in the fastening operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fastening screws are inserted in the left and right directions, the fastening work can be made more efficient.

  Further, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L are unified in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. In the operation device 10300, since the operation direction of each operation unit is along a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the operation unit of the operation device 10300. Is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of. That is, when a load or impact during operation occurs along the operation direction, the component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being loosened due to a load or a shock when the operation device 10300 is operated.

  In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (including a part that is operated by an operation. For example, the swing operation member 10310, the lens member 10317, the lever member 10340, etc.), but all the operation parts are the levers. Since it is designed to operate in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

  On the other hand, when the operation portion does not move on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation portion that pushes in the left and right diagonal directions), A direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) found as the balance (average) of the operation directions may be set as the fastening direction, or an operation portion having a high frequency of operation instructions may be targeted (operation instructions rarely occur. It is also possible to set the fastening direction by ignoring the operation part that is only performed.

  223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap for disposing the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. And a portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed, the upper and lower surfaces are in contact with each other on a plurality of surfaces that are arranged to face each other.

  In the contacting portion, a plate-shaped portion is extended from the left front cover 10321 to the right side on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface thereof (see FIG. 223(a)).

  Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 6803R is restricted from being displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

  In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L (see FIG. 218), the lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is housed, and the lever member 10340 are driven. It is possible to prevent the liquid from touching the drive motor, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or a gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electric system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor.

  In addition, the cuts of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the left and right center of the swing operation member 10310, while the cuts (coupling surfaces) of the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330 are the swing operation members. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the breaks between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is arranged closer to the left side with respect to the left-right center of the inner case member 10330 (in the bulging portion from the inner case member 10330 to the left). Correspondingly, see FIG. 218), even if the lower part between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that part can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330, It is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

  Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb that extends rightward along the back surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from the rear by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

  The liquid which has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-shaped support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234), and when a larger amount of liquid continues to pass, the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the lower plate. There is a possibility that it may flow between the main body box portions 6421 of the forming member 6420, flow toward the through hole 6412, or flow along the recessed shape portion 6414. In particular, when the liquid flows downward from the through hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, which may hit the player or wet the thousand boxes.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, since the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, it is easy to prevent the passage of the liquid by sandwiching it without any gap. As in the embodiment, by suppressing the passage of the liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will hit the player or wet the thousand boxes. It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably.

  As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are streaked in a state of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The strip-shaped portion D23 is formed. The streak portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface because of its formation mode.

  The streak portion D23 has a role as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R. That is, as compared with the case where it is formed as a thin mere plate, the rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is maintained while maintaining (or decreasing) the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23. Improve (anisotropic). This will be described by taking the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

  The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and have a role of filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be able to be displaced downward by a slight amount due to a load or an impact during the operation in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during the operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of making the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodating recess 17a is configured to be displaceable.

  That is, when the operation device 10300 is operated, a gap may be formed between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended (elastically deformed or bent) in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodation recess 17a, and the gap Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the streak portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly oriented) in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed. Since it is made large (since the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration when the shape is restored and the excessive deformation. As described above, the design of the streak portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for the purpose of taking measures against a defect that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

  Since the streak portion D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied at the center, both left and right sides endure upward (a pulling force is generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied when operating the operation device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

  On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the streak portion D23, the load that is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side is generated due to the deformation that is allowed due to the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

  The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided with end streak portions D24 that are formed in a streak shape in a state of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The streak portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and a convex portion on the rear surface because of its formation mode.

  The end streak portion D24 mainly includes a left and right streak portion D24a formed on the left and right sides and a central streak portion D24b formed on the center side, and is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

  The left and right streak portions D24a are streak portions arranged above the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side), and are formed in a shape that descends and slopes toward the rear side. This descending inclination corresponds to the load direction such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swinging operation member 10310 (along the load direction). That is, by increasing the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R by the left and right muscle portions D24a in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operation load.

  In addition, as for the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the inclination angle with respect to the left and right sides is gradually increased with respect to the longitudinal direction as compared with the inclination angle with respect to the left and right center side. That is, the streak portion extends in a plurality of directions. This makes it possible to improve the resistance force of the lens member 10317 against a load when operating the lens member 10317 regardless of the position of the swinging operation member 10310.

  In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right streak portions D24a are formed is shorter on the left and right sides than on the left and right sides. That is, since the forming width is made shorter on the side (left and right side) whose inclination with respect to the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R becomes smaller and the resistance becomes larger. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction with a large inclination with respect to the front-rear direction as the direction in which the load during operation tends to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

  On the other hand, the central streak portion D24b is a streak portion disposed below the position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that is inclined upward toward the back side. Formed from. This rising inclination corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operating device 10300 tilts forward.

  That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is improved by the central streak portion D24b in the direction of the central streak portion D24b, so that the load during the tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (the inside of the operation device 10300 It is possible to improve the resistance against the case member 10330) being tilted forward and displaced.

  In addition, the central streak portion D24b is formed with a total of seven pieces, one at the center and three on the left and right sides, and the left and right central streak portions D24b incline toward the left and right sides toward the rear side. As a result, when the operating device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 of the operating device) is tilted forward and displaced by the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if displacement occurs in the left-right direction, It is possible to improve resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction).

  The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, especially in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, compared with the vertical bending (deformation expanding and contracting in the vertical direction), the lateral bending (deformation expanding and contracting in the left and right directions) is less. It becomes a big bend.

  Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower plate unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edge portion of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge portion). When the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are deformed in a manner in which the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are displaced downward, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed by bending the upper and lower intermediate portions and the upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R in the left and right directions. It is possible to release the load (stress) applied to (the stress concentration can be avoided).

  Even in the case of being flexibly deformed in this way, the lower edge overhanging portion is formed so that the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c continuously formed from the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. The left front cover 10321 is supported between the 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed in the front-rear direction toward the left and right sides. Also, it is possible to prevent a gap from being easily formed between the right front cover 10322 and the housing recess 17a.

  Further, since the bending easiness of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is made different depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operating device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operating device 10300 on the downstream side (V-shaped design member). 6450, see FIG. 232), the ease of transmission can be changed by the direction of vibration or load.

  That is, it is possible to easily transmit the vibration along the vertical direction and the operation load to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while the vibration and the operation in the horizontal direction. A load (for example, a load generated when a hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when the ball is transferred from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50. It can be hard to do. This prevents vibration or load from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50 even if the player unintentionally applies a load to the swinging operation member 10310, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. it can.

  Further, connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. It is inserted between the lower edge overhang 10017b and the opposite overhang 10017c (see FIG. 214).

  Here, in the comparison between the shapes of the plate-shaped overhang portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge overhang portion 10017b and the opposite overhang portion 10017c, when the left and right end portions are displaced in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like. (For example, when the front-side upper end portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-shaped protruding portions 10321c and 10322c are loosely curved (the left and right end portions are displaced to the rear side). It is preferable that the molding error can be dealt with by deforming the above.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the streak portions D23 are formed on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R along the vertical direction, the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is higher than the vertical rigidity. Will be lowered. Therefore, when the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the curvature becomes loose, the deformation of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. The deformation width of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be dealt with can be increased.

  In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (weakens) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the forming direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

  From these things, due to the streak portion D23, a defect that can occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled (same as when the operation device 10300 is assembled, see FIG. 213) and a defect that can occur when the operation device 10300 is operated. Both can be accommodated.

  It returns to FIG. 212 and demonstrates. In the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped flat plate portion (a plate-shaped portion in which the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) along the metal main body 10014a on the lower left front surface of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014. And a plate-shaped upper plate portion extending toward the front side so as to be bent and formed at an upper end portion configured to be inclined downward toward the right in the upper portion of the flat plate portion. The rear cover portion 10014b formed of a resin material is provided in this mode. That is, the back cover 10014b is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow LR.

  The back cover portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is brought into contact with (joined to) the flat plate portion at its rear end portion, and is brought into contact with (joined to) the upper plate portion at its right end portion. In the region (space) formed in this way on the side where the lower plate 50 and the back cover 10014b face each other, balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, etc. are stored. Will be. Next, the details of the lower plate unit 6400 forming the lower plate 50 will be described.

  FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that, in FIG. 225, each part of the lower plate unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle looking up from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower plate unit 6400 is a cover member that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a in a manner of covering the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212). A base plate 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted to the covering base member 6410 from the upper side to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device that is attached to the covering base member 6410 from the lower side. A ball discharging device 6430 that is fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420 and one that is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that allows the lower tray forming member 6420 to be prevented from coming off from the back side at the left end portion of the covering base member 6410. On the opposite side (rear side), an intermediate holding member 6440 fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and a V formed from a resin material in a V shape when viewed from the front are disposed on the upper front side of the covering base member 6410. The character design member 6450 is mainly provided.

  The covering base member 6410 includes a main body portion 6411 whose lower bottom surface is formed into a substantially flat shape and which is formed into a substantially box shape with its rear surface and upper surface open, and a slightly skeleton portion at the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411. A through hole 6412 that is formed through the remaining portion, a protruding shape portion 6413 that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the center side in the left-right direction of the main body portion 6411 with reference to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion On the back side of the installed shape portion 6413, a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the plate thickness of the protruding shape portion 6413 is substantially the same as the other portion of the main body portion 6411 is mainly provided.

  By forming the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at a position for holding the operation device 10300 from below, and details thereof will be described later.

  The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50 described later, and is formed to be much larger than the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball removing lever 52.

  In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the discharging speed of the balls from the lower plate 50 corresponds to the game performance realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. It can correspond to the discharging speed of the spheres.

  That is, the discharging speed of the balls from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom surface opening 6432. For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as the size of the bottom surface opening 6432, the discharging speed of the balls is changed. It cannot be made larger than that. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom surface opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom surface opening 6432 is changed within the range not exceeding the through hole 6412 ( By changing the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430), it is possible to change the discharging speed (discharging mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the balls can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower plate unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

  The demand for changing the discharge speed of the balls is not limited to the case where the game property of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in a game store, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode in which it is necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes, and in a mode in which it is not necessary to transfer payout balls to a thousand boxes (so-called “personal”). In case of) there is.

  When it is necessary to transfer the payout balls to the 1,000-carton box, if the balls are ejected at high speed, the balls may overflow from the 1000-carton box frequently, so the ball ejection is designed to be slower than the specified speed. It is desirable to be done.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface port 6432 is formed from a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison of the opening area and the shape of a sphere (spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The maximum number of spheres that can be ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about 7.

  On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the payout balls to the 1000-box, there is no concern about the balls overflowing from the 1000-box, so the upper limit of the desired discharging speed of the balls changes greatly in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the dispensed balls will flow into the automatic counters provided in the respective pachinko machines 10010, so that an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed is built in the automatic counters. The operating speed of the ball-sink device is illustrated.

  As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharging speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but the strength of the main body portion 6411 may be reduced. There is. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a portion to which a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted. However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to such an extent that it can withstand.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a mode that compensates for the strength reduction due to the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened to each other in such a manner that the covering base member 6410 is sandwiched from above and below with the line illustrated by the imaginary line in FIGS. 224 and 225 as the fastening direction. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Accordingly, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the left and right long frame portions located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced by the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 come into contact with each other from before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened (the state in which they are arranged at the fastening preparation position). (Refer to FIG. 233), there is a gap between each other before fastening, but it is also possible to adopt a design mode in which the gap can be filled and pressure can be applied by tightening the fastening screw.

  Further, the pressed portion does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, particularly in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion in the vicinity of the projecting shape portion 6413) or in the back side portion (the long plate portion arranged behind the through hole 6412) that may be impacted each time it is opened and closed. However, since a large load is likely to occur, it is preferable to adopt a design mode in which it is pressed down.

  In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower dish forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, it is possible to sufficiently secure the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, so that the bottom surface opening 6432 is formed. The bottom surface opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to the above. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom surface opening 6432 can be improved.

  The lower plate forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the bottom side of the bottom surface of 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom, and a ball discharging device 6430 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 into which fastening screws for fastening are fastened, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421. Mainly includes a plate-shaped support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end portion and a flexible resin member 6427 mounted on the upper surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position which is a front end portion and a right end portion of the lower plate 50. The upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface that descends and inclines toward the discharge port 6422, and when the balls that have flowed into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the discharge port 6422, Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, even if the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50.

  The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 where the load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur, and the influence of strength reduction due to the formation of the through hole is considered. We are taking measures to prevent this, but details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different projecting lengths in the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be substantially flat, while the lower tray 50 is formed such that the lower bottom surface of the lower tray portion is inclined downward toward the right. In order to make contact with the upper surface of the edge portion of 6412), it is necessary to shorten the protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 toward the right side, which corresponds to this. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (abutting by line contact or surface contact). ).

  Two fastening portions 6424 are formed at the front end portion where a load from the player is likely to occur, and one location at the rear end portion where a load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing the fastening location at a location where a load is likely to occur, the fastening location can be limited, but it is possible to prevent the fixation from deviating when a load occurs and causing the displacement of the lower plate forming member 6420. ..

  Further, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the fastening portion 6424 is fastened inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw through the main body portion 6411 is different). It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge portion of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (while facilitating to maintain the relative position) while performing the fastening without being formed in (4). Can be done). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower dish forming member 6420 while eliminating the need for forming through holes other than the through holes 6412.

  The guide rib 6425 is used both for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball removing lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is considered that the bottom portion of the lower plate 50 is formed of a plate shape that is long in the left and right, and reinforcement along the left and right direction is required. Since it slides along the left-right direction coinciding with, the guide for the movement of the ball pulling lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

  Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in a pair as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Further, even if one is damaged, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so that the service life of the lower plate unit 6400 can be extended.

  The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, may be made of silicone, or may be another flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

  The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the above-mentioned ball removal lever 52 is disposed, a circular bottom face opening 6432 vertically penetrating the main body plate portion 6431, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 arranged at positions vertically overlapping the fastening portion 6424 of the 6420 and fastened by fastening screws into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the fastening holes 6433, and its frame And a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

  The ball pull-out lever 52 is a grip portion 52a that is projected forward so that the player can operate it in a manner of sliding left and right, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). And a guided rib 52c that is a pair of rib-like portions that protrude upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extend along the left-right direction and that are guided by the guide ribs 6425. Are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

  The bottom surface port 6432 is arranged vertically opposite to the discharge port 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball pulling lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, since the ball-pulling lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432 when not in operation, the degree to which the strength is lowered by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300. It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being deteriorated while adopting the (arrangement) configuration.

  Details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 is provided with a flange portion 6431a that extends outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (plane side and left and right sides) except the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is internally fitted in the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap, and when the ball discharging device 6430 is fitted in the through hole 6412 as it is, the flange is formed. The portion 6431a contacts the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

  On the other hand, the inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape capable of abutting in the front-rear, left-right direction from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is As described above, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 abuts in the vertical direction.

  As described above, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower dish forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430. Fastening is performed after the positions of the respective components are aligned. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening. Therefore, the assembly work can be facilitated.

  The intermediate holding member 6440 has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side, which is a portion through which a fastening screw fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and a metal main body 10014a (see FIG. 211). In the portion where the screws inserted through the formed through holes are fastened and fixed, and in which a plurality of fastening portions 6442 projecting on the back side and the left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410 interfere with each other in the front-rear direction. And an interference portion 6443 formed in a dovetail plate shape.

  FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 6400. 226 and 227 show a state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from FIGS. 224 and 225.

  The V-shaped design member 6450 has a V-shaped main body portion 6451 which is open on the back side and has a groove shape whose opening width is narrowed toward the center in the left-right direction, and which is arranged downward toward the center in the left-right direction. A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed in the lower edge of the main body portion 6451 as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning portion 6453 formed near the central portion of the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, and left and right sides of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 that are formed near the end portion and are formed so as to be able to be screwed with fastening screws, and a plate shape that extends in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side portion of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side portion of the main body portion 6451 and aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451. Mainly, a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456 that

  The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. This makes it possible to limit the places where a through hole is likely to be formed in order for an unauthorized person to enter an illegal member into the pachinko machine 10010. That is, compared with the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 is provided with a through hole, the case where the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is provided with a through hole has a lower degree of difficulty. The right front cover 10322 can be designed to be emptied.

  Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the places to be checked regularly to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, it is unnecessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the burden of checking can be reduced compared to the case where it is necessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 evenly.

  The main body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and can be flexibly deformed in a direction in which the groove width is narrowed (flexibly deformable in a state of being crushed up and down). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits with the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, vertical displacement that may occur during operation of the operation device 10300 is generated via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexibly deformed in the direction in which the groove width of the groove of the main body portion 6451 is narrowed, whereby at least a part of the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is caused by the flexion of the V-shaped design member 6450. Can be absorbed.

  That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 can be transmitted to the downstream thereof (for example, the covering base member 6410) after operating the V-shaped design member 6450 by deformation. Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, and the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 by operation. Alternatively, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

  The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the left side with respect to the center of the left and right, and a plate-shaped projecting portion that is provided on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L so as to project toward the back side in a plate shape. It mainly comprises 6453R.

  The insertion hole 6452 is a portion fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 is inserted into the recess formed on the front side from the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (in FIG. 226 and FIG. 227, an example of the movement trajectory of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown by an imaginary line).

  Note that at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in the present embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6452) is invisible in the assembly state of the lower plate forming member 6420 when the fastening screw is inserted in the insertion direction (FIG. 230(b)). That is, in the state where the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering base member 6410, the fastening screw inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the covering base member 6410 can be removed from the V-shaped design member. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a pre-stage of disassembling 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450.

  In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in the front-side longitudinally elongated portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction, and the fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted, and the lower right fastening portion 6453L is screwed. The insertion portion 6426c1 is fixed. In addition, operation device 10300 is arranged in such a manner that its insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded in rear view (see FIG. 232).

  Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move it from the position where the insertion portion 6426c1 is shielded. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the inside through the gap formed.

  The plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front vertical elongated portion 6426c of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R.

  Accordingly, for example, even when the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operating device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d. Since and are fitted, the front side portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction with the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the ascending direction.

  Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R, the upward displacement of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed.

  The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws to be inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 are screwed, and the fastening position thereof is The back side (the side closer to the metal body 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

  The right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 have a function as a rib for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and a thin wall shape that allows the body portion 6451 to be flexibly deformed by itself to transmit the displacement to the downstream side by the deformation thereof. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) for suppressing. As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are closer to each other than the right reinforcing ribs 6455. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

  FIG. 228(a) is a schematic sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. Note that in FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b), a cross section in a plane that divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction is illustrated. Although the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are formed to have the same thickness, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body portion 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 228( a ), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-shaped portion that extends from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a connecting portion that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b that is arranged to face the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel and forms a gap, and a mode in which the separation width increases toward the rear side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. And a lower facing portion 6455c facing each other in an inclined manner.

  The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point, and to disperse the load at the front and rear positions. As a result, the withstand load of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and rubbing. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The lower facing portion 6455c has a longer width of separation from the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the rear side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase), so the right side reinforcement It is possible to increase the allowable amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself and to avoid collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 when displacement occurs.

  Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 functions as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the displacement or load transmitted via the right front cover 10322 to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

  In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the downstream side (lower right side) of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322. It is possible to reduce the rate at which the load, displacement, or vibration associated with the operation or drive of the device 10300 is transmitted to the operation handle 51. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

  As shown in FIG. 228( b ), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom portion of the main body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a connecting portion that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b that is arranged in parallel to face the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and a projecting portion 6456c that extends beyond the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to the rear surface side. And a lower facing portion 6456d, which is arranged in parallel to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.

  The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion where the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point, and to disperse the load at the front and rear positions. Thereby, the withstand load of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. Accordingly, the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and can be prevented from colliding with each other and rubbing. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  The overhanging portion 6456c includes an upper edge portion that inclines in a direction away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 (downward) toward the rear surface side. As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is not a portion that is always in contact with the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 but is a portion that is not in contact with the left front cover 10321 for the first time when the downward displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the overhang portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement of the left front cover 10321 when the displacement amount becomes abnormally large.

  Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the same surface position as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, so that the withstand load of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

  The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear cover portion 10014b when the rear cover portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower cover portion of the main body portion 6451. Is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 contact the rear cover portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed and the amount of downward displacement of the rear cover portion 10014b can be reduced. ..

  This makes it possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the rear cover portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower plate 50 (the space where the balls are stored and the player may put his/her hand) It is possible to prevent narrowing.

  That is, the back cover 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back cover 10014b. Can be suppressed. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface forming the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

  As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged in the right reinforcing ribs as compared with the arrangement interval of 6455. Therefore, it is configured to be able to handle a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the balls stored in the upper plate 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the left and right reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged where uneven load is likely to occur on the left and right. It is possible to deal with the uneven load by arranging the above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 have different shapes, so that different types of loads can be accommodated. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to cut off the transmission of the load, so that an instantaneous load or impact via the operation device 10300 is generated. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left side reinforcing rib 6456 supports the load by distributing the load, so that even if the weight is applied for a long time through the upper plate 17, the rear side It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed so as to cope with the load mode which is likely to cause a problem.

  229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right side view of the lower plate unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a lower plate unit. 6 is a left side view of 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 229(a) and FIG. 230(b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is arranged in a manner to straddle the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 to the left and right. The plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed in a state of making surface contact with the upper portion of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, and is arranged apart from the recessed shape portion 6414. Hereinafter, details of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described.

  The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are similar to the deformation when pressing a part of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 from above, so that the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 bulge (extend) downward from the lower surface. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and one shape of the front and back is similar to the other shape. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as shapes whose scale is changed by an amount that can secure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411. It Therefore, it is possible to easily imagine the other shape from the one shape.

  As shown in FIG. 230(a), the lateral width of the protruding shape portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(a), since the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is disposed closer to the front side than the center of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction, the protruding shape portion The plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be supported at a portion where the left and right widths of the 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially flexed, which will be described later in detail.

  Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can be vertically displaced as the player operates the operation device 10300. In connection with this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are formed of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410, Shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

  When the shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings get into the gaps and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings getting into the detection area of the detection sensor to cause erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or reduce the amount thereof.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is for the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

  That is, when a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414, and thus the main body portion 6411. It is possible to eliminate the displacement of other parts such as.

  On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operating device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and the V-shaped design member. Since it is converted into the deformation of 6450, the displacement of other portions such as the main body portion 6411 can be unnecessary.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that is inclined upward as it goes toward. This configuration is suitable when, for example, the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

  When the front frame 10014 is stored as a single body, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on the floor of concrete or flooring so that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 is in contact with the floor. At this time, it is considered that it is preferable that the entire lower surface is in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoidance of concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt on the floor will adhere to the entire lower surface. Although the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is a position that is difficult for the player to see, it is preferable to avoid dirt from being attached as it is a product.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the front side. Since the gap between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 occurs when the installation shape portion 6413 contacts the floor surface, the location where the installation surface portion 6413 contacts the floor surface and dirt is attached is limited to the protruding shape portion 6413. can do. Therefore, when installing the front frame 10014 in a playable state, the amusement store side only has to wipe off the dirt on the protruding shape portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. ..

  Further, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hanging portion for hanging a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged in the left-right center of the front frame, it is easy to attach the lower plate part to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12) by catching the lower plate part with a hand. However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left-right direction (opening/closing axis side), it is difficult to hang the front plate 10014 by hooking the lower plate 50 to assemble it. It has been configured.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the hand on the operation handle 51, the own weight of the front frame 10014 is hung on the base side of the operation handle 41, which may damage the operation handle 51 and is recommended. Is not preferable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 6413 that also functions as a finger hook portion is arranged at the left and right center position so that it is recommended to hook the bottom surface of the lower plate unit 6400 to lift the front frame 10014. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking the protruding shape portion 6413 to lift the front frame 10014 and pivotally supporting the front frame 10014 on the rear frame.

  Then, by adopting a work procedure in which the work of wiping off the dirt is performed before and after the time when the finger is hung, it is possible to make the worker aware of the place where the wiping of the dirt is required in relation to the carrying operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off the dirt.

  Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a proper gap corresponding to the amount of deformation expected in the protruding shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411, the gap between the bottom surface and the floor surface increases toward the front side. This is formed such that the protruding shape portion 6413 is wider toward the front side. This corresponds to an increase in the deformable amount (deflection amount) due to the load.

  That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, it is easy to secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor even when the protruding shape portion 6413 is flexibly deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014. You can On the other hand, when the protruding shape portion 6413 is flexibly deformed to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface is eliminated, it is possible to make the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 easily contact the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body 6411.

  Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, a part of the main body portion 6411 is It is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on.

  In addition, the deformable amount is made larger toward the front side of the protruding shape portion 6413. It works well even while playing a game. For example, at the time of exchanging a thousand box, the clerk of the game store slides the thousand box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the protruding shape portion 6413. At this time, the thousand box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 are separated from each other. May collide. When the impact and load due to this collision are accumulated in the component members as fatigue, the component members are destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the projecting shape portion 6413 increases as it goes to the front side where it is more likely to collide with the thousand box. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and the load due to the collision with the 1,000-ply box by the deformation (flexing deformation), and it is possible to suppress the breakage of the protruding shape portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

  Further, on the left and right sides of the projecting shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of collision between the 1,000-box box and the main body section 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape section 6413 when the 1,000-box box is replaced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is damaged, and thus it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

  FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower plate unit 6400. Note that, in FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the operation device 10300 other than that is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As illustrated in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 (upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b (FIG. 228(a) and FIG. 228 (FIG. 228)) of the V-shaped design member 6450. It is supported by b))).

  Since the main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V shape when viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456. Is directed in a direction (upward diagonal direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, the restoring force from the bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed in the upper oblique direction.

  Accordingly, not only the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 but also the horizontal displacement can be dealt with. For example, as in the present embodiment, even when the movement direction of the operation portion of the operation device 10300 (for example, the swing operation member 10310) does not have a horizontal component, the downward load given by the player is left and right. A directional component may be included, and when such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and may be displaced (vibrated) slightly in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can flexibly deform based on the curved shape of itself to deal with the lateral displacement of the operating device 10300 (the lateral displacement is absorbed or the restoring force is restored). The arrangement of the operating device 10300 can be returned), and further, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the center of the left and right, whereby the operating device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before the displacement. Therefore, the design of the front frame 10014 in front view (see FIG. 207) can be easily maintained.

  FIG. 233(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is a lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a). 233(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). Note that in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is enlarged and shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 has a lower tray forming member 6420 (the rear side portion has a protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed down by the installation end (lower end) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). Accordingly, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced by the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

  The inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can contact the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224) from the outside in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and is L-shaped. As described above, the lower end portion of the plate portion 6423 comes into contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through hole 6412 can be improved.

  As described above, since the ball pull-out lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 when it is not operated, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening is determined by the closing plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 from becoming fragile. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom face port 6432 are arranged near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (close to the operation device 10300. It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 from being deteriorated while adopting the (arrangement) configuration.

  As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed such that the width becomes wider and the recessed depth increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to bend more toward the front side.

  As a result, sufficient flexing performance can be imparted to the recessed shape portion 6414 near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to the load. This will be described in detail.

  The operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes as described above. The display device or the like notifies the operation timing and the operation mode, and has a role of causing the player to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification and drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

  For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is stop-controlled to the initial position from the start of the game to the execution of a specific reach effect (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

  In this state, the player performs a pushing operation (pushing operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to perform an operation for a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (a notification such as "press the button!") or to switch the stage. It Therefore, most of the load that accompanies the operation is the load that occurs when the lens member 10317 is pushed in, and is the load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215(a)). Since the frequency of notification is high, the frequency of this load is high.

  On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled so as to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down, and for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position. The notification that prompts the operation is executed in the state (see FIG. 215(b)).

  In this case, the operation direction is the direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) further inclined by the angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position, and the direction Y17b becomes Along the load occurs. Since the notification is generated only when the specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of occurrence is low.

  That is, the frequency of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width is wider and the recessed depth is increased toward the front side, so that the load is increased toward the front side. It is formed so that the corresponding performance of is high.

  That is, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front-rear direction, it can be configured so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of load generation in place, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It is possible to avoid avoiding easy breakage.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the frequency of load during operation are high are both the front side, and thus the width of the recessed shape portion 6414 is wider toward the front side. , Was formed at the bottom, but is not limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is opposite, and in this case, the recessed shape is widened toward the rear side. By forming it in the deep bottom, it can be configured so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of load occurrence in place compared to the case where it has a common shape in the front-rear direction, and it deforms too much due to the applied load. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of cracks or insufficient deformation and easy damage.

  As shown in FIG. 233(b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b vertically contacts the main body portion 6411 at positions on the left and right outside of the left and right ends of the recessed shape portion 6414. Contact.

  This makes it possible to reduce the ratio of the load transmitted from the operating device 10300 to the recessed shape portion 6414 as compared with the case where the hanging plate portion 6426b abuts on the upper edge portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. .. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by a load when operating the operation device 10300.

  Further, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the plate-shaped portion from the upper edge portion of the recessed shape-shaped portion 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 is used as a response to the load. Therefore, the allowable amount of load can be increased.

  FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and the left and right and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a are moved downward. A hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate shape, and a front vertically long portion that is joined to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and that is taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and that is open downward. 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front vertically long portion 6426c to the back surface side and is fitted with the operation device 10300 are mainly provided. Note that in the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

  The flat plate-shaped portion 6426a is formed wider than the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6414 and covers the front half of the recessed shape portion 6414. A hanging plate portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (upper and lower portions). That is, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a does not come into contact with the main body portion 6411, but the extended end portion of the depending plate-shaped portion 6426b formed in a U-shape in bottom view (see FIG. 225) comes into contact with the main body portion 6411. The position of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

  In this way, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not formed in a block shape but in a box shape with an open lower portion, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the drooping plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily bent and deformed. It is composed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are flexibly deformed with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion are formed. 6426b can also be flexibly deformed, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the protruding shape portion 6413, and the concave shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 are It is possible to further prevent damage.

  The hanging plate portion 6426b extends to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend to the recessed shape portion 6414. That is, there is a space between the hanging plate portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate portion 6426a in FIG. 234). This makes it possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed-shaped portion 6414 also plays a role of draining water. For example, even when the liquid infiltrates through the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid transmitted along the back side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid penetrating back. Accordingly, it is possible to easily stop the infiltration of the liquid at the front frame 10014.

  The front vertically long portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load via the operation device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d that extends toward the back side, and the lower portion on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load applied by the player to the operation device 10300 can be dispersed not only by the main body 6411 but also by the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be weakened. it can.

  In addition, a space is created between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. This makes it possible to maintain a state in which there is no skeleton inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be prevented.

  Further, the space between the front vertically long portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also plays a role of draining water. For example, even when the liquid infiltrates through the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower dish unit 6400, the liquid transmitted along the back side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. Therefore, it is possible to weaken the flow of the liquid penetrating back. Accordingly, it is possible to easily stop the infiltration of the liquid at the front frame 10014.

  The fitting portion 6426d is a portion that is long in the lateral direction so that it can be fitted into the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and receives a load from the operating device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front vertical elongated portion 6426c formed on the extending base end side.

  Since the reinforcing ribs 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can endure even when a load that displaces the operation device 10300 downward is applied. Accordingly, the displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented from occurring excessively.

  Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, a load caused by the player's operation of the operation member 10300 or vibration is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 6426 via the resin member and is transmitted to the covering base member 6410 arranged downstream thereof. The support portion 6426 is supported below the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

  In the present embodiment, since the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that rises upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234), the front and rear in the direction of the load transmitted from the operation member 10300 to the main body portion 6411. The direction component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

  That is, it is possible to avoid a defect that may occur due to the load generated from the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the rear surface side (outer frame 11 and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) sways, which affects the flow-down mode of the fired sphere, or the load is transmitted to the board boxes 100 to 104 or the electronic board, causing the board to crack. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the upper production device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that, in FIGS. 235 and 236, the lower plate unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 described above are omitted, and the upper effect device 6500 is illustrated in a state of being disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014a.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the upper production device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the acoustic devices 6610 arranged in a pair of left and right, and an illumination board 6570 in which light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. , And each component member that serves as an intermediary that delivers the light emitted from the LED to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in a separating direction from the metal main body 10014a is arranged on the back side of the upper production device 6500. As a result, the fastening force of the fastening screw that fixes the upper production device 6500 to the metal body 10014a can be increased (stable fastening and fixing).

  237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. 237 and 238 show a state in which the upper lid member 6510 of the upper performance device 6500 is disassembled upward.

  The upper performance device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 that occupy a front side portion below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580 is mainly provided.

  The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper performance device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a, and is a main body plate configured as a semi-elliptical plate-shaped portion obtained by dividing an ellipse that is long to the left and right. A portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically formed near the front side edge portion of the body plate portion 6511 and configured to allow fastening screws to be inserted therein, and extending downward from a rear side portion of the body plate portion 6511. And a plurality of fastening portions 6513 configured to be able to fasten fastening screws to be inserted into the metal main body 10014a into the female screw holes.

  The upper lid member 6510 has a rear surface side portion on which the fastening portion 6513 extends, which is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and the other components of the upper performance device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512. That is, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper performance device 6500 by utilizing the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510.

  The fastening portion 6513 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner of falling forward.

  The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has the acoustic device 6610 of the metal main body portion 10014a. Can be prevented from coming off.

  The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface, and an uneven portion 6514 formed so as to project downward from the lower surface is formed on the entire surface as decoration. The uneven portion 6514 can increase the force that resists the load in the direction perpendicular to the surface as compared with the case where the upper lid member 6510 having the same thickness is formed of a plate-shaped member having a smooth surface. Can be made easier).

  239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper effect device 6500. Note that in FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper cover member 6510 of the upper production device 6500 is omitted, and the front unit 6520 to 6550 is disassembled in front of the rear unit 6560 to 6580. In addition, in this embodiment, the front performance units 6520 to 6550 are moved obliquely forward and downward with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 (the forming direction of the extended plate portion 6552, the direction along which the surfaces are), thereby producing the upper performance device 6500. Is configured to be disassembled, but details will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from the light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 emit light such as LEDs. It has a role as a means and a role for supporting an electric decoration substrate on which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560-6580, FIG. 241(b) is a front view of the decorative board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580. FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580.

  As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear-side units 6560 to 6580 include a plurality of partition members 6560 formed in a manner of partitioning the internal space in a front view, and a plurality of LEDs that emit light to the partition members 6560. A pair of the decorative board 6570 to be arranged and the pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and having a slight gap with respect to the decorative board 6570 in the internal area of the contour and supporting the surface in the contour part. And the back support member 6580 of FIG.

  It should be noted that the term “surface-supporting with a slight gap” means that the posture of the decorative substrate 6570 can be maintained and the partition member 6560 and the rear-face supporting member 6580 can be displaced back and forth by the gap. Means that.

  The partitioning member 6560 is arranged to face the front side of the decorative board 6570 so as to be opposed thereto, and is configured to partition the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the decorative board 6570 from the vicinity of the decorative board 6570. It By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and the light emission mode of the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is significantly different. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

  The partition member 6560 includes a facing plate portion 6561 arranged to face the decorative substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the left and right center portions of the facing plate portion 6561, and holes formed in the lower left and right portions of the facing plate portion 6561. Left and right light holes 6563 provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back surface supporting member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the facing plate portion 6561. , To the front side of the counter plate portion 6561 in the shape of a rectangular tube that surrounds the center light hole 6562 and extends to the front side of the counter plate portion 6561, and a long cylinder shape that surrounds the left and right light holes 6563. A plate-like coupling that connects the extending left and right tubular portion 6567 and the opposing plate portion 6561 formed from a T-shaped plate portion in a front view to the opposing plate portion 6561, the central tubular portion 6566, and the left and right tubular portion 6567. And a portion 6568.

  The facing plate portion 6561 is provided with flange portions 6561a to 6561c that project from the upper edge portion to the back surface in a left-right elongated shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portions 6561b are formed in a left-right pair, and extend from the left and right ends of the first flange portion 6561a to a position near the fastening portion 6564 from a position where a slit is formed. The third flange portion 6561c is formed in a pair of left and right, and extends from a position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-shaped joint portion 6568.

  Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the decorative substrate 6570, and the break is provided at least in the decorative substrate 6570. The light emitted from the LED is hard to leak. In other words, this portion is a portion where the light is hard to mix with the light emitted from the LED even when the light is incident from the outside.

  The break between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light hole 6563, and the LED is intentionally mounted on the decorative substrate 6570. It is a break that is not placed. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from the break.

  The break between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at a position where the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and the position where an alternative portion that blocks light is arranged is intentionally defined as a break. It was done. That is, even if the light progresses to the break, the light that tries to pass through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the phenomenon that the light leaks from the break.

  Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous series of portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently ensured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 is not possible. (It is assumed that a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partition member 6560, a gravity and a load given by the player) are opposed only by the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fastens the fastening portion 6564. Occurs. In the present embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of man-hours required to tighten the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the decorative board 6570 decreases, and the places where the LEDs can be arranged are limited. This will reduce the design freedom of the 6570.

  On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths sufficient to ensure rigidity, it is possible to counter the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 by the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative board 6570 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the lengthwise direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper production device 6500 is formed in a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the center of the left and right in a top view (see FIG. 237). Generally, a load given by the player (for example, a hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper production device 6500, so that the load given by the player at the left and right central portions of the upper production device 6500 is maximum. And becomes gradually smaller toward the left and right ends.

  On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c intentionally have different lengths. More specifically, compared with the left and right length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b arranged on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a are longer, Further, the third flange portions 6561c arranged on the left and right sides are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left-right length is shortest in the left-right center portion, and gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left-right end portions. As a result, it is possible to generate a counter force without excess or deficiency in the load applied to the upper production device 6500.

  Accordingly, the deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the decorative board 6570 can be stably maintained. Note that maintaining the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case where the force for holding the decorative substrate 6570 is reduced due to the deformation or displacement in the separating direction and the displacement of the decorative substrate 6570 is prevented, and the deformation in the approaching direction is not limited. This also includes the case where a load in the compression direction is applied to the electric decoration substrate 6570 due to the displacement and the electric decoration substrate 6570 is prevented from being broken or deformed.

  The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes formed corresponding to the patterns of the LEDs arranged on the decorative substrate 6570. The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes that are slightly larger than the outer shape of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes that are large enough to surround a plurality of LEDs. ..

  The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back surface support member 6580, and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed so as to project to the back side from the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 are aligned.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front-side cylindrical portion extending in the front surface side in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter, and an insertion hole 6565a formed at the bottom of the front end thereof so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 from the back side is inserted into the insertion hole 6565a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. With this configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240). it can.

  The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended to reach the rear end portions of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are incident on the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper performance device 6500, and the central cylindrical portion 6566. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 bears the load prior to the central tubular portion 6566, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the central tubular portion 6566 is loaded, and the central tubular portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. It is possible to easily avoid such a situation.

  The plate-shaped connecting portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Accordingly, when the load is transmitted to the plate-shaped coupling portion 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 also opposes the load. can do. In this case, since the plate-shaped portion is formed, the counterforce can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-shaped portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right tubular portions 6567 can be suppressed.

  The decorative board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and is a plate-shaped board portion 6571 and a fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 which is a portion that is punched or cut into the board portion 6571 and is fastened. A large-diameter insertion portion 6573, a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 which is formed in the board portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted, and a plurality of LEDs (see FIG. b), a first illuminating section 6574 formed of a uniform rectangle) and a plurality of LEDs symmetrically arranged with reference to the first illuminating section 6574, and the center of the board section 6571 in the vertical direction. A second illuminating unit 6575 arranged in the vicinity of the portion, a third illuminating unit 6576 symmetrically arranged along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571, and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Prepare mainly.

  As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction, and is opposed to the partition member 6560. It is arranged according to the physical relationship. That is, the first lighting unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting unit 6575 is located at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting unit 6576 is located below the partition member 6560. They are arranged at positions below the edges. As a result, the respective illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminate different regions partitioned by the partition member 6560. The first illuminating section 6574 and the second illuminating section 6575 illuminate the area inside the partition member 6560, while the third illuminating section 6576 illuminates the area outside the partition member 6560.

  The third illuminator 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in a front view. As will be described later, since the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 travels obliquely downward by the light receiving member 6558, avoid the situation where the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is blocked by the partition member 6560. Accordingly, the third lighting unit 6576 and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap with each other in the front-rear direction.

  The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is designed in such a size that the fastening force in fastening the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 in the fastening insertion portion 6572 does not act. That is, the decorative substrate 6570 is supported between the partition member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

  The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) in a front view. This can improve the assembly efficiency, but details will be described later.

  The back surface support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, is a pair of members configured to have substantially symmetrical shapes with each other, and includes a front plate portion 6581 arranged to face the decorative board 6570 and the front thereof. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending plate-like to the rear side, and a front plate A rear surface box portion 6584 formed in a box shape that is connected to the left and right edge portions (an edge portion on the opposite side of the pair of members facing each other) and the lower edge portion of the portion 6581 and opens to the back side, and a pair of rear surface boxes. A lower surface box portion 6585 formed in a box shape having a smooth upper surface on the side of the portion 6584 near the rear surface box portion 6584 of the other side, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion. An opposing plate portion 6586 that is a plate-shaped portion that is connected to the 6581 and that faces the mating member (back surface supporting member 6580), and a cut that vertically penetrates between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585. A notch portion 6587, which is a notch, is mainly provided.

  The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports each including a pair of an elliptical rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole into which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A through hole formed of a vertically elongated oval shape having a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the portion 6581a and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560, and is disposed at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear. A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c, which are mainly formed in a lower edge portion which forms a boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear surface box portion 6584, and through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front side units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted. Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d used for positioning the front side units 6520 to 6550 are formed in an elongated hole shape along a lower edge portion that forms a boundary with the rear surface box portion 6584, and Mainly provided is a wiring hole 6581e which is formed at a position corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decorative substrate 6570 and allows an electric wire to pass back and forth.

  In the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, the inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes the short diameter is made slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560, while the outer width in the left-right direction is the illuminated substrate 6570. It is made longer than the lateral width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the decorative substrate 6570 is surface-supported by the tip portion of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

  The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the back surface support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520 to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they descend and incline toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

  The front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclination direction in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the descending inclination direction. (See FIG. 247).

  This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the decorative board 6570 as compared with the case of opening in the front-rear direction, and brings the positions of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d closer to the decorative board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, it is possible to secure a wide area for disposing the decoration substrate 6570, and when the decoration substrate 6570 is formed to have the same size. A region where the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

  The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (a hanging load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the frontward tilt of the partition member 6560.

  The upper plate portion 6583 is provided at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513. The fitting recessed portion 6583a is formed in a rectangular shape as viewed in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) with the upper side and the rear side opened.

  The rear surface box portion 6584 has a projecting portion 6584a that projects toward the front side of the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmitting portion 6584b made of punching metal that covers the opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a, and a right member. The light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light transmissive member disposed at the right end portion of the projecting portion 6584a of the above, and the light receiving portion 6584c disposed at the position closest to the center of the upper end portion (position closer to the front plate portion 6581) and in the assembled state. (See FIG. 207) The pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d formed so as to generate a biasing force in the direction of repulsion from the metal main body 10014a and the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are inserted. It mainly includes a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

  The overhanging portion 6584a has an upper edge portion formed in a shape along the lower edge shape of the decorative board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and an upper surface thereof constitutes a guide surface that guides the front units 6520 to 6550.

  The sound transmission unit 6584b is a portion through which a sound wave generated from the audio device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmitting unit 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating film 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

  The light receiving unit 6584c receives light emitted from the illumination unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows it to the player as a light emitting effect. Is. In this embodiment, the illumination unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a mode different from that of the illumination board 6570. That is, the light emission effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed at the time of the variation effect having a high occurrence probability, the normal variation effect and the reach effect, the demonstration effect, and the like, while the light emission effect of the illumination unit 10014c has the occurrence probability. It is executed when an effect that is extremely low and extremely advantageous to the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

  The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front side units 6520 to 6550 enter from the lower side, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw that is inserted from the back side into the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened.

  The cutout portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 vertically formed on the lower surface of the left and right central portion (the portion farthest from the vibrating membrane 6611) of the acoustic device 6610 is passed. To form. That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d supporting the back surface side of the audio device 6610 and the notch portion 6587.

  The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as the sound that travels toward the back side with the vibration of the vibrating membrane 6611, contrary to the sound that is output as the sound that travels toward the front side with the vibration of the vibrating membrane 6611. The sound is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 through the internal cavity (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker) of the audio device 6610. By providing a plurality of paths for emitting sound in this way, it is possible to simultaneously generate sounds with different timbres.

  244(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line of FIG. 241, and FIG. 244(b) is CCXLIVb of FIG. 245 is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 in the CCXLIVb line, and FIG. 245(a) is a partition member 6560 in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 6570 is a partial cross-sectional view of the back support member 6580 and the sound device 6610, and FIG. 245(b) is a sectional view of the CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. 241, the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the sound device 6610. FIG. 246(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the illuminated substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line of FIG. 241. FIG. FIG. 24 is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back surface supporting member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line in FIG.

  Note that in FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is enlarged and shown. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the decorative substrate 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582. Accordingly, even when the back surface supporting member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the decorative substrate 6570 (the width of vibration) due to the vibration of the back surface supporting member 6580. .

  As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a of the back support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the decorative board 6570 being sandwiched therebetween. By being inserted, the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the decorative substrate 6570. That is, the electric decoration substrate 6570 is only aligned with the fastening insertion portion 6572 with the fastening portion 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 at the fastening position.

  Further, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a abuts on the back surface of the decorative board 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the decorative board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative board 6570 is not sandwiched at the front-rear position, so the decorative board 6570 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilt displacement).

  Further, the lower edge portion of the illuminated substrate 6570 is not supported by the back surface support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

  As shown in FIG. 244( b ), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the decorative board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581 b of the back support member 6580. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244(a)). It will be described that the formation in this way facilitates the assembling of the partition member 6560 to the back surface support member 6580.

  When the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 as in the conventional art, the partition member 6560 is aligned in the vertical and horizontal positions with respect to the back surface support member 6580. Need to be assembled.

  However, in the present embodiment, since the decorative board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580, the back surface support member 6580 of the decorative board 6570 is mounted when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the positions with respect to, which may make the work difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a and the positioning hole 6581b have a vertically long elliptical shape (or a shape obtained by halving the elliptical shape). Since it is formed by, it is possible to assemble even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

  As an example of the assembling order, first, the decorative board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 such that the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the decorative board 6570. At this time, it is not necessary to determine the arrangement of the decorative board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and it may be an arbitrary position.

  In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can contact the decorative substrate 6570, so that the partition member of the decorative substrate 6570 is assembled at the time when the decorative substrate 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560. The positional deviation with respect to 6560 is significantly suppressed.

  Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the back surface support member 6580. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not have to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning such that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), and positioning in which the allowable width in the vertical direction is sufficiently long). The work efficiency of inserting the 6564 inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

  Next, the partition member 6560 is moved in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a with respect to the back surface support member 6580 to align the fastening portion 6564 with the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a. Then, the fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244(a)).

  In this state, even if the position of the illuminated substrate 5670 is deviated, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to the position (see FIG. 244(b)) where the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is supported by the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565. And the back support member 6580.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the decorative board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner between the partition member 6560 and the back surface supporting member, and generally it is easy to align the decorative board 6570. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving the oval shape) even though it is an assembly mode. It is possible to improve the assembly efficiency. In addition, even if the electric decoration board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight. Therefore, the effect of the light emission effect during the game can be maintained for a long time due to the deviation of the electric decoration board 5670. It can be prevented from lowering.

  The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). The central light hole 6562 is arranged in an inverted T-shape (arranged at four locations, see FIG. 241) in the center of the left and right, and an enlarged hole 6562a and a substantially gourd shape (general vase shape) outside thereof. (It is arranged at eight places, see FIG. 241) and mainly has a direct insertion hole 6562b. The direct insertion hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole that allows the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 to pass therethrough, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the facing distance becomes wider as it goes toward.

  Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be regulated. That is, the way the light is shown to the player can be changed depending on the design mode of the enlarged hole 6562a (the inclination angle of the inner wall, the height of the raised wall, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the tip of the portion of the enlarged hole 6562a that is raised to the front side is raised to a position where it comes into contact with the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thereby, the light passing through the enlarged hole 6562a can be made incident on the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 without leaking.

  246(a) shows the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246(b) shows the positioning elongated hole 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they descend and incline toward the front side, and the front side units 6520 to 6550 are arranged in the rear unit 6560 to It is assembled to the 6580 and fastened and fixed.

  Since the front-side units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved as compared with the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the decorative board 6570 can be positioned to such an extent as to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the decorative board 6570 can be secured. .. On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, it is possible to secure the sizes of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be housed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed so as to incline downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the vibration film 6611 of the speaker is arranged, the vibration film 6611 is enlarged. It can be formed (see FIGS. 235 and 246).

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning elongated hole 6581d incline downward while heading toward the front side, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction. The fact that it is formed along (is not inclined) is due to the fact that the drawing direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-back direction.

  In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (composed of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed on the back surface support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a. In the present embodiment, the extraction direction is set to the same front-back direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a. Therefore, the shapes of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are distorted shapes. The shape is changed (the shape changes in the hole forming direction (depth direction)).

  Particularly, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the back side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. As for the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c, the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which a load is applied due to fastening is made thinner toward the center of the hole, so that the load is unbalanced between the upper edge and other portions. Is likely to occur, and the fastening screw may loosen depending on the state of use and years of use.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but due to the difference with the quality of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, it results in higher cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening points, the cost will increase because the fastening screw cannot be a common component, while at the same time, a fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, resulting in a high material cost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is arranged so as to sandwich the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in a recess shape in the front wall 6620 ( A retaining plate portion 6621 that is a part of the portion formed (recessed) and that is formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion where the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed is provided.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure a region where the head portion of the fastening screw can be arranged between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the back surface supporting member 6580. Further, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening screw is prevented from falling off by restricting the further progress of the fastening screw. Can be prevented.

  The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed in such a size that it is slightly spaced from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loose. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted through the head of the fastening screw.

  On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. When outputting sound from the audio device 6610 at this time, the vibration of the audio device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  Further, the front wall 6620 is provided with a plurality of contact avoiding recesses 6622 that are recessed at the back surface position of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is an extent to avoid contact with the head of the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) (a slight gap between the head and the head). It is recessed to a size that allows

  This can prevent vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same as the front-rear direction that is the same as the resin mold drawing direction, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, which is sufficient. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a will loosen, but if loosening occurs in the fastening screw, the same function as that of the retaining plate portion 6621 described above will be avoided. It can be generated in the concave portion 6622.

  That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by abutting, so that the gap between the contact avoiding recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. When outputting sound from the audio device 6610 at this time, the vibration of the audio device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

  As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration generated when the head of the fastening screw comes into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding recess 6622 due to the occurrence of the loosening of the fastening screw. It is possible to notice the occurrence of looseness, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the fastening screw is left loose.

  For example, the transmission of vibration may be configured to generate an abnormal sound, or the vibration may be detected.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in the present embodiment, the decorative substrate 6570 is arranged in the vicinity of the back surface supporting member 6580, but is not fixed to the back surface supporting member 6580. To be done. Accordingly, while the acoustic device 6610 and the decorative substrate 6570 can be arranged close to each other with the rear surface supporting member 6580 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the rear surface supporting member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the decorative substrate 6570. It is possible to prevent the substrate 6570 from being broken.

  Here, the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back surface support member 6580 at a position excluding the effect part (that is, the illumination parts 6574 to 6576) of the decorative board 6570, and the ratio of the effect part on the surface of the decorative board 6570 is determined. For the purpose of ensuring a large size, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

  Therefore, the problem that the partition member 6560 is apt to be insufficiently fixed tends to occur, and the vibration of the audio device 6610 may be transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the back surface support member 6580 without any measures. Vibration of 6560 may result in a poor effect, loosening of fastening points, or damage to partition member 6560 itself.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 6560 is fixed from another direction to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560. On the other hand, a description will be given with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper production device 6500. In FIG. 247, the fastening position of each component of the upper production device 6500, the fastening direction, and the fastening direction are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is shown by a T-shape, the horizontal line of the T-shape shows the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line shows the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

  As shown in FIG. 247, the upper production device 6500 is configured such that the front and bottom surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580 are surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550 and the front units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper lid member 6510. However, the upper lid member 6510 is only fastened to the back surface support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560.

  This avoids reinforcing the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510. In the present embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed of a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted via the back surface support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 is formed in the thickness direction ( Easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction.

  With this displacement (deformation), the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the center in the front-rear direction, the front-rear spacing of the insertion holes 6512 formed separately in the front-rear direction is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 to the back side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

  That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched between the back surface support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration. You can

  Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, when the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the partition unit 6540 is applied to the partition member 6560. The applied load is likely to be insufficient, and the action of suppressing the vibration of the partition member 6560 may be insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guided unit 6550 regulates the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the partition unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. Thereby, the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 can be sufficiently secured.

  At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed at the end portion of the guided unit 6550 in the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580. The vibration transmission direction can be set to the direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

  Thereby, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when the vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening position, the decorative board 6570 is closely arranged in a non-fixed state to the acoustic device 6610 where vibration is likely to occur, while the decorative board 6570 is prevented from being damaged. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partition member 6560 by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 that prevents the decorative board 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back surface support member 6580) by an allowable amount or more.

  That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the upper production device 6500 while improving the durability of the decorative board 6570 arranged in the vicinity of the audio device 6610.

  Further, one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment is to deal with the displacement amount of the upper lid member 6510. That is, the upper lid member 6510 has a structure in which the rear surface side is fixed by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in the front and rear in a thin plate shape. Therefore, the upper lid member 6510 is easily curved and displaced in a manner in which the displacement amount on the front surface side is larger than that on the rear surface side. It is for that.

  For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the center of the radius of curvature is arranged below the upper lid member 6510 from the shape of the upper lid member 6510 with the rear end as the starting point. It can be curved and displaced. In this case, the upper lid member 6510 itself is given a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are given a compressive load.

  Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the rear side, which is the base end side, but with respect to the front-rear direction as the displacement amount increases (as it moves toward the front side). It follows the direction of descending inclination toward the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 has a fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be approximated.

  As a result, in addition to being able to sufficiently generate a resistance force against the compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the shearing direction of the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) is reduced, so that the fastening screw is broken. Can be suppressed.

  The fastening screws whose fastening direction is formed so as to descend and incline toward the front side are used to fasten the plate guide unit 6550. The plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the decorative board 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246(a)). In the present embodiment, the decorative board 6570 is arranged so as not to be fixed and is configured to be easily displaced. However, the plate guide unit 6550 can limit the allowable displacement of the decorative board 6570. That is, even if the decorative board 6570 is displaced, when the displacement amount becomes excessive, the plate guide unit 6550 can be brought into contact with the movable board 6570 to prevent the excessive displacement of the decorative board 6570.

  Further, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged in proximity to the back side of the decorative board 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the rearward displacement of the decorative board 6570 can be particularly suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the decorative board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as the vibration source.

  In the present embodiment, the fastening portions (fastening support portions 6581a, insertion holes 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction extends in the front-rear direction are gathered on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction descends toward the front side. Fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not arranged close to each other.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the deformation (displacement) that occurs in the one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if the fastening portion along the front-rear direction is loosened and displaced in the front-rear direction, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction, so that the portion is inclined downward. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a load in a direction inclining with the fastening direction (along the front-back direction) with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. This can prevent the loosening of the screw.

  In addition, by fixing a portion that is long in the front-rear direction, which is the center of the left and right, with a fastening portion whose fastening direction extends in the front-rear direction, it is possible to improve the resistance of the upper production device 6500 against a load in the pushing-down direction.

  On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and slopes toward the front side is considered to have a lower resistance to the load in the pushing direction than the fastening portion in which the fastening direction extends in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction descends and tilts toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance force to the load in the push-down direction decreases. It is possible to secure an arrangement area for the decorative substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 while minimizing the influence of the above.

  FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along the line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). In addition, the specific part is expanded and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 248, in the decorative substrate 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 contacts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. Further, the front and rear surfaces are formed so as to abut on the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back surface supporting member 6580, respectively, but the abutting positions thereof are formed so as not to match in the front and rear.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the decorative board 6570 and adjust the easiness of displacement. These will be described below in order. First, the improvement of the durability of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described.

  Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated substrate 6570 abut the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 at positions that match the front and rear, respectively, for some reason (error during resin molding, fastening failure, etc.) When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 is shorter than the plate thickness of the decorative substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the decorative substrate 6570, and when a large load is applied, The decorative substrate 6570 may be cracked.

  Further, even when no compressive force is applied to the decorative substrate 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, which causes a load (for example, a load in the compression direction). May be added, and this load may break the decorative substrate 6570.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions of the front and rear surfaces of the decorative substrate 6570 that contact the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 do not match in the front and rear (there is a position where they contact at displaced positions), Even if a load is applied to the decorative board 6570 in the above-described manner, the load is not a load for compressing the decorative board 6570 but a load for bending the decorative board 6570. Therefore, since it is possible to deal with the electric decoration substrate 6570 by bending and deforming, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric decoration substrate 6570 is cracked.

  Next, the adjustment of the easiness of the displacement of the illuminated substrate 6570 will be described. In the decorative substrate 6570, the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partition member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted to prevent displacement, but in the present embodiment, they are densely arranged near the left and right center. Are arranged (see FIG. 243).

  In addition, the decorative substrate 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, so that the contact resistance between the decorative substrate 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is secured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, the contact area naturally becomes large, and sufficient frictional resistance can be secured.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the decorative board 6570 in the vicinity of the left and right central portions of the decorative board 6570. Therefore, even when a peripheral member vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to easily maintain the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the decorative substrate 6570.

  On the other hand, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and the fastening portion 6564 are not arranged on the left and right sides (particularly, the lower side) of the decorative substrate 6570, and a load that is compressed from the front and rear does not occur. Displacement can be made easier than in the left and right central portions of 6570.

  Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of light emitted from the second lighting portion 6575 and the third lighting portion 6576 of the decorative substrate 6570 can be easily changed.

  In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, the vibration mode of the decorative board 6570 is changed based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610. That is, when sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the decorative substrate 6570 is preferentially vibrated, and when sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the decorative substrate 6570 is preferentially vibrated. The case where the sound is emitted from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 and the left and right sides of the decorative board 6570 are vibrated can vibrate the decorative board 6570 in at least three different vibration modes.

  Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550. Note that, in FIGS. 249 and 250, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are omitted for easy understanding.

  249 and 250, in FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits the light incident from the first illumination portion 6574 of the decorative substrate 6570 to the front side and an outer frame that is formed so as to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. The member 6530, the partition unit 6540 that abuts the partition member 6560 at the front and rear and similarly partitions the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 are disassembled. It

  At the time of light emission effect through the front side units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit. 6550 receives the light from the 3rd illumination part 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

  251(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(a) is a partition 252(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253(b) is a plate guide. It is a rear view of the unit 6550.

  FIG. 254(a) is a sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 254(b) is taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 254 is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550, and FIG. 254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 taken along the CCLIVc-CCLIVc line of FIG. 251(b).

  FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

  The partition unit 6540 includes a milky white member 6541 formed of a milky white light-transmissive resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and a light transmission unit 6520 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the central portion of the milky white member 6541. A through hole 6542 formed so that the rear side portion can be inserted, a pair of fastening portions 6543 that are portions protruding inward of the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A plurality of insertion holes 6544 in which fastening screws for fastening and fixing are formed so that they can be inserted, and a pair of guiding rear fastening portions in which fastening screws that extend in a tubular shape toward the back side and pass through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape open to the rear side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and extended downward from the lower edges of the box light receiving portions 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-shaped portions and have insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are formed, and colorless transparent light. A transparent cover member 6548 that is formed of a transparent resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving unit 6546 and that is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541 is mainly provided.

  The partition unit 6540 has a front-side edge portion formed in a curved shape that bulges toward the front side in a top view similar to the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and is centered on the back side in a side view. Is formed in a substantially arc shape (see FIG. 254(a)).

  The milky white member 6541 is provided with a pair of fastening portions 6541a on the upper surface to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

  The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side in correspondence with the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 which will be described later. As a result, the front end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into surface contact with each other, and the posture of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be prevented from changing. You can

  The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. The post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole facing the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

  The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion that is arranged so as to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the illuminated substrate 6570, and is provided on the front bottom rear surface and the lower plate upper surface of the box light receiving portion 6546. Has a jagged ornament with a short left-right width. This jagged shape is formed by an uneven shape in which protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

  With this shape, light incident from the back side can be scattered (diffused), so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front surface thereof can be made to uniformly emit light in a front view.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U shape having an open upper side in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. And a projecting rib 6547c that has a semi-elliptical shape and that projects toward the front side.

  By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550, the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550.

  The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion that is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the screw insertion portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted and that receives a load generated by fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 has a relationship with the drawing direction of the resin mold (in the present embodiment, the front-rear direction), and the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying the fastening is applied is It is made thinner toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254(b)).

  In this case, the load is likely to be unbalanced between the upper edge portion and the other portions, so that the fastening screw may be loosened when a small positional deviation occurs repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. is there.

  In order to prevent loosening of the fastening screw, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be adopted, but due to the difference with the quality of the fastening screw used for other fastening points, it results in higher cost. .. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening points, the cost will increase because the fastening screw cannot be a common component, while at the same time, a fastening screw with a large head diameter will be used at all fastening points. If adopted, the material required for the fastening screw will be bulky, resulting in a high material cost.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is configured to prevent displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, first, since the screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partitioning unit 6540, the downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented (FIGS. 247 and 254). (See (b)).

  Secondly, the front-side upper end portion of the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to engage with the rear-side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking convex portion 6548b in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 254(b)). As a result, the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented from being displaced toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540.

  Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 on the surface (see FIG. 254(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced upward with respect to the partition unit 6540.

  Since the displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by the first to third contact structures, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw insertion portion 6554a. You can

  The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and has a lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a extending plate-like toward the back side at the lower edge connecting portion of the V shape, and an upper edge to a back surface. And a plurality of locking projections 6548b projecting in a plate shape toward the side. The center portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 on the left and right sides is cut out from the rear surface side to the front surface side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

  A serrated decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a similarly to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. Accordingly, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is cut out, the cutout portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 6548 can be extended in the left-right direction. Light can be uniformly emitted.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that rises toward the rear side (see FIG. 254(c)). In order to form the 6548a at the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 and the surface position, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward as it goes to the back side like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. ..

  If it is attempted to form this inclined surface by the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the direction of removing the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the drawing direction is the front-rear direction near the through-hole 6542, and the direction near the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 is ascending toward the rear side, which only increases the difficulty of the mold design. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is formed by the transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254(c)). Further, in the assembled state, since the white partition member 6560 is arranged to face the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 forming the inclined surface, the transparent covering member 6548 is provided to the player. Can be visually confirmed with a uniform color (white).

  As a result, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front surface of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front and rear drawing directions. While the shape (the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering the partition unit 6540 in a front view), the light emission of the transparent covering member 6548 is performed in a uniform light emitting mode. Can be seen by a person.

  In other words, the partition unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the rear surface side (narrower vertical spacing), while the rear surface portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that are adjacent to each other. Since a similar decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the (see enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a light emission effect in a uniform light emission mode.

  In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the transparent cover member 6548 is removed from the molding die in the front-rear direction, but the transparent cover member 6548 does not originally have a portion formed along the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the direction of rising inclination) as the drawing direction of the molding die, a manufacturing process in which the molding direction is resin molding in the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily manufacture the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548, and it is possible to uniformly emit light to a portion visually recognized through the transparent covering member 6548.

  The locking convex portion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking protrusion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

  The guided unit 6550 includes a main body resin member 6551 formed from a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V shape in a front view and guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the main body resin member 6551. An extended plate portion 6552 that is extended in a plate shape along the lower edges of the left and right central portions and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 that are formed at the rear end portions of the extended plate portion 6552. A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edge portions of the main body resin member 6551 and facing the insertion plate portion 6547 of the partitioning unit 6540, and fastening screws are fastened, and the left and right sides of the main body resin member 6551. A plurality of back side fastening portions 6555, which are arranged along the lower edge portion, to which fastening screws that have passed through the screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back face support member 6580 are fastened, and the back side fastening portions 6555. Between the plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 protruding in a rib shape and inserted into the positioning elongated holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back surface support member 6580, and the plurality of insertion rib portions formed in the front-rear direction in the left and right arm portions. A through hole 6557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 that are formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material and that are fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557 are mainly provided.

  The guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584a of the back surface supporting member 6580, which is the drawing direction of the mold. That is, each of the constituent members is formed along an inclined direction that is inclined upward toward the back side or a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

  The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the audio device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmitting hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure communicating hole 6553.

  The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed as a plurality of small hole shapes (the range is divided into small parts). Formed). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that a fine wire such as a piano wire enters.

  Further, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed such that the hole width becomes narrower toward the end of the hole and toward the rear surface side. Thereby, the fine wire can be clogged in the hole, and therefore, when the fine wire is further advanced to the back after being made to enter the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, or when a load is applied by hooking on a specific member, The movement resistance of the thin wire can be increased. As a result, the time required for fraudulent acts can be extended, and thus fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  The front-side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a pair of wall-shaped positioning wall portions 6554b on the left and right of the screw-in portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width length of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a portion that is guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction having an L shape. A guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b that are formed in a box shape that bulges on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and that opens on the back side, and that can be fitted into the through holes 6557; An upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the center side end of the portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other) is mainly provided.

  The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third illuminating unit 6576 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the decorative substrate 6570. The above-described jagged shape for decoration is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. This allows light to be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, which is the case when the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (1-2 in FIG. 241(b)). However, it can be visually recognized as uniform light over the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (the posture in which the light advancing direction is inclined so that the traveling direction of the light is along the assembling direction of the plate guiding unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guiding unit 6550). The light emitted from the LED disposed on the third illumination portion 6576 of the illuminated substrate 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received in the front-rear direction. When the light passes through the member 6558, the light can be refracted, and the light can be moved toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558 in an obliquely downward direction.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed such that an object arranged on the left and right outer sides has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than an object arranged on the left and right inner sides. Accordingly, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected below the partition unit 6540.

  The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partition member 6560 is formed in a flat shape particularly in the extension plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and since there is no partition, alignment with the partition member 6560 is performed. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper edge extended portion 6558c serves as a partition that divides the region above the extended plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

  It returns to FIG. 249 and demonstrates. In the description so far, the portion that receives the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 arranged on the left and right has been described. Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520, which is a portion that receives the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, will be described.

  257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(a) is 258 is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

  The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (in this embodiment, orange) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape in a front view, and the main body portion 6531. An opening 6532 having a substantially gourd shape (generally a pot shape) formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6533 having a shape along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protruding in a rib shape on the back side. And a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are formed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partitioning unit 6540 and that are capable of receiving the fastening screws that are inserted into the insertion holes 6544.

  In the outer frame member 6530, since the main body portion 6531 is impermeable to light, the portion that transmits light inside the outer shape is limited to the opening portion 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first illuminator 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination section 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241(a)).

  The light emitted from the first illuminating unit 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. However, since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed to be different depending on the front and rear position, the front side of the opening 6532 is formed. It is possible to make the player visually recognizing the light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first illuminator 6574.

  For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that the lateral width becomes longer as it approaches the opening 6532 (so that both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light visually recognized from the front side of the opening 6532 around the position overlapping the front plate and the rear plate is visually recognized in a pattern that is laterally wide compared to the arrangement pattern of the first illumination unit 6574.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first illuminating unit 6574 that emits light behind the light while widening the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first illuminating unit 6574 (or the decorative substrate 6570). The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

  The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is arranged at a position where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking protrusion 6548b are formed on the same curve in front view (formed on the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). Be done).

  259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin and extending in the front-rear direction and having a bottomed tubular shape, and a plane disposed at an intermediate position of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape to cover the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin. Of the colored (white in the present embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, the shielding member 6524 formed in a cylindrical shape so that the portion opposite to the side covered with the cup-shaped member 6523 can be inserted, and the shielding member 6524. An abutting plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of abutting the flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer portion extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the abutting plate portion 6525. The frame extending portion 6526 is mainly provided.

  The bottomed tubular member 6521 is a member that extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction, has a curved shape such that the left and right wall portions are constricted inward, and is arranged in front of and behind the LEDs arranged in the first illumination section 6574. A rear outer shape portion 6521a formed by overlapping outer shapes, a plurality of light receiving projections 6521b protruding from the rear outer shape portion 6521a to the rear side at a position facing the LED, and an area surrounded by the rear outer shape portion 6521a. And a plurality of light-transmitting holes 6521d formed in the closing portion 6521c at a position opposed to the LED, and at least the left and right width of the upper wall and the distance between the left and right wall portions toward the front side. A main body tubular portion 6521e that becomes longer toward the front and a frame-shaped extending portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body tubular portion 6521e are mainly provided.

  The light receiving projecting portion 6521b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. In other words, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the decorative substrate 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illuminating section is formed on the light receiving projection portion 6521b without leaving a gap as thick as the facing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560. Light can be incident from the 6574 LED. This makes it easy to cause total reflection.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LEDs of the first illuminating unit 6574 is incident at a short distance, is totally reflected, and travels to the front side, as compared with the above-described second illuminating unit 6575 and the third illuminating unit 6576. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 or the rear box-shaped portion 6558b that is recessed in the direction away from the LED, and the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are made to emit light. Therefore, compared with the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be visually recognized by the player as a uniform light with a low light amount. it can.

  Further, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed of a light-transmissive milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear surface box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is formed of a colorless transparent light-transmissive resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 can be changed stepwise.

  The frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is formed to have a shape similar to that of the back outer shape portion 6521a, but the outer shape of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is compared with the outer shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a due to the interposition of the main body tubular portion 6521e. And be made bigger.

  Therefore, as compared with the size of the area where the LEDs are arranged in the first illumination unit 6574, the player can visually recognize the light as a light that illuminates a large area.

  The shape of the extending distal end of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is such that each location is arranged at substantially the same distance as the back side surface (back surface) of the bottom portion of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, the shape of the extending tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is designed depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523. Accordingly, the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f can be made to shine in a uniform light emitting manner.

  The flange portion 6522 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a that are formed in a size that allows the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The cup-shaped member 6523 is formed in a flat shape on the back surface side, is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened by a fastening screw inserted in the bottom portion. A pair of end fastening parts 6523a to which the parts 6543 are fastened and fixed, a decorative shape part 6523b in which a light-diffusing shape (a decorative shape consisting of a protrusion having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and the decorative shape part. Mainly includes a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

  The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light emitted from the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. As a result, a player looking at the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if they are emitting surface light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

  Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the flat surface portion 6523c does not diffusely reflect the light passing through the inside of the wall of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f and is directly reflected from the front surface. Can be passed to the side. This allows the player to visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f as clear light.

  The shield member 6524 has a rear end portion formed in a shape similar to that of the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is provided with a recess having a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

  The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a that are formed with a size that allows the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 to be inserted.

  The outer frame extending portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so that the flange portion 6522 can be accommodated, and the extending length is the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the rear surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-shaped portion and the thickness.

  That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, since the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)), the optical transmission unit 6520 is provided. The assembled state of can be stably maintained. Further, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540 is inserted and fastened in the order of the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the end fastening portion 6523a. The assembled state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

  According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear end surface of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e and is advanced to the front side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. And the cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated. Since the gap between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is set to be short, a line shape (a corner of the cup-shaped member 6523 is provided to the player who visually recognizes light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523). It can be visually recognized in a light emitting mode in which the light is emitted along the outline. This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emitting mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emitting mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, and thus it is possible to perform a vivid light emitting effect. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 261 shows a six-sided view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows a six-sided view of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. The left side view is omitted because the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically.

  261(a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. 261(d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262(d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. Note that in FIG. 262(e), the illustration of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent tubular member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right surface portions and the lower bottom surface portion are inclined so that the horizontal width and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that. On the other hand, due to the fact that the extraction direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the extraction direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

  For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when moving the resin mold on the back side in the drawing direction (rearward), but the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a formed on the rear side portion thereof. With the same inclination, it will interfere when the resin mold on the back side is moved, so the inner surface of the outer shape portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

  Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body tubular portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when moving the resin mold on the front side in the drawing direction (front), but a frame shape formed on the front side portion thereof. If the outer surface of the extended portion 6521f has the same inclination, it will interfere when moving the resin mold, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 263).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold that is pulled out forward and the back-side resin mold that is pulled out rearward is constituted by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-described inclination is provided on the front and rear sides thereof. Where the surface is formed and the non-inclined surface is formed on the other side, in the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, the length of the non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction is compared with the length of the inclined surface in the front-rear direction. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position while the transparent tubular member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above. It is possible to suppress a change in the front-back position of the progress mode. Therefore, when light is incident on the inside of the thick wall and total reflection occurs at the boundary at which light first arrives, it is possible to easily repeat total reflection until it reaches the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. Since leakage of light can be suppressed, a player who views the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side can visually recognize sufficient light.

  The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, as compared with the case where the upper and lower widths are formed in the same direction in the front-rear direction, when the light transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the guide recessed portion 6524a has a fastening portion. Since the 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

  FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520 taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of description, a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the audio device 6610 are arranged in an assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed in such a size that a slight gap is generated when it is inserted into the direct insertion hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and the tip thereof is opposed plate portion. It is inserted up to the surface position of 6561. Accordingly, the distance between the first illuminating section 6574 and the light receiving projecting section 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness of the facing plate section 6561.

  The light receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is along the shape of the back outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illuminating unit 6574 arranged to face each other.

  As a result, in the short-side direction of the light-receiving projection portion 6521b, only light (light having an extremely small angle with respect to the optical axis) that proceeds substantially straight from the first illumination portion 6574 to the front side is incident, and the other light is not incident. Can be prevented.

  The light thus entered easily travels to the front side inside the thick wall of the transparent tubular member 6521, and even when reflected at the boundary, the angle formed by the transparent tubular member 6521 and the light direction is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent light from being weakened before reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521.

  The lengthwise dimension of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be about twice the dimension in the widthwise direction. Therefore, with respect to the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illuminating unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared with the case where the thickness direction of the surface is described. Can also be incident on the light receiving protruding portion 6521b.

  On the other hand, the back external shape portion 6521a coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b does not abut on the facing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. Thereby, of the light emitted from the first illuminating unit 6574, the light (light having a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) incident from the end face of the back external shape portion 6521a is reflected, and is reflected on the player. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized.

  That is, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the light that passes through the light receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels through the wall thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e as it is, and to cut the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving projection portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle with respect to the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

  The light emitted from the LED of the first illuminating unit 6574 which is not arranged to face the light receiving projecting portion 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light transmitting hole 6521d of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 260). After passing through, the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260) is irradiated. Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, the player can visually recognize it as uniform light.

  Note that the raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closing portion 6521c are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking through the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how the light passing through the transparent tubular member 6521 of the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed will be described. FIG. 264(a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination section 6574, and FIG. 264(b) schematically shows the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that in the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 are appropriately referred to.

  First, as described above, the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, so that the transparent tubular member 6521 passes through (through total reflection) the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521. The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting parts 6574a on the left and right sides) is visually recognized in a shape in which the shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting parts 6574a is enlarged.

  In addition, as described above, since the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, it corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520. Strong light emission (light emission like point light source).

  Here, the inter-light source distance is longer in the strong light-emission arrangement distance L17b in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520 than in the actual inter-arrangement distance L17a of the edge light emitting unit 6574a. Only it can be visually recognized, and the effect of light is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the strong light-emission arrangement distance L17b of visually recognized light is longer than the actual arrangement distance L17a of the edge light emitting unit 6574a. Therefore, the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased. It is difficult to solve even if the LED interval is narrowed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a travels radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent tubular member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving protruding portion 6521b). The light emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlaps with each other, and the intensity of the light visually recognized at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

  Accordingly, even in a portion (between the LEDs) of the first illumination unit 6574 where the LEDs are not arranged, the linear light can be visually recognized in the front view of the light transmission unit 6520 (the imaginary line in FIG. 264(b)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state where the light is visually recognized as a point.

  In particular, the LEDs at the two left and right positions arranged at the lower end of the first illumination section 6574 are arranged at the boundary position between the side surface 6521e1 of the main body cylinder section 6521e and the bottom surface 6521e2 (see FIG. 262(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above the optical axis, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 so that the lower side of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f. Overlap at the left and right center.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), although the LEDs are not arranged at the lower left and right centers of the first illuminating section 6574, the optical transmission unit 6520 can be installed as shown in FIG. 264(b). Through this, line-shaped light can be visually recognized at the lower left and right centers.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while the space for disposing the first illuminating unit 6574 is reduced, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased, and in addition, the light serves as a point. The degree of visual recognition can be weakened, and clear, line-shaped light can be visually recognized.

  It should be noted that when the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior thereof is made invisible by the decorative shape provided on the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so that the light traveling inside the transparent tubular member 6521 can be used. It is difficult to grasp the position where the crosses. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indefinite, it is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect from being lowered.

  Further, when the position where the lights are overlapped is near the tip of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source is arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, it is possible to make an illusion that more LED light sources than the actual number of LEDs are arranged, so that even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The staging effect of staging can be improved.

  The light emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b (four LEDs on the left-right center side of the first illumination portion 6574) arranged inside the transparent tubular member 6521 in the front view is inside the transparent tubular member 6521. Pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521, and in addition, it has a shape (see FIG. 245(b)) of the enlarged hole 6562a that is arranged to face. It travels radially along.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574b is visually recognized as a planar light spreading as a region A17 centered on the LED of the surface light emitting unit 6574b in a front view. Further, the light is diffusely reflected by being applied to the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back surface side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light in a front view.

  That is, the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, which is outside the area (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264(b)) where the light radially emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches, is not limited to the area. The formed area (for example, the area between the area A17 and the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f in the front view) can be brightly illuminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-shaped light and surface-shaped light having different impressions. In addition, it is possible to prevent the boundary from becoming dark by irradiating the boundary between the edge-shaped light and the surface-shaped light with the light diffusely reflected. Therefore, the impression of visible light can be changed stepwise and continuously.

  Here, as the change of the impression of the visually recognized light, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emitting situation such as light and dark or blinking, or a change in the color of light.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The partition unit 6540 visually recognized in front view on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that bulges toward the front side in the front view and the side view as described above. Therefore, the light visually recognized on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left, right, up, and down directions (direction of diffusing with respect to the point on the back surface side).

  Further, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 disposed below the partition unit 6540 on the left and right sides has the front side edge located on the back side toward the left and right outside, and the light passing through the light receiving member 6558 is not attached due to the mounting posture. , In a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction (direction in which the points on the back side are diffused).

  This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the light becomes larger as the player gets closer to the player, as compared with the case where the light is produced only in the mode of advancing the light in the front-rear direction, and the light effect is produced. Can be improved.

  Next, the horizontal rendering device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal rendering device 6700.

  Note that, in FIG. 265, the illustration of the upper rendering device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower dish unit 6400 is omitted, and a direction view from the diagonally right front is illustrated in a state where the horizontal rendering device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a. In FIG. 266, a directional view of the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the diagonally left front is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a rendering device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the metal body 10014a, and divides the vertically long elliptical shape in half. It is formed from the formed shape.

  The horizontal rendering device 6700 is provided with a pair of left and right devices having similar shapes, but since the internal configuration is the same, the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the right side will be described in detail, and the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the left side will be described. The description is omitted.

  In order to visually recognize the front-back stacking relationship at the upper end portion of FIG. 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a cover that covers the front side of the base member 6710 on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a. The units 6730 to 6760 are arranged.

  The fastening of the base member 6710 and the metal body 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body 10014a, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 is inserted into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a for positioning. Then, the fastening screw inserted into the through hole of the metal body 10014a is fastened and fixed in the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base member 6710.

  Of the constituent members of the horizontal rendering device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal rendering device 6700, there is no constituent member that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a except the base member 6710.

  As shown in FIG. 266, on the side toward the game area, the position where the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back surface side end portion of the base member 6710 and the surface position). Has been formed. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is arranged in close proximity to the glass unit 16 in the front-rear direction so as to face it, as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG.

  With this arrangement, the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 can be easily visually recognized. can do.

  267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal rendering device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal rendering device 6700. 267 and 268 show the state where the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 267, on the front surface side of the base member 6710, there is arranged a decorative board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to be capable of emitting light are mounted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a covered manner.

  That is, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4 ), and supports the illumination board 6720 whose emission is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. Mainly includes a light emitting unit including a base member 6710 and a light receiving unit including cover units 6730 to 6760 that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit and makes it visible to the player. .. First, the light emitting unit will be described.

  269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the decorative board 6720, FIG. 269(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a right side of the base member 6710. 269(d) is a plan view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a plan view of FIG. 269(a). It is sectional drawing of the base member 6710 and the electrical decoration board 6720 in a CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line.

  As shown in FIGS. 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710 includes a flat plate-shaped support plate portion 6711 that is arranged to face the decorative substrate 6720 and is arranged on the back side of the decorative substrate 6720. A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting toward the front side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 that are formed outside the illumination board 6720 and are close to the illumination board 6720 in a front view so that fastening screws can be inserted, and two insertion holes 6736 at upper and lower locations. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and a portion of the support plate portion 6711 (step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) that is on the right side of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 (encloses the game area). A plurality of alignment holes 6716 formed vertically as long holes in a region opposite to the window portion (opposite side of the glass unit 16) and a plate shape having a step from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. Mainly includes an outer frame plate portion 6717 extended from the left side of the support plate portion 671, and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extended from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side.

  The protruding end of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is arranged so as to face the back surface portion near the outer shape portion of the decorative substrate 6720, and is in surface contact with the decorative substrate 6720. As a result, a space is provided between the decorative board 6720 and the support plate portion 6711 on the rear surface side except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the decorative board 6720.

  Accordingly, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the decorative substrate 6720 Since it is possible to suppress (low), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects such as malfunction of the decorative board 6720 due to high temperature.

  The positioning protrusion 6713 is a portion for inserting the positioning holes 6722 formed in two places of the decorative board 6720 to align the decorative board 6720 with the base member 6710. That is, the positioning board 6720 is provided with a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning projection 6713 with reference to the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the decoration board 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269(a)). Is set up.

  The insertion hole 6714 includes a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268), and position them. The through holes are formed so that they can be aligned with each other and through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed are inserted.

  The fastening portion 6715 is formed so as to be fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271 ), and into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 6715 at the upper and lower portions.

  The alignment hole 6716 is a hole through which the protruding portions 6743 and 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. In the covering units 6730 to 6760, a pair of thin plate-shaped members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are arranged to face each other on the left and right, and are formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the back side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the back side portion (edge portion).

  Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 is located in a portion (outer shape portion) that can be touched by the player, and a load applied by the player (for example, the player collides with the load). It can be displaced by the load generated by doing). As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear end portion of the thin shape, it deforms when a load is applied to the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction). Or there is a risk of displacement of the base member 6710. In order to prevent this, the number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but this may cause a problem of increasing the number of assembling steps.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing the increase in the number of fixed portions, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are inserted into the plurality of alignment holes 6716 so that the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be inserted into the base member. It is possible to suppress the positional displacement (the lateral displacement) with respect to the 6710.

  In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is arranged close to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712, it is left from the player to the flat plate member 6740. Even if a directional load is applied, the flat plate member 6740 abuts the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 on the surface, and thus the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, the covering units 6730 to 6760 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced from the base member 6710.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal rendering device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly work steps. The main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by including the unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine unevenness is formed in the contact area with the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712, but details will be described later. ..

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged so as to face the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a and is in surface contact with the metal frame portion 10014a to cover (cover) the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the metal main body 10014a.

  The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess portion 6717a that is recessed from some of the alignment holes 6716 along the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717a is provided along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

  The support concave portion 6717a is formed in such a size that it fits with the protruding portion 6743 or is arranged to face each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area where the projecting portion 6743 can be supported can be increased (supported by the surface of the supporting recess 6717a). It is possible to prevent the position of 6740 from being displaced with respect to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported with respect to the base member 6710.

  The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion that is arranged to face the main body bending portion 6751 of the bending plate member 6750, and is formed in a plane shape that faces the game area side (inside).

  The decorative board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has a body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 formed at two locations of the body plate portion 6721, and an arbitrary body plate portion 6721. The LED chip D1 in which a plurality of patterns are mounted is mainly provided.

  The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning protrusion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722, so that the movement in the left/right and up/down directions is restricted, and the movement in the front/back is performed by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). The movement is restricted by being sandwiched between (see).

  Similar chips are mounted on the LED chip D1 in the present embodiment, but as a boundary of the region showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760, in relation to the region shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 269(a). There are two types.

  That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a arranged inside the imaginary line frame shown in FIG. 269(a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b arranged outside the imaginary line frame. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

  Next, the covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the illuminated board 6720 will be described. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730-6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730-6760.

  As is clear from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 by disassembling and showing in FIGS. 270 and 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed of a light-transmissive resin inside and pass through the inside. Is provided with a light receiving member 6730 that is capable of refracting and covers the illuminated substrate 6720 from the front side, and is configured to cover the front thereof with other constituent members.

  272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. 273(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCXLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and FIG. 273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). is there.

  274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274(b) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. is there.

  Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274 is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272(b), the covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively shown for easy understanding.

  The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a light receiving surface portion 6731 that is formed in a flat plate shape with an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720 and that is arranged to face the decorative substrate 6720. An inner extending portion 6732 that extends from the inner edge (left side edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) to the back side and the outer edge of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. (The right side edge in FIG. 274) The outer extending portion 6733 is extended to the back side so as to be bent, and a plurality of ribs (in the present embodiment, protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are formed in a long rib shape). (5 places) long ribs 6734, and a long fin-like extending from the front surface of the front and back of the light receiving surface 6731 and the base ends of the long ribs 6734 (the side to be joined with the light receiving surface 6731). A plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735, a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which fastening screws arranged at the upper and lower ends and fastened to fastening portions 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) are inserted, and A fitting portion 6737 formed of a shape that can be fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the plate member 6750 is mainly provided.

  The light-receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1 and has a decorative pattern with a complicated cut on the back surface side. The decorative pattern is formed with long protrusions arranged along a plurality of concentric circles having different diameters, centering on a portion opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter projection at the position opposite to the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light emitted from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). 275 (see FIG. 275( b )), the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is also inclined (reflects the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 to the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). 275(b)).

  Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is refracted in the vicinity of the shaft portion of the long protrusion and travels to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then the large diameter further away from the shaft of the long protrusion. By refracting at a location and proceeding to the front side, a wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made to emit light.

  Further, on the front surface side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in a front view and has a substantially central portion that bulges to the front surface is formed in a regularly densely arranged manner. The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a surface light emitting portion. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at a position on the front side of D1b.

  By the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the surface light emission of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made stronger or weaker (stepwise strength can be made). That is, since the light is collected on the center side of the recess due to the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a stronger light emission mode compared to other portions.

  The inner extended portion 6732 and the outer extended portion 6733 are configured such that the extended end portions of the inner extended portion 6732 come into contact with the decorative board 6720 in the front-rear direction. While abutting on the decorative substrate 6720, a part of the outside extending portion 6733 that does not abut is formed at the extending end portion.

  That is, the outer extending portion 6733 includes a separating end portion 6733a which is formed so that the extending length is short by about the plate thickness of the decorative substrate 6720 and is separated from the decorative substrate 6720 without coming into contact therewith. In the present embodiment, the separated end portion 6733a can favorably allow air to flow in and out of the region between the decorative substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from being accumulated.

  Further, like the inner extending portion 6732, when the LED chip D1 is in contact with the decorative board 6720 over the entire upper and lower sides, the LED chip D1 arranged so as to project from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the decorative board 6720 is arranged inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the inner extending portion 6732 is increased, the area in which the LED chip D1 is arranged is limited.

  On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extended portion 6733 and the decorative board 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extended portion 6732. Can be placed at. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum arrangement area of the LED chips D1 while sufficiently securing the plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733.

  The left and right wall portions of the outer extending portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extending portion 6732 (on the side opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is densely formed with a protrusion having a semicircular cross section. The concavo-convex shape formed in a manner aligned with is formed. Thereby, the light emitted to the left through the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted (radially spreads), which makes it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

  As will be described later, when a part of the light emitted from the decorative board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, the intensity of the light changes from region to region. That is, in the peripheral position of the end portion of the fin 6735, the light D1m obtained by combining both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized. However, at the position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is better than the light D1p. Is also recognized as strong light (the intensity of light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

  Thereby, the magnitude of the intensity of light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed for each vertically arranged region and visually recognized. Note that the difference in the form of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

  For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 can be changed up and down. It can be visually recognized by changing it for each region arranged in line.

  The long rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting part D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with an equal thickness without tapering in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially linear shape in the rear view and a V-shaped rib 6734b bent in the rear view and formed in a substantially V shape.

  The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where a jagged line is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light from the surface) and is unidirectional. Proceed to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the long ribs 6734 from uniformly emitting light, so that when the horizontal rendering device 6700 is viewed from the left and right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface light emitting portion. It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light emitted from D1b is mixed and visually recognized.

  That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed vertically long and formed as a portion that can be seen in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the light passing through the long rib 6734 from reaching the eyes of the player in a surface emission mode. Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left and right to easily visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two at the top and bottom, and are formed in such a manner that they extend in a direction that inclines toward the vertical center position toward the left side (center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265), and the left end portion 6734a1 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, while the right end 6734a2 is separated from the outer extending portion 6733.

  Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1, while the light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 is outside the extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between and.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and a portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized as darker than that.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the straight rib 6734a passes through the left end 6734a1. The light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only for the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, in the vicinity of the left end portion 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at the position apart from the left end portion 6734a1 (the position between them), the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is recognized. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left and right to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The V-shaped ribs 6734b are arranged at the upper and lower central positions and are connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while the both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly deviated from each other because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged to face the bending position.

  That is, by shifting the position for receiving the light emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a from the intermediate connecting part 6734b1, the light linearly emitted from the edge light emitting part D1a in the front-rear direction (main light) reaches the connecting position. Since it is possible to suppress the incident light, it is possible to reduce the loss of the light that is incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b.

  The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, while the light passing through both end portions 6734b2 is the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of light decreases in the gap between and.

  As a result, the brightness visually recognized near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, a portion visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is visually recognized brightly, and a portion visually recognized through the outer extension portion 6733 is visually recognized as darker than that.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is deteriorated, while the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is formed. The light passing through and entering the inner extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extending portion 6732.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is limited to the light that has entered the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 and is easily visible in the left-right direction. That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is visually recognized in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, and the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is detected at a position (intervening position) away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1. Since it is possible to visually recognize the color and brightness, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the lateral effect device 6700 from the left and right to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

  The fin 6735 is formed so that the thickness thereof decreases from the extending base end toward the tip side, and the tip curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a, and the tip bending fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b. , Is mainly provided.

  The tip curved fin 6735a has curved edges formed on the upper and lower sides, and triangular-wave (notched) notches are densely formed on the left side surface (inner side surface of the front frame 10014) to form a light diffusion section. The right side surface (outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  The tip bending fin 6735b is provided with an inclined surface whose extended tip inclines toward the back side from the upper and lower end portions toward the upper and lower centers and intersects with the front side of the bent position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. The triangular wave-shaped (jagged shape) notches are densely formed on the inner surface 10014) to form a light diffusion portion, and the right side surface (outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

  The fins 6735 are formed so that the extending length becomes shorter toward the left side. Particularly, in the tip curved fin 6735a, since the end portion on the left surface side is coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front end portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (mainly Light) is emitted from the fin 6735 in the vicinity of the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, the light can reach the inner extended portion 6732 side (back side, root side), and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

  In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are joined behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is joined to the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the inner rib is extended by light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734. The installation portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the elongated rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to produce a light emission effect. , It is possible to improve the effect of light emission effect.

  It should be noted that this jagged shape is described as processing performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

  Due to the difference in the formation between the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735, the passage mode of light passing through the side surface can be changed. That is, the surface emission effect of the notch makes it possible to visually recognize the light passing through the left side surface as uniform light, while the light passing through the right side surface does not have the surface emission effect, so the light passing through the right side surface is passed. The generated light can be visually recognized as local light. Further, it goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions that reinforce the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

  One insertion hole 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two positions are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  As a result, when the positional relationship between the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is deviated (for example, due to vibration by a player's operation or vibration due to opening/closing of the front frame 10014). Since the maintenance work for returning the position to (case) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal rendering device 6700, the maintainability can be improved (the difficulty level is low and the time is shortened).

  The fitting portion 6737 is provided in a recessed shape in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns and positions the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. And a single recess 6737a is provided so as to be further recessed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of locations where the recesses 6737a are disposed (locations where the fastening portions 6753 are disposed) on the side of the inner extending portion 6732 (where the fastening portions 6753 are disposed) is limited (decreased) to the light receiving member 6730. The positional deviation and the positional deviation with respect to the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

  Here, in the case of fastening and fixing the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal rendering device 6700, the fastening screw does not allow light to pass therethrough, and thus the more fastening points there are, the more likely shadows are to occur. Therefore, even if the surface area of the horizontal rendering device 6700 is formed to be large, the light is divided at the fastening points, and the rendering effect of the light rendering may be reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force may be reduced, and there is a possibility that the lateral effect device 6700 may be deformed from the root due to the load applied by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the fastening force is limited to the concave portion 6737a, but the fitting force 6737 and the decorative protruding portion 6571a (see FIG. 276) are fitted to each other to maintain the supporting force. ing.

  As a result, the fastening portion of the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the side of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) (in the present embodiment, is disposed between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light rendering portion and the decorative board 6720). It is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal rendering device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points).

  Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed so as to be able to travel to the back side via the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

  275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal rendering device 6700 taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and FIG. 275(b) is shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 275(a), the concave portion 6737a is arranged in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and the striped decorative portion 6751e is formed via the fastening portion 6753 fitted into the recess 6737a. It is formed so that light can travel to the back side of the main body curved portion 6751. That is, the light is formed so as to be able to travel toward the back surface side (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction) of the illuminated substrate 6720.

  Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a place where the fastening screw is fastened, and it is considered unsuitable for light emission production because the fastening screw is likely to be shaded, but in the present embodiment, intermediate coupling is provided on both upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw up and down, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by advancing the light from the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

  In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is enlarged and shown. Of the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light receiving surface portion 6731 while gently refracting and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. At that time, it is further refracted and condensed. Accordingly, the emission intensity of light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be increased.

  As described above, in the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of light increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases, with the decorative recessed portion 6731a whose light intensity is increased by condensing. It is set to be low.

  At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side as compared with the case where the surface emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as a single item. The intensity of the visible light can be increased as compared with the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  That is, by the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b from a light having a high intensity (a light visible in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731a) even when the light is directly viewed. The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to light having a lower intensity than that of directly seeing the light, and the light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  Referring back to FIG. 270, a member that covers the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member having an open rear side is provided. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 that form the cup-shaped member will be described.

  276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. Is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760.

  After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left-right direction and joined by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, whereby the members are fixed inseparably.

  The flat plate member 6740 is a member that is made of a colorless transparent light-transmissive resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741. A fitted plate portion 6742 that is a flat plate portion that is parallelly moved to the left from the flat surface and that is connected to the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741 with a step, and a rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6741. A plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear to the rear side, a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions separated from the projecting portions 6743 and configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the rear side, and the main body The plate portion 6741 mainly includes a plurality of insertion holes 6745 that are formed with a size that allows a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough.

  The main body plate portion 6741 is provided with a decorative shape that is recessed from the left side surface to the left side, and in correspondence with the recessed portion, is protruded from the right side surface to the right side. , The right side surface of the main body plate portion 6741.

  The concavo-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in a manner of being filled with hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper to the left, and produces an action similar to that of a reflection plate. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that external force is applied. It is possible to prevent it from cracking or splashing. Further, it is possible to reduce the contact friction when sliding the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 to the base member 6710 to slide them.

  Therefore, after the horizontal rendering device 6700 is attached to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a player gives an impact or a load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By making it difficult, it is possible to improve the durability and facilitate the assembling of the lateral effect device 6700.

  The fitted plate portion 6742 is formed on the right side surface in a direction along the groove portion 6742a in a step between a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as narrow grooves extending in the front-rear direction and the main body plate portion 6741. And a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described later in detail.

  The protruding portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is an insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269(a)). It is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through.

  Further, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions that are close to the outside of the right edges of the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, since the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269(a) and 274(b)), the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member for the flat plate member 6740 are arranged. The position shift of 6730 can be suppressed.

  The insertion holes 6745 are through holes into which fastening screws to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are provided at four positions above and below. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, the fixing force is insufficient even when the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small. Can be avoided.

  The curved plate member 6750 is arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, is curved so as to swell to the left as it goes to the rear side, is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, and is transparent and colorless and transparent. Curving portion 6751 formed of a flexible resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner side surface, and a curving plate portion arranged in parallel with the curving portion 6751 to the right side, the front side of the curving portion 6751. Corresponding to the fitted plate portion 6752 that is connected to the fitted plate portion 6742 at a stepped edge and is arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 that allows fastening screws to be screwed from the back side, and the insertion hole 6745. A plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein, and a plurality of insertion holes 6755 formed in the front side edge portion of the main body curved portion 6751 so that the fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction. Mainly provided are a plurality of insertion holes 6756 formed in the front side edge of the fitted plate portion 6752 so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction.

  The main body curving portion 6751 has a triangular shape that tapers toward the rear side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the upper and lower center, and a decorative projecting portion 6751a that projects from the right side surface to the right side, and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b formed in the front-rear direction in the front side portion, a flat partition portion 6751c partitioning the striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed with a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at a vertical center position. And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

  The decorative protruding portion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the bending plate member 6750.

  Accordingly, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion for aligning with the light receiving member 6730. Accordingly, even if the fastening portion 6753 is provided (only a few) in the upper and lower central portions as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling.

  The flat partition 6751c is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge of the curved tip fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-rear direction and the side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat partition 6751c, so that the light remains clear and visible. Can be made

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions defined by the flat partition 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

  The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that matches the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) in the front-back direction and the side view. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is visually recognized as clear light. Can be made

  On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the side surface, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

  Like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 has a step between the main body curved portion 6751 and a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as thin grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface. And a front-rear direction hole 6752b formed in a direction along the groove 6752a. The groove 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, which will be described in detail later.

  The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged so as to enter the recess of the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 ( a) and FIG. 274 (b)), it is possible to suppress the positional displacement of the decorative board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the bending plate member 6750.

  The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed, and is provided at a position (4 places) corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since the plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

  On the other hand, since the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the bending plate member 6750 to be arranged is reduced, the bending plate member 6750 is reduced. It is possible to suppress wobbling. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, and the number of places where the light is blocked by the fastening screws can be reduced. As a result, the light emission effect can be visually recognized without the light being blocked. It is possible to secure a large area.

  The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which a fastening screw can be inserted from the back side, and guide walls 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. Formed (see FIG. 277).

  The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed such that the inner side surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 is arranged to face the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). To be done. Accordingly, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be regulated by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 is careless. It can be prevented from being removed.

  The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth in a manner along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a main body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a curved plate member 6750 that is bent and formed at the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6761. A curved plate portion 6762 that is a curved plate portion that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and two positions that are vertically separated from the upper and lower center position by substantially the same distance, and extend to the left rear of the curved plate portion 6762. A plurality of connecting extension portions 6763 that are connected at the ends and a plurality of fastening screws that are disposed on the back surface of the bending plate portion 6762 and that are inserted into the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the bending plate member 6750 can be screwed. A fastening portion 6764 and a base end fastening portion formed at the rear end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and into which a fastening screw inserted into an insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed. 6765 (see FIG. 279) and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 that project from the rear end portion of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the rear surface.

  The main body plate portion 6761 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a plurality of protruding ribs 6761a.

  The protruding rib 6761a is formed so as to project rearward from the rear side edge of the main body plate 6761, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and the movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. This can prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced leftward with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (FIG. 265).

  The curved plate portion 6762 is configured to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, and protrudes rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a.

  The protruding rib 6762a is formed so as to project rearward from the rear side edge portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and this projecting portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state (FIG. 265) of the horizontal rendering device 6700.

  The connecting extension part 6763 is provided with a protruding rib 6763a protruding rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

  The protruding rib 6763a is formed so as to project rearward from the rear side edge portion at the connecting position of the connecting extension portion 6763, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged so as to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. This can prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state (FIG. 265) of the horizontal rendering device 6700.

  As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state (see FIG. 265) of the lateral effect device 6700, whereby the curved plate member 6750 is provided. It is possible to prevent careless removal.

  In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the lateral movement of the curved plate member 6750. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear holes 6751b, 6752b, and the curved plate member 6750 is controlled by the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall portions 6755a, 6756a. The movement of the 6750 to the left is restricted. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

  The proximal end fastening portion 6765 is disposed on the back side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 can be screwed into the proximal end fastening portion 6765. Formed in. That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

  The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. Further, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 are the illumination board 6720 for the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or the upper edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in front view, The position shift of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

  280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the decorative substrate 6720, and the light-receiving member 6730 taken along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b), and FIG. 280(b) is CCLXXXb in FIG. 272(b). FIG. 280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the decorative substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along line −CCLXXXb; FIG. 280(c) is the base member 6710, the decorative substrate 6720, and light received at line CCLXXXc−CCLXXXc of FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 280(a), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is suppressed to about the height at which the LED chip D1 rises from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can be made incident on the long rib 6734 without leaking, and the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to easily advance to the front side. ..

  Further, in the place where the long rib 6734 is not arranged, the front-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or more than the front-back width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. Therefore, it is possible to widen the area as a place where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are premised on the assumption that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is radially emitted. It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize it by distinguishing it from the light.

  That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel as line-shaped clear light that travels by being totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or through the long rib 6734. On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized as light that brightens a small-scale area, and the uniform light (pale light) is transmitted through the light receiving surface portion 6731 and the light refracting surface portion of the inner extending portion 6732. ).

  As a result, as compared with the conventional production mode in which a lens that collects the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is arranged to face the illumination board 6720 and the bright light is visually recognized in a small area, the present embodiment. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the decorative substrate 6720, while visually recognizing glittering light (line-shaped light) in a small area. Then, these different lights can easily perform an effect of visually recognizing only one or both of them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in light production.

  Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is used for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b are By changing the tint and the brightness, the light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness) can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is such that the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is the surface position in the front-rear direction with the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 10014). The inner surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal line of the left side surface does not face directly beside (the direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illuminated substrate 6720, that is, the direction orthogonal to the front-back direction), but the direction having a component facing the front side. Turn to. Thus, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 280(c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed to the inner extending portion 6732. Can be progressed. The progress of this light will be described using a schematic diagram.

  FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of the base member 6710, the illumination substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 that schematically shows the cross section of FIG. 280(a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e showing the light emitted from the edge light emitting section D1a are schematically illustrated.

  Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the surface of the decorative substrate 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In the present embodiment, the arrival position after that is different depending on the traveling direction of light, so that the following description will be made in order.

  An arrow L23a indicates a traveling direction of light that is incident on the end portion of the long rib 6734, travels by being totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end portion of the fin 6735. . The light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and travels, so compared with the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. , Can reduce the energy loss of light. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the light of sufficient brightness.

  An arrow L23b indicates a traveling direction of light emitted from the side surface on the left side (inside the front frame 10014) before reaching the front end portion of the fin 6735. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in a surface emission mode.

  An arrow L23c indicates a traveling direction of light which passes through the long rib 6734 and directly advances to the inner extending portion 6732 and is emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light does not undergo refraction at the end surface after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be viewed brightly. Further, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

  The arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of the reflected light that cannot travel to the inside of the fin 6735 after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the coupling position of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed such that its length in the thickness direction is shorter than that of the long rib 6734 toward the front side, and the left side surface (the inner side surface of the front frame 10014) is Since the notched concave portion is formed, the long rib 6734 is partially protruded from the fin 6735 in the front-back direction.

  Therefore, even light that travels in the front-back direction cannot enter the fin 6735 at all of the coupling positions of the long rib 6734 and the light-receiving surface portion 6731, and a portion (particularly, the long rib 6735) can be entered. In the area (near the left side surface of 6734), entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and light reaching this area is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

  After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is notched, light is emitted in a surface emitting manner.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes light that travels to the rear surface side of the decorative substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rear side portion of the decorative substrate 6720 can be made to emit light by the decorative substrate 6720 including the LED chip D1 for irradiating the front surface with light on the front side. Light can be propagated to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

  Then, the inner surface of the rear-side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are vertically arranged in rear view (see FIG. 276). Accordingly, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear side end of the bending plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner in the vertical direction, and the glass unit 16 can be illuminated brightly by this light.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform light production by combining the light emitted toward the glass unit 16 from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 and the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d, so that the light production is performed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  According to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle from the axis X23, but is indicated by the arrow L23. When the light reaches the inner extending portion 6732, it is visually recognized as light having substantially the same brightness because energy of the transmitted light is lost when reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. In this way, the difference in brightness of light depending on the irradiation direction can be reduced, and the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 can be easily made uniform in the front and rear.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 disposed on the left side, most of the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the right side is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or a similar shape). As a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long rib 6734 (projection to the back surface) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the mode of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

  This adjustment is an adjustment for ensuring the visibility of the player. That is, it is the intention to maintain the effect produced by advancing the light on the fin 6735 even on the left side, but to suppress the light from advancing to the game area side by the light advancing on the long rib 6734.

  That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball on the left side of the game area, where the launch ball enters the game area, the intensity of light emitted from the horizontal rendering device 6700 to the inside (game area side) is reduced. Is aimed at. This makes it difficult to visually confirm the launch ball due to the dazzling light effect, and to prevent difficulty in adjusting the launch intensity and confirming the launch of the game ball in advance.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, a ball fired by right-handing (the strongest firing intensity) almost flows down, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize it in order to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. .. In addition, since a large number of game balls gathered in a short time will flow down continuously in a narrow place, by irradiating that place with light and reflecting it on the game ball, the effect effect of the production using light Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal rendering device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side as in the present embodiment. It is possible to improve the effect of production.

  The arrow L23e is the light emitted in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and is the light (light that does not enter the long rib 6734) emitted in the direction in which the angle with the axis X23 is large. It shows the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner side surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to perform surface emission, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Due to the fact that it is extended to the position, the intensity of the light traveling at the arrow L23e is very small in the first place, so it can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being lowered by the light traveling along the arrow L23e being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

  Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the recess 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similar to the contents described above with respect to the arrows L23c and L23d, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left side surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both walls of the recess 6737a.

  The recessed portion 6737a is configured as a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753. Therefore, the fastening screw is lighted near the recessed portion 6737a. Since the light is blocked, the effect of the light emission effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protruding portion 6751a are matched with each other, it is possible to perform sufficient alignment (prevention of displacement), and therefore, the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and it is possible to reduce the number of places where the effect of light emission effect is reduced.

  In addition, the concave portion 6737a is disposed near the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extending portion 6732. It prevents the area from getting too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the effect of the light emission effect.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the decorative board 6570 is arranged on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 in the upper part of the front frame 10014 has been described, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment is the right side of the operation device 10300. By disposing the rendering device 18800 including the illuminated substrate 18830 below, it is possible to execute the light emission rendering even in the lower portion of the front frame 18014. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 is different from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is provided with a rendering device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the other configurations are the same, so the rendering Only the device 18800 will be described, and description of other components will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a device for light emission effect in which the back side and the upper surface side of the lower plate unit 6400 are combined with the covering base member 6410, and is the operation device 10300. It is arranged between the operating handle 51.

  This effect device 18800 is configured so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect due to structural ingenuity. Next, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe the structural improvement.

  FIG. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCXLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284(b) is a decorative board 18830 of the rendering device 18800 in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. Note that FIG. 284(b) schematically illustrates a support mode of the decorative board 18830.

  As shown in FIG. 284(a), the rendering device 18800 is arranged on the front side of the joining base member 18810 joined to the lower plate unit 6400 and the joining base member 18810 with a planar gap. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the joining base member 18810, an illumination board 18830 arranged in a gap between the joining foundation member 18810 and the intermediate fastening member 18820, and the illumination board 18830. The light radiated from the LED chip D1 is formed so that it can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18850 attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840. And mainly.

  The coupling base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface in which a wall surface on the front side, which is arranged to face the decorative substrate 18830, is inclined downward toward the rear side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is the same as the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the swinging device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before the operation. It is formed with an inclination angle that is parallel to the inclined surface.

  The decorative substrate 18830 is arranged parallel to the front wall surface of the coupling base member 18810. Therefore, the vibrating direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate 18830. The decorative substrate 18830 mainly includes the LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 formed in a vertically long shape, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates upward biasing force.

  The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the decorative substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixed portion 18821 is designed as a length (allowable length) at which the decorative substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

  The LED chips D1 are arranged on the front side of the decorative substrate 18830 in an arbitrary pattern (in the present embodiment, the apex of a pentagon) and emit light in the normal direction of the surface of the decorative substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a direction in which it descends and slopes toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light to the direction along the front-rear direction.

  That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the line of sight of the player). Even in the direction away from), it is possible to prevent the effect of the light effect from decreasing.

  The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material, and has a plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be able to close the front opening of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-shaped portion from the back surface of the plate-shaped portion 18841. And a plurality of extending plate portions 18842 that are extended to.

  The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape in which the front side is opened from a resin material having low light transmittance, and has a plurality of fixing portions that are protruded in a cylindrical shape toward the coupling base member 18810 side and are fastened and fixed to the coupling base member 18810. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 formed in the bottom portion on the rear surface side at positions and sizes that can receive the extended plate portion 18842.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the left-right direction because the resin mold withdrawing direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged on the left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extended plate portion 18842. Accordingly, the extended plate portion 18842 can be formed as upper and lower three plate portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also formed in the upper and lower portions at different positions.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed to have a gently curved curved plate shape, although it starts to extend along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841. The radius of curvature of the curvature can be set arbitrarily, but in the present embodiment, the curvature is such that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the decorative substrate 18830 reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841. It is designed with a curved shape with a large radius. This makes it easier for the light incident on the extended tip (back side end) of the extended plate portion 18842 to reach the plate-shaped portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

  The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage in a portion where light production is not desired on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840, and can be realized in various modes. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

  In the present embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that is formed so that it can be fitted from the front side, and the bottom of the cup arranged on the front side has a pentagonal shape based on the arrangement of the LED chips D1. A plurality of through holes 18851 are formed at the apex positions of the holes for light passage.

  The arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and similar shapes having slightly different sizes can be used, as described above. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the layout of the through holes 18851 than the layout of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that matches the base position of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

  The operation of rendering device 18800 will be described. As described above, the decorative board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged with the allowable width of the elongated hole 18831, and the first displacement direction is the operation direction. The vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300 coincides with the vibration direction Y17a.

  That is, when the operating device 10300 produces a vibration effect, the electric decoration substrate 18830 is slidable by the vibration. When the decorative substrate 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 is displaced, and thus the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is less likely to enter the extended plate portion 18842.

  In this case, even when the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extended plate portion 18842, so that the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark. That is, it is not possible to know whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first displacement direction.

  In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the decorative substrate 18830 is suppressed, and the decorative substrate 18830 is returned to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the leaf spring 18832. At the initial position of the decorative substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear side end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged so as to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate portion 18842 and then undergoes total reflection. It is formed so that it can proceed to the front side.

  That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark) while the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed to operate. It is possible to visually recognize the through hole 18851 brightly.

  Therefore, when the vibration effect is being performed and when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. You can Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big hit occurs or when a game state advantageous to the player is entered (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be improved.

  As a result, the player's motivation to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be increased, and when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's motivation to participate is increased and the player is actually invited. The swinging operation member 10310 can be operated.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the decorative substrate 18830 is arranged outside the covering base member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative substrate 18830 may be disposed so as to penetrate the covering base member 6410 and enter the inside, and may be in contact with the operation device 10300.

  In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the decorative substrate 18830, and the decorative substrate 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. Can be configured as.

  In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the pressing instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed in (pushed) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light in a front view.

  In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pushed in (pushed) at a timing other than the notification, it is possible to easily miss the notification advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pushing operation to the lens member 10317 at the timing other than the timing at which the pushing instruction is issued, the operating device 10300 may fail early, or the operating device may be operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It can suppress nuisance.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be split left and right is described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the 19th embodiment are formed so as to be split front and back. There is. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 19322 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configurations of the covers 19321 and 19322 are substantially the same as those of the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and will be described mainly as an example in which the dividing direction is changed.

  The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be dividable along a dividing surface that coincides with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted through insertion holes 19321a formed in the upper cover 19321 in a direction orthogonal to the dividing surface, and the lower side. The cover 19322 is formed so that it can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

  Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the pre-operation vibrating device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact of vibration.

  Further, in the swing operation member 10310, since the vibration direction Y17a is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw. Since the fastening direction is orthogonal to the fastening direction in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 286. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in a sectional view and the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described. The protrusion-shaped portion 16413 and the recess-shaped portion 16414 in the embodiment are formed such that the inclination is slightly closer to the vertical direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line in FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are compared with those of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described in the seventeenth embodiment. And is set toward the top and bottom.

  In addition, the lower end of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) ( The recessed base end) is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  The hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is brought into contact with and supported by the base end portion (the upper surface of the main body portion 6411) of the recessed shape portion 16414, and the main body portion at that supporting position. Since it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness in the up-down direction (vertical direction) of 6411, it is possible to suppress deformation of the main body section 6411 due to a load when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) is operated.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the inclinations of the left and right end portions are changed as compared with the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there may be no inclination, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in cross section). Even in this case, the support thickness of the main body 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 are formed so as to be inclined in an inverted C shape in cross section, the direction in which the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 deform when an external force is applied is set to the left and right center Can be easily turned to. As a result, the degree of fatigue given by an external force can be reduced as compared with the case of being deformable in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 is early damaged. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 is unnecessary is explained, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the 21st embodiment is vibrated by the conduction of electricity. It is equipped with a device 21500, and it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower plate unit 21400. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower plate unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. Note that in FIG. 287, the upper half portion of the front frame 10014 is omitted, and the lower dish unit 21400 and the operating device 10300 are disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and then viewed from the rear side. ..

  Further, for ease of understanding, an assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening positions is illustrated by an imaginary line, and further, electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 so as to be able to supply electricity. The positional relationship between the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower plate unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 287, the bottom member 21De, which is a design change of the above-mentioned bottom member De, is fastened and fixed to the lower bottom side of the operating device 10300. The bottom member 21De includes an overhanging portion De3 that is formed to overhang to the right in addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above.

  The overhang portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibration device 21500 and a function of restricting the displacement of the electric wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged so as to crawl below the overhanging portion De3, so that the electric wiring 21513 and the right front cover are removed when the lower plate unit 21400 is removed for maintenance. It is possible to prevent rubbing with 10322.

  The bulging portion De3 is formed such that the back side is inclined in a manner that the width becomes narrower toward the bulging end, while the front side forms a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, it is possible to form a gap between the metal main body 10014a and the rear surface of the overhanging portion De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhanging portion De3.

  This gap has a length required for removing the lower tray unit 21400 for maintenance, that is, an electric wire 21513 (a length for filling the distance that the lower tray unit 21400 separates from the metal main body portion 10014a). Is effectively used as an area to be slackened and arranged when it is not removed (when it is fastened and fixed to the metal body 10014a). As a result, compared to a case where the electric wiring 21513 is tightly arranged when the lower plate unit 21400 is not removed, the load applied to the electric wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 287, the operation handle 51 is internally fitted and supported by the handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower tray unit 21400 overlap each other in the front and back, but the entire left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 is covered. The fastening portion is not formed, and the coupling with the lower tray unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

  Therefore, the lower plate unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

  As a result, the right edge of the lower plate unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction as compared with the case where the right edge of the lower plate unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the left edge portion of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500 described later from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

  That is, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower plate unit 21400 to the player. For example, the vibration transmission path transmitted to the player who holds the operation handle 51 is not the path through the operation handle 51, but the lower plate unit with which the finger or arm of the player who holds the operation handle 51 comes into contact. It is possible to limit the route to the right side surface portion of 21400.

  FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower plate unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower plate unit 21400. In FIGS. 288 and 289, the covering base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the portion corresponding to the fixing position of the vibrating device 21500 are illustrated in phantom lines in association with each other.

  In addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above, the covering base member 21410 includes a plurality of members (in the present embodiment, a pair of pairs in which a fastening screw can be screwed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411). ) Fastening portion 21415. A fastening screw inserted into a pair of upper and lower insertion portions 21535 arranged on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21415. That is, the insertion portion 21535 on the right side is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410.

  The lower dish forming member 21420 includes, in addition to the configuration of the lower dish forming member 6420 described above, a support hole 21428 that is formed in a plate-shaped portion that extends upward from the upper surface of the front vertical elongated portion 6426c in the front-rear direction. The fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500, is inserted into the support hole 21428.

  The V-shaped design member 21450, in addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, is columnarly projected to the back side as an alternative to the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 227), and a fastening screw can be screwed therein. A fastening portion 21457 that is formed and a connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 that is formed in a plate shape and that connects the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452 are provided.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed and fixed. That is, the insertion portion 21535 on the left side is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

  Therefore, the vibration device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

  Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhanging fastening portions 6454 disposed at the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via the intermediate member. Therefore, it is structurally hard as compared with the covering base member 21410 which is configured in a substantially bag shape that opens to the rear surface side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a mainly at the rear surface side edge portion.

  That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions on the lower end and the left end on the back side, while the number of fastening positions on the upper and right edges is suppressed (or not The number is limited to a small number, and since it is formed in a thin, substantially box-shaped (generally bag-shaped) structure, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance) especially at the right edge.

  Further, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the upper edge of the front surface of the covering base member 21410, the vertical (vertical) displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. The degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). As a result, by displacing the covering base member 21410, for example, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lower tray 50 is vertically displaced and the balls stored in the lower tray 50 bounce.

  According to the present embodiment, by virtue of the V-shaped design member 21450 that is rigidly configured as a base (reference), the covering base member 21410 that is more flexible (higher in displacement freedom) than the V-shaped design member 21450 is vibrated. Therefore, the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration) by driving the vibrating device 21500.

  In addition, since it is possible to suppress vibration transmission to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420, the operating device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate. It can be said that the device 21500 is prevented from vibrating due to the vibration, and also from this fact, the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration) by driving the vibrating device 21500.

  The connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 described later. Accordingly, the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other over the longitudinal direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541, and a large load generation area can be secured. It is possible to avoid stress concentration (during pressing).

  In this embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is configured to have a dimensional relationship in which the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 abuts (is pressed against) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, it is possible to receive vibration through at least the contact position between the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458.

  This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. That is, compared with the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the deviation from the design size of each member may be accumulated, as compared with the case where the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member. The gap is likely to be large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the vibration transmission strength.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the possibility that the dimensional deviation may occur, no matter how the dimensional deviation occurs (no matter what size is within the large or small limit value), the shell The bulging portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (when the gap is short, the shell-shaped bulging portion 21541 contacts while deforming so as to be crushed), so that the shell-like shape is stable. The overhang portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, the vibration can be stably received.

  In the present embodiment, the abutting direction of the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 is set in the front-rear direction similarly to the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even when the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 should be slidably displaced with respect to the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pushing displacement from being transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration device 21500 from being pushed down by the operation of the operation device 10300.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the location where the vibrating device 21500 is disposed is a flexible location of the covering base member 21410, so the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 is destroyed and penetrates into the interior (for example, a thin metal wire). It is a place that is easily broken during fraudulent acts. That is, in the present embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at a place where a person who commits an illegal act can easily select the entry route.

  Therefore, when the covering foundation member 21410 is broken, the vibrating device 21500 may be destroyed or disconnected at the same time, and in this case, the electrical connection to the vibrating device 21500 is cut off. By controlling this so as to output an error signal when the voice lamp control device 113 detects it, it is possible to detect an illegal act at an early stage.

  Further, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided instead of the vibrating device 21500. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is intentionally provided so that the vibrating device does not vibrate. It can be used for production. That is, the vibrating device 21500 can be used both for vibrating and for detecting fraud (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), so that the installation space of the device can be suppressed.

  FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device 21500. As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration when the eccentric weight 21512 is controlled to rotate, and a soft resin material (silicon resin or the like). And a covering member 21520 that covers the vibration motor 21510 and a material that is harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the back side. The cover member 21530 is formed in a shape that allows the cover member 21530 and a counter plate member 21540 having a flat plate shape and arranged to face the cover member 21530 with the covering member 21520 interposed therebetween.

  The covering cover member 21530 and the counter plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround the front and rear, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the covering cover 21530 includes a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) insertion holes 21532 through which the threaded portions of the fastening screws can be inserted, and the counter plate member 21540 has the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 21532 screwed therein. A plurality of fastening portions 21542 that can be formed are provided. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the covering cover member 21530 and the counter plate member 21540 will be described in detail.

  292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. is there. In FIG. 294, a perspective view of the covering member 21520 as viewed in a diagonally downward upper direction is illustrated.

  The vibration motor 21510 includes a main body portion 21511 whose rotation is controlled by energization, an eccentric weight 21512 which is fixed to the shaft portion and has a center of gravity at a position different from the shaft portion, and which has a fan shape in a top view, and a lower surface of the main body portion 21511. Electrical wiring 21513 extending downward from (to be electrically connected to terminals formed on the lower surface).

  The covering member 21520 includes a tubular main body portion 21521 formed in an inner tubular shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the tubular main body portion 21521. Formed of a pair of protrusions 21522, a plate-shaped protrusion 21523 projecting in a plate shape in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the tubular main body 21521, and a bottom view length from the lower surface of the tubular main body 21521. And a projecting portion 21524 having a circular shape and projecting downward.

  The overhang portion 21524 is formed in an oval shape having a size that surrounds the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electric wiring 21513 in a bottom view, and the upper surface side is recessed so as to receive the electric wiring 21513.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the overhanging portion 21524 has a recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the tubular main body portion 21521 and a vertical direction in a region sandwiched by the recessed portion 21524a. A wiring through hole 21524b to be drilled and a pair of preliminary holes 21524c to be vertically drilled at a position opposite to the wiring through hole 21524b sandwiching the recessed portion 21524a are provided.

  With the above configuration, the electric wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held by the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in the present embodiment, the covering member 21520 can be provided with a function of preventing the electric wiring 21513 from hanging down due to its own weight, a function of bundling the electric wiring 21513, and a function of guiding the electric wiring 21513. As a result, the number of necessary binding bands can be reduced, and the material cost and the manufacturing man-hour can be reduced.

  In addition, since a gap is created between the covering cover 21530 and the facing plate portion 21540 in a state where the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is possible to prevent a person who performs an assembling operation from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electric wiring 21513, as compared with the case where the binding band is separately prepared and the electric wiring 21513 is held.

  In this embodiment, the electric wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228, and vibration is controlled by the control signal transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even when the electric wiring 21513 is about to come out of the main body portion 21511, by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c and pushing the electric wiring 21513, the electric wiring 21513 can be pushed into the main body portion 21511 side. it can. This makes it possible to prevent the electric wiring 21513 from falling off the main body portion 21511.

  In this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is arranged in the lower plate unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). The lower plate unit 21400 is formed so as to be detachable from the metal main body 10014a. Therefore, if an operator who performs maintenance work accidentally separates the lower plate unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 will be disconnected. Excessive load may be applied and the wire may break. Further, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 occurs, an excessive load is applied to the electric wiring 21513, which may cause the disconnection.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projecting portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 is excessive. It is possible to prevent the displacement.

  Further, since the electric wiring 21513 having a length held by the recessed portion 21524a is secured in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 21513 from being broken by this length. You can (can afford). Further, even if a load is applied to the electric wire 21513, the electric wire 21513 is held in the recessed portion 21524a in the longitudinal direction (that is, the protruding portion 21524 of the protruding portion 21524), not in the connecting direction of the electric wire 21513 and the main body portion 21511. Since the load is applied along the longitudinal direction), it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 21513 from falling off the main body portion 21511.

  In addition, as described above, even when the electric wiring 21513 has fallen out of the main body portion 21511, the electric wiring 21513 can be easily reconnected to the main body portion 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the preliminary hole 21524c. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the maintenance work including the step of removing the lower plate unit 21400.

  In the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electric wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, at the same time as the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed, so that the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

  FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. Note that in the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 includes a main body portion 21531 forming a frame whose front side and lower side are opened, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and a receiving concave portion 21533 which is provided on the front side of the main body portion 21531 and receives the vibration motor 21510. A plurality of ridges 21534 protruding inward from the left and right inner side surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extending in the front-rear direction, and bored in the front-rear direction at upper and lower positions of the insertion hole 21532. The cover base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289) are provided with a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws can be fastened.

  The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body that are arranged such that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is located at the center position in the left-right direction. And a bearing receiving concave portion 21533c for connecting the receiving concave portion 21533b.

  The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed by an extra length on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c as compared to the left side. On the contrary, the protruding portion 21534 is protruded by an extra length on the right side as compared with the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 is substantially left and right with respect to the bearing recessed portion 21533c. They are arranged in symmetrical positions.

  Accordingly, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, when the vibration motor 21510 is in the non-excited state (stopped state), the covering member 21520 is held by the protruding tip of the protrusion 21534, while in the excited state (vibration state) of the vibration motor 21510, Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be coped with by a deep recess formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged in parallel vertically). As a result, it is possible to prevent the covering cover member 21530 from being overloaded and improve the durability of the covering cover member 21530.

  Since the ridge portion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 supported by contacting the ridge portion 21534 to the left and right is affected by the engagement and the bite of the ridge portion 21534. Therefore, it easily occurs in the front, rear, left, and right (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, even in a configuration in which the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed on the upper end of the main body 21511, and the main body 21511 tends to tilt about the lower end as a fulcrum when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed. The displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected horizontally.

  A mode in which the protruding length of the protruding portion 21534 increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (rear surface side) formed in a flat plate shape having a vertical width that is half the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portion of the main body portion 21531 (covering). Since the cover member 21520 is formed so as to follow the outer shape of the member 21520, the covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right sides and the back side.

  In addition, the protruding portion 21534 is provided with an inner inclined portion 21534a that rises toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b from the closest protruding lower portion 21534 below the intermediate lower surface 21531b forming the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.

  The distance between the back sloped portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 immediately above it is narrowed toward the rear side. Therefore, as compared with the case where the interval between the upper and lower ridges 21534 is not narrowed, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced to the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the back sloped portion is deformed. It is possible to increase the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the 21534a and the protruding portion 21534 immediately above. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from excessively displacing to the back side.

  The ridge portions 21534 are not completely symmetrically arranged, but are partially displaced vertically. This makes it easier to avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from the left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, as compared with the case where the protruding portions 21534 are arranged at completely symmetrical positions. The compression load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

  The ridges 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520.

  The formation of the lower half of the rear side wall of the main body 21531 is omitted. Therefore, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, the displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half portion of the main body portion 21531, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half portion of the main body portion 21531.

  Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the back side due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 restricted by the upper half of the main body 21531 and the lower half of which the displacement is allowed. Can be deformed so as to proceed (flow) to the area opened in the lower half of the main body portion 21531, and serve to improve the vibration effect of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later in detail.

  The plate-shaped protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 has a right side portion supported from below by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530. The left side portion is open to the covering cover member 21530 and is supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the counter plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). Accordingly, in addition to being able to support the own weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, it is possible to configure an open portion that is accessible from the outside on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

  That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower part from the right rear side, and the counter plate member 21540 supports the lower surface of the covering member 21520 in a manner covering the lower part from the left front side. The left rear part of the lower part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. The open portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the overhanging portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

  The facing plate member 21540 is a plate-like member that is arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 from the open side of the covering cover member 21530, and has a shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 that is formed to project to the front side. The fastening portion 21542 described above and the support extension portion 21543 extending from the lower left end portion to the back side are provided.

  The shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin like the counter plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip end portion and the covering member 21520. Even if a load is applied in the pushing direction (backward direction) and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to prevent a large load from being transmitted to the covering member 21520.

  296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, FIG. 296(b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a), and FIG. FIG. 298 is a rear view of the dish unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a cross-sectional view of the lower dish unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a).

  As shown in FIG. 296(b), the ridge portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are configured to have a dimensional relationship of abutting in the front-rear direction, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stop state ), the overhanging portion De3 slightly bites into the protrusion 21522 (the protrusion 21522 is slightly deformed).

  By applying a load from the overhanging portion De3 to the ridge portion 21522, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibration device 21500 can be moved to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at the position approaching the back side.

  FIG. 299(a) is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 that schematically illustrates the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 299(b) is a lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). 21400 is a schematic partial side view of FIG. 21400, FIG. 300(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 300(b) is FIG. 300(a). FIG. 23 is a schematic partial side view of a lower plate unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG.

  In FIGS. 299(a) and 299(b), similarly to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, a state in which the vibration device 21500 is arranged at the front side limit position of the vibration displacement is shown. FIG. 300B shows a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in the excited state and the vibration device 21500 is arranged at the back side limit position of the vibration displacement. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. 300. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and the vibration is directly transmitted.

  A transmission mode of vibration of the vibration device 21500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300. As described above, in the vibration device 21500, a plurality of parts are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidity. This is intended to effectively cause the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to occur in a specific part.

  More specifically, if the member to which the entire vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration is suppressed too much, while if it is too soft, the vibration may be damped too much. Is fixed to the member on the hard side, and the member on the soft side fixed to the other part of the vibrating device 21500 is vibrated around the fixed position as an axis. Accordingly, the portion fixed to the other portion of the vibration device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

  That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side), and the shell-shaped overhang portion 21541 abuts on the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458, while vibrating. The insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 (soft side).

  Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is such that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) using the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (vibration axis). By being transmitted to the 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position near the player's finger holding the operation handle 51.

  When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the back side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the overhanging portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protruding portion 21522 receives a load directed from the overhanging portion De3 toward the front side, so that the vibrating device 21500 returns to the front side as compared with the case where the overhanging portion De3 is not formed. Can be increased.

  Further, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner of rotating backward with the left end portion as an axis due to the vibration, the left plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De with this displacement (FIG. 300). (See (a)). As a result, the plate-shaped protrusion 21523 receives a load from the bottom member 21De toward the right side, and the vibrating device 21500 can increase the momentum of returning to the front in the rotation direction about the left end.

  When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 regulated to be displaced by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow downward from the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, since the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened by concentrating the resin material forming the covering member 21520 between the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3, the reaction force received from the protruding portion De3 can be increased. You can Since the bottom member 21De including the protruding portion De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to assume that the covering member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the protruding portion De3.

  As a result, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 can be limitedly increased in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510. In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 216) of the operation device 10300 produces a vibration, when the vibration device 21500 is not excited, the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 are connected to each other. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibrating device 21500 side by maintaining the load generated between the vibrating device 21500 and the vibrating motor 21510 in the excited state, and between the vibrating device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3. By increasing the load, the action of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

  Therefore, when the vibration device 21500 is in a non-excited state, the load transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (the flexibility of the covering member 21520 is sufficiently exerted). In the excited state of the vibrating device 21500, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the ridge 21522, so that the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased.

  On the other hand, since the protruding portion 21522 is a protruding portion formed of a flexible resin material, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the protruding portion De3 due to the pressing of the protruding portion 21522. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the overhang portion De3, and thus it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500.

  When the vibration device 21500 is displaced to the back side and then returned to the front side due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. As a result, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-like portion 21458 toward the back side, so that the vibrating device 21500 has a rear surface as compared with the case where the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is not formed. The momentum of returning to the side can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the vibrating device 21500 in both the front and rear directions is assisted, the vibrating device 21500 is in the excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player. The period can be shortened.

  Note that, in the above description, the state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-excited when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 produces a vibration is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the operation of the operation device 10300 may be executed during the vibration of the vibration device 21500.

  In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 due to the operation of the operating device 10300 and the covering member 21520. Since the direction of the load generated between the overhang portion De3 and the overhang portion De3 intersects, the interaction between the load generated by the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operating device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 or the operation device 10300 fails due to a load being simultaneously generated from the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300.

  FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower plate unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower plate unit 21400. In FIG. 301, a state in which the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end portion of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the state in which the vibration motor 21510 is arranged at the right limit position of the displaceable area is shown. Illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering cover member 21530 via the covering member 21520. Therefore, the vibration motor 21510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530 due to deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Further, as described above, in the vibrating device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 on the left side (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). The force is applied to the right.

  That is, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 becomes severe, the vibrating motor 21510 is displaced rightward by the centrifugal force generated in the vibrating device 21500 (see FIG. 301). Since the protruding portion 21534 formed on the right side of the cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape that shifts to the left side at the rear side end portion (see FIG. 295), the vibration motor 21510 moves to the right side and vibrates. The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 when the motor 21510 is displaced to the back side increases. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration motor 21510 is displaced in the direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-back direction) to suppress the vibration. Since the action occurs, the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the stop of the vibration motor 21510 by the control is executed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

  Further, since the vibration can be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, the arrangement of the detection sensor for detecting the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the excessive vibration can be eliminated. . As a result, the product cost of the lower plate unit 21400 in the present embodiment can be reduced, and wiring can pass through the empty area by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor and heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated. It can be effectively used as a space for playing.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame has been mainly described, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operation unit A300 visually recognized through the window 14c will be described.

  FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, in the game board A13, a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view is provided with a number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, and the like, the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (Fig. 1)).

  The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate A60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board A13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board A13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board A13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board A13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board A13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member A73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  In the present embodiment, the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) made of metal is incorporated into the outer edge member A73 so that the strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is increased. However, details will be described later.

  In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the aim of disposing the general winning opening 63 is different for each disposition. This will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game, the ball is fired aiming at winning the ball to the first winning opening 64 on the route passing the left side of the third symbol display device 81, but the first winning. A part of the ball flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the mouth 64 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged so as to affect the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the easier it is to generate a large number of winnings in the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal operation.

  On the other hand, in the game during time saving or sudden change, the ball is shot aiming to win the ball to the second winning opening 640 on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second A part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged so as to affect the game during the probability change or the shortening of time. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the more the ball loss during the probability change or the shortening of time can be suppressed.

  By suppressing ball loss, you can win the next big hit before the balls held on the upper plate 17 run out, even if you do not play the game in a launch mode that stops the ball firing at a certain time during the probability change (even if you keep hitting) Since it is easier to play, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives during the game. Therefore, even when the number of rotations until the next jackpot frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 100 rotations or more), the player can comfortably execute the game.

  In the game in the special game state, the ball is fired aiming at winning the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in a route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but on the right side of the second winning opening 640. A part of the ball flowing down the area flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and wins to the general winning opening 63a. The prize balls associated with the winning in the general winning opening 63 are paid out as a prize balls different from the prize balls in the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player may change the special game state by the end of the special game state. In addition to the expected prize balls based on the number of prizes to the specific prize hole 65a, prize balls based on the number of prizes to the general prize hole 63 can be obtained.

  That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged for the purpose of increasing the number of payout prize balls that the player can obtain in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning to the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so that the elapsed time until the special gaming state ends tends to become longer. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special game state (the specified number of prizes per round) are the same in terms of control due to the location of the general winning opening 63, the number of the locations, and the design of the upstream channel. Also, it is possible to vary the time (long or short) required until the end of the special game state and the number (somewhat) of prize balls paid out to the player.

  It should be noted that the display mode in the case of displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning in the specific winning port 65a and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning in the general winning port 63 may be separately displayed, or payout based on winning in the specific winning port 65a may be displayed. The total number of the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big hit, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Toward the left, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the first winning opening 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning port 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and the through hole 67 is passed to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the game board A13 has a left-right asymmetrical configuration, and it is required to hit the ball separately on the left and right according to the game state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the structure of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 302). In this case, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right hitting" or at the second winning opening 640 by "left hitting". Therefore, depending on the game state (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in normal time), the player can change the ball firing method between "left hit" and "right hit". It can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the annoyance of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via the bus line 224 composed of the address bus and the data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input/output port 225 (see FIG. 4). The other device 228 includes a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for moving up and down the rendering unit A710, and the like.

  FIG. 303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state where the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a figure. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, for convenience, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted.

  Next, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300. It is a figure. Note that in FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is enlarged. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 is referred to as appropriate.

  The center frame A86 is an annular member that is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, is fitted into the through hole 13a formed in the game board A13 from the front side, and is fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge. A covering portion 86h that is covered with the covering portion, a distribution extension portion 86a that extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side so that the sphere can be distributed on the left side, and a downward inclination from the upper end portion to the left. The left slanted portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in the shape of a straight line, and the right slanting portion 86c extending from the upper portion to the right side to extend to the front side from the covering portion 86h. And a right flow path forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner extending downward from a position connected to the lower end portion of the right inclined portion 86c and facing the return rubber 69. , A plurality of lateral ridges 86e protruding toward the flow path side (right side) as ridges extending in the front-rear width of the right flow passage forming wall 86d, and positions where the horizontal ridges 86e alternate (lever). In relation to a plurality of front protrusions 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h to the flow passage side (front side) as protrusions extending over the flow passage width in the region between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. A separation wall portion 86g that extends downward from the lower end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and is configured to be able to separate the lower right corner portion of the through hole 13a from other portions is mainly provided.

  307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 taken along the line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). ..

  When the player strongly rotates the operation handle 51 to the right and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the distance between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is such that the sphere can flow down (the diameter of the sphere is 11 mm, whereas the distance is about 16 mm). Since the length is set to have a slight gap), the sphere flows down while contacting the right flow path forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

  More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced back by the reaction force from the return rubber 69 to the left and right center sides of the game area and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that descends downward toward the right, the sphere that flows down by its own weight tries to flow down so as to roll on the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

  In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the lateral protruding portion 86e. In the present embodiment, the projecting length of the lateral protruding portion 86e is designed to be about 2 mm (a little less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere), and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the flow channel width). Therefore, the deceleration of the flowing ball and the prevention of the ball clogging can be achieved in a well-balanced manner.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the front protruding portion 86f is formed with the same protruding length (2 mm) as the horizontal protruding portion 86e at the intermediate position of the plurality of horizontal protruding portions 86e. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging while improving the deceleration effect by reducing the formation interval of the ridges to half the flow passage width.

  Usually, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game shop, it is laid down slightly (a little less than 1 degree) from the vertical state to the back side. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that descends and slopes toward the front side, and the ball flowing down by its own weight tries to flow down so as to roll on the covering portion 86h. With such a configuration, as compared with the case where the protruding portion is formed from the glass unit 16 side (front side) toward the flow path, the front protruding portion 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h and the front protruding portion 86f are formed. A collision with a sphere can be generated well. Note that, in FIG. 307(b), in order to make it easy to grasp the inclination, the inclination angle of the game board A13 is illustrated to be larger than usual (about 5 degrees).

  The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion that is arranged so as to face the lottery unit A600, and has a role of blocking and separating the region where the lottery unit A600 is arranged in the region of the through hole 13a. Hereinafter, the assembling of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described.

  In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, in the through hole 13a of the game board A13, a small concave portion 13b that projects rightward from the substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86 and a lower right portion below the small concave portion 13b. A large concave portion 13c that overhangs is formed. In this way, by forming the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c as the arrangement area of the lottery unit A600 as a concave portion connected to the opening portion of the through hole 13a that receives the center frame A86, a plurality of independent through holes can be formed. It is possible to secure a wider area that can be used as an area for disposing the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600, as compared with a case where the area is required as the width of the part that forms the boundary. The details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a box-shaped rear surface whose front side is open from the bottom wall portion A311, and the outer wall portion A312 standing upright from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

  The rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening A311a in the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 in which a movable device having substantially the same configuration is arranged in the inner space of the rear case A310 so as to cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation unit A400. The second operation unit A700, which is arranged on the lower side in which the arrangement is omitted, is housed, and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is positioned above and to the left and right of the opening A311a, and the second operation unit A700 is positioned below the opening A311a, and is attached to the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310. It is arranged. Note that, in FIGS. 305 and 306, a state in which the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are attached to the rear case A310 is illustrated.

  The rear case A310 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion A312, and the game board A13 faces the assembly state (see FIG. 304). The support plate part A313 which supports is provided.

  The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion protruding from the back surface of the game board A13 toward the back surface, and is provided with a shape capable of positioning a fastening projection 13d having a female screw portion formed at the center thereof. The positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and the positioning convex portion A313a has a substantially central position (a position matching the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d) with a size large enough to insert the fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d. A hole A313b is provided.

  That is, the fastening convex portion 13d is positioned by the positioning convex portion A313a, and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d, whereby the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed, and thus the gaming board. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole.

  The shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having a shape along an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular shape in the present embodiment) of the fastening convex portion 13d may be used, or the support plate portion A313 may be formed in consideration of workability during assembly. It may be a convex portion along an elliptical shape along the formed direction. Further, when the fastening protrusion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is correspondingly rectangular.

  As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, and the formation of the support plate portions A313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. This is the result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

  That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light transmissive resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 is visible through the game board A13. The entire rear surface side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for performance to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in a front view, so that the movable member is correspondingly moved. The area that can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, if the strength problem can be maintained and the problem can be maintained, the support plate portion A313 can be omitted to prevent the range of arrangement of the movable member from being limited. That is.

  In the present embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, which are related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the shot ball such as the game area. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed in a place other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the launching device 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to the game area. It is introduced, and thereafter it is configured to flow down the game area. In the ball game, the most noticeable place is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer region (for example, the region opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 interposed therebetween). () is usually low in attention.

  Therefore, the left lower part and the upper left part based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left part and the upper right part based on the upward convex arc are defined as the range that the sphere cannot reach. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be reduced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left portions with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, the rear side of the game board A13 cannot be seen from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74. Is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially arranged at a location where the attention is reduced or a location where the attention is not visible. Actually, also in the left side portion and the upper side portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed in large numbers, the support plate portion A313 is formed near the corner portion of the rear case A310, avoiding the central portion as the protruding end portion of the outer rail 62. To be done.

  In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from the location with low visibility (low performance), the rigidity of the operation unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole can be improved. It is possible to secure a large area within the visual field of the player who pays attention to the sphere while achieving the effect of securing the security.

  In this respect, since there is a common configuration in the pachinko machine that rolls the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a along the outer rail 62 and introduces it into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left and the upper left. It is easy to find the section and upper right part. On the other hand, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, which once absorbs the kinetic energy of the sphere and adjusts the subsequent flow-down mode, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the sphere does not flow down.

  That is, in the downstream of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the flow path of the ball changes according to the configuration and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. However, until the specifications on the game board A13 side are decided, the arrangement position of the support plate portion A313 cannot be decided.

  Since the operation unit A300 can be freely designed as compared with the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball-out performance of the pachinko machine A10, the design of the operation unit A300 progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13. Ordinarily, and with this, the internal configuration of the operation unit A300 can be carefully elaborated. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, the position of the support plate portion A313 will be changed accordingly, and not only the rear case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300. This leads to a change in the design of another device installed in the device, which increases the cost of the change in the design.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted at the position corresponding to the downstream of the return rubber 69. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

  In addition, the inner space of the rear case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313 in the region downstream of the return rubber 69, and a sufficient space for arranging the first action unit A400 for performance is secured. In addition, since the path along which the ball flows down and the range in which the first operation unit A400 is arranged can be overlapped with each other in the front and rear, the first operation unit A400 naturally enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball. Can be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed behind the outer edge member A73 is formed inside (on the left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side portion of the back case A310 is formed outside (on the left side) of the outermost shortest left side of the outer wall portion A312. That is, the formation mode of the support plate portion A313 (the formation direction with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is asymmetrical.

  As a result, the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the right end portion of the game board A13 can be made shorter than the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the left end portion of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the back case A310 can be brought close to the right end of the game board A13.

  The outer wall portion A312 on the right side is not formed with a surface opposed to the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge portion on the front side contacts the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the outer wall portion A312 on the right side comes into line contact with the game board A13.

  A notch portion A312a that is notched toward the back side (formed as a notch) is provided in a substantially lower half portion of the outer wall portion A312 on the right side. The notch portion A312a is notched below the upper edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

  By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the cutout portion A312a can be made to function as a wiring passage through which the wiring connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 passes outside the rear case A310. This can reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700 side, as compared with the case where the wiring is routed vertically.

  In addition, the gap formed by the cutout portion A312a can be used as an arrangement space of a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. In addition, as a configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65, for example, a solenoid for generating a driving force, a flow path for a ball, a substrate for light emission effect, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, Other structures are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the discharge path ER through which the balls won in the second winning opening 640 of the lottery unit A600 are discharged is configured to pass through the gap between the cutout portion A312a and the game board A13 (FIG. 317). reference).

  Further, by disposing a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the cutout portion A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily made visible to the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared with the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 can be ambiguous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the rear case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect.

  The formation length (vertical length) of the cutout portion A312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion A312a may be formed over the entire area (upper and lower width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, fastening fixing with the game board A13 is omitted in the right side portion of the back case A310, so in considering the rigidity in the right side portion of the game board A13, rely on the rigidity of the operation unit A300. I can't.

  As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is arranged at the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

  308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75. Note that in FIGS. 308 and 309, the game board A13 is illustrated as a single body, and other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted for ease of understanding.

  The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, has an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side portion and has an arcuate inner side surface, and extends downward from the lower end portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape. A vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c having an upper surface that slopes downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is made of a plurality of members that are vertically separated from each other. It is possible to reduce the man-hours for assembling the game board A13.

  The vertical wall portion 73b is formed by bending a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape along the right surface portion toward the back side and a U-shape in a vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion. A plurality of bent portions 73b2, and a columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape at the joint portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 is provided side by side and fastened. And a fastening portion 73b4 formed so that a screw can be screwed therein.

  The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1. Thereby, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of the seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

  In other words, as compared with the case where only the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 at three positions resist the bending of the metal plate-shaped member 75, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 form the metal plate-shaped member 75. Since the resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one place can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly allocated, so that it can be arranged in any one of the positions. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring.

  The metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent back in a plurality of directions in the short-side direction, and is bent leftward at the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 75a which is formed without folds in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c formed in the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the folded portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. The through hole 75d is provided, and the through hole 75e is provided along with the plate portion where the through hole 75d is formed, and the through hole 75e is formed so that the fastening screw can be inserted through the plate portion that is stepped to the front side.

  The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to how the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, by arranging integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b that is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

  The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in such a size that the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b can be inserted therethrough. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetrating portion 75c.

  When the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b to form a cylindrical projection. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of positions in the vertical direction. In this state, the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e is screwed into the fastening portion 73b4, whereby the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed.

  With the above configuration, since the metal plate member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 and the columnar protruding portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip end thereof engages with the game board A13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described.

  The game board A13 receives a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed so as to be able to receive the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 on the right side edge of the front face, and the cylindrical protruding portion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are formed so as to extend vertically as long holes as possible.

  When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 are assembled to the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. Be positioned. That is, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. As a result, the number of positionings can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 73b with sufficient rigidity by itself, and The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily bent in the left-right direction by itself.

  Further, since the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (the rigidity can be improved), even when the game board A13 and the rear case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated from each other, the game board is separated. The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening projection 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

  Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b or the large recess 13c can be arranged at a position where the distance from the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position extremely close to the right end). As a result, the right limit positions of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b, and the large recess 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved to the right and the opening shape can be increased.

  In this case, when the game area is formed by using the game board A13 having the same vertical width and left-right width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is set to the right. Since it can be moved to the left, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows down when hitting left (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide flow path, the position of the ball passage opening, etc.).

  Further, a distribution device (not shown) in which a ball flows down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches a path in the order in which the ball arrives to flow down), a lottery unit A600, and a variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 305). Since a large arrangement area can be secured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design of the sorting device, the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65, which are not shown.

  FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the above-described electric accessory 640a, and the second winning opening 640 in which the ball can pass or cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in the open state or the closed state. It is an assembly which comprises.

  The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610 which is formed by penetrating the second winning opening 640 and constitutes a flow-down path through which the balls flow down to the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and the rear surface of the main body member A610. Is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610, an engagement member A620 that is rotatably rotatably supported on the side, engages with the electric accessory 640a, a drive unit A630 that generates a driving force that operates the engagement member A620. A cover member A650 that defines the flow path of the sphere, a main irradiation device A660 that is provided on the back surface side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to an area corresponding to the flow path of the sphere, and a main member A660 are provided on the back surface side. An auxiliary irradiating device A670 is provided which irradiates light to a region which is provided and is less visible by the covering member A650 and which is different from the flow path of the sphere.

  The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extending wall portion extending in a wall shape from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side. A612, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall shape from the position including the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rear side in a rectangular frame surrounding the second winning opening 640 in a rear view. To the rear side of the extended rectangular frame A614, which is provided above the second winning opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extended rectangular frame A614. The main light emission holding frame A616 is provided in a frame shape including the portion and extends to the back side, and the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is provided in the frame shape and extends to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

  A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the sphere that is about to enter the lottery unit A600 passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

  The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion arranged to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 engage (abut) with each other to secure rigidity. Thereby, the through hole 13a can be stably held in a mode in which the positional displacement of the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 is suppressed while forming the through hole 13a in a shape large enough to accommodate both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600.

  The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball. That is, the ball flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

  The extended rectangular frame A614 is provided with a shaft support hole A614a formed as a portion that rotatably supports the engagement member A620, and the extended end edge thereof can receive the front end of the drive unit A630. Formed from a shape. That is, the drive device unit A630 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614 by fastening the extended rectangular frame A614 with the front end of the drive device unit A630 assembled to the extended end.

  The protruding receiving portion A615 is a portion that is configured to be capable of contacting the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and defines the movement end position thereof. Will be described later.

  The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame of the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside thereof. The fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650, but as will be described later, the fastening portion A652a overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in a front view. Formed in position. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a in a front view, and avoids damaging the design of the lottery unit A600.

  The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame forming an outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in a front view.

  The engaging member A620 is rotatably supported in the shaft supporting hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614, and is configured so that the claw-shaped portion A622 arranged at the rotating tip end and the electric accessory 640a are engaged with each other. . Accordingly, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is changed along with the change of the posture of the engaging member A620. Next, the details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 312(a) is a side view of the engagement member A620 in which the engagement member A620 is visually recognized from the rotation axis J1 direction, and FIG. 312(b) is an engagement member viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a). FIG. 312(c) is a front view of A620, and FIG. 312(c) is a cross-sectional view of the engagement member A620 taken along the line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b).

  The engaging member A620 is formed of a flexible resin material, and has a pair of rotary arms A621 formed of a plate-shaped portion intersecting (orthogonal to) the rotary axis J1 and a rotary tip of the rotary arm A621. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of projecting shaft portions A623 protruding from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621. A proximal end connecting rod portion A624 that is a rod-shaped portion that extends in the radial direction from the end side and that is formed in a U-shape in a front view in such a manner that it is joined after being curved toward the other side at the extended end. And a rod-shaped portion extending from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621 in a direction parallel to the base end side connecting rod portion A624, and is joined after being curved toward the other side at the extended end portion. And a front end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in a front view in a mode.

  The pair of rotary arms A621 are arranged to face each other with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere. This makes it possible to form a sphere flow path so that the sphere passes between the rotary arms A621 (see FIG. 313), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the downward flow path of the sphere formed by the lottery unit A600. be able to.

  The proximal-side connecting rod portion A624 projects toward the distal-side connecting rod portion A625 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a and the main body rod portion A624a which are formed from the substantially same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod. And a projecting restricting portion A624b that is provided. The protruding restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting excessive rotation of the engaging member A620, but details will be described later.

  The tip-side connecting rod portion A625 is formed such that a rod-shaped portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1 has a cross-sectional shape different from that of the base-side connecting rod portion A624. That is, in the rod-shaped portion A625a, the surface on the side facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed into a flat surface that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is the rotating tip. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines in a direction away from the rotary arm portion A621 as it goes to the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed such that the thickness increases and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases) toward the rotation tip side.

  In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is recessed in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotary arm portion A621 approaches the surface on the side facing the rotary arm portion A621 toward the center side in the direction of the rotation axis J1. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c to be provided.

  The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the slope of the sloped surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface A625b, the respective points of the recessed surface A625c that are different only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) are the same. Visible as dots.

  The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A632 of the drive unit A630, which will be described later in detail.

  FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive device unit A630. FIG. 313 illustrates a state in which the engagement member A620 is axially supported by the shaft support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

  Assembling of the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610 is performed by inserting the engaging member A620 into the extended rectangular frame A614 in a state where the engaging member A620 is deformed by applying a compressive force, and the shaft supporting hole A614a and the engaging member A620 are projected. It is executed by removing the load and releasing the deformation in a state where the position of the shaft portion A623 is aligned.

  That is, the engaging member A620 is grasped by sandwiching it from the direction of the rotation axis J1 with a finger, a compressive force is applied, and the projecting shaft portion A623 is deformed to an extent that the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 is shorter than the inner width of the extended rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by inserting the engaging member A620 into the extended rectangular frame A614, aligning the positions, and releasing the finger.

  In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be connected by the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 which are narrower and more easily deformed than the rotating arm portion A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly can be caused in the base end side connecting rod portion A624 and the tip end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the rotary arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, so that it is possible to prevent the engagement member A620 from malfunctioning due to the deformation at the time of assembly.

  In addition, since the pair of rotating arms A621 are not connected by a single rod-shaped portion but by a pair of rod-shaped portions (the base end side connecting rod portion A624 and the tip side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it is possible to easily avoid the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 from deviating from each other.

  Further, by disposing a rod-shaped portion, which is wider than the rotation base-end side, on the rotation tip side of the pair of rod-shaped portions where the load during operation tends to be large (see FIG. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to prevent the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 from deviating from each other when they are operated by the driving force.

  In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required at the time of assembly is reduced to the vicinity of the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. It can be generated intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing a stable operation using the engaging member A620.

  As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 comes into contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion A615, whereby further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a portion for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that a ball will enter the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is open. The ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is a surface that forms the extended rectangular frame A614 with the engaging member A620, is disposed so as to face the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that descends toward the rear side. And flows into the drive device unit A630.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotating arm portions A621 are arranged with a space longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the balls, the balls can flow between the facing rotating arm portions A621. Accordingly, since the engaging member A620 can be arranged in a manner of surrounding the downward flow path of the sphere from above, the engaging member A620 and the downward flow path of the sphere can be arranged compactly.

  The drive device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped main body box portion A631 with an open front side that is connected and fixed to the rear side end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and an upper portion of the main body box portion A631. Electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies a biasing force to the operating member A632, and a main body box portion A631 And a detection sensor A634 for detecting passage of a sphere.

  When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, the operating member A632 is arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 314(a)) by the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is excited, The operation member A632 is driven against the biasing force and is arranged at the back side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 contacts the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

  314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), for ease of understanding, only the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are shown, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

  Further, FIG. 314(a) illustrates a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (closed state of the electric accessory 640a), and FIG. 314(b) illustrates an excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (opening of the electric accessory 640a). State) is shown.

  When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the non-excited state and the operating member A632 is disposed at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is in the downward inclined posture (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the excited state. Then, when the operating member A632 is disposed at the back side position, the engaging member A620 is in the upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314(b)).

  The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion A653 of the covering member A650, and includes an eccentric projecting portion 640b projecting rearward from a position eccentric to the rotation shaft. The eccentric projecting portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620 in the vertical direction, and as the eccentric projecting portion 640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion A622, The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of the claw-shaped portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a is separated from each other. You may make it comprised from a pair of blade-shaped member which opposes. In this case, the engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

  Description will be given by returning to FIGS. 310 and 311. The covering member A650 is a member that is formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material and is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween, and the main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610. A main body plate portion A651 that forms a flow path of the sphere between the main body plate portion A651 and a rear surface of the main body plate portion A651. And a shaft support portion A653 that rotatably rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

  The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmission range A651a that makes it easy to visually recognize the back side when viewed from the front, and a low transmission range A651b that has lower light transmittance than the high transmission range A651a and that is difficult to see on the back side.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a seal having a printing surface designed in such a manner as to configure a range having high transparency and a range having low transparency is attached to the front surface side of the main body plate portion A651 so that the high transmission range A651a Although the low transmission range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color molding of resin, or the main body plate portion A651 may be subjected to shaving to roughen the surface to form a low-permeability range.

  In the present embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side portion) of the downward flow path of the sphere, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with the restriction wall portion A652 that restricts the downward flow of the sphere. Is formed on the side (mainly on the left side). Thus, while ensuring the visibility of the flow path of the ball, it is possible to block the field of view so that the player does not see the internal structure in the range where the ball does not flow.

  The restriction wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A616a is screwed for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610. Since the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and non-transparent, it is easy to form a shadow in a front view. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the fastening portion A652a is arranged outside the downward flow path of the ball, it is possible to prevent the shadow generated by the fastening screw from entering the downward flow path of the ball and giving the player a feeling of strangeness. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's concentration that visually recognizes the flow of the ball from being scraped off by the shadow of the fastening screw.

  The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed inside a main light emission holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illumination substrate A662 on which a light emitting means A663 such as an LED is arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and the like. A rear lid portion A664, which has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative substrate A662 and is fastened and fixed to the rear end of the main light emitting support frame A616.

  The diffuser plate A661 is a plate-shaped member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and a diffused shape that diffuses light is formed on both front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape are provided. The extended portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting in a state where the diffusion plate A661 is housed in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extending portions A661a comes into contact with the inner side surface of the main light emitting holding frame A616, and resistance is generated in the direction to return the tilt, so that the attitude of the diffuser plate A661 is maintained.

  In the state where the main irradiator A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front surface of the decorative board A662 abuts on the extended end of the extended portion A661a, so that the diffusion plate A661 is prevented from coming out to the rear side. ..

  The outer shape of the decorative board A662 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and the outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative board A662. . That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the decorative board A662 is held in a state of being sandwiched between the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 from the front and back (held by abutting on the surface).

  As a result, even if the rear cover A664 has a small thickness and the rear cover A664 alone has low rigidity, the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616 can be used to stably hold the decorative board A662. it can.

  Here, an insertion hole A616a through which the fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screw, it is necessary to pull out the diffusion plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616. Therefore, mischief can be suppressed by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screw.

  Further, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transmissive and is likely to cause a shadow, but according to the present embodiment, the plurality of light emitting means A663 on the back side of the fastening screw and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663. A diffuser plate A661 capable of diffusing is disposed. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made light (shadow can be cast) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

  Particularly, the light emitting means A663 is arranged at a position where the insertion holes A616a do not overlap with each other on the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outer shapes projected in the front-rear direction do not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thin (shadow can be cast), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw inconspicuous can be more remarkable.

  The main irradiator A660 is arranged on the back side of the downward flow path of the sphere as described above, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated to the downward flow path of the sphere. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A661 is provided. Light reaches the downflow path through. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate, the light can be light and spread. As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball.

  The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and is provided with a plurality of light emitting means A672, and an illumination board A671 and a back side of the illumination board A671. A rear lid portion A673 formed of an outer shape having substantially the same shape as the outer shape.

  The decorative board A671 is fixed in the same holding mode as that of the decorative board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge portion of the decorative board A671 is held in such a manner that it is sandwiched between the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and the rear lid portion A673 from the front and back (held by abutting on the surface).

  As a result, even if the rear cover A673 has a small thickness and the rear cover A673 alone has low rigidity, the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 can be used to stably hold the decorative board A671. it can.

  Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, a diffusion plate is not provided on the front side of the decorative substrate A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is applied to the main body member A610 in a state where the light emission intensity is maintained without being diffused.

  Although light is emitted in this manner, in the present embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is arranged at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in a front view, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visible to the player through the transparent range A651b. Therefore, since the player visually recognizes the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to avoid giving excessive fatigue to the eyes of the player who sees the light.

  In addition, by keeping the light emission intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect of brightly illuminating the character with the light emitted from the light emitting unit A672.

  315(a) and 315(b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 taken along the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 315(a) shows the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(a)), and in FIG. 315(b), the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 315(a), in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 and the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620 are in contact with each other. Here, in addition to the disk portion of the operating member A632 progressing to the front side to the extent that it is opposed to the vicinity of the intermediate position in the width direction of the recessed surface A625c, the recessed surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. Since the surfaces are substantially parallel to each other, the load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 becomes a load mainly having a component in the vertical direction (direction orthogonal to the front-back direction).

  Therefore, it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620, and the piano wire from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent attempts to change the state to the open state by introducing a wire rod such as the above and applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

  Heretofore, a pachinko machine has conventionally been provided with a function of outputting an error notification when a fraudulent activity is detected, but by improperly applying a load to the movable accessory 640a visible from the front side, an electromagnetic solenoid is provided. If the movable accessory 640 can be opened regardless of the state of ASOL, the deterrent power against fraud is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a are mediated by the eccentric protruding portion 640b. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314(a)), in the configuration of the present embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, a load is applied to the movable accessory 640a. Therefore, it may be difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in contrast to the above-mentioned misconduct that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a, the concave surface A625c is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotation tip side of the engaging member A620. Since it is inclined, when the engaging member A620 is displaced in the upright direction from the state of FIG. 315(a) by force (for example, while deforming the distal end side connecting rod portion A625), the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 form a rod shape. The contact position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotation tip side), and the tip side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

  Therefore, each time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the load necessary for further displacing the engaging member A620 can be increased, so that a load is applied to the movable accessory 640a. It is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of opening the movable accessory 640a.

  Further, the flat surface of the rod-shaped portion A625a on the opposite side of the recessed surface A625c is an inclined surface that descends downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315(a), when the rod-shaped portion A625a is flexibly deformed in the thickness direction by the load received from the operating member A632, the reaction force applied to the operating member A632 is inclined upward toward the front side. Can be turned to.

  Thereby, the load in the front-rear direction given from the rod-shaped portion A625a to the operation member A632 can be generated as a load on the front side, and the movement member A632 is prevented from retracting backward by the load from the rod-shaped portion A625a. Therefore, the rising displacement of the engagement member A 620 can be more reliably regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 315(b), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the excited state, the lower end of the disk portion of the operating member A632 and the protruding restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620 contact each other, so that the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. Further collision movement of the engaging member A620 (movement in the rising direction) is restricted before the collision with the section. That is, since the rotation of the base end side connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the base end side connecting rod portion A624 can be controlled by the main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with the section.

  316(a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, FIG. 316(b) is a side view of the operation unit A300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 is a game board A13 and operation unit. It is a rear view of A300.

  As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is arranged so as to project toward the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is formed from a plywood board while arranging the first operation unit A400 in this way, it is necessary to form a recess or a hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400. However, in the present embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the mold is manufactured in advance by designing in a shape that can avoid the interference with the first operation unit A400, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is formed by recessing from the back surface side to the front surface side along the left and right and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306). It is possible to easily avoid the interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 while being configured to project to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. As a result, the arrangement of the first operation unit A400 can be brought closer to the player side, so that the effect of the effect of visually confirming the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged on the upper portion of the back case A310 is arranged inside (lower side) of the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312. As a result, as compared with the case where the support plate portion A313 is arranged outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 in the left and right center where the support plate portion A313 is not arranged is moved to the outside (upper side). It is possible to lower the upper end position of the rear case A310.

  That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the first operation unit A400 (or the second operation unit A700) with respect to the rear case A310, while improving the degree of freedom with respect to arranging the rear case A310 in the game board A13.

  In addition, since the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the upper part of the rear case A310 is arranged are located outside the game area in the front view as described above, the support plate portion A313 is below the outer wall portion A312. By being arranged in, it is possible to suppress the influence (disadvantage) on the game to a small extent.

  As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the rear case A310 except for the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied by the support plate portion A313 can be omitted below the upper end position, the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 can be moved closer to the right end of the game board A13 by that amount. You can

  318 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 taken along the line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60 is an area inside the outer edge extended portion 60a and at least a game area as compared with the outer edge extended portion 60a extended to the back side along the outer edge. The central overhanging portion 60b overhanging to the back side in the region where the front and rear portions overlap each other has a shorter front-rear width.

  Since the front end surface of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the rear side end portion of the central overhanging portion 60b is arranged on the front side more than the rear side end portion of the outer edge extending portion 60a. Thereby, the interference between the base plate A60 and the first operation unit A400 is avoided.

  A recessed portion 60c recessed toward the front side is formed between the outer edge extended portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b. In the formation range of this recessed portion 60c, the base plate A60 is It is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c than in the outer edge extended portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b.

  When the center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. 318. The gap is arranged at a position overlapping the recessed portion 60c in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained even on the front side of the base plate A60.

  The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is applied to the sphere that illuminates the sphere by irradiating the sphere that flows down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of reduction of energy when the light used for the effect of irradiating the sphere with the light passes through the game board A13 can be lowered, so that the light is weaker and effectively. It is possible to execute the effect of making the sphere glow.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner side surface of the outer edge member A73 is arranged outward in front view as compared with the inner side surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60, the downward flow path of the sphere is It can be easily arranged at a position overlapping the installation portion 60c in the front and rear. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

  As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thereby, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured to integrally and mutually assist from the viewpoint of rigidity.

  Further, it is possible to locally increase the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 by utilizing the fact that the light is reflected by the metal when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light. This locally increased intensity of light emission occurs at the widthwise inner end (left end) of the bent portion 75b where it can be seen through the outer edge member A73, so the light emission location is defined by the vertical wall portion. It is possible to limit the range of formation of 73b (see FIG. 308) (excluding the arcuate wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c).

  Thereby, even when light is emitted from the back side to the entire upper and lower sides of the metal plate member 75, the location where the emission intensity is locally increased is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, it is possible to easily concentrate the line of sight of the player on the lottery unit A600 arranged to face the vertical wall portion 73b and the flow path forming range above the lottery unit A600.

  319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. Note that in the description of FIGS. 319, 320, 321, and 322, all the description of the first operation unit A400 and the plurality of first operation units A400 means that the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C and A400D. Further, the first operation unit A400 may be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

  In FIG. 319, it is illustrated that all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 do not project to the third symbol display device 81 side and maintain the retracted state of retracting, and in FIG. It is illustrated that the operating unit A400 is excited and is in an extended state in which the operating unit A400 is extended toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second operating unit A700 maintains the retracted state.

  In FIG. 321, it is illustrated that all the first operation units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operation unit A700 is in the projecting state projecting to the side of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. The first operation units A400B, A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A, A400D are in the extended state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. It

  As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 are formed in a color that is noticeable to the player in a range defined by a colored (in this embodiment, ultramarine blue) cover member A591. In the present embodiment, the front cover A410 (the front surface of which is plated with gold) and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visually recognized, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third symbol display device 81. The part is arranged so as to be the closest position to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

  That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radiation that spreads from the inside (center) of the third symbol display device 81 to the outside, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 serve as the center of this radiation. The player's line of sight can be concentrated toward the inside of the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third symbol display device 81 comes closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. 319, the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 (adjacent The side surface including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440) is chamfered so as to taper toward the tip side (the side of the third pattern display device 81). This avoids interfering with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

  Although the starting point of chamfering is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, the straight line extending along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. Chamfering is not done until just before an intersection that intersects a straight line, but chamfering is done just before that intersection. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a wide range in which the first displacement member A440 is visually recognized while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440.

  As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front and rear so as to occupy the range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged in such a posture. Therefore, as compared with the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) is directed to the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in a front view. And it is possible to suppress the displacement amount in the front view and increase the visual change.

  This configuration is effective when there is a circumstance that the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 320, in the projecting state of the first operation unit A400, the second displacing member A490 is arranged at the projecting position, while the first displacing member A440 is at the projecting position (the third symbol display device 81). (Position away from).

  Explaining in detail, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a wide posture in the front and back so as to occupy a range extending from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second displacement member A440. From the state of interfering with the movement trajectory of A490 (the retracted state of the first operation unit A400), the second displacement member A490 is arranged closer to the game board A13 side than the second displacement member A490 in order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490. The state changes to the state (the extended state of the first operation unit A400).

  As a result, the first displacement member A440 does not block the light by the second displacement member A490, regardless of whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state or the extended state, and emits the light to the player side. It is possible to perform a luminous effect to be emitted. In particular, in the projecting state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long hole A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be guided, but details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the effect unit A710 is vertically movable to the center side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the second operation unit A700 includes a rotating body A720 that is configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the effect unit A710, and the rotation of the rotating body A720 executes light emission effect in which light travels in multiple directions. This is possible, but details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 322, since the plurality of first operation units A400 each include an individual driving device, each first operation unit A400 can independently change the state and maintain the state. That is, the combination forming the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

  For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is also possible to execute the state change in the first operation unit A400 which is different in order. For example, the state change can be performed sequentially from the lower left first operation unit A400 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, or the state change can be sequentially performed from the lower left first clockwise operation mode from the third first operation unit A400B in both directions. You can also do it. In this way, various effects can be performed using the first operation unit A400.

  Also, for example, in the case where the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C that is in the retracted state in FIG. 322 is arranged at the projecting position so as to interfere with the second operation unit A700. Can set the first operation units A400B, A400C that may interfere with the second operation unit A700 in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, A400D in the extended state. As a result, as compared with the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same driving device, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of operations (states) of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700. it can.

  FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged so that the game area can be effectively decorated. This will be described below.

  First, in the case where a game area is defined as an area where a ball passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged to face each other (a ball launching unit) The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400, A400A (from the lower left to the second) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 is arranged near the inner rail 61 (outer side). (Extending to the outer rail 62 is unnecessary).

  On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (in particular, the area where the right-handed ball flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation units A400B and A400C (third and fourth from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 is near the outer rail 62 (outer side). Is located in.

  Further, the outer rail 62 is interrupted, and the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end portion of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right unit) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner side surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is feasible in the present embodiment because the support plate portion A313 is omitted in the right side abdomen of the rear case A310 and the right end portion of the rear case A310 is brought close to the right end portion of the game board A13. It will be.

  That is, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end portion of the game board A13 by forming the inner area of the rear case A310 close to the right end portion of the game board A13 in a front view. As a result, a flow path arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for the ball hitting the right side to flow (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302). The first operation unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer end portion of the front cover A410 is arranged on the outer side (right side).

  In other words, like a general right-handing machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not a left-right symmetrical machine), the right-handing flow path is extremely thin compared to the left-handing flow path, and is moved to the right end of the game board A13. In the case of being arranged in such a manner that the movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be arranged right-justified in the inner region of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment, the rear face of the game region is arranged. The movable device can be arranged on the entire side.

  On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight is concentrated on this guide portion. Since it is difficult, even if the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the back case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is optimal to arrange the support plate portion A313 on the left side of the back case A310 and omit the support plate portion A313 on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said to be a choice.

  A plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged in the game area as described above in FIG. 323, so that the patterns and figures to be visually recognized by the player who pays attention to the game area can be visually recognized through the game board A13. It can be configured with a plurality of front covers A410.

  As a result, it is not necessary to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like having characters printed on the surface of the game board A13. Further, since the area in which the front cover A410 is arranged is configured so that the appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400, as described above. Compared with the case where a sticker or the like is attached to the game board A13, it is possible to increase variations in the aspect of decorating the game area. The details of the change in appearance will be described later.

  Since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305), it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated even if the structure is exposed here or the drive device is arranged. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 323, adjacent first operation units A400 are arranged in proximity to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 arranged between them is the first operation unit A400 in a mode in which adjacent first operation units A400 are connected to each other. One operation unit A400 is fastened and fixed. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of the first operation units A400 arranged around the third symbol display device 81 are combined with each other to form an integrated structure.

  Further, the outer side surface of the first operation unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operation unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the back case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reinforcing the back case A310 described above. It is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308). Therefore, the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

  As a result, it is possible to easily design the shape of the metal plate member 75 into a shape that facilitates noise prevention and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contact with the inner side surface of the inner frame 12 as the original function. it can.

  FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 illustrates a state in which a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) first operation units A400 are detached from the rear case A310 to the front side and the second operation units A700 are attached to the rear case A310.

  The first operation units A400 are configured to be operable in substantially the same operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are arranged so as to surround a part of the inner space of the back case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves toward the center of the internal space of the back case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the back case A310). It is configured to move in.

  Therefore, for example, the influence exerted by gravity may change in each first operation unit A400, so in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without depending on gravity, but details will be described later. To do. As described above, since the first operation units A400 have a generally common configuration, the first operation unit A400 arranged at the lower left will be described in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be described. Omit it.

  FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area in front view which is covered by the front cover A410, and a main body area A400b in which a light emission effect is mainly executed and its main body. It is composed of a side-by-side area A400v provided side by side at the end of the area A400b.

  The juxtaposed region A400v is not a region that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is provided on the center side that may be visually recognized by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

  In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, drive motor AMT1, detection sensor A426 for detecting the position, wiring, connector, etc.) that is inevitably generated along with the performance executed in the main body area A400b, not for the purpose of being visually recognized by the player. By disposing the main body area A400b, the main body area A400b can be utilized to the maximum for disposing the members that are supposed to be visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to prevent the main body region A400b from being eroded by a structure that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, and thus it is possible to arrange a large member by making full use of the size of the main body region A400b.

  327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. 327 and 328 show the state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front cover A410 and a front unit FU that includes a first displacement member A440 that is displaceable in such a manner as to enter between the front cover A410 and the front cover A410. A rear unit BU arranged on the back side of the front unit FU is mainly provided.

  The front cover A410 is configured by a thin plate bent in a U shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU, and is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. And a plurality of through holes A412 formed at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

  With the above-described configuration, the front cover A410 has a function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU invisible to the player while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412, and the first displacement member of the front unit FU. It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the A440.

  329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is arranged so as to be stacked on the back side of the production central portion A411a of the main body portion A411 so as to be opposed to the production central portion A411a and has the shape of the production central portion A411a. A diffusing plate A415 formed of a light-transmissive resin material in a plate shape having a corresponding outer shape, and an LED (oppositely a square chip shape in FIG. 329) arranged opposite to the diffusing plate A415 and having an optical axis directed to the diffusing plate A415 side. (Illustrated in FIG. 4) and a light emitting means A416a arranged on the board, and a board fixing plate which is arranged to face the board A416 and fixes the board A416 and is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. A417 and mainly.

  Hereinafter, the configurations of the diffusion plate A 415, the decorative substrate A 416, and the substrate fixing plate A 417, and the fact that the configuration suppresses the positional deviation will be described.

  The diffuser plate A415 is not fastened by a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body portion A411 and the board fixing plate A417 from the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the back side so as to face the light emitting means A416a at an axis corresponding position A415a. A corrugated pattern formed by concentric circularly extending ridges is formed, and a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a smaller diameter than the light emitting means are formed. It mainly includes a plurality of small-diameter holes A415c and a plurality of projecting plate portions A415d projecting from the sides forming the upper and lower ends to the back side in a plate shape.

  The ridges that form a wave pattern on the back surface side of the diffuser plate A415 refract the light irradiated to the axis corresponding position A415a side, and after advancing in the radial direction of the circle centering on the axis corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the side of the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position distant from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not the opposite. That is, it is formed so as to prevent the light incident on the position distant from the axis-corresponding position A415a from proceeding to the axis-corresponding position A415a side.

  The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed in order to avoid interference of members, and in the present embodiment, the purpose is to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative board A416 to the board fixing plate A417. Is formed by.

  The small-diameter portion 415c is a position that does not face the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 (a position that faces the plate portion of the main body portion A411) in order to make it difficult to visually recognize it in a front view, and is a column through which the board fixing plate A417 is inserted. The through hole is formed at a position corresponding to the portion A417f and is used for aligning the diffusion plate A415, the decorative board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, which will be described in detail later.

  The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417, so that the diffusion plate A415 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417. The projecting plate portion A415d is formed with the projecting length of about 4 mm and the width of about 10 mm as the upper limits, and since it has a certain degree of rigidity, the load generated during assembly and maintenance (for example, with other members). It is possible to prevent the protruding plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc., and it is possible to maintain the function of alignment for a long time.

  The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire back surface side and can perform a light diffusing function in the entire area, but it is clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 in terms of the presentation mode. That is, the first region AC1 is a region that overlaps the decorative substrate A416 in front view, and the second region AC2 is a region that does not overlap the decorative substrate A416 in front view.

  The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416 passes through the first area AC1, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light in a strong light emitting mode as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second region AC2 corresponds to a region formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and corresponds to the light emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416. The light from the light emitting means A 416a weakens and arrives without passing through the optical axis.

  On the other hand, the second region AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of light emission by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, which will be described later in detail.

  The illuminated substrate A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, a recessed portion A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large-diameter holes A416c formed with a large diameter for positioning, and a small-diameter through-hole. A plurality of set fastening holes 416d provided as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e provided on the front and back sides and connected to the ends of the wiring, and an electric wiring FC (the book) for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440. The embodiment mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat cable is connected.

  The light emitting means A416a is a position where the intensity of light visually recognized by the player is likely to be maximized, and in the present embodiment, it is preferentially arranged at a position matching the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed in the front-rear direction. It This makes it easier to secure the intensity of light visually recognized by the player through the through hole A412.

  The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b for fastening and fixing the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

  The large-diameter hole A416c is a through hole having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar portion A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the decorative board A416 can be aligned with the board fixing plate A417.

  The group fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through holes arranged vertically. By configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes, the maintenance efficiency is improved.

  For example, for maintenance, the main body unit A411 and the diffusion plate A415 are removed while the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the faulty decorative board A416 is removed from the board fixing plate A417. When it is assumed that the A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417, the decorative board A416 is tilted forward by its own weight before being fastened and fixed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through-hole (the side where the displacement toward the front side due to the forward tilt is large) of the pair of upper and lower through-holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed by the fastening screw, so that the front side is attached by its own weight. It is possible to satisfactorily return the posture in the backward falling direction by tightening the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the posture of the decorative board A 416 from being erroneously fixed when fastening and fixing the maintenance.

  In addition, in the lower through hole of the set fastening portion A416d, the columnar portion of the board fastening portion A417c protrudingly provided on the front side of the board fixing plate A417 is inserted to position the decorative board A416 and to fix the decorative board A416. Equipped with the function of temporary fastening. That is, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through hole is caught by the columnar portion of the board fastening portion A417c, and thus it is possible to prevent the decorative board A416 from dropping by its own weight.

  The connector A416e is disposed on the front side and includes a first connector A416e1 to which a wire for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting means A416a is connected, and a wire to be connected to a detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

  In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is coupled is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( For the reason of the third connector A416e3), it can be arranged at an arbitrary position. In the present embodiment, the position corresponding to the lower end of the decorative board A416 and included in the side-by-side area A400v is set so that interference with other members is less likely to occur and the player may not visually recognize it. It is arranged.

  On the other hand, the first displacing member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring has a region (the substrate fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (Fig. 335)), the distance between the connectors (front-back distance) is shortened. Therefore, if the connector is misplaced, an excessive load is applied to the wiring. May be given.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the connector A416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below) in which the wiring may be in any direction, the intermediate connector A416f is set to the first unit of the front unit FU. The direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the displacement member A440, and the direction in which the electric wiring FC is expandable/contractible (the flat (flat) cable band extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to be broken) It is set.

  The board fixing plate A417 has a main body portion A417a which is opened in the front side and is formed in a box shape capable of accommodating the decorative board A416, and a ridge portion for receiving the fastening portion of the front unit FU on the rear surface side of the main body portion A417a. Then, from a plane common to the plurality of through holes A417b configured so that the fastening screws screwed into the fastening portions can be inserted, the fastening portions into which the fastening screws are screwed, and the tip end surfaces of the fastening portions, from the front side to the front side. A plurality of board fastening portions A417c configured by a set of protruding small diameter columnar portions.

  Further, the main body portion A417a of the board fixing plate A417 includes a plate-shaped deep bottom plate portion A417a1 connected to a rear end portion of the board fastening portion A417c, and a front surface parallel to the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 and the front surface of the board fastening portion A417c. The shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the front end surface of the fastening portion.

  That is, the back surface of the decorative board A416 can be surface-supported by the tip surfaces of the fastening portions of the plurality of board fastening portions A417c and the shallow bottom plate portion A417a2.

  The board fixing plate A417 has a sharp protruding portion A417d protruding from the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp shape, and a vertical width of the sharp protruding portion A417d at a lower left portion of the sharp protruding portion A417d. It has an insertion hole A417e formed in a rectangular shape having an equivalent width.

  The sharp protruding portion A417d is disposed in the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and has a triangular cross-section in a state in which it is spaced from the electric circuit board A416 by about the thickness of the electric wiring FC which is a flat cable. The protrusion is formed as a linearly extending ridge, and the extending direction of the ridge intersects (orthogonally) with the direction A416x in a front view. Since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, the electric wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is connected to the board fixing plate A417 and the sharpened portion A417d. Sandwiched between.

  In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d, the position where the electric wiring FC is displaced by the displacement of the first displacing member A440 is set to the intermediate connector A416f. The position can be shifted from the end position of the electric wiring FC to be connected to the position sandwiched between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC falls off from the intermediate connector A416f.

  The board fixing plate A417 includes a plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f protruding in a columnar shape from the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2 toward the front side at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c, the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2, and the shallow bottom plate-like portion. A plurality of through holes A417g penetratingly formed at the boundary between the A417a2 and the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 and a side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body portion A417a to the front side can receive the projecting plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415. A plurality of notch parts A417h formed by the width and a plurality of projecting pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body part A417a along the front end of the side wall A417a3 obliquely formed on the right side in front view. And

  The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the decorative board A416c, exceeds the thickness of the decorative board A416, and is a large-diameter base portion protruding in a plane formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3. And a small-diameter tip portion protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base portion with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

  As a result, the large-diameter base portion can align the decorative substrate A416 and the diffuser plate A415 can be surface-supported, and the small-diameter tip portion can align the diffuser plate A415. That is, the diffuser plate A415 is aligned with the small-diameter tip portion, and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the posture of the diffuser plate A415 from shifting even though it is not directly fastened and fixed.

  The through hole A417g forms a passage for air and has a function of suppressing heat generation of the decorative board A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged so as to close the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the decorative substrate A416, and it is difficult to form the air passage to the front side, so the through hole A417g is formed on the back side. Is formed. Thereby, heat generation of the decorative board A416 can be suppressed without lowering the effect of the light emitting means A416a.

  The cutout portion A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages in the direction along the side wall A417a3. As a result, even if the small-diameter tip portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f is broken due to deterioration over time or the small-diameter tip portion falls off due to manufacturing failure, the diffusion plate A415 is provided so as to project from the substrate fixing plate A417. It is possible to prevent the plate portion A415d from being displaced in the longitudinal direction (the direction along the forming direction of the side wall A417a3, the upper right direction). Therefore, in the support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

  The projecting piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape that allows the illuminated substrate A416 to enter between the protruding piece A417i and the shallow bottom plate portion A417a2. In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the decorative substrate A416 in a front view, and in addition, the protruding piece A417i is downward (obliquely downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), the projecting piece A417i causes the projecting piece A417i to tilt toward the tip end side (upper right side) of the decorative board A416 even when the decorative board A416 receives a load in a forward tilting direction due to gravity or the like. Since it is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the decorative board A 416 from tilting forward.

  The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and restricts the displacement of the decorative board A416 toward the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, it is possible to stably fix the decorative board A416 while omitting the disposition of the fastening screw inside the internal space of the operation unit A300. Thereby, while avoiding the reduction of the light emitting effect by disposing the fastening screw inside the internal space of the operation unit A300 where the player's attention is likely to be high (because the fastening screw causes a shadow), The decorative substrate A416 can be stably fixed to the substrate fixing plate A417.

  When assembling the decorative board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right edge of the decorative board A416 is slidably inserted between the shallow plate portion A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i, and the insertion tip is inserted. By pushing the illuminated board A416 backward from the starting point, the assembly can be smoothly performed. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

  FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 331(b) is a view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 of the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXXIb line of FIG. 331(a). FIG. 332(a) is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 332(a) is a front view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a decorative board A416 and line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb in FIG. 332(a). It is a sectional view of substrate fixing plate A417.

  331(a) and 331(b) show a state in which the decorative board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and in FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b), the decorative board A416 is shown. Is shown assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

  The illuminated substrate A416 includes chamfered portions A416g and A416h that are chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate body. The form of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. That is, as compared with the length to the cutout portion A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417, the length to the cutout portion A417h at the lower end corresponds to the length to the cutout portion A417h. As compared with the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed with a shorter distance from the right side of the decorative substrate A416.

  FIG. 331 shows a state in which the decorative board A416 is displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the board fixing plate A417, as compared with the state shown in FIG. The upper limit of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417, and in the state of FIG. 331, the first chamfered portion A416g. The edge portion of is inserted into the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h.

  Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when displacing the decorative substrate A416 downward, the upper limit of the length of the space formed between the second chamfered portion A416h and the lower surface of the substrate fixing plate A417 is set. As a result, the illuminated board A416 can be shifted downward from the state of FIG. 332, and the edge portion of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h in the state of being displaced downward.

  By thus forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the decorative board A416, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the position of the decorative board A416 when inserting the decorative board A416 into the board fixing plate A417. That is, even if the right side of the decorative board A 416 and the right side of the board fixing plate A 417 are not in the positional relationship as shown in FIG. 332, a slight vertical shift is allowed and the decorative board A 416 is fixed to the board. It can be plugged into plate A417. Thereby, the decorative board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

  To change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the decorative board A416 may be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with the right side thereof as the tilt axis. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, as can be seen from the fact that the insertion columnar section A417f of the board fixing plate A417 is visible through the large-diameter hole A416c of the decorative board A416, the tapered insertion columnar section A417f (FIG. 329). The large-diameter hole 417c is guided by (see) to correct the positional deviation of the decorative board A 416 in the vertical direction, and the state becomes as shown in FIG. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the decorative board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the decorative board A416, so that the decorative board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

  The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h in the assembled state (see FIG. 325) to fill the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative board A416 from entering the cutout portion A417h after assembly. That is, while providing the cutout portion A417h with a function of widening the gap when the decorative board A416 is assembled, after the assembled state, the clearance is filled to maintain the arrangement of the decorative board A416. It can have a function.

  As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the decorative board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the projecting piece A417i overhangs on the front side of the decorative board A416 to prevent the decorative board A416 from coming off. Since they interfere with each other, it is possible to prevent the right side of the decorative board A416 from falling off the board fixing plate A417.

  In this embodiment, the board fastening portion A417c is not arranged in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 by preventing the decorative board A416 from falling off by such a retaining structure. (The installation of fastening screws is omitted). As a result, it is possible to secure a region in which the light emitting means A416a is provided in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and it is possible to avoid a shadow caused by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

  When the decoration substrate A416 becomes defective and the maintenance work for replacing the decoration substrate A416 is performed, the decoration substrate A416 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. 331(b). Need to tilt. At this time, since the decorative board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the decorative board A416. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 is pulled toward the front side, so that the decorative board A416 can be easily mounted. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

  Further, the first connector A416e1 is arranged at a position opposite to the right end (the end opposite to the side wall A417a3) that is the starting point of the posture change of the decorative board A416. The decorative substrate A416 can be efficiently rotationally displaced by the load applied to the wiring connected to the A416e1. In other words, the moment of the force applied to the decorative board A416 by the load applied to the wiring can be increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent an extra (excessive) load from being applied to the decorative board A 416 and the wiring during maintenance work.

  FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and the front unit FU is fixed to the opened front side in a manner of covering the front side. That is, the second displacement member A490 arranged on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to move forward and backward through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

  As shown in FIG. 333, the drive device provided in each first operation unit A400 is only one of the drive motors AMT1. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, so that the movable effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the units that can be disassembled as the units are simply referred to as the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and when performing the movable effect, the configuration of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU is executed. Do not work independently, but work in conjunction. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the rear unit BU.

  FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400. is there. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operation unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. Note that the wiring HC and the like are omitted in FIGS. 335 and 336. First, the outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400, which constitutes the front unit FU, is a support plate formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive and colored (black in this embodiment) resin material. The first displacement member A440, which is formed of a light-transmissive and colorless resin material, is provided on the front side of the support plate portion A420 with a gap allowing advance and retreat, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420. A guide plate portion A430, a first displacement member A440 which is guided in the gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420 and is displaced forward and backward (sliding displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344), and its first A slide link A450 that is a mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 and that is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, the drive motor AMT1 that is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and the same. A drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to the drive motor AMT1 is mainly provided.

  In addition, the first operation unit A400 constitutes a rear unit BU, and a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and in which each constituent member rotates in accordance with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1 and its transmission. A support box portion A470, which is rotatably supported by a gear group A460, is formed of a light-transmitting colored (black in the present embodiment) resin material into a box shape with its front side open, and a light-transmitting and colorless support box portion A470. A rear plate portion A480 which is made of a resin material and which is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A470 with a gap and is fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap which is formed on the front side of the support box portion A470 (support A second displacing member A490 that is moved forwards and backwards (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) in a gap between the plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470, and the drive motor AMT1 is attached to the second displacement member A490. A rack and pinion mechanism that transmits a driving force and is mainly provided with a rack and pinion A510 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box portion A470.

  As described above, the first displacing member A440 and the second displacing member A490 have a transmission mechanism on the rear side with the plate-shaped portion (the supporting plate portion A420 and the bottom portion of the supporting box portion A470) arranged on the rear side therebetween. (Slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) is provided in common, and the slide link A450 and the second displacement member A490 are both provided in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. It is arranged.

  That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in front and rear of the plate-shaped portion so as to be easily bulky before and after, but the first displacement member A440 on the front side. As compared with the case where the slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism of the second displacement member and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, the arrangement of the plate member for forming the independent gaps is omitted. Therefore, the front-back width occupied by the displacement mechanism section of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, another effect mechanism section can be arranged in the front-rear gap that can be formed by the amount that the front-rear width can be suppressed, so that the effect of the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

  Next, each component of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 having different displacement modes, and the configurations required for the respective displacements are partially different. The configuration required for realizing the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be described, and the remaining configuration required for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be described later.

  The support plate portion A420 is a portion that constitutes the skeleton of the first operation unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main body plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 penetratingly formed as elongated holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a hole A423 provided as a similar elongated hole in one of the guide holes A422, and parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide ridges A424 protruding on the front side as ridges, and a body plate A421 that is recessed along the direction A416x from the right side edge of the body plate A421 so that the recessed end faces the front side. Recessed portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the right side edge portion of the vehicle, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position, and a slide link A450 covered. A cylindrical portion from the main body plate portion A421 to the rear surface side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the shaft support portion A427 protruding in the rear surface side from the main body plate portion A421 and having a circular cross-section capable of supporting the shaft supporting hole A452. Mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 that are provided in a protruding shape.

  The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b for guiding the displacement of the guided protruding portion A455c of the slide link A450.

  The hole A423 is a through hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d is projected to the front side of the main body plate portion A421 and the coil spring ASP1. Lock (hook) the end of.

  The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) at the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates a biasing force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

  The guide ridge A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electric wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and the details will be described later.

  The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler-type sensor that is arranged so as to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

  In the present embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are at the projecting position. The arrangement of the detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

  Thereby, the member cost can be reduced and the space for disposing the other displacement member can be unwound, while the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already disposed at the projecting position. Despite this, it is assumed that the drive motor AMT1 may not stop. On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken so that overload is prevented from occurring in a portion related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can be maintained. However, details will be described later.

  The retaining cylindrical portion A428 is projectingly provided in a cylindrical shape formed with an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and the projecting tip is slightly spaced to form a transmission gear. It is arranged so as to face the group A460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 has a function of suppressing the displacement of the transmission gear A461 in the axial-side falling direction.

  In this embodiment, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461 (not shown). Therefore, as long as the screw does not loosen or fall off, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the transmission gear A461 in the axial side drop direction by the screw. As described above, in the present embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 are configured to suppress the retaining of the transmission gear A461 in two steps, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the transmission gear A461 from falling off the shaft. Can be prevented.

  The guide plate portion A430 has a right side edge parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421, and a plate-like main body plate portion A431 that is arranged to face each other in a posture along a plane parallel to the surface formed by the main body plate portion A421. , A plurality of long recesses A432 recessed in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x on the back surface side of the main body plate portion A431, and to the lower left along the direction A416x on the right edge on the front surface of the main body plate portion A431. It corresponds to the width of the inclined surface A433 that is formed to be inclined toward the front side and is configured to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (rear lid portion 443), and the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420. And a guide plate portion A434, which is formed in a long plate shape and has a width that extends in the direction A416x.

  The main body plate portion A431 has a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by the side (side) of the side wall portion A421a that is raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 to the front side. The guide plate portion A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420 while the insertion hole portion A431a provided at the edge portion is provided at one place.

  Further, at the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431, which is a position passing through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 moves forward and backward, the insertion hole portion A431a is arranged only at one position at the substantially central position of the vertical width. As compared with the case where the insertion hole portion A431a is arranged at a deviated position, the gap between the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over all the right edge portion. At the same time, the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 can be improved as compared with the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged.

  The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stopper protruding portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the displaceable length of the displacement stopper protruding portion A441e of the first displacement member A440. It is recessed with a length almost equal to. That is, the first displacement member A440 is not only guided on the back side through the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420, but also on the front side by the elongated recess A432.

  The guide plate portion A434 is provided with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged on the right edge side at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable, and between the claw portions A434a. The electric wiring FC, the end of which is connected to the first displacement member A440, is passed through the gap of and temporarily fixed. By this. One end of the flexural displacement of the electric wire FC that is flexibly displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be set to the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wire FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized. ..

  Therefore, it is possible to maintain the electric wiring FC composed of the flat type cable in such a state that the electric wiring FC is brought closer to the guide plate portion A434 so as to come into contact with the guide plate portion A434. However, when the electric wiring FC is also displaced (see FIG. 346), it is possible to avoid the interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

  FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that, in FIG. 338, for convenience of description, the drawing is illustrated in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

  As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacing member A440 includes a guided plate portion A441 that is a plate-shaped portion that is guided between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430 along the direction A416x, and a colored plate. It is a plate-shaped portion that is formed of a light-impermeable resin material (which is plated with gold in this embodiment), is axially supported by the guided plate portion A441, and is displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. The interlocking plate portion A442, a rear lid portion 443 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the interlocking plate portion A442 to form a gap between the interlocking plate portion A442, and a plate-like member made of a colorless light-transmissive resin material. The diffusing plate A444 is disposed to face the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffusing plate A444 is disposed to face the back side of the diffusing plate A444 and has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the diffusing plate A444. And an illumination substrate A445.

  Here, since the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the decorative board A445 are fixed together, they will be described above. That is, the plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the back surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffusing plate A444 so that the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusing plate A444 are positioned with respect to each other, and the diffusing plate A444 The plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the diffuser plate A444 and the decorative substrate A445 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted into the plurality of insertion holes A445a of the decorative substrate A445.

  Then, the fastening screws passing through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid 443 are fastened and fixed to the plurality of screw-in portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442, so that the diffusion plate is provided between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the rear lid portion 443. The A444 and the decorative board A445 are held in a mode that allows the positioning pins A442a and A444b to be displaced (displacement less than the height of the positioning pin) to such an extent that they do not fall off. Accordingly, the diffuser plate A444 and the decorative board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screws into the diffuser plate A444 and the decorative board A445.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear lid 443 abut on the decorative substrate A445 and press it against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in a dimensional relationship that causes a load. With this pressing force, the diffuser plate A444 and the decorative board A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

  The decorative substrate A445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed to the diffusion plate A444 side on the front side.

  The diffusing plate A444 is formed with a corrugated pattern formed by a ridge having a shape that concentrically spreads around a shaft-corresponding position A444c arranged to face the light emitting means A445b on the back side, and the outer edge of the corrugated pattern has an interlocking plate part It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

  On the front surface side of the diffusion plate A444, a fitting portion A444d is formed which is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442 and projects toward the front surface. In the assembled state, the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c. Be done.

  With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b that has passed through the opening A442c among the light that has passed through the diffusion plate A444.

  The decorative board A445 is provided on the back side and includes a connector A445c to which the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected. The electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442. Accordingly, the curved position of the electric wiring FC can be configured on the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of the bending can be moderated.

  The rear lid portion 443 is provided with a vent opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to the connector A445c or a circuit component device (not shown) (a condenser, a resistor, or the like) and the vent opening 416c in the direction A416x. And a through hole A443d formed therethrough.

  The tip of the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is arranged in the ventilation opening 443c in which the connector A445c is located, but the electric wiring FC passes through the through hole A443d and is routed to the back side of the rear lid 443. .. This allows the electrical wiring FC to be sandwiched between the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d and the small-diameter rod portion 443e and the decorative board A445, so that the electrical connection between the connector A445c and the small-diameter rod portion 443e can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the wiring FC from being displaced. The through hole A443d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wiring FC, and compared with the case where the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wiring FC is not formed. It is possible to reduce the load given to the.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e is formed so as to project to the side of the decorative substrate A445, similarly to the protruding rib 443b. Therefore, the distance between the small-diameter rod portion 443e and the decorative board A445 is narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point where a load is applied from the rear lid portion 443 to the decorative board A 445. That is, only the protruding rib 443b and the small diameter rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the decorative board A445.

  Accordingly, even when the electric wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from coming off from the connector A445c.

  Next, the connection mode of the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and the details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 has a support shaft portion A442d protruding in a circular shape, a shaft support hole A442e which is a circular opening coaxial with the center axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and a center shaft of the support shaft portion A442d. A roller member A442f which is a resin member rotatably supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 about a parallel axis and which is formed in an outer circular shape.

  The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed of a resin material in a long plate shape, a support shaft portion A441b protruding from the upper end of the main body plate portion A441a in an outer circular shape, and A shaft-supported hole A441c formed in a lower end portion of the main body plate portion A441a in a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b and a long linear shape from the front surface to the front surface side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of protruding guide ridges A441d, a plurality of displacement stop protruding portions A441e protruding in the front side in a long shape along a direction intersecting (orthogonal to) the guide ridges A441d, At a position facing the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, the inclined surface A441f is inclined toward the outer side (lower left side) toward the front side, and the direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as small-diameter grooves along with, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right side edge portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and the rear surface side of the main body plate portion A441a. And a fastening portion A441i projectingly provided in a manner capable of fastening a screw.

  The support shaft portion A441b and the shaft-supported hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As an assembling method, after the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged such that the shaft-supported hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged in the shaft shape of the support shaft portion A441b, the interlocking plate portion A442 is mounted along the axis. By moving with respect to the guide plate portion A441, the supporting shaft portion A441b can be inserted into the supported shaft hole A442e and the supporting shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the supported shaft hole A441c to form a supported shaft state. The shaft-supported hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft-supported hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d are dimensioned such that a slight gap is rotatably formed therebetween.

  In the present embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 are axially supported by the above-described method, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b. Since the diameter of the head portion is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft-supported hole A442e, the interlocking plate portion A442 is prevented from coming off the guided plate portion A441.

  The guide ridge portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. Thereby, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

  The displacement stop protruding portion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the long recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the long recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

  When the guided plate portion A441 is arranged at the end of displacement, the formation position of the displacement stop protruding portion A441e is designed so that the displacement stop protruding portion A441e is arranged at the end of the elongated recess A432 in the longitudinal direction. To be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not normally stop at the displacement end, the displacement of the guided plate portion A441 is regulated by locking the displacement stop protruding portion A441e with the elongated recess A432. be able to.

  The inclined surface A441f is a plane for receiving and guiding the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445. By forming the guide plate portion A441 so as to be inclined, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. It should be noted that the mode of bending of the electric wiring FC formed of a flat cable will be described later.

  The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424, and has a cross section halfway from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It is provided with a projecting portion that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the projecting portions is set to be slightly longer than the thickness of the guide ridge A424. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A424 while suppressing the extending direction of the guide groove A441g from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.

  The recessed portion A441h is a recessed portion that is recessed to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted into the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 can be arranged on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 and is connected to the displacement side elongated hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, whereby the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

  It returns to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, and demonstrates. The slide link A450 includes a long link A451 that is rotatably supported by a shaft support A427 of the support plate A420, and a deformed slide member that is connected to the long link A451 and is supported so as to be movable in parallel along a direction A416x. A455 and.

  The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and has a shaft-supported hole A452 bored with a diameter that allows the shaft-supported portion A427 to be inserted, and a long side on the basis of the shaft-supported hole A452. Displacement-side elongated hole A453 formed in the end portion in the elongated direction along the elongated direction, and elongated hole along the elongated direction in the end portion on the side opposite to the side where the displacement-side elongated hole A453 is arranged. And a transmission-side elongated hole A454 formed in the.

  The deformed slide member A455 is disposed in the recess A421b of the main body plate A421 that is recessed on the front side of the base end surface on which the shaft support A427 of the support plate A420 is projected, and the main body plate A421 and the long link A451. A plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a and a transmission projection portion A455b which is formed in a circular outer shape and projects into the rear surface side of the main body plate portion A455a and is inserted into the transmission side long hole A454 of the long link A451. And a plurality of guided projections A455c which are formed in a circular outline on the front side of the main body plate A455a and are inserted into the second guide holes A422b of the support plate A420, and the front end of the main body plate A455a on the front side. A spring hooking portion A455d that is projecting like a hook and is inserted into the through hole A423 of the support plate portion A420, and the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked), and a thinness that can enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426. The detection target plate portion A455e formed in the plate shape and the deformed transmission target portion A456 to which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

  The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470, one of which is meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and the other of the pair of transmission gears A461. On the other hand, it is provided with a pinned gear A462 that meshes with the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1, and an in-phase member A465 that follows the pinned gear A462 in phase.

  The pinned gear A462 has a transmission projection A463 that is provided in a circular outline from the eccentric position toward the front side, and has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission projection A463 as the base end. And an arc wall portion A464 formed as a wall portion.

  The arc wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and has a shorter length formed on the front side than the transmission protrusion portion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, although the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are portions that similarly transmit the load to the deformed transmitted portion A456, the load generation points are different in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load is generated via the transmission protrusion A463 (in the case where the load is generated at a plurality of points, the intermediate point or the average point) is the front side compared to the position where the load is generated via the arc wall A464. Becomes With the configuration described above, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be described, and hence the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

  339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is a first operation on the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXIXIXc of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 339(a), the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339(b), the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC are not illustrated, and the gear with pin is illustrated. As for A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arc wall A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is shown in phantom. Further, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), the rear unit BU is not shown unless otherwise specified. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

  FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c) show a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position before the excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged at the outermost side (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is made the shortest. Therefore, the biasing force applied from the coil spring ASP1 to the odd-shaped slide member A455 is increased. Is the weakest.

  As shown in FIG. 339(b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pinned gear A462, and is located on the rear side from the main body plate portion A455a on the protruding position (upper right) side than the transmission protrusion A463. Of the projecting plate portion A456a that is projected in a plate shape toward the side, and is disposed opposite to the projecting plate portion A456a at a retreat position (lower left) side of the projecting plate portion A456a with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission projecting portion A463. And an insertion gap A456c formed between the projecting plate portion A456a and the opposed arrangement portion A456b.

  The projecting length of the projecting plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length of the facing disposing portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), with respect to the transmitting projecting portion A463 and the arc wall portion A464. Can be contacted in the moving direction.

  The facing arrangement portion A456b is capable of abutting (overlapping) in the moving direction with respect to the transmission protrusion A463a, while being non-contacting (non-overlapping) with respect to the arcuate wall portion A464 in the moving direction. That is, the facing arrangement portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which a front-rear gap is generated.

  The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed on the open end side. With this relief portion A456d, the forward/backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A463 with respect to the insertion gap A456c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

  Although illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), in the actual assembled state (see FIG. 324), the pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462. And the drive force of the drive gear AMG1 is transmitted to the pinned gear A462.

  As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A440 guided by the first guide hole A422a and the deformed slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b are connected by the long link A451. .. That is, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are respectively displaced in the opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the shaft support A427.

  As shown in FIG. 339(b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 339(c), in the first displacement member A440, a roller member A442f is arranged between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. Since the arrangement of A442f is regulated between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate portion A442 is supported by the slide hole of the guided plate portion A441. It is configured to rotate starting from A442e. An operation diagram for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in time series will be described.

  FIG. 340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is a first operation on the line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  340(a) to 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the roller member A442f is located at the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339(c), and the guide wall portion of the support box portion A470. The state of contacting the bent corner of A471b is shown.

  By the time the state of FIG. 339 is displaced to the state of FIG. 340, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. It As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A456b. (See FIG. 340(b)).

  In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is configured to be parallel to the direction A416x at the initial angle d0, but the configuration is not limited to this. ..

  For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (only 10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). It may be formed as a straight line. In this case, the section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section that does not apply a load in the traveling direction to the projecting plate portion A456a, so that excessive drive resistance may occur immediately after the start of rotation. It can be avoided.

  That is, a section corresponding to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the projecting plate portion A456a can be pushed forward after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. It can be suppressed. Further, when driving in the direction of returning to the initial angle d0, a section for 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

  FIG. 341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is a first operation on the CCCXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc line in FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  341(a) to 341(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

  By the time the state of FIG. 339 is displaced to the state of FIG. 341, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. It As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A456b. (See FIG. 341(b)).

  342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is a first operation on the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  342(a) to 342(c) illustrate a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the long direction of the long link A451 is substantially orthogonal to the direction A416x.

  By the time the state of FIG. 339 is displaced to the state of FIG. 342, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 to the third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. It As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A456b. (See FIG. 342(b)).

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the first displacement member A440 starts the sliding movement along the plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455. Since it is configured to be substantially orthogonal to (the direction parallel to the direction A416x), the slide displacement in one direction (same plane) of the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly performed.

  That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is set to one side (the lower side in the present embodiment) based on the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). It can be limited. As a result, during the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 is compared with the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is possible to suppress the rattling of the slide displacement of.

  FIG. 343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is a first operation on the line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  In FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f extends from the state of FIG. 342(c) to the projecting position of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 344(c). The state of being arranged at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement until the state of () is reached is shown.

  By the time the state of FIG. 339 is displaced to the state of FIG. 343, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 to the fourth angle d4. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. It As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A456b. (See FIG. 343(b)).

  FIG. 344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is a first operation on line CCCXXIXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. 319. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a unit A400.

  In FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c), a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated and the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the bulging position (also referred to as a bulging state) is illustrated.

  By the time the displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 344, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a so that the deformed slide member A455 is slid and displaced, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. It As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A456b. (See FIG. 344(b)).

  When the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the direction A416x. Here, since the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship of abutting in the direction A416x, even after the transmission projection portion A463 is separated from the protruding plate portion A456a. The displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is restricted in a state where the abutting contact with the protruding plate portion A456a.

  The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arcuate wall portion A464 is configured to pass through the rotation shaft of the pinned gear A462, so that the pinned gear A462 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A456a. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the arc wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, since the line contact can be achieved, the contact area can be reduced). Is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the frictional force generated between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be reduced (theoretically, it should be set to 0. Therefore, it is possible to avoid unnecessary driving force for restricting the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A462.

  In addition, in consideration of the deformation of the resin material forming the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a due to wear, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a increases. It is considered that the frictional force generated at is increased. On the other hand, a low friction seal may be attached to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied as a countermeasure. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, it is possible to reduce the area that needs to be dealt with by using a low friction seal or a lubricant. Therefore, the cost of measures can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission projection A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall A464 are formed in the same circular shape that is coaxial with the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. It is possible for the player to have difficulty in grasping the timing at which the state of contact with the protrusion A463 changes to the state of contact with the arcuate wall portion A464.

  FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 illustrates a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the projecting position, and the transmission protrusion A463 is in contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456.

  By the time the state of FIG. 339 is displaced to the state of FIG. 345, the pinned gear A462 has rotated from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360). After the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 is displaced without pushing the protruding plate portion A456a and without contact with other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is regulated in displacement by abutting on the arcuate wall portion A464, and is maintained in the state of FIG. 344(b) (displacement in the return direction is regulated). ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the odd-shaped transmitted portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 is a position on the side of the protruding position of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the portion where the deformed transmitted portion A456 is loaded due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (insertion gap A456c) and the portion where the deformed transmitted portion A456 is loaded in FIG. 345 are made different. As a result, even if the pinned gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and the transmission protrusion A463 or the odd-shaped transmitted portion A456 is overloaded, it is possible to avoid changing the shape of the insertion gap A456c. You can Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is affected after the overload occurs.

  In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the deformed slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction). Since odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the moving range in this direction, displacement of odd-shaped slide member A455 due to the load applied from transmission projection A463 is avoided.

  In this way, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 by elastic deformation (bending or expansion/contraction) of the facing arrangement portion A456b while avoiding displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455.

  As shown in FIG. 345, the position where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is the side wall of the facing arrangement portion A456b on the detected plate portion A455e side, and the transmission protrusion A463 applies a load to the detected plate portion A455e by abutting. ing. In the present embodiment, when the odd-shaped transmitted portion A456 is overloaded due to the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially bent. That is, the detected plate portion A455e is made weaker than the transmission protrusion A463.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 of the structure of the deformed transmitted portion A456 from being destroyed by the load caused by the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the odd-shaped slide member A455 can be improved.

  If the detected plate portion A455e is broken, the detected plate portion A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. Therefore, based on the detection failure of the detected plate portion A455e. It is possible to assume the possibility that the pinned gear A462 is over-rotated, and to perform timely maintenance.

  The design mode of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the transmission protrusion A463 abuts on the deformed portion A456 for each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled to be excited until a slight load is applied, and fatigue destruction occurs due to long-term use. The detected plate portion A455e may be designed to break due to the accumulation of the load of the number of times of contact that is approximately the same as the number of times of durable operation of the portion (for example, the transmission protrusion A463) that is apt to occur. In this case, in addition to the possibility of occurrence of over-rotation of the pinned gear A462, it is possible to notify the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

  346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is a first operation taken along the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a). It is a sectional view of a unit A400. FIG. 346(a) illustrates a state where the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (also referred to as a retracted state), and in FIG. 346(b), the first displacement member A440 is in the extended position (also referred to as an extended state). Referred to).

  As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), the electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electric wiring FC is slack in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443.

  As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to contact the electric wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is pulled in to a position (a side away from the first displacement member A440) slightly deeper than the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end portion facing the first displacement member A440). It is formed in the vertical position), and a space between the inclined surface A441f and the electric wiring FC can be secured.

  The electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 when the first displacement member A440 is in an extended state, and enters the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. It Thereby, the space VE described later can be used both as the space into which the electric wiring FC enters and the space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for the arrangement can be reduced.

  The electric wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding unit that shields the field of view of the electric wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from being visually recognized in the directional view from the front, rear, left, and right. The space VE will be described.

  In the space VE, in the retracted state of the first displacing member A440, the inclined posture in which the surface on the side visually recognized by the player (the surface on which the opening A442c on the interlocking plate portion A442 side is formed) is directed toward the third symbol display device 81 side It is the space behind which is formed by being composed of. As described above, the space VE is formed in a tilted posture in which the first displacing member A440 is formed in a plate shape, and the first displacing member A440 is in a retracted state in which the first displacing member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction. It can be easily formed.

  On the other hand, this space VE is also a space into which the second displacement member A490, which will be described later, enters by displacement. Therefore, in consideration of the visibility of the second displacement member A490, it is preferable that the field of view in front view can be maintained wide. Since the field of view in the front view expands at an angle around the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer contour of the space VE is formed so as to incline in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the rear side. In the embodiment, the outer contour of the space VE (the boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed by a surface that is not inclined in the front-rear direction for ease of manufacturing.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE generated for improving the visibility of the first displacing member A440 and the second displacing member A490 is effectively used as the region for slackening the wiring. Accordingly, when the slackened portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacing member A440 at the projecting position, an area required in order to loosen the wiring (in other words, The area between the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440 can be eliminated.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the slackened portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position, the electric wiring FC is placed inside the rear case A310. The end of displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close (close) to the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 while being accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 346, in the first displacing member A440, the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged on the front limit line FL at the projecting position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the retracted position (FIG. 346(a)). In the displacement process up to (see), at least a part (mainly the protruding position side part) of the interlocking plate part A442 projects to the front side with respect to the front limit line FL. This overhang is such that, in the process in which the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position, the posture change of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the state where the first displacement member A440 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 339(c)). 342 (see FIG. 342), the first displacement member A440 can extend beyond the front limit line FL toward the front side, particularly on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (left side in FIG. 346).

  Therefore, it is necessary to form a space for avoiding a collision with the first displacement member A440 on the front side of the front limit line FL, so that the arrangement of the decorative board A416 is further separated from the first displacement member A440 (front side). However, in this embodiment, the space for the first displacing member A440 to project is not formed in the present embodiment by not forming the illuminated substrate A416 on the retracted position side (left side in FIG. 346) of the first displacing member A440. Is formed. In addition, by forming only the diffusion plate A415 on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the region where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a arranged on the decorative substrate A416 is visually recognized is the decorative substrate. It is avoided to be limited to the formation range of A416.

  As described above, the diffusion plate A415 is formed so as to project from the outer edge of the decorative substrate A416 while limiting the formation range of the decorative substrate A416, and thus the front-rear spacing of the arrangement of the decorative substrate A416 and the first displacement member A440 is increased. While narrowing, it is possible to sufficiently secure the range in which the light-emission effect by the illuminated board A 416 is visually recognized.

  With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the external appearance of the first operation unit A400 that occur with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effect. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacing member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when the first displacing member A440 is arranged at the projecting position (position after excitation). is there.

  347(a), 347(b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. In FIG. 347(a), the retracted state of the first displacement member A440 is shown, and in FIG. 347(b), the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342). The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the extended state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 347(b) and 348, the shape of the portion of the first displacement member A440 that is hidden by the front cover A410 is illustrated by hidden lines.

  On the back side of the front cover A410, a diffusion plate A415 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a provided on the decorative substrate A416 is provided, and the diffusion plate A415 has the above-mentioned first area AC1. And a second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

  The first displacing means 440 is arranged at least on the back surface side of the diffusion plate A415 at the projecting position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passing through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacing means 440 is displaced to a position where it overlaps with the first area AC1 in a front view, since the decorative board A416 is disposed in the first area AC1, the opening A442c has passed through the opening A442c. The light is blocked by the illuminated substrate A416.

  Therefore, the light passing through the opening A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second region AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the illuminated substrate A416 and diffused by the diffusion plate A415, and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440. The light emitted from (see FIG. 337) can be visually recognized in a mixed state.

  More specifically, the aspects of the second region AC2 are as follows: the light emitting means A416a is turned on and the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A416a is turned off and the light emitting means A445b is turned on, and the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means. It is configured to be switchable in at least four modes, that is, a mode in which both the A445b are turned on and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 defines the through hole A412 as the edge of the front cover A410 on the side of the third symbol display device 81. A plurality of long holes A412a are formed along a straight line at three locations.

  As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the middle long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged outside the opening A442c. (Do not face each other). As a result, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be made higher when viewed through the central long hole A412a than when viewed through the long holes A412a on both sides.

  For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the projecting position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the central long hole A412a, but is not visible through the long holes A412a on both sides. Can be configured to. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b are visually recognized through the central long hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a is visually recognized through the long holes A412a on both sides. Light (light emitted from the light emitting unit A445b is difficult to see).

  Here, the mode (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the light emission mode of the light emission unit A416a (see FIG. 329) while the light emission unit A445b of the first displacement member A440 is off. .. Therefore, even when the first displacing member A440 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, it is possible to reduce the influence on the light emitting effect by the light emitting means 416b. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the projecting position without causing a change in the appearance of the front cover A410.

  On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the projecting position 440, the long hole A412a formed in the position close to the third symbol display device 81 side in common to the first operation units A400 is formed. Since the light emitting mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the side of the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the effect of the change in the form visually recognized through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 of the first operation unit A400 arranged in a set of five is arranged at the projecting position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged at the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b, next, at the timing of turning on and turning off the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 that is adjacent to the clockwise in the front view, the next is first adjacent to the clockwise direction in the front view. The light emitting means A445b of the displacement member A440 may be turned on in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, such as turning on the light emitting means A445b.

  In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b turned on, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained and only the mode of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a is sequentially changed clockwise in the front view. Can be executed.

  Here, the light emission mode of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the lower left front view, the first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left front view, and the first operation unit A400C is Is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view, and the first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view. The main differences between the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D and the first operation unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, openings corresponding to the openings A442c of the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are shown as openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and other configurations are similar to the first operation unit A400 for convenience. Is attached.

  349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A. Note that FIG. 349(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and in FIG. 349(b), the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. The state in which the A440 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400A is configured such that the opening WA overlaps with the long holes A412a at both ends in a front view. Further, since the width length of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the projecting position, the opening WA and the ends thereof are The area overlapping with the long hole A412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a can be changed in association with each other.

  350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B. Note that FIG. 350(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and in FIG. 350(b), the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. The state in which the A440 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), in the first operation unit A400B, unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WB may overlap with the long holes A412a at both ends in a front view. In addition to the above, the width of the opening WB is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. Accordingly, the area where the central long hole A412a and the opening WB overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position is set to the maximum in the state shown in FIG. It can be configured such that it is once decreased with the displacement of A440 and is increased again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). Accordingly, while the first displacing member A440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to configure the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

  351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C. Note that FIG. 351(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and in FIG. 351(b), the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. The state in which the A440 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), in the first operation unit A400C, unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WC may overlap with the long holes A412a at both ends in a front view. In addition to this, the width length of the opening WC is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is widened in a tapered shape in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

  As a result, the area where the left and right elongated holes A412a and the opening WC overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position is once decreased with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and is increased again. Can be configured as. Accordingly, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the elongated holes A412a at both ends can be configured in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

  352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D. Note that FIG. 352(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (position similar to the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and in FIG. 352(b), the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. The state in which the A440 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), the first operation unit A400D is different from the first operation unit A400 in that the opening WD is branched in a front view. That is, the opening WD is formed in a shape that branches in the vicinity of the lower end so as to expand toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.

  As a result, it is possible to divide the range in which the central long hole A412a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is divided into a plurality of ranges from the mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)). It can be changed to a mode in which the light is emitted (see FIG. 352(b)).

  In the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge portion of the opening WD divides the central long hole A412a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the range in which light can be visually recognized is divided for the entire three long holes A412a. That is, when three elongated holes A412a and the opening WD overlap each other and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three elongated holes A412a, the opening WD has a central elongated hole A412a among the three elongated holes A412a. By overlapping only with the long holes A412a on both ends, the visible range of light is divided into the central long holes A412a, and it is possible to switch between the case where the light is limited to the long holes A412a on both sides. Is also good.

  It returns to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, and demonstrates. The support box portion A470 has a main body box portion A471 formed in a box shape with its front and upper right sides opened, and a shaft hole through which the rotation shaft of the pin-bearing gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 is bored formed in the main body box portion A471. A 472, a shaft support hole A 473 that is bored so that the second displacement member A 490 can be supported, a notch portion A 474 that is cut out in a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A 473, and the cut portion thereof. A fastening portion A475 having a columnar shape protruding near the notch portion A474 and having a distal end formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. And a pinion support portion A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with a slide rack A511 supported by the rack support portion A476.

  The main body box portion A471 is provided with a protruding wall portion A471a which is provided in a wall shape from the back bottom edge portion to the back surface side, and a wall portion is provided in a wall shape from the front upper edge portion to the front surface side to assemble the first operation unit A400. In the state (see FIG. 324), the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f, and the projection wall portion A471a is arranged opposite to the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 interposed therebetween. And a wiring guide portion A471c.

  Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f contacts the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b, and the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in a manner of sliding or rolling (FIG. 339). To FIG. 344).

  The wiring guide portion A471c is designed such that the shape thereof can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wiring HC described later, but the details will be described later.

  The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected to each other through the shaft support hole A473 and the cutout portion A474. In particular, the notch portion A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, but the details will be described later.

  The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the back side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a that is inserted into the support hole A512 of the rack pinion A510 and a slide rack A511 of the rack pinion A510. A stepped portion A476b that is formed in a stepwise shape and extends along the sliding movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and projects toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is disposed. Prepare

  The pinion support portion A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-shaped plate (plate) from the bottom of the main body box portion A471 to the rear side along an arc centered on the pinion shaft A477a. Arcuate wall portion A477b that is extended in the shape of FIG.

  The pinned gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the in-phase member A465 are connected through the shaft hole A472. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, a connection mode of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

  FIG. 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465, and FIG. 353(b) is a front perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 in FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465. Note that in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the side connected to each other is in the front.

  As shown in FIG. 353( a ), the pinned gear A 462 has a plurality of phase matching circumferential projections A 462 a protruding from the surface on the side facing the in-phase member A 465 toward the in-phase member A 465 side. Prepare

  The phase member A 465 has a phase matching diameter projection A 465 a protruding from the surface on the side facing the pinned gear A 462 toward the pinned gear A 462 side, and an outer circular shape from an eccentric position to the back side. The transmission projection A466 is provided so as to project, and the arc projection wall A467 is formed as a circular arc-shaped wall centering on the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465 with the transmission projection A466 as a base end. As compared with the transmission protrusion A466, the arc wall portion A467 has a shorter formation length on the back surface side.

  The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a has a plurality of arc-shaped wall portions formed by cutting a circular wall portion around the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 along the axial direction.

  Further, the phase matching diameter projecting portion A465a is provided with a projecting strip projecting radially outward from a cylindrical projecting portion having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase aligning circumferential projecting portion A462a. It is formed so as to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is formed in the mating circumferential protrusion A462a. By inserting the protrusion into the notch of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a, the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the same phase member A465 is matched with the pinned gear A462, The pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pinned gear A462 and screwing it into the tip end of the phase matching diameter projection A465a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a are not equalized (120° intervals if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but are made uneven, The gear with pin A462 and the in-phase member A465 are configured to be coupled only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b)).

  That is, by combining the angles of the notches of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a with 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them non-uniform), the angle at which the gear with pin A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected. The relationship can be limited to one type.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the case where the notch of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a (the phase matching diameter protrusion A465a) is formed at three positions has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of positions may be one or two, or may be four or more, and can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

  It returns to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, and demonstrates. The rear plate portion A480 is a body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmissive resin material, and is fastened to the body plate portion A481 by being screwed into the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A plurality of alignment projections A483 are provided that project toward the outer peripheral side of the through hole A482 through which the screw is inserted and the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470, and are used for alignment by contacting the outer peripheral side. And a plurality of projecting plate parts A484 projecting from the main body plate part A481 to the front side so as to form a plate shape along the outer shape of the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

  The outer edge portion (the left edge portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the rear plate portion A480 comes into surface contact with the rear side end portion of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and is projected as the left-right direction. Only the installation plate portion A484 functions.

  On the other hand, in the inner edge portion (the right edge portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the rear plate portion A480, the alignment protrusion A483 and the arc wall portion A477b come into contact with each other in a plurality of directions (vertical and horizontal directions). Can be aligned. Accordingly, the rear plate portion A480 is favorably aligned with the support box portion A470, and the space for the outer edge portion can be widened by eliminating the portion for alignment from the outer edge portion. In this embodiment, the secured space is utilized as a space for disposing the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), which will be described later in detail.

  The projecting plate portion A484 is arranged such that the projecting tip thereof is close to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (abutting or leaving a slight gap such that wiring cannot pass through), and the rack pinion A510. Of the slide rack A511 and the outer area. This can prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacing member A490 from entering the moving range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, which will be described later in detail.

  FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacing member A490 includes a shaft-supported plate A491 that is formed of a colorless and light-transmissive resin material and that is rotatably supported by the shaft-supporting hole A473 of the support box portion A470, and its supporting plate A491. A cover formed by an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the shaft-supported plate A491 and fitted to the shaft-supported plate A491 in a manner of covering the shaft-supported plate A491 from the front side and formed of a colorless light-transmissive resin material. A mounting member A492, and a decorative substrate A493 in which a light emitting portion A493a including an LED or the like is disposed and which is housed in the shaft-supported plate A491 and the covering member A492.

  The supported shaft support plate A491 is provided with a supported circular projection projecting portion A491a protruding outward in a circular shape on the back side and inserted into the supporting shaft hole A473, and a projecting length shorter than the supporting shaft supporting projection portion A491a. And a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a long hole A491d formed in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the shaft-supported projection A491a. , A plurality of circular support parts A491e protruding toward the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on the insertion hole A491c, and a thin projecting shape protruding toward the front side along the side wall part forming the outer circumference. And a plurality of thin protrusions A491f.

  The circular support portion A491e and the thin protrusion A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge portion of the decorative board A493 in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIGS. 335 and 336), and the decorative board A493 is located on the rear side. Support from.

  In particular, since the thin protrusion A491f is formed at a portion where the shape of the accommodated decorative board A493 is constricted, that is, at a location where the outer peripheral side wall of the shaft-supported plate A491 is recessed inward, the decorative board A491f is formed. A part where the shape of A493 is narrowed can be selectively supported. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the decorative board A493 in a constricted portion where the rigidity is likely to be reduced due to the reduced width dimension, and it is possible to prevent the decorative board A493 from breaking. ..

  The covering member A492 is inserted through the supported portion A493b of the decorative board A493 and has a plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes A491c, and a radial direction on the base side of the fastening portions A492a. A plurality of projecting support portions A492b that are projectingly provided on the cover member A492 and are coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492, and the thin projecting portions A491f of the shaft-supported plate A491. A plurality of thin protrusions A492c are provided along the rear side of the thin protrusions.

  With the above structure, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative board A493 is supported by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported by the circular support portion A491e and the protruding support portion A492b around the fastening screw. Accordingly, the decorative board A493 can be favorably fixed to the shaft-supported plate A491 and the covering member A492.

  It should be noted that the manner of supporting the illuminated substrate A493 is not limited at all. For example, it may be fixed by applying a load to the decorative board A493 along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is not generated (for example, the front-rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c is the decorative board. It is also possible to maintain the arrangement of the decorative board A493 without causing a load by being formed in the same dimensional relationship as the thickness of A493).

  The decorative board A493 is provided on the back side with the above-described plurality of light emitting parts A493a, and a plurality of supported parts A493b formed by punching or recessing so as not to interfere with the fastening part A492a in the front-back direction. And a board-side connector A493c to which the ends (connectors) of the wiring are connected.

  The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which the wiring extends along the lengthwise direction of the lengthwise hole A491d of the shaft-supported plate A491, and the lengthwise hole A491d extends from the inner edge portion on the short side direction to the lengthwise direction. A partition extension portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge portion on the opposite side is shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be coupled), and the partition extension portion A491d1. Is used as a reference, and a ridge portion A491d2 that is provided so as to widen from the edge portion on the opposite side of the board-side connector A493c to the back side is formed.

  The board-side connector A493c is arranged on the visible region side (left side in FIG. 355) of the third symbol display device 81 with the partition extension A491d1 as a reference, and the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c on the opposite side is long. Pass through hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the partition extension portion A491d1 and the decorative board A493.

  Accordingly, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, the displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extension portion A491d1 can be suppressed, so that the board-side connector is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from the A493c.

  The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length that allows the protruding portion A491d2 to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. Accordingly, the wiring HC whose end is coupled to the board-side connector A493c can be routed so as to stand up toward the back side of the shaft-supported plate A491 (in the protruding direction of the protrusion A491d2). It is possible to avoid the wiring HC from coming into contact with the cutout portion A474, as compared with the case where is disposed near the rear surface of the shaft support plate A491 and is routed to the rear surface of the support box portion A470. Therefore, it is possible to avoid disconnection of the wiring.

  In addition, since the protruding portion A491d2 is provided so as to project at a right angle to the back surface of the shaft-supported plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, and contact with the wiring HC is avoided. It is possible to suppress the width of the cutout portion A474. This makes it possible to secure a large area (area) of the main body box portion A471 on the side of the fastening portion A475, so that the rigidity of the main body box portion A471 can be secured and the degree of freedom in disposing the fastening portion A475 is improved. be able to.

  It returns to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, and demonstrates. The rack and pinion A510 is meshed with a slide rack A511 that is slidably supported along the direction A416x, a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is axially supported by a pinion shaft A477a of a support box portion A470. The pinion A517 that rotates in synchronization with the sliding movement of the pinion A517, and the reinforcing arm A518 that meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

  The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the above-described second displacement member A490, so that the second displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out. That is, it is fastened at the rotation center position of the reinforcing arm A518 to the shaft-supported projection A491a of the second displacement member A490, and fastened to the fastening projection A491b at the rotation tip side of the reinforcing arm A518 (see FIG. 355). .. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  The slide rack A511 is formed in a plate shape along with a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending in the direction A416x and having a size capable of inserting the support columnar section A476a of the support box portion A470. A supported plate portion A513, a projecting plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position distant from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and the same phase member A465 facing each other and having the same phase. The deformed transmitted portion A515 to which the driving force is transmitted from the member A465.

  The support hole A512 is inserted with the tip small diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging the large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. .. In this manner, the slide rack A511 is arranged such that the plate-like portions are opposed to each other with a gap of at least about the height of the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a between the slide rack A511 and the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x in the state of being kept.

  The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the rear end of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 has a slight gap with the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. Are placed opposite each other. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent the displacement from occurring.

  Various causes are exemplified as the cause of displacement of the slide rack A511 in the front-rear direction. For example, a case where a player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called "docking"), a case where fine particles are clogged in the gap, and the tooth resistance becomes excessive so that an excessive load is generated at the tooth position is exemplified. It

  356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. It should be noted that in FIG. 356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358, the rear plate portion A480 is not shown for easier understanding, The state where the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 and the odd-shaped transmitted portion A515 are shown in an enlarged manner for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358, the second displacement member A490 extends from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the projecting position (see FIG. (See 358) is illustrated in time series.

  The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed, the driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm A518 via the pinion A517. As described above, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

  The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described with reference to FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the operations described above with reference to FIGS. 339 to 345 are performed. Rotation of the pinned gear A462 will occur, and the relationship between them will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 356( b ), the deformed transmitted portion A 515 is a portion that engages with the in-phase member A 465, and the transmission protrusion A 466 can enter and can move independently (load the slide rack A 511. A non-transmission recess A515a that is recessed (movable without giving), a connection recess A515b that is a recess of the same depth that is connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A515a, and a width narrower than the connection recess A515b. In front of the slide rack A511 at the retracted position (lower left) side of the insertion gap A515c, which is a recess having the same depth, which is connected to the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a with respect to the connection recess A515b, and the transmission protrusion A466. A protruding plate portion A515d that is formed in a plate shape toward the side and constitutes the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and a distance that is greater than or equal to the diameter of the transmission protruding portion A466 on the protruding position (upper right) side of the protruding plate portion A515d. It is provided with a facing arrangement portion A515e that is arranged so as to be opposed to the protruding plate portion A515d and that constitutes a right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.

  The projecting length of the projecting plate portion A515d is formed longer than the length of the facing disposing portion A515e in the same direction, and is longer than that of the transmitting projecting portion A466 and the arc wall portion A467 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324). Can be contacted in the moving direction.

  The facing arrangement portion A515e is capable of abutting (overlapping) with respect to the transmission protrusion A466 in the movement direction, while being non-contacting (not overlapping) with respect to the arcuate wall portion A467 in the movement direction. That is, the facing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which a front-rear gap is generated.

  The side surfaces of the protruding plate portion A515d and the facing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x).

  The connection concave portion A515b has the same function as the relief portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connection recess A515b is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A466. As a result, the forward/backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

  Although not shown in FIG. 356(a), FIG. 356(b), FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(b), and FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 is similar to the pinned gear A462 in the drive motor. The drive force of the AMT1 is transmitted by the drive gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, the displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate the drive gear AMG1 and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

  In FIG. 356(a), in the state before the drive gear AMG1 rotates, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the movement range on the retreat position side, and accordingly, the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retreat position. The illustrated state is shown.

  In this state, the transmission protrusion A466 is not in contact with the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x), while the arcuate wall portion A467 is in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d. At A467a, the protruding plate portion A515d is abutted from the upper right (extended position side) along the movement direction (direction A416x). As a result, the displacement of the projecting plate portion A515d can be restricted by the arcuate wall portion A467, so that the slide rack A511 is unintentionally displaced by the external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in the non-excitation (non-drive) state. Can be prevented.

  The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is arranged in a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465 and parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting plate portion A515d to the arcuate wall portion A467 is configured to pass through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, so that the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the projecting plate portion A515d. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, since the line contact can be achieved, the contact area can be reduced). Is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356(a), the frictional force generated between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, to 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid an extra drive force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the in-phase member A465.

  In addition, in consideration of the deformation of the resin material forming the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d due to wear, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d increases. It is considered that the frictional force generated at is increased. On the other hand, a low-friction seal may be attached to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied as a countermeasure. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, it is possible to reduce the area that needs to be dealt with by using a low friction seal or a lubricant. Therefore, the cost of measures can be suppressed.

  The external force is exemplified by gravity, a load generated by vibration during an earthquake, a force generated when a player hits or rocks the pachinko machine A10, and the like.

  FIG. 356(b) illustrates a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the coupling recess A515b. By the time the state of FIG. 356(a) is displaced to the state of FIG. 356(b), the in-phase member A465 has rotated from the initial angle d10 by the first angle d11, but the transmission projection A466 is still deformed. It is not in contact with the portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).

  On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (extended position side) along the movement direction (direction A416x). As shown in FIGS. 356(a) and 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer side surface of the arc wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a moves in the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction A416x). Does not displace. Therefore, also in the state of FIG. 356(b), as in the state of FIG. 356(a), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the retracted position side end of the movement range.

  As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A515e. (See FIG. 356(b)).

  FIG. 357(a) illustrates a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the insertion gap A515c. By the time the state shown in FIG. 356(a) is displaced to the state shown in FIG. 357(a), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 contacts the projecting plate portion A515d. Contact.

  In FIG. 357(a), the straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (parallel to the direction A416x). That is, in the transmission protrusion A466, the farthest portion from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d, so when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357(a), The restriction by the in-phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced to the extended position side (upper right side).

  As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A515e. (See FIG. 357(a)).

  FIG. 357(b) illustrates a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the inside of the insertion gap A515c. The phasing member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13 by the time it is displaced from the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG. 357(b). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e to slide the slide rack A511, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

  In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

  As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A515e. (See FIG. 357(b)).

  In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the facing arrangement portion A515e, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end portion on the extension position side of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 is extended. The state of being arranged at the exit position is shown.

  By the time the state of FIG. 356(a) is displaced to the state of FIG. 358, the same phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 to the fourth angle d14 (rotates one rotation or more). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e to slide the slide rack A511, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

  In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

  As described above, since there is a front-rear gap between the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged in front of and behind the facing arrangement portion A515e. (See FIG. 358).

  In FIG. 358, a portion of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A465 abuts the facing arrangement portion A515e. Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In the present embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, the slide rack A511 is allowed from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) when the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the moving range on the projecting position side. The rotation of the in-phase member A465 is allowed up to the angle dd1.

  That is, since the transmission projection A466 and the projecting plate portion A515d contact each other only when the in-phase member A465 rotates by the permissible angle dd1, the transmission projection A466 and the projecting plate portion A515d do not come into contact with each other until the permissible angle dd1 rotates. Since the installation plate portion A515d is not in contact with each other and the load is not transmitted, the disposition of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end portion on the projecting position side in the movement range.

  Therefore, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control in which the rotation of the in-phase member A465 is stopped at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 actually rotates beyond the fourth angle d14. Even if there is an excess of the rotation angle up to the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end portion of the moving range on the projecting position side, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the projecting position. it can.

  In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (even if there is an error of the allowable angle dd1 or less), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the projecting position. It is possible to increase the rotational speed of the in-phase member A465 and realize highly accurate displacement of the second displacement member A490 with a simple configuration (the second displacement can be performed without suddenly decelerating the in-phase member A465 and stopping it). The member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position).

  In addition, by intentionally causing the rotation angle excess of the allowable angle dd1 or less from the fourth angle d14 to drive the excess amount toward the retracted position of the second displacement member A490 (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

  Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the facing arrangement portion A515e move in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. By abutting in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position (bounce displacement).

  As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be regulated (the return rotation can be prevented) in the state of FIG. 358, and therefore the pinion A517 is fastened and fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518 meshed with the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm portion A518. It is possible to prevent the second displacing member A490 that returns from the extended position (see FIG. 358) from returning and rotating.

  359 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit BU taken along the line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). Note that in FIG. 359, for ease of understanding, the illustration of the alignment projection A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly shown.

  The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. 359. Note that in the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 are referred to as appropriate. The wiring HC is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a circular cross section and connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. Is installed in.

  As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC that is connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the partition extension portion A491d1 and the decorative board A493, and extends along the ridge portion A491d2 into the support box portion A470. And is guided to a space surrounded by the rear plate portion A480.

  As described above, since the protruding portion A491d2 is formed in such a protruding length that it can enter the cutout portion A474 of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC is guided so as to be separated from the cutout portion A474. The contact with the cutout portion A474 is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the cutout portion A474 and breaking.

  On the other hand, since the wiring HC is guided by the ridge A491d2, the wiring HC is guided closer to the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be rubbed with the rear plate portion A480 without any measures and broken in a short period of time. However, in the present embodiment, the friction between the rear plate A480 and the rear plate A480 is suppressed by appropriately inserting the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC into the rear plate A480. This will be described in detail below.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470 once. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the decorative board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around the winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound at an intermediate position of the protruding wall portion A471a. And the side of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound around the fastening portion A475 once around the end of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

  The wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, so that even in a loosened state (see FIG. 356(a)), the wiring HC is separated from the fastening portion A475 upward (direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends). Can be suppressed. Accordingly, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

  In the present embodiment, since the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, there is an advantage in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from coming off from the fastening portion A475 before the fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw in the process of being screwed.

  In addition, at the time of this fastening and fixing, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 with the back surface side (the side where the fastening portion A475 extends) of the support box portion A470 facing upward, the rear plate portion A480 is attached to the support box portion A470. Since the wiring HC can be prevented from dripping in the gravity direction in the main body box portion A471 by mounting the screwdriver and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, the assembly can be completed easily. .. That is, as compared with the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be forced to assemble in a downward posture, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 to facilitate the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. Can be

  Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the binding band KB is guided (closed) to the rear plate portion A480 side. Accordingly, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

  Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while leaving a sufficient length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect with each other. At the position, the end portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that it is slid between the wiring HC already arranged and the support box portion A470.

  This makes it possible to form a state in which the intermediate portion HCa abuts from the rear plate portion A480 side of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate portion A491d2 by the rear plate portion. The degree of proximity to the portion A480 side can be suppressed.

  A displacement mode of the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described. The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the entire length of the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 is used to generate a displacement (flexure) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) associated with the wiring can be made uniform, it is possible to prevent a large load from being locally generated on the wiring HC.

  The board-side connector A493c has a retracted position as compared with the shaft-supported protrusion 491a that functions as a rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm A518 formed on the protruding position side of the second displacement member A490. It is arranged on the side. That is, when the second displacing member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, the board side is located inward of the member of the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight toward the second displacing member A490 (see FIG. 346(a), right). A connector A493 is provided.

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the wiring HC protruding outside the outer shapes of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. That is, the axially supported projection A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 are arranged close to the projecting position side (the third pattern display device 81 side) to secure a large projecting amount of the second displacing member A490 while wiring. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing the HC.

  As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end portion of the wiring HC along the radial direction of the circle centered on the shaft-supported protruding portion A491a. When the board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side with respect to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)). , And the case of being arranged on the other side (the upper left side, see FIG. 358) is switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC that is connected to the board-side connector A493c between the forward and backward passes of the second displacement member A490. As a result, fluctuations in the load applied to the wiring HC can be suppressed, so that disconnection of the wiring HC can be prevented.

  In addition, the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily approached to the displacement toward the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475. The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

  FIG. 357(b) illustrates a state in which the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and is rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c extends is substantially parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 that passes through the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491. That is, the amount of deformation (the amount of bending) of the wiring HC can be minimized by setting the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490. ..

  In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described. A portion that is in contact with the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 and a portion that is disposed below the fastening portion A475 are described. It is rising slightly. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

  That is, when the second displacing member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the projecting position side, the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side has a space between the middle portion HCa and the rear plate portion A480. While the effect of entering the wiring HC cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without rubbing between the wirings HC.

  Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state of FIG. 357(b) to the projecting position shown in FIG. 358, the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c has a posture along the left-right direction. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the posture along the left-right direction is generated, and compared with the case where the second displacement member A490 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 357(a)). As a result, the influence of the load applied by the ridge A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced.

  Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa is provided between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c only when an excessive frictional force may be generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480. The wiring HC is made to enter so as to separate the wiring HC from the rear plate portion A480.

  On the other hand, when the possibility that excessive frictional force is generated is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b), by eliminating the front-back overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, It is possible to prevent extra resistance from being generated in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

  In the projecting state of the second displacing member A490 (see FIG. 358), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357(b). It was arranged above the fastening portion A475. The part is slightly lowered, and the part arranged below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is such that the displacement is close to the straight line connecting the center of the shaft-supported protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

  As shown in FIG. 358, in the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the projecting position (that is, the state where the second displacement member A490 is rotated by 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide portion A471c, so that the wiring HC is arranged. Is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed for one purpose to reduce the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

  More specifically, when the second displacement member A490 is in an extended state, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and in contact with the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c forms the connecting portion A475 and the protruding wall portion A471a, which are the passages of the wiring HC. Configured to pass between. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC and improve the durability of the wiring HC.

  FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 based on the initial angles d0 and d10. Note that in the description of FIG. 360, the angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate the rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 unless otherwise described.

  As described above, the first displacement member A440 continuously displaces from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5 and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 dissipates the initial angle d5. While it is stopped from d10 to the second angle d12, it is continuously displaced from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are set. An angular range that does not generate a driving force is inserted between the pinned gear A462 and the rotational angle range of the phase member A465 for generating the driving force. Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

  The manner of setting the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, at the same time when the first displacement member A440 is switched from the continuous displacement state to the stopped state, the second displacement member A490 starts displacement from the stopped state. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is configured so that the timings of simultaneously displacing the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 do not occur, so that a single drive motor AMT1 can be used to drive a plurality of members (first displacement member It is possible to reduce the load received by the drive motor AMT1 while adopting a configuration for driving the A440 and the second displacement member A490 (the load applied from a single member can be limited).

  Further, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, a section in which the driving force of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 needs to be generated while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced. It can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

  According to the present embodiment, the members that are displaced at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 are switched, so that the pinned gear A462 in the one side angle range based on the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. By rotating the same phase member A465 by reversing it, one member (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490) is stopped and the other member (the second displacement member A490 or the first displacement member) is stopped. A440) can be reversed.

  As described above, it is not necessary to add a large driving force to stop one member (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members contact (rub) with each other in line contact, so that theoretically no frictional force is generated. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

  Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the drive motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is caused, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. A driving mode of performing is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14. Therefore, the rotation of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 is mechanically restricted when the sixth angle d6 rotates before the fourth angle d14 rotates by the allowable angle dd1 (see FIG. 345). .. Therefore, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, the accuracy of stopping the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low, and the second displacement member A490 is configured even if it is easily over-rotated (control mode). Can be maintained in the extended position (see FIG. 358).

  The numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14 (for example, may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). good). In this case, while allowing the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 to rotate by the allowable angle dd1 beyond the fourth angle d14, the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1 to reach the sixth angle d6. When it reaches, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be immediately stopped by the mechanical regulation.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the second displacement means A490 from reaching the extended position by performing stop control at an allowable amount (that is, an angle (allowable amount) slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14) with respect to the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1. It is possible to avoid the second displacement means A490 to be stopped at the projecting position), and when the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 is unintentionally large, the second displacement member A490 is erroneously difficult. It is possible to prevent being ranked.

  As described above, the arc wall portion A464 is formed with the central angle of approximately 230 degrees, and thus even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position that restricts the first displacement member A440 (the position of the fifth angle d5). Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where the first displacement member A440 comes into contact with the first displacement member A440, it is possible to maintain the displacement regulation at the protruding position of the first displacement member A440.

  The state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the detection sensor A426 detects the detected plate portion A455e, and thus the stop control is performed. It is unlikely that the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally becomes large in the vicinity of the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arcuate wall portion A467 has an angle range smaller than that of the arcuate wall portion A464 as the minimum necessary angle range for maintaining the second displacement member A490 in the retracted position from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12. Then, it is formed at about 210 degrees). Thereby, the material cost required for the arc wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

  Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width that exceeds the horizontal width of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81, and is below the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. Is located in.

  362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operating unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operation unit A700 includes an elevating unit A701 that includes an elevating unit A702 that is held by a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction and that is configured to be vertically movable. The production unit A710 is configured to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position by the ascending/descending operation of A702 and configured to be operable (produceable) in a plurality of modes.

  The elevating unit A701 supports left and right elongated elevating portions A702 on the left and right, and a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported by left and right side end portions as an axis and an arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). And a pair of drive motors A704 for transmitting the driving force to.

  As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, gear teeth are formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the rotation shaft side, and the gear teeth are fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. A gear transmission mechanism in which gears mesh with each other is illustrated.

  Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided, which is axially projected at a position where a pin inserted through the long hole is eccentric and gear teeth are formed on the outer periphery, and the rotation thereof is performed. A gear link transmission mechanism in which a gear tooth of the body and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 mesh with each other may be used.

  Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the end of the rotating outer diameter of an unillustrated auxiliary arm member fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole. A link transmission mechanism in which a driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the rear side shape of the game board A13 arranged to face the front side of the second operation unit A700 is left-right asymmetrical (see FIG. 306), so that the drive motor A704 is placed left-right. It is asymmetric. That is, by inserting the drive motor A704 into the gap (space) on the back side of the game board A13, the front-back width required for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

  As described above, since there is a circumstance that it is desired to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 according to the shape of the game board A13, in the present embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. Is preferred.

  FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of effect unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of effect unit A710. In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that divides the effect range of the effect unit A710, a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 that is arranged below the annular front cover A711 and is fastened and fixed to an upper lid portion A740 described later, A state in which a skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is arranged below the upper cover A712 and overlaps with the rear surface side and fastened and fixed to the elevating portion of the elevating unit A701, is disassembled and separated to the front side is illustrated.

  In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714 that is formed in an annular shape that is substantially the same as the annular front cover A711 in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711 is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 is rotatably arranged at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714.

  In the rotating body A720, a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 in a front view is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A714. It is possible to receive the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a such as the LEDs arranged on the plurality of electric decoration substrates A715. Three light emitting means A715a are arranged on one side of the pentagon formed by the illuminated substrate A715, and three light emitting means A715a are arranged at equal intervals in the side direction.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the decorative board A715 is composed of three LEDs or the like arranged on one side of the pentagon at regular intervals in the same direction as the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed to the front side. The front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b causes the annular front cover A711 to emit light by irradiating the back side of the annular front cover A711 with light. That is, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the light emission effect through the light transmissive portion that is partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

  In the present embodiment, each of the five flat plate-shaped decorative boards A715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, and the decorative board A715 above the rotating body A720 is in a horizontal posture, and the decorative boards at the lower left and right sides. The lower end of A715 is arranged so as to face the rotation axis side, and the light emitting means A715a is arranged such that the optical axis is oriented in the normal direction of the inward surface of each of the decorative boards A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

  Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotation outer side portion of the rotating body A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. Accordingly, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a when reflected by the rotating body A720 can be changed with the rotation of the rotating body A720, so that a glittering effect can be executed. ..

  In the present embodiment, plating (gold plating, silver plating, etc.) is applied to the outer surface of the rotating body A720 in order to easily reflect light by the rotating body A720. The aspect of the outer side surface is not limited to plating, but various other aspects are possible. For example, a tape of a color that is easily reflected may be attached.

  As described above, since the rotating body A720 rotates about the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotating shaft is on the rotating shaft of the rotating body A720 regardless of the rotation of the rotating body A720. Is irradiated to the same place. In the present embodiment, the light passage concave portion A722a is formed at that location, so that the upper portion of the rotating body A720 is opened so that light passes therethrough. The details will be described later.

  The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 surround the rotating shaft of the rotating body A720 and the recessed portions A711a and A714a that form a window portion through which the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a passes, at the opposite edges. It is provided with semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b that are recessed in a semicircular cross section.

  The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further applied to the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 to be reflected, so that the light emitted from the same light emitting means A715a is plural. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the number of the light emitting means A 715a arranged while performing a glittering effect.

  In this respect, it is possible to secure a wider area for reflecting other light (area to be plated) by forming the window portion necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A 715a as small as possible. This is advantageous because it can be done. In the present embodiment, the shape of the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED forming the light emitting unit A715a, and the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a is increased. It is possible to secure a wide area for reflecting light without damaging it.

  FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of rotating body A720 of rendering unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of rotating body A720 of rendering unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the effect unit A710 are not shown.

  The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, is a set of members supported by a plurality of supporting portions A730 supporting the plurality of rotating members, and has a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotating member A721 and a second rotating member formed of a pair of members formed of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material in a shape capable of rotating the outside of the first rotating body 721. A728 and.

  The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed of a resin material having a low light transmittance to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton. And an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recessed portion formed on the back surface side of the shell portion A722 on the front surface side and in which gear teeth are engraved on the back surface side. The gear tooth A724a, which is disposed on the back side of the annular gear member A723, is rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched by the pair of shell portions A722, and the gear tooth A724a engraved on the shaft portion is the same as the gear tooth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly comprises a central rotating member A 724 to be combined.

  The pair of shell portions A722 are provided with a light passage concave portion A722a which is provided in an upper portion thereof in a direction away from each other. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passage concave portion A722a is formed both above and below the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the concave end of the light passage concave portion A722a. Are arranged in a manner.

  That is, even when looking through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a in a top view, most of the annular gear member A723 cannot be seen in that direction, so that the central rotating member A724 disposed inside the annular gear member A723 is not visible. Can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the annular gear member A723 from blocking the light when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, and the light is transmitted to the central rotation member A724. Can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of an operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

  FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, the illustration of the shell portion A722 on the back side is omitted, and for convenience of description, the fixed gear SG, which is arranged non-rotatably above the support portion A730, is an annular gear. It is shown in a state of being meshed with the member A723.

  The outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate about the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG). When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 arranged inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG move relative to each other accordingly. Displacement (change in tooth mesh).

  In the present embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, the relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is secured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotating member A724 meshed with the annular gear member A723 rotates with the rotation. Since the rotating shaft of the central rotating member A724 extends in a direction intersecting with a vertically extending shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) as the rotating shaft of the first rotating member A721 (direction orthogonal to each other), The central rotating member A724 rotates in a different manner (longitudinal rotation of the horizontal axis) in accordance with the rotation of the shell portion A722 of the one rotating member A721 (transverse rotation of the vertical axis). The relationship of the rotation directions will be described later.

  Since the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 keeps changing in the same plane as the rotation of the shell portion A722 (synchronous with the rotation angle), the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is vertically and horizontally set to the player. Can be made to appear to rotate. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotation member A724 to rotate in a plurality of directions.

  In the present embodiment, the number of gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (10 teeth each), so the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell A722 and the central rotation member A724 are equal. The absolute value of the rotation angle is synchronized. As a result, during rotation of the shell portion A722, the central rotation member A724 is rotated every time the shell portion A722 comes into a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized in a front view as shown in FIG. 368 (every half rotation). As shown by 368, the disc portion is in a posture in which it faces the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

  Returning to FIGS. 366 and 367, description will be made. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721, and from the lower side of the first rotating member A721 to the first rotating member A721. A rod-shaped extending portion A728a that is formed in a rod shape and extends upward so as to reach a position where the first rotating member A721 is covered with the first rotating member A721 from above.

  The rod-shaped extending portion A728a is formed with a width narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721, and depending on the disposition, a part of the first rotating member A721 may be hidden and an outside of the first rotating member A721. The case where it can be seen (the case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, but the details will be described later.

  The outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are configured to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the annular rear cover A714, and the vertical gap is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are disposed while the annular rear cover A714 is provided. Inadvertent disassembly of pulling out (disassembling) upward can be prevented.

  As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728) that are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730, and these rotate with the rotation of the support portion A730. To do. Next, the support portion A730 will be described.

  FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370(a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

  As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the supporting portion A730 includes a first supporting portion A731 whose main body is formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material into a cylindrical shape, and a colorless supporting portion. A second support portion A735, which is formed of a transparent resin material and has a main body formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731, and is configured as a set of divided bodies divided in two in the radial direction. A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to a box-shaped portion A750 to be described later is inserted inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735, and a deformed shaft is formed at the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751. The metal ring-shaped C ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, which are non-rotatably fixed by fitting with the fixed gear SG, are non-removably supported.

  The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A731a which has an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and which is formed so that the shaft rod portion A751 can be inserted, and its main body. A plurality of supporting plate portions A732 extending in a plate shape in a straight line from both ends in a straight line and formed with through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and two supporting plate portions A732 projecting downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body portion. And a pair of protruding portions A733.

  The projecting portion A733 is a portion that is disposed at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later, and that is capable of transmitting force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed with different widths. It As a result, as compared with the case where the pair of protruding portions A733 are formed to have the same width, it is easier to perform the angle matching between the cylindrical extending portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 and the first supporting portion A731 during fitting. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 369(b) and 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a half-cylindrical portion A736 forming a tubular portion, and a plate extending in a straight line from the upper end portion of the half-cylindrical portion A736. And a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 in which through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted are formed.

  The semi-cylindrical portion A736 has a recessed fitting portion A736a which is recessed upward in a rectangular shape from the lower end at the center position of the circular arc on the lower end side portion, and a rectangular shape which projects radially outward from the end of the circular arc. And a protruding fitting portion A736b.

  The recessed fitting portion A736a is a recess that fits into an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, which will be described later, and the protruding fitting portion A736b is formed in the cutout portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. It is a protrusion that fits.

  At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged so as to face the inner wall of the cylindrical protruding portion A762b, and the inner wall of the semi-cylindrical portion A736 is radially outward. Is regulated and the protruding fitting portion A736b is fitted into the cutout portion A762c, the divided body forming the second support portion A735 can be supported inseparably.

  Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that the cutout portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the shaft rod portion A751 are in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of rotation. Therefore, the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 also functions as a transmission portion for transmitting the rotation to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent division of the second support portion A736 and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

  A groove portion A735a that is recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion in which the semi-support plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a can reduce the contact area between the inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer surface of the first support portion A731, and can reduce the generated frictional force.

  In particular, a load may be generated at the time of fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 at a position arranged between the semi-supporting plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be tightened as compared with the dimension at the time of design. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at the position between the semi-support plate portions A737, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 are easily contacted at a place where sliding friction is likely to occur. The area can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force generated between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.

  The semi-supporting plate portion A737 has a pair of assembling projections A737a projecting to the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second supporting portion A735 is split, and a pair of positions projecting from one split body. Alignment protrusion A737b, insertion hole A737c formed in the other divided body as a through hole having a size capable of inserting the alignment protrusion A737b, and fastening of the second rotating member A728 formed in the thickness direction. The portion A728b (see FIG. 367) is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d formed to have a size capable of being inserted therethrough.

  The semi-support plate portion A737 is aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusion A737b into the insertion hole A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) assembled from the outside in the dividing direction is fastened to the fastening portion A728b with the fastening screw. Are screwed in and fastened and fixed, so that they are coupled to each other. That is, the fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-support plate portion A737, so that the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

  The assembling projection A737a is used for positioning by being inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728, and the projection interval is a pair of split bodies forming the second support A735. Different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is wider than the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the back side.

  By forming the assembling projections A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members forming the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second supporting portion A735. That is, the assembling projection A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted only when assembled from the correct direction, and when the assembly projection A737a and the second rotating member A728 are in the wrong direction, Since the position of the two-rotation member A728 does not match the position of the concave portion and the two rotation members are not assembled, it is possible to notice an error in the assembly direction.

  Further, the second rotating member A728 is largely different in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, it is intended that the second rotating member A728 be assembled as a pair of members at the time of handling. An error may occur when trying to assemble two members of the set. According to the present embodiment, since the forming protrusions A737a are formed at different intervals (because they are not in a common mode), both of the members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 are one member (combined). It is possible to be aware of an error in assembling the member on one side) before inserting the fastening screw.

  Before the second support portion A735 is disassembled, the radial separation is restricted by the cylindrical protruding portion A762b of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (see FIG. 366). Therefore, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 cannot be assembled. , The protrusions A733 are notches A772a, and the recess fitting portions A736a are the inner protrusions A762d (see FIG. 373). The mating portion A736b is fitted into the notch portion A762c, respectively. Here, due to its shape, the second support portion A735 is first assembled, and in that state, the first support portion A731 is assembled.

  Here, because of the shape of the other member to be assembled, the posture when assembling the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 is not an arbitrary posture but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the 1st support part A731, the 2nd support part A735 obstructs a field of view, and it is possible that it may become difficult to assemble the 1st support part A731.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support portion A735 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and the first support portion A731 is made of a light non-transmissive resin material. The inner side of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized after the assembling. In addition, since the cylindrical extension A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support A731 is assembled is arranged so as to project over the upper lid A740, the projection A733 of the first support A731 is fitted. The position to be operated is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

  Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, it is possible to easily adjust to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a through hole A741 that surrounds the central axis of the support portion A730 is formed in the upper lid portion A740 that arranges (accommodates) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later between the box-shaped portion A750. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper lid portion A740 and manipulate the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the upper lid portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 is removed from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the part A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped part A750.

  At this time, if the support portion A730 is still assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A737 interfere with each other and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support portion A730 before disassembling the upper lid portion A740. Then, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotation member A721 (see FIG. 368). ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

  Thus, in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, it is necessary to sequentially disassemble a plurality of members, so that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are illegally accessed. It is possible to make it difficult to perform, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent acts that cause a malfunction by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

  371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750. It should be noted that FIG. 371 shows a direction view looking down obliquely from above, and FIG. 372 shows a direction view looking up from below obliquely (direction view tilted by 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

  As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 includes through holes A741 that are vertically formed at the left and right center positions, and supports the transmission members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (shape such as unevenness) for forming is formed.

  The box-shaped portion A750 is formed below the upper lid portion A740 and is formed in a box shape at least the upper surface side of which is opened, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are arranged at the opened position. Of the metal (in this embodiment, brass) shaft rod portion A751 which is fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the upper lid portion A740 and extends in the vertical direction coaxial with the central axis of the through hole A741 and the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. Detection sensor A752 including a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed in the first and second detection sensors including a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750. A753, a drive motor AMT2 having a main body portion protruding to the lower surface side and fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 rotated by excitation of the drive motor AMT2, various sensors A752 and A753 arranged below the bottom plate portion A750a, and a drive motor The relay board A754 is provided to relay the wiring connected to the AMT 2 and the like.

  373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. 373 and 374, a state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the vertical direction is shown. In FIG. 373, it is shown in a direction looking down from diagonally above, and in FIG. It is illustrated in a directional view looking up.

  Each of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to two types of shapes (sizes). That is, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small-diameter gear PG1 that is in mesh with the drive gear AMG2, a small-diameter gear PG2 that has the same shape that is meshed with the small-diameter gear PG1, and the small-diameter gear PG2. And a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

  The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshed with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter meshed with the large-diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG13 meshed with the small diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

  Detected pieces A763 and A773 detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are formed on the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream side.

  In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, the small diameter gear is used, but since the large diameter gear is arranged again on the downstream side, both the large diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle when the drive gear AMG2 is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

  In the present embodiment, the detected pieces A763 that extend radially outward from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (intervals of 180 degrees) at equal intervals on the circumference. Since the detected pieces A773 axially extending from the umbrella portion that covers the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four positions (90° intervals) on the circumference at equal intervals. , The first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 both detect the detected pieces A763 and A773 (see FIG. 372), and the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees, so that the first detection sensor A752 is rotated again. The detected pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the A752 and the second detection sensor A753. As described above, in the present embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

  On the other hand, the reason why the plurality of detection sensors of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is that there is a timing at which only one of the detection sensors functions, but the details will be described later. ..

  In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of locations, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for ease of understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism that is disposed in the lower layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and is composed of the four gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 that mesh with each other as described above.

  On the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, a plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and one of the recesses A771 is provided with a projection A771a protruding radially inward. To be done. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed to be different from the internal shape of the other recess A771.

  The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a tubular extension portion A772 that extends in a tubular shape from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft rod portion A751. A pair of cutouts A772a, which are cut out in a rectangular shape at symmetrical positions sandwiching the shaft rod portion A751, are formed at the upper end portion of the cylindrical extension portion A772. The notch portion A772a is a portion that fits with the protruding portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as a notch having a width different from each other, corresponding to the formation mode of the protruding portion A733.

  The large-diameter gear LG1 is arranged below the intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and the intermediate plate portion A750b restricts upward pull-out. That is, in order to remove the large diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes in the vertical direction, so that the number of steps required to remove the large diameter gear LG1 can be increased. This can facilitate avoiding the large-diameter gear LG1 from being accidentally pulled out.

  Further, the intermediate plate portion A750b partitioning the region makes it easy to avoid contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, it is possible to avoid the transmission of the driving force between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (downstream of the driving force transmission path).

  Next, the details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism that is disposed in the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and includes the four gears LG11, LG12, PG11, LG13 that are meshed with each other as described above.

  The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits the driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise in a top view) by the one-way clutch housed inside, and in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in a top view). It is configured so as to idle when rotating, and includes a plurality of ridges A761 that are provided to project downward from the lower side surface of the one-way clutch.

  The protruding portion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protruding portion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and the corresponding portion A761a corresponding to the protruding portion A771a is inserted radially inward (to the radially outward direction). It is a straight line shape that suppresses overhang). Accordingly, it is possible to configure the drive gear AMG2 so that the protrusion A771a and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 can be assembled only in such a posture that they match each other.

  The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is provided with a through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2 in the central portion, and projects from the upper surface side into a large-diameter cylindrical shape. A cylindrical protruding portion A762b provided, and a pair of notch portions A762c notched in a rectangular shape at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protruding portion A762b, A pair of inner protrusions projecting along a straight line passing through the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the straight line passing through the notch portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 in the top view. And a part A762d.

  The cylindrical protruding portion A762b is a portion that receives the lower end portion of the second supporting portion A735 (see FIG. 366) and restricts the displacement of the second supporting portion A735 in the dividing direction, and includes the cutout portion A762c and the inner protruding portion A762d. Is a portion that is fitted to the protruding fitting portion A736b and the recessed fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735 and is configured to be able to transmit the driving force.

  The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed along the axial direction with the pair of detected pieces A763 described above and the same angular deviation from the detected piece A763 in the same direction at the position where the formation of the umbrella portion is omitted. A long gear tooth A764 and a columnar functional portion A765 that is disposed inside the large diameter gear LG13 so as to be coaxially rotatable and is rotatable relative to the large diameter gear LG13.

  The cylindrical function part A765 is provided at a symmetrical position with the rotation axis sandwiched therebetween, and includes a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a supported by a support groove part A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped part A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with the large-diameter gear LG13 is housed inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

  That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is smaller (small) than the reference, torque transmission is maintained and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 are maintained. When the load generated between them is excessive, the torque transmission is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles, thereby cutting off the drive force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used as a device that creates resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions similarly to a resistance member that constantly generates resistance and a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling to transmit the drive force through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, the torque limiter is used. As a result, the transmission of torque is interrupted and the resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

  Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation. , After the rotation continues for some time (after rotating for a certain angle), the state is switched to the state where the torque transmission is released. Therefore, before the switching occurs, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

  In the present embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the attitude of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in the top view is limited to the attitude (see FIG. 373) in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752. By performing such control, the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in the top view can be limited to specific gear teeth.

  By forming the specific gear tooth as the elongated gear tooth A764 in the axial direction, it is possible to reduce the load generated per unit length in the axial direction. Thereby, the durability of the large diameter gear LG13 can be improved.

  The first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of targets by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 rotates to transmit the driving force and then stops, it can be detected that the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 has stopped in an appropriate posture (angle).

  Secondly, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idled to release the driving force transmission to the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in a top view). ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the drive force transmission is insufficiently blocked (idling) due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction, When the driving force transmitted to the radial gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large-diameter gear LG13 rotates.

  When the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detection target piece A763 is displaced when the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, the first detection sensor A752 is notified. Can be used to find out problems with the one-way clutch and the torque limiter.

  The mechanism for supplementing the release of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by the plurality of transmission members that rotate about the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction, but in this configuration, gravity cannot be used.

  When the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to use the self-weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is canceled. In the embodiment, the self-weight cannot be used, and the driving force may be transmitted even by a weak load generated by idling in the release direction of the one-way clutch.

  Further, as a structure that suppresses displacement due to idle rotation, it is possible to cause friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate a driving force greater than friction to drive the members, so another problem May occur. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the torque limiter is employed so that the release of the driving force transmission due to the switching of the driving direction can be reliably generated.

  FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is the upper lid portion A740, the box portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism. It is a front view of A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

  Transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the ridge A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 also rotates.

  When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large diameter gear LG11 idles, and the ridge A761 and the large diameter gear LG11 relatively rotate. By doing so, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains the same state.

  That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 that passes through the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force transmission through the upper transmission path UL1 that passes through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is blocked. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension A772 and the cylindrical protrusion A762b that fit into the support A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension A772 rotates and the cylindrical protrusion A762b remains unchanged. maintain.

  As a result, in the assembled state of the effect unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A731 that fits into the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369). ) Only rotates, and the second support portion A735 maintains the same state, so that of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728, the first rotation member A721 (fastened and fixed to the first support portion A731 ( (See FIG. 367) only rotates, and the second rotating member A728 maintains the same state.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise in the top view, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 sufficiently transmits the driving force to the ridge portion A761 and the large-diameter portion. The gear LG11 rotates in synchronization (integrally). That is, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

  That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, both the cylindrical extending portion A772 and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b that fit into the supporting portion A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

  Thus, in the assembled state of the effect unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) that are fastened and fixed to each other rotate.

  Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotation member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view, the large diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise in a top view, and the large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise in a reverse direction in a top view. Since it rotates, the rotation direction of the second rotation member A728 is counterclockwise in a top view.

  Next, the first rotation member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in the top view, the small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in the top view, and the small diameter gear PG2 meshed with the small diameter gear PG1 (FIG. 373). (See reference) rotates clockwise in a top view, the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 becomes a clockwise direction in a top view.

  That is, the rotation directions of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 are opposite to each other with the shaft rod portion A751 as the rotation axis. This allows the player to visually recognize that the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change), as compared with the case where the rotating directions are the same. Alternatively, it is possible to facilitate execution of an effect in which the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can appear to rotate independently.

  376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c).

  376(a) and 376(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and in FIG. 376(c) and 376(d), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is in the initial state. The state (first state) after being rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees from above is illustrated.

  377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c).

  377(a) and 377(b) illustrate a state (second state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotation member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the first state. 377(c) and FIG. 377(d) illustrate the state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotation member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the second state.

  378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c).

  378(a) and 378(b) show the state (fourth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the third state. 378(c) and FIG. 378(d) show the state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotation member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the fourth state.

  379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a). c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 when viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c).

  379(a) and 379(b) show a state (sixth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in a top view from the fifth state. 379(c) and FIG. 379(d) show the state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the sixth state.

  When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the seventh state, the first rotation member A721 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIGS. 376 to 379, one section (one cycle) of rotation of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

  In the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the side of the shell A722 that is visible in the front view will be described as a front shell A722F, and the opposite side thereof will be described as a back shell A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side visually recognized in front view of the central rotating member A724 will be described as a member front surface A724F, and the opposite side thereof will be described as a member rear surface A724B.

  Note that in FIGS. 376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), 378(a), 378(c), 379(a), and 379(c). , The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of the illuminated substrate A715 (see FIG. 364) is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 376(b), FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(b), and FIG. 377( In d), FIG. 378(b), FIG. 378(d), FIG. 379(b) and FIG. 379(d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is shown. The optical axis KJ passes on this virtual plane VS.

  In addition, in FIGS. 376(d), 377(d), 378(d), and 379(d), arrows HL and VL schematically showing the light reflection directions are shown. The arrow HL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell portion A722 and travels, and the arrow VL indicates the upper side of the central rotating member A724. The direction in which the light emitted from the arranged light emitting means A715a is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d), and FIG. 379(d), in response to the first rotation member A721 rotating counterclockwise once in a top view, The direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise in a top view. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is radiated through the central rotating member A724 in the radial direction of the circle about the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721. And the direction can be changed in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

  This is difficult to realize with a configuration in which the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724, for example. For example, when the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the change of the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotation direction as the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721.

  Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is always facing the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, when the light emitting means is arranged on the member front surface A724F or the member rear surface A724B, the surface normal line. The change in the traveling direction of the light emitted in the direction does not change about the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 (change in the rotation direction having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform the light emitting effect, it is possible to perform the unexpected light emitting effect. For example, the rotation direction of the change of the traveling direction of the light and the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721 are opposite to each other, so that the player feels as if they are rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. Can make you feel.

  As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 also rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface visually recognized by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

  That is, since the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area for the player to visually recognize, but as an area for another purpose, regardless of appearance, the purpose (in the present embodiment, light It is possible to select a configuration that makes it easier to achieve the purpose of (reflecting). For example, in the present embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause reflection of light using the gloss of the surface of the member of the fastening screw.

  In addition, the aspect of the member surface of the fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to facilitate the formation of shadows, or the surface of the fastening screw member may be colored to reflect that color, or the fastening screw LED may be used. Light emitting means such as

  The action of light applied to the first rotating member A721 will be described. Note that in the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. As described above, the decorative substrate A715 including the light emitting unit A715a that irradiates the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to configure each side of the pentagon, and is orthogonal to each side (inclined to each other). The optical axis KJ is arranged along the (direction in which). The decorative board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the decorative board A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

  The illumination substrate A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passage recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by irradiating the central rotating member A724 with light by irradiating it with light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illuminated substrate A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 can be kept illuminated.

  In the light emitting unit A715a, where three LEDs are arranged side by side in parallel, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 may change depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), since the light passage concave portions A722a are elongatedly formed in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also emitted. It is easy to reach the central rotating member A724.

  On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passage concave portions A722a do not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is not included. Since it is difficult for the light to enter the A722a, among the light emitted from the decorative substrate A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 and the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724 can be associated with each other.

  From this point of view, in the initial state or the fourth state where the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible in a front view, the central rotating member A724 is irradiated with light from the decorative substrate A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724. In the second state and the sixth state in which the front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is hard to be seen in front view, the central portion is irradiated with the illuminated decorative board A715 located above the central rotating member A724. The intensity of the light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in a front view and the magnitude of the intensity of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be correspondingly changed.

  The illuminated substrates A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 include a light emitting unit A715a in which the optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a toward the first rotating member A 721, but the position where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A 721.

  That is, the shell portion A722 is arranged between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (FIG. 378(a) and In FIG. 378(b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell portion A722 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

  The shell portion A722 is curved in a manner that the width becomes smaller toward the radially outer side at the outer peripheral edge portion, and a connecting portion A722b that connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A722 with a deformed arch-shaped bridge is formed. Prepare Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell portion A722 is partially curved and the arch of the connection portion A722b is curved. By reflecting in the curve of, it is possible to proceed toward the player.

  In addition, the shell portion A722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the player side in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 (reflection along the arrow HL). Since the tilted posture is adopted, it is possible to make the difference between the light amount of the light that advances to the player side in the state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, and the light amount in the other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulse-likely) visually recognized to be dark, and in the state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A724 is moved. It is possible to execute a light emission effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

  On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, not all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 overlap, so at least a part Light reaches the central rotating member A 724.

  In this way, a state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative substrate A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724 and a state in which the light does not reach the central rotating member A724, It can be switched in the state of the first rotating member A721. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the light reaching the central rotation member A724 is visually recognized as if it is blinking, without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting unit A715a.

  For example, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state, the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a can be visually recognized as blinking at different lighting or extinguishing times ( It can be visually recognized as a luminous effect with different blinking cycles).

  In this case, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage occurs, The center rotating member A 724 is visually recognized as if it is stopped regardless of the magnitude of the speed, while the blinking cycle of the light emitted to the center rotating member A 724 can be changed due to the difference in speed.

  That is, as the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 is higher, the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state can be shortened, and the shell portion A722 allows the light emitting means A715a (center). Since it is possible to shorten the cycle in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right of the rotating member A724 is blocked, it is possible to shorten the blinking cycle of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light with which the central rotating member A724 is irradiated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 is in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged to face each other. As viewed in the rotation axis direction (or in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a), the longitudinal direction is overlapped with the shell portion A722. In the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (for example, the arrow L-R direction, the arrow U-D direction, or the arrow F-B in FIG. 376(a)). And the lateral direction is defined as the direction connecting the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (arrow FB direction in FIG. 376(b)).

  In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has a longitudinal direction with the thickness of the shell portion A722 as viewed in the rotating axis direction (or as viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a). The posture is such that it goes inside (fits). Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by blocking the light with the shell A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. For example, the light from the light emitting unit A715a can be emitted from the shell A722. It is possible to easily configure a situation in which the central rotating member A 724 is not illuminated while the central rotating member A724 is illuminated.

  When the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (percentage) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time when the rotation is continued is the rotation speed thereof. It is the same regardless of. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the first rotating member A721 visually recognized by the player from changing by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a high speed, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being visually recognized as dark.

  In the present embodiment, the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed by rotating the first rotating member A721 while the light emitting means A715a is turned on. According to this, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of blinking the light emitting means A 715a itself, and to eliminate the need for forming a circuit for causing the light emitting means A 715a to blink. Therefore, the size of the decorative substrate A715 can be reduced.

  As described above, the light emitting unit A715a that emits light from above the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting unit A715a that emits light from the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are the first with respect to the state of the first rotating member A721. The rotation member A 721 is configured to be different in how to illuminate it. Therefore, by controlling separately, it is possible to execute the light emission effect exemplified below.

  For example, in the initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)) of the first rotating member A721, above the central rotating member A724. By controlling the light emitting means A715a arranged at the center to be turned off and the light emitting means A715a arranged at the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to be turned on or blinking, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as dark and the shell portion A722 is bright. Illuminating light effects can be performed.

  Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 is turned off. By controlling, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the central rotating member A724 is illuminated brightly and the shell portion A722 is visually recognized as dark.

  Also, for example, light is emitted from both directions in the left-right direction, but light is emitted from only one side (upper side) in the up-down direction (each half rotation is reflected from the central rotation member A724 to the front side). It is possible to execute a complicated light-emission effect by utilizing the difference between the case and the case of being reflected to the back side. For example, the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 emits blue light, and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 emits red light. Switching between a situation in which the player visually recognizes from the front with blue light and a situation in which blue light and red light are mixed and visible, for each half rotation of the first rotation member A721. You can

  In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while continuously controlling the lighting without blinking the light, it is possible to arbitrarily change the cycle in which the appearance of the light changes. .

  An example of the stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, when the driving force that rotationally drives the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)), the large-diameter gear LG1 arranged in the lower transmission path DL1 is transmitted. Since the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90-degree intervals, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) causes the first rotating member A721 to rotate 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and separately determining the accumulated result.

  That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (forward direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise in a top view, each detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753. While the value of the cumulative counter is incremented by 1, the detected piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell A722 rotates clockwise in the top view. Each time it is detected in A753, the value of the cumulative counter is decremented by 1.

  If the value of the cumulative counter is 0 or a multiple of 4, it is the initial state, if it is (0 or a multiple of 4)+1, it is the second state, and if it is (a multiple of 0 or 4)+2, it is the second state. If it is 4 states and (0 or a multiple of 4)+3, it can be determined to be the 6th state.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be specified, the stop state of the drive motor AMT2 is controlled by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter, so that the initial state The first rotation member A721 can be stopped in any of the second state, the fourth state, and the sixth state.

  Therefore, the effect can be executed such that the postures in which the first rotating member A721 is stopped have different meanings. For example, it can be utilized as a production means for notifying a difference in the jackpot expectation degree or notifying time information (such as changing the stopped posture every two hours).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the case where the detected pieces A773 are formed at four positions at equal intervals has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The detected pieces A773 may be arranged at non-equidistant intervals, may be formed at three locations, a plurality of locations of five or more, or may be formed at one location.

  380(a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, FIG. 380(b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and FIG. 380(c) is FIG. 380 is a front view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is a top view of the rendering unit A710 in the direction of the arrow D in FIG. 380(c).

  381(a) is a front view of the rendering unit A710, FIG. 381(b) is a top view of the rendering unit A710 in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and FIG. 381(c) is 381 is a front view of the rendering unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is a top view of the rendering unit A710 in the direction of the arrow D in FIG. 381(c).

  In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in time series. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotation direction in which it rotates counterclockwise in a top view, and in FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b), the initial state of the first rotating member A721 is as shown in FIG. 380(c). In FIG. 380(d), the first state of the first rotating member A721 is shown. In FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b), the second state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d). In (), the third state of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.

  When the first rotation member A721 is driven in the rotation direction that rotates counterclockwise in the top view, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1 as described above, and thus the second rotation member A728 also makes the first rotation. It reversely rotates at the same rotation angle as the member A721.

  That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) show the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380(c). And FIG. 380(d) shows the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the initial state in the top view, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b) are shown. Shows the second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extending portion A728a has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the first state in a top view. In FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d), the rod-shaped extending portion A728a is shown. The 3rd state of the 2nd rotation member A728 which the part A728a rotated 45 degrees clockwise in a top view from a 2nd state is shown in figure.

  Since the pair of rod-shaped extending portions A728a is formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 is returned to the initial state by further rotating from the third state by 45 degrees clockwise in the top view. To do.

  Note that in FIGS. 380(b), 380(d), 381(b), and 381(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic diagrams (simple shape diagrams). ) Is shown in phantom.

  Note that in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a), and 381(c), the outer shape of the decorative substrate A715 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b), 380(d). ), FIG. 381(b), and FIG. 381(d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 380 and FIG. 381, the second rotating member A728 is, along with its rotation, the decorative substrate A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 (two substrates arranged on the left and right). Passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative substrate A715 can be changed in accordance with the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

  Here, unlike the case where the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and It does not block the light when passing through the optical axis, but acts so as to cause a change in the refraction mode of the light or a change in the color of the light. In the present embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is colored in blue when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis. It can be changed to (color mixed with blue).

  In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape that extends in the direction along the rotation axis and bends along the circumferential direction of rotation, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724. It is configured so that it does not overlap all of the optical axes of.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are overlapped with each other, and other The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the decorative substrate A715 does not overlap with the second rotating member A728, but on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 381(d), it is arranged on the left and right lower sides of the central rotating member A724. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the illuminated substrate A715 overlaps the second rotating member A728, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the other illuminated substrate A715 and the second rotating member A728. Does not overlap with. In the state shown in FIGS. 380(b) and 381(b), the second rotating member A728 does not overlap with the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a.

  As a result, in comparison with the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to be overlapped or not to be overlapped, the central rotating member A724 can be changed. It is possible to increase the number of types of reaching light. That is, regarding the mode in which the light passing through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, only the light reaching from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728, and the light reaching from the lower left and right sides only. It can be increased to a mode in which the second rotating member A728 is passed.

  In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the second rotating member A728 and the optical axis overlap. The appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed by turning off the light emitting means A715a overlapping with each other and turning on the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728. That is, it is possible to switch whether the central rotating member A724 emits light in a mode in which the colors of the second rotating member A728 are mixed or whether the central rotating member A724 emits light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

  In addition, since the direction of the optical axis that overlaps the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left side to the lower right side by the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, the color of the second rotating member A728 is similarly changed. It is possible to switch the portion of the central rotating member A724 that emits light in a mixed manner.

  Note that, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotation member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the light passage recess A722a in a top view. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head towards A722a.

  Therefore, for example, by illuminating only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 and turning off the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, It is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

  If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at the timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect with the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728. Requires control to turn off the light emitting means A715a at a timing when intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728), but in the present embodiment, it is arranged above the central rotating member A724. By the function of the light emitting means A715a, such control can be made unnecessary.

  The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the player's view in a posture in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the effect of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. As described above (see FIG. 381(a)), the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can be easily advanced to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the rendering function of the rotating body A720 during continuous rotation.

  Here, since the rod-shaped extending portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape, the shape (outer shape) in front view is switched at 180 degree intervals. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381(a) is the same as the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). ..

  On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 that rotates inside the second rotating member A728 does not enter the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotation member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377(a)) shown in FIG. 381(a), the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)) is obtained. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the second rotating member A728 is arranged before and after the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381(a)), the second rotating member A728 causes the first rotating member A728 to move. Since A721 is partially hidden, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

  Then, from the state in which the second rotation member A728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381(a), the first rotation is performed while the second rotation member A728 and the first rotation member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724. Is the direction facing the front side (see the arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized by the player brightly, while the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (FIG. 379(a)). ), the direction of light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 toward the back side (FIG. 379(d). )), the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized by the player as dark.

  That is, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while changing the visible outer shape of the second rotating member A728 during displacement is equivalent to changing the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a. It can occur without change. In this case, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark with, for example, the high or low of the jackpot expectation in the lottery of the special symbol, the second rotating member A728 in the state of FIG. 381(a). When is stopped, the sense of expectation for the subsequent operation mode can be increased, and the attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

  In addition, in this case, while the second rotating member A728 is placed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 381(a), the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated 90 degrees in synchronization with each other. The member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from the upward posture to the front-back posture. Along with this, until the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually increases from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction. On the other hand, when the rotation angles of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reach 90 degrees (changes in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721), the member front surface A724F moves in the front-rear direction. Since it is facing (because there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the front-back direction component of the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 is close to 0, and the light reflecting direction returns to the vertical direction. ..

  Thus, in synchronization with rotating the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is emitted by the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the front-back direction component of light when reflected. Accordingly, as the rotation time of the first rotating member A721 becomes longer, it becomes easier to determine whether the first rotating member A721 was in the second state or the sixth state, so that the first rotating member A721 rotates. It is possible to maintain a high attention force on the first rotation member A721 not only at the moment when the rotation is started but also after the rotation.

  In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise in the top view. It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 as it is. In this case, since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) easily passes through the second rotating member A728 and reaches the eyes of the player, the central rotating member A724 is easily visible in color. ..

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways at 180 degree intervals, and the state shown in FIG. 381(a) is synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728. Since it can be configured with a mode in which the first rotation member A721 is rotated and a mode in which only the first rotation member A721 is rotated while maintaining the posture of the second rotation member A728 from the state shown in FIG. 381(a), As a way of showing the rotating member A724 to the player, a total of four ways of showing can be executed.

  The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 has a function of not only changing the brightness of the central rotating member A724 but also a function of illuminating a member arranged around the central rotating member A724.

  For example, when light is reflected to the left front side through the central rotation member A724 (see FIG. 377(d)), the left flow path (game) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. In the case where light can be used for brightly illuminating the flow path formed in the left side area based on the center of the left and right width of the area, and the light is reflected to the right front side through the central rotation member A724 (Fig. 376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right flow path (the flow path formed in the right area based on the center of the left and right width of the game area, mainly right) It can be used as light for brightly illuminating the flow path through which a ball fired by striking passes.

  Further, for example, when the light is reflected to the left rear surface side through the central rotation member A724 (see FIG. 378(d)), the first arranged on the front side left side of the third symbol display device 81. It can be used as light for brightly illuminating the operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., and when the light is reflected to the right rear surface side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379(d)), It can be used as light for brightly illuminating the first operation units A400C, A400D and the like arranged on the front side right side of the symbol display device 81. In this way, the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 can be switched to a direction in which it is directed to a different member, so that the player's line of sight can be guided to a different member (location) by switching the direction of the light. You can

  The second rotating member A728 is configured to have a vertical length that can divide the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in the front view into the left and right (see FIG. 381(a)). Thereby, in the state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, in the state where the effect unit A710 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inner side of the annular front cover A711. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the area can be partitioned so as to be divided into right and left. That is, the second rotating member A728 can be utilized not only as a member that performs an effect by the rotating operation but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when it is stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise in the top view, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. It is possible to execute an effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 in a state where the display area of the display device is divided.

  In the present embodiment, the second rotation member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotation member A721 is driven in the counterclockwise rotation direction in the top view, and the reverse rotation (the first rotation member A721 is the top surface). The second rotation member A728 is stopped in the driving mode in the clockwise rotation direction).

  In other words, in one rotation direction, the action of arbitrarily changing the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 by the first rotation member A721 passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right is provided. In the other rotation direction, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking cycle, the light emission mode (color, color, of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 due to the second rotation member A728 passing through the optical axes arranged on the left and right) is generated. (Width, etc.) can be caused.

  In this way, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed by changing the direction of the rotational drive. Since the frequency with which the second rotation member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotation member A728, the variation of the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotation member A724 is It depends on the resolution of the rotation speed of the two-rotation member A 728 (the number that can be switched).

  The rotation speed of the second rotating member A728 naturally has an allowable limit, and this allowable limit defines the limit of variation in the change of the light emission mode of light, but in the present embodiment, the rotation direction is made different. Since it is switched whether the second rotating member A728 operates or stops, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed even if the rotating direction is different even at the same rotating speed. Can be different.

  Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 rotate only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotating direction is different (for example, when the second rotating member A728 does not exist, (2) The change mode of the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is doubled as compared with the case where only the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721 changes and the second rotating member A728 keeps rotating. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the appearance of the central rotating member A724.

  Details of how the central rotating member A 724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of vertically inverting the member front surface A724F while maintaining the posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front surface side.

  Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be tracked as a still image and the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage is generated, the central rotating member A724 is rotated. When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the vertically inverted shape of the member front surface A724F is united. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape having 5 corners is visually recognized as a star shape having 10 corners.

  In the present embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the vertically inverted shape is united) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it is as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. Can be visually confirmed.

  In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either one of the upper and lower sides of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and the shape or figure is vertically inverted and merged so as to recall another concept. You may.

  For example, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated by drawing an equilateral triangle shape on the member front surface A724F in a state where one side overlaps with the rotating shaft in a front view above the rotating shaft of the central rotating member A724. By combining the upper and lower sides, it is possible to visually recognize a rhombic figure, and above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724, the lower end of the rotation axis overlaps with the rotation axis in a front view. By drawing the character (graphic), when the central rotating member A 724 is rotated, the inverted shapes are merged at the top and bottom so that the character (graphic) of the numeral “3” can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

  In FIG. 382, an example of the effect using the second operation unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. FIG. 382 shows a state in which the effect unit A710 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It

  In FIG. 382, a second state (see FIG. 381(a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is illustrated, and the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are the annular front. An image displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is shown in the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening).

  That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the second rotating member A728V on the rotating display. Accordingly, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

  The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transparent liquid crystal may be disposed on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state in which the second rotating member A728 rotates by the transparent liquid crystal may be displayed, or the front side or the rear side of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed. An illumination plate may be disposed on the display, and a graphic formed on the illumination plate and an image of the third symbol display device 81 may be combined to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the means.

  When the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illuminated substrate A715 in this state, the player expects a mode of light production in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the second rotating member A728 is in the stopped state. Since it is possible to execute the light effect in the mode of (1), it is possible to execute an unexpectedly high effect.

  In addition, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the projecting position, and the same applies during the effect unit A710 is displaced up and down. For example, the rendering unit A710 is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 in the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while the rotating body A720 is in the extended position. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions of (see FIG. 321).

  That is, in response to the raising operation of the rendering unit A710 toward the projecting position, it is on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 and inside the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening). ) The display area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the area is gradually widened. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the above-described display in the region of the third symbol display device 81 which is gradually visible, the effect unit A710 is moved upward while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When controlled to, the effect that makes the player feel that the second rotation member A728 has begun to rotate can be executed (the effect can be performed by using the illusion of eyes).

  At the time of the raising operation of the effect unit A710 in this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that the player visually recognizes when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. On the other hand, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpectedly high-quality production.

  Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 383. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a has been described, but in the twenty-third embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ moves in the front-back direction. It is configured as a slide member A2729 that moves in parallel. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 383 is a schematic top view schematically showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a back side position that intersects the virtual plane VS and a front side position that does not intersect the virtual plane VS.

  Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position that intersects the optical axis KJ at the back side position, moving to the front side position can eliminate the intersection with the optical axis KJ. The way in which light reaches the one-rotation member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, it is possible for a player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 from the front side to have difficulty in grasping that the slide member A2729 is moving.

  That is, while the shapes (outer shapes) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in front view are maintained (while remaining), the rendering mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LEDs and the like that configure the light emitting unit A715a are turned on. You can change the (lighting). Thereby, it is possible to configure an unexpected effect without performing control for changing the LED to be turned on.

  The material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a light transmissive resin material, may be formed of a light impermeable resin material, or may be formed of a metal material.

  Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the outer side surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the gear with pin A462 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission protrusion A463 has been described, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the gear with pin A3462. However, it is provided with a plurality of outer diameter projections A3464 which are provided so as to project radially outward from the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 and which have a semicircular cross section. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 is formed at four positions that divide the circumferential length of the arc wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts in rear view.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the long holes (first long hole A422a, second long hole A422b, displacement side long hole A453, and transmission side long hole A454) formed for displacing the first displacement member A440 are the first. By being formed longer than the 22nd embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the overhang position side in the 22nd embodiment.

  In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 contacts the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pinned gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, the deformed slide member A455 is pushed upward from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time the outer diameter protrusion A3464 contacts the protruding plate A456a. Along with this, the long link A451 rotates, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced to the left of the extended position.

  Accordingly, the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

  Note that, in FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 is randomly illustrated, but the size is not limited to this. For example, they may all be provided with the same size, or external size projections A3464 of different sizes may be formed. In this case, it is not necessary that they all have different sizes.

  In the present embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed to be larger on the side closer to the transmission protrusion A463 than on the side farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, when the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position and the gear A3462 with a pin is continuously rotated, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer shape protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is the same as that of the previous two times. The latter two times are smaller than the above. That is, the displacement (reciprocal small displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the extended position can be gradually reduced.

  From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the arc wall portion A464, or vice versa. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocal small displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

  In addition, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arc wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the deformed slide member A455 is attached to the coil spring SP1 in the lower left direction from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time the recessed portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a. It can be configured such that it is pulled back by the force, the long link A451 rotates accordingly, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) from the extended position.

  Further, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be different (shifted) between the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319). Accordingly, when the operation timings of the drive motors AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D are synchronized (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing). In the case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be changed in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in the control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited at the same time, the displacement (small amount) generated in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is displaced within a predetermined displacement width by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. The timing of (displacement) can be shifted.

  For example, the timing at which each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the projecting position (see FIG. 320) and each second displacement member A490 is stretched. While the same timing to reach the projecting position (see FIG. 320), the displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacing member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 after the first displacing member A440 reaches the projecting position. ) Can be adjusted to be sequentially generated in the clockwise direction from the first operation unit A400 arranged at the lower left of the front view.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight focusing on the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the clockwise direction in the front view. Further, as described above, the mode of the light visually recognized through the elongated hole A412a (see FIG. 320) can be changed in association with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, so that the player visually recognizing the light can change the mode. It is possible to easily guide the line of sight in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, during the jackpot game (special game), an effect that suggests right-handedness executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like can be performed using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

  Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacing member A440 displaces the back surface side of the decorative board A416 has been described, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a decorative member A4550 that displaces to the front surface side of the decorative board A416 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  385(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa of FIG. 339(a) of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 385(b) is shown in FIG. 344(a). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 taken along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 which is disposed so as to be displaceable on the front side of the front cover A410, and a side surface of the main body portion A411. A pair of guided portions A4552 guided by a long hole A4411b formed along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, which are integrated with a pair of connecting arm portions A4553 formed outside the front cover A410. It is connected and fixed to.

  Since both of the pair of guided portions A4552 are inserted into the long holes A4411b, only the displacement of the guided portions A4552 along the long holes A4411b is allowed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the decorative plate portion A4551. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the sliding displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x which is the extending direction of the elongated hole A4411b.

  The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of projecting portions A4442g projecting from the left and right end portions of the interlocking plate portion A4442 to the front side, and is the same as the configuration of the first displacement member A440 except for this.

  In the present embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed so as to project inward of the front cover A410 to a position at which the guided portion A4552 can come into contact with the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacing member A4440 at the timing of contact between the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 during the displacement of the first displacing member A4440.

  The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacing member A4440 is configured to be displaced during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441 with a posture change. The arrangement of the protruding portion A4442g is set so that the vehicle can enter. Accordingly, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (left and right directions in FIG. 385(a)) in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both forward and backward directions.

  According to the present embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, the timing for hiding the through hole A412 by the decorative plate portion A4551 can be configured. As a result, the light traveling through the through hole A412 can be physically blocked.

  Further, unlike the first displacing member A4440 that is hidden behind the front cover A410 at the projecting position, the decorative plate portion A4551 is not hidden by the front cover A410 and is always visible to the player. Therefore, in the decorative plate portion A4551, the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 is formed in a different shape in each first operation unit A4400, and these are configured to make a series of meanings in the retracted position. In a hidden overhang position, it can be used as a means for solving the problem that the player cannot visually recognize it in a series of senses, but it is difficult to give a sense of unity in the light emission mode.

  That is, by configuring the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the drawn figure in the same manner, the first displacing member A4440 is arranged at the projecting position and hidden by the front cover A410 (FIG. 385). The unity feeling of each first operation unit A4440 in (b) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

  Further, the light emitting means is previously arranged at a similar position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400, which is visible through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is arranged in the projecting position. A 445b is provided, and in the state where the first displacement member A 4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A 445b is simultaneously turned on by the plurality of first operation units A4400 to produce a light emitting effect with a sense of unity. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the elongated hole A4411b is formed by using the gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) that is ensured by not forming the decorative board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the decorative substrate A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging the structure for realizing the displacement of the decorative member A4550.

  The displaceable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the forming range of the long hole A4411b. That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the decorative substrate A416 can be set to a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of members to be displaced in a range (corresponding range when viewed from the front) where the decorative board A416 is not formed.

  Further, before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, the posture change (displacement in the front-back direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large displacement amount (a displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 in a range (corresponding range when viewed from the front) in which the decorative board A416 is not formed.

  The form of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a light-transmissive resin material, may be formed of a low light-transmissive resin material, and may have an LED or the like or an illuminated substrate inside. Further, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the decorative board A 416 through the through hole.

  Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 386. In the twenty-second embodiment, the arcuate wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion A463, so that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455. Although the case has been described, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  386(a) and 386(b) are front views of a displacement device A5000 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and FIG. 386(b) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the displacement end.

  The displacement device A5000 includes a displacement member A5001 configured to be slidable along a straight line and biased leftward by a biasing member (coil spring or the like) not shown, and a displacement member A5001 displaced along the displacement direction. A transmitting member A5002 to which a driving force for transmitting is transmitted, an rotatably supported member A5003 rotatably supported at an end of the transmitting member A5002, and one end of the rotatably supported member A5003 in the rotational direction. A thin portion A5004 extending and connected to each other, a roller member A5005 arranged at an end opposite to the axially supported end of the shaft-supported member A5003, and a guide groove for guiding the roller member A5005. A5006 and A5007.

  The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 include a first area A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 and a second area A5007 that deviates from the end of the first area A5006 in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001. Composed. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is formed in an arc shape, but it is not limited to an arc shape as long as it has a shape that deviates in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

  The operation of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first area A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

  On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second area A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the portion contacting the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001. The displacement to the left of can be regulated.

  Further, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 does not change the position of the displacement member A5001 in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is the displacement member A5001. The displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-mentioned one section.

  Further, when the thin portion A5004 is deformable so as to be crushed toward the shaft-supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the biasing force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Accordingly, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed even after the contact between the shaft-supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released.

  Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and is irremovably supported by the fastening portion A475, but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the wiring box HC is displaceably supported by the support box portion A470. The case where the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A6560 to be relatively displaceable will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  387(a), 387(b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the 27th embodiment. In FIG. 387(a), the state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the retracted position, in FIG. 388, the state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the projecting position, and in FIG. The state in which the two-displacement member A490 is arranged at an intermediate position (about 45-degree rotation position) between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated. Note that, in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b), and 388, the rear plate portion A480 is not shown in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

  As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead the wiring guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

  The wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported at its upper end by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate part A480 is inserted in a state in which the support projection part A6471d projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side of the support box part A6470 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end part of the wiring guide member A6560. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is axially supported by the support protrusion A6471d so as not to fall off.

  The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in the shape of a long plate, and is provided with a main body plate portion A6561 opposed to the back surface of the support box portion A6470 with a space therebetween, a lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561, and a middle abdominal surface. And a plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting toward the side (support box portion A6470 side).

  The main body plate portion A6561 is arranged in the vicinity of the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, so that a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

  In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the wiring HC is guided toward the rear surface side (rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge A491d2 and the binding band KB, the position between them (the position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed in the rear plate portion A6501, the main body plate portion A6561 can be disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480. Rubbing with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, by setting a position where the wiring HC is pressed toward the rear plate portion A480 side to a position overlapping the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in a direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It is possible to easily cause the situation. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, the wear of the wiring HC can be prevented and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

  The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced, the horizontal displacement of the board-side connector A493c is small and the vertical displacement is large. It occurs vertically. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387(a).

  Note that in the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper protruding portion A6562. That is, the protruding portion A6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

  In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the board-side connector A493c is mainly displaced in the left-right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction, so that the posture of the wiring guide member A6560 is changed in a manner pushed by the wiring HC. In this case, the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A6560 with a margin, but the lower limit of the displacement can be defined by the lower protruding portion A6562. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering (dripping) toward the pinion A517 or the reinforcing arm portion A518 side due to excessive force.

  In this way, by arranging the position of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (protruding portion A6562 on the front end side of the main body plate portion A6561) to be changeable, the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening). The design length of the wiring HC can be made shorter than that of the portion A475 shown in FIG. 356(a).

  As a policy of changing the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (protruding portion A6562 on the front end side of the main body plate portion A6561), another explanation will be given. In the displacement from FIG. 387(a) to FIG. 387(b), The board-side connector A493c is displaced (the wiring HC is displaced toward the protruding portion A6552 side) in a manner of approaching the protruding portion A6552, whereby the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the loosening side. On the other hand, in the displacement from FIG. 387(b) to FIG. 388, the board-side connector A493c is displaced in a manner of moving away from the projecting portion A6552 (the wiring HC is displaced toward the side away from the projecting portion A6552). The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaceable when the state changes between FIGS. 387(b) and 388.

  From this, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the projecting portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (to the side where the wiring HC is expanded). It can be said that it is configured to be displaceable to the (displacement) side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the curve of the portion of the wiring HC that is wound around the protruding portion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from being excessively deformed (eg, broken or chipped). ..

  According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is not connected to the second displacement member A490 is displaced along with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, it is a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560, and is arranged so that it can be visually recognized by the player in any of the states of FIG. 387(a), FIG. 387(b), and FIG. 388 (for example, the third portion). By arranging a decorative member that can be projected on the side of the symbol display device 81 (on the right side of FIG. 387(a)), it is possible to perform an effect with the decorative member that is displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

  In this case, as described above, the second displacing member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked with each other, and the wiring guide member A6560 is stopped while the second displacing member A490 is rotated 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 further rotates (because the displacement timing is displaced), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as being independently displaced.

  For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated as being wound once (the wiring passes twice between the pair of protruding portions A6562), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the wiring HC may pass (not be wound) only once between the plurality of protruding portions A6562.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be satisfied by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 moves to the end of pushing is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of “a button that cannot be pressed” can be performed. it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to notice that the "push-down button" is not activated until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d can be changed in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other, and therefore the engaging rib 344c can be rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form the tilting device 310 in the tilting motion more than in the first embodiment.

  Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the drive mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. Accordingly, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and an effect can be performed in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 for applying the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of motion has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the operation direction. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end (during the descending operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is being pushed repeatedly, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodation member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the accommodation member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the protruding leg portion 5324 is provided. If the configuration is such that the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is changed, and it is configured to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in association with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the flexible member 5420 can be operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher. It is possible to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the containing member 5430 by increasing the deformation amount of. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of production.

  For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "Press the button." is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "Press the button. Push it at a high speed and feel the vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", it is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilt device 310). In this case, by determining whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilt device 310) by the designated push method as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, the button (tilt device 310) can be pushed by the designated push method. It is possible to increase the player's motivation for the operation and prevent the operation of the button (tilt device 310) from becoming monotonous.

  Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the magnitude relationship with the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, the fact that the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 is low can be a condition for transmitting the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to the player, and it is recommended to the player to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 forcibly, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 forcibly.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to contact the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed, while the weight member 5412 is pushed to the end of the movement while the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal end. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot be brought into contact with the housing member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be made lively, while the player can change the effect mode in a way that the vibration is stopped when the player pushes it in, which makes it difficult for the player to notice the surroundings. It is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the presentation mode, except for the surrounding players. it can.

  In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to operate so that the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desirable that both the case where the weight member 5412 is brought into contact with the weight member 5412 occur, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused due to the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is tilted and deformed to bring the disc cam 5344 and the releasing member 346 into contact with each other to generate a frictional force is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and abuts when the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving portion, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with a case where the disc cam 5344 and the movable releasing member 346 contact each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where both the board surface supporting devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to contact the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board surface supporting devices 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, a portion of the multi-function cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to contact the board surface supporting device 600 arranged in the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. You may comprise so that it may be arrange|positioned below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 is fixed. It is possible to let 13 ride on the support bottom portion 12c. Therefore, since the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface supporting device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height when the game board 13 is fixed, the work of fixing the game board 13 The efficiency can be improved.

  In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and rear immediately behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend forward and backward, it is possible to prevent the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 from interfering with each other. It can be done easily.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is a concave surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is visually recognized lightly. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the path forming ribs 467 and 487 form the path that bends up and down has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the route may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched and sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. Even when a load of 1 is applied, the speaker connection line 453 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

  Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H while the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the wiring passage concave portion 464 in the range of the projecting length corresponding to the concave depth. In the range of the length, a step may be formed in the middle so that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched while the sound leakage is suppressed while sufficiently securing the range where the back wall 461H and the front wall 481H form the double wall.

  In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the middle body 461M corresponds to the duct. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T, the proximal end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T jointly. A large speaker room may be configured with.

  Further, although the base end side main body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the front end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be configured. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be in the center in the left and right direction, or may be in a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e that form the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T. The case where they do not overlap with each other in the connecting direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, the rib portion 467d and the rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a labyrinth shape, for example, a fine metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, It is possible to suppress fraudulent activity by making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent activity. Here, examples of the suppression of the fraudulent activity include suppression of the fraudulent activity itself and suppression of obtaining the profit of the fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity).

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. Can be made As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of production can be improved.

  Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured to rotate coaxially with the rotary plate 830, the loose fitting device 880 is not limited to this. For example, the rotary plate 830 may be configured to expand and contract as the rotary plate 830 rotates, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotary axis of the rotary plate 830.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the operation unit rear surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing restriction portion 159 when the board surface support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing restriction portion 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted to the front side), the portion of the game board 13 arranged to face the operation portion back surface member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are interfered with each other. be able to. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12, and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 when the board surface support device 600 is fixed. Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back surface member 155 arranged to face the lower board surface supporting device 600, and the board surface arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thus, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multi-function cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunction cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not contact the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the multifunction cover member 171 will be damaged due to the collision of the multifunction cover member 171 made of synthetic resin with the metal board support device 600. Therefore, the multifunction cover member 171 can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light emitted to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end of the front frame 14 and the front side is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By arranging the right panel unit 500 to rotate about another axis), the mode of the light with which the center frame 86 is irradiated can be switched. Further, by changing the correspondence between the mode of the light applied to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that extends inward of the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effect.

  That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a in the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are caused to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged. Consider switching between the case of being placed on the front side. When the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the movable accessory side, the movable accessory that is disposed so as to face the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (location near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 520 emits light. When the surface on the 560 side faces the mobile accessory side, the mobile accessory that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a that emits light, it is possible to switch the light emitting location of the moving accessory.

  In this case, for example, the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory at the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface changes on the side of the outer cover member 560 while shrinking to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524. The movable accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (expand) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 at the timing of facing. This makes it possible to change the position where the light is emitted in accordance with the operation of the mobile accessory by changing the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to change the LED 512a that controls light emission.

  Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and the light is emitted clearly), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. Diffuse (low brightness, low light intensity, light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving accessory) can be changed.

  Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed to the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal). In the above, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to the posture in which it is arranged on the back side of the support plate 510), so that beam-shaped (narrow width) light is transmitted to the moving accessory or the liquid crystal. While irradiating, light can be emitted in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the moving accessory or the liquid crystal. Thereby, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position apart from the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially folded by the load from the yarn Y8, and the folded portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the folded portion passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and control is performed so as to forcibly stop the launch of the ball, thereby attempting early detection of fraudulent activity and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss to the gaming machine hall) that can be obtained by a person who engages in cheating.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or by disposing a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810), The operation resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

  In addition, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can be inserted into the wall portions of the both side slits 815 that are arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. The recessed portion may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operation resistance due to the slanted surface 2803T entering into the recessed portion.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of light may be the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, since the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction that is inclined upward in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe, the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the machine to be played. It is possible to make it easier for light to travel toward. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

  Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in the areas CCVIc and CCVIe that are areas that emit light to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in areas CCVIb and CCVId that are areas that emit light to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward, so that the game machine to be selected is selected. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking on the side, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the spheres stored in the upper plate 17 with light and perform an effect that makes the spheres look gorgeous. Therefore, while enhancing the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing the game.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed near the left and right center has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

  Further, both the device formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the device formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 for handling the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for responding to the problems (ease of holding, durability, etc.) of the front frame 10014 alone. The 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the protruding shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable), but not necessarily. It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs a sound may be used, a vibration device that is configured to be inoperable by a player to perform a vibration effect, an illuminated board that performs a light emission effect, or a board box. It may be something that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, triangular or circular recesses and protrusions may be formed in a top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operating load of the operating device 10300 and the magnitude of the load. May be.

  Moreover, the same groove shape or a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while forming the width of the groove to be small, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed can be obtained in terms of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. You can When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to extend along the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially, for example, in a top view.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 is protruded below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 and can be used as a finger rest portion when carrying the front frame 10014 has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the up-down direction than the finger of an operator who carries the front frame 10014. In this case, since it is possible to put a finger in the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 (can be used as a finger rest portion), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. ..

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operating device 10300 to reduce the load transmission of the operating device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that produces an elastic biasing force may be used, or a device such as a damper for damping vibration may be used.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is poor in flexibility or flexibility, it is possible to suppress the load generated in the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate unit 6400.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven by the drive motor about the lever support shaft 10331d1 has been described, but various modes of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotating gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by the load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) that is not close to the gear mechanism may be present in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that the lever member 10340 can be idle when an overload occurs.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in the direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operation load of the operating device 10300 is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation part that does not move on the plane is provided (for example, when there is an operation part that pushes in a diagonal direction to the left and right), the balance (average) of the operation directions of the operation parts is calculated. The direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) that is found may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening operation may be performed on the operation portion that frequently gives the operation instruction (ignoring the operation portion that rarely gives the operation instruction). The direction may be set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fastening loosening due to the load during operation.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are united by fastening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which they are combined with an adhesive material may be used, or they may be combined by fitting the shapes.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have high rigidity (the direction along the vertical direction) and the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 are described has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the vibration direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the left-right direction. In this case, since the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the vibration of the vibration device 10366, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration occurs. it can. Further, the mode of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, a direct drive type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof may be used.

  The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of the opaque resin. In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are configured to be irradiated with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are changed in accordance with the changes in the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. The appearance of the light visually recognized through the cover 10322 can be changed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations to easily suppress the bending regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by setting the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a to be the same regardless of the position, the degree of rigidity in the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened with respect to that direction are set. The difference can be increased.

  In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a to be the direction along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. While suppressing the flexure of the cover 10322, the flexure of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased with respect to the flexure. be able to. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  Note that, conversely, the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member with respect to the bending is suppressed. The deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when the 10310 is arranged in the upward position can be increased. That is, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be changed by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled there. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled, and after the assembly to the front frame 10014, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be exerted.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 contacts the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extending above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. It may be configured to be inserted into an insertion hole formed in the portion. In this case, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, but also when it is displaced downward, so that the load can be dispersed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, in the V-shaped design member 6450, the dimension of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b is fitted to the thickness dimension of the inserted covers 10321 and 10322. The description has been given of the case where the layer is formed with a possible thickness (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap), but the thickness is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the inserted covers 10321 and 10322 may be shorter than the size of the gap (the size may be such that a gap between members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the inter-member gap, the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 are prevented from abutting (colliding). Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 is formed in a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge, and the facing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with that shape so that they fit together when assembled. You can In this case, it is possible to prevent the partition member 6560 from separating from the back surface support member 6580 to the front side in a state where the partition member 6560 is located at the position in the assembled state.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a incline with respect to the front-rear direction in the cross-sectional view has been described, but it is an essential point that the distance increases toward the front side, and this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 formed of a colorless and transparent resin material has a milky white member 6541 and a partition member 6560 arranged behind it. The case where the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily recognized as a series of regions by making the colors of the above visible is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a may be formed in a milky white color in advance by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with the fastening screw in the fastening direction that is inclined downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw in a fastening direction that is inclined downwardly toward the back side. The fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by the placement space required by the components placed near the fastening position and the selection of the side where displacement is desired to be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the configuration in which the compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 according to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven such that its front-rear width can be changed, and the degree of compressive force that can be generated due to the deformation of the upper lid member 6510 can be changed.

  That is, by driving the partition member 6560 so that the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is shortened in a manner of displacing the rear side edge of the partition member 6560 to the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 are separated from each other even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still be generated between them, and compression force can be made difficult to occur. Since the compressive force is unlikely to be generated, the degree of holding the decorative board 6570 can be reduced, and thus the degree of displacement of the decorative board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

  In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the decorative board 6570 in a situation where the upper cover member 6510 may be deformed can be changed, and similarly, to the front side of the decorative board 6570. The appearance of the illuminated light can be changed.

  In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (a space is provided between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580), and the front-rear width is widened by drive control to support the partition member 6560 and the back surface support. It may be configured to change into a situation in which a compressive force may be generated between the member 6580 and the member.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 that sandwich and support the decorative board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the illumination substrate 6570 may be arranged below the back surface support member 6580, the illumination substrate 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member separated from the acoustic device 6610), or the illumination. The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving projection portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521 that is inserted into the partition member 6560. In either case, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted from the acoustic device 6610 to the decorative substrate 6570.

  Further, the rear surface support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the rear side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other, so that the front frame 10014 is sandwiched between the back support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 in the closed state. It is possible to easily replace the illuminated decorative substrate 6570 and restore the positional deviation.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged so as to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise can be generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may travel near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw may be viewed from the front side. In this case, it is possible to confirm the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, so in a noisy environment, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw was found, compared to when abnormal noise was detected. It can be done easily.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is set to the direction that vertically inclines with respect to the front-back direction has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be inclined to the left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or locations that are inclined vertically and horizontally may be mixed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed to have a linearly extending shape in a front view has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curvedly extending shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a grid shape.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface and diffusion of light from the side surface is suppressed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the long rib 6734 to prevent light leakage from the side surface. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress a decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fin 6735. Further, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, by covering the entire side surface, the light on the front side edge can be emphasized, and by covering a part of the side surface (for example, using a light-shielding tape having a hole with a polka dot pattern), Since the player can visually recognize the light according to the shape of the light-shielding tape, the effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

  In the above-described seventeenth embodiment, in the lateral effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010, the case where the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended to the back side, it may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inner extended portion 6732 at the left and right end portions. Even in this case, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the light traveling in the long rib 6734 along the front-rear direction is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of the light when the fin 6735 is viewed from the front. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (a cutout or the like) for emitting at least a part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-back width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surface is inclined in a manner that the thickness of the fin 6735 is gradually reduced toward the front side, so that the light is emitted from the fin 6735 before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. It may be configured such that light is easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured to easily reach the side surface repeatedly.

  In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 are configured to be small has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the claws may be fitted based on the shape relationship or may be fixed by meshing. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the effect of light from being lowered due to the shadow of the fastening screw.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the decorative substrate 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the coupling base member 18810, and the decorative substrate 18830 may be slid by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-back direction) are different, the displacement mode of the decorative substrate 18830 can be complicated.

  In addition, by producing a sound with a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, the player can perform a silent effect in which the illuminated board 18830 can be slid while maintaining the state where the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, the vibration of the decorative substrate 18830 is transmitted to the operation device 10300, so that the player touching the operation device 10300 can recognize the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Accordingly, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, it is possible to improve interest in touching the operation device 10300.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the decorative substrate 18830 is supported so as to be capable of floating (sliding) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper production device 6500 may be supported in a floating manner. In this case, the bar member may be fixed to the front frame 10014 so as to be floatable by a bar member that extends from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or may be fixed to the wall portion of the acoustic device 6610. It may be supported in a floating manner. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, an intermediate direction). The reference line X19 may be arranged in the direction of the angle.

  Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of vibration generation and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibrations and operations in the first direction is extremely high, and vibrations in other directions occur. When the occurrence frequency of the operation is low, setting the reference line X19 along the first direction can prevent the loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. ..

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured to be less likely to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vibration may be transmitted to the operation device 10300 to the same extent as the vibration transmission to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 21410. In this case, the vibrating device 21500 can vibrate a plurality of objects.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case has been described in which the front portion of the overhanging portion De3 against which the protrusion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is formed of a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the front portion of the overhanging portion De3 may be formed as a flat surface that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-back direction. In this case, since the direction of the load applied to the vibrating device 21500 from the overhanging portion De3 (the normal direction of the front surface of the overhanging part De3) is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 occurs. It is possible to add a component in the direction (vertical direction) intersecting the front-rear direction to the temporal displacement (in particular, the displacement toward the front side). Accordingly, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction. Therefore, in addition to the case where the eccentric weight 21512 and the covering cover member 21530 collide in the front-rear direction, the vertical direction (the ridge portion). It is possible to configure a mode of collision in a non-guide direction that intersects the guide direction of 21534), and it is possible to complicate the mode of vibration.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512) Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of an arbitrary shape. .. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 occurs.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened together through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening portion 21457 may be made slightly longer so that the fastening force is not applied to the support hole 21428. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the spheres stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. Since it is possible to avoid doing so, it is possible to execute the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed in the rear case A310, and the end face is arranged to face the base plate A60 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the cutout portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the state where the base plate A60 and the back case A310 are assembled, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of the light visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be ambiguous. it can.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case in which the rear case A310 is formed in the shape of a box with the front side opened has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rear case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be composed of a columnar portion extending from the rear bottom portion to the front side (no wall portion is formed). ) May be configured. In this case, rigidity can be secured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and other movable units (first operation unit A400 and second operation unit A700).

  In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the portion on the right side which is close to the game board A13 is formed in a linear shape instead of a surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, when the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right sides may be lower than that of the other.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be arranged on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, since the metal plate is formed along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, a function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate and a game area are provided. It is possible to add a function of guiding the flowing ball. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be arranged in the gap.

  In the 22nd embodiment described above, the case where the front projecting strip portion A86f capable of contacting the game ball is provided so as to project from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the game area has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and the ridge portion may protrude from the rear surface to the rear surface of the flange portion. In this case, even when the game ball flows down to a position closer to the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be decelerated efficiently.

  In the 22nd embodiment described above, in the state where the decorative board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the case where the front surface of the decorative board A416 and the projecting piece A417i do not come into contact with each other and a gap is formed has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the decorative board A416 and the protruding piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be provided between the front surface of the decorative board A416 and the protruding piece A417i. ) May be interposed so that the load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the decorative board A416. Thereby, the decorative substrate A416 can be stably supported.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, in the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400, the second area AC2 is arranged closer to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second area of the plurality of first operation units A400. Although the case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 is surrounded by AC2 from the upper side, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the 2nd area|region AC2 may be scattered around the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the 2nd area|region AC2 is displaceable so that it may reach in front of and behind the 3rd symbol display device 81. They may be provided, and may be configured in any arrangement.

  In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the first displacing member A440 includes the decorative substrate A445 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an illumination substrate and a diffuser plate on which a light emitting unit such as an LED that radiates light to the front side is arranged may be arranged on the guide plate portion A430 or the support plate portion A420. Thus, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can hide the light emitting means from the player.

  Further, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the decorative substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this structure, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, the first displacing member A440 may not be provided with the decorative board A445. For example, a single or a plurality of through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440, and light may pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes due to the disposition of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light emitted to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the decorative board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 (the decorative board A416 is not completely cut off in front view) has been described, but the invention is not limited thereto. Not a thing. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass (cut off) in the front view through the illumination substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Further, it is not necessary for the entire first displacement member A440 to enter the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view. May be.

  In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the first displacing member A440 includes the decorative substrate A445 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illumination substrate A445 may not be provided on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging the decorative board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating the front side with light, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid part A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate part A442 are formed. The light passing through can be configured to be visible to the player.

  In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 is restricted by the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pin-shaped gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-shaped gear A462 is separated from the odd-shaped slide member A455. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 is not formed, the pinned gear A462 is moved to the position where the arcuate wall portion A464 should have been arranged because the transmission protrusion A463 is arranged at a position away from the deformed slide member A455. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to project, and the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 may be restricted by contacting the shutter member.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the plurality of guided protruding portions A455c arranged on the odd-shaped slide member A455 are arranged shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited. For example, the plurality of guided protrusions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line which is parallel to the direction A416x, or may be arranged so as to be offset in a direction intersecting the direction A416x in the front-rear direction. In any case, the posture of the odd-shaped slide member A455 can be stabilized.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the protruding plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with the contact with the arcuate wall portion A464), By reducing the angular width of the deformed slide member A455 restricted by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is stretched in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. It can be displaced from the exit position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is accommodated in a section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A440 are adjusted. It is possible to avoid the interference with the A490.

  In this case, whether the first displacement member A440 contacts the transmission protrusion A463 or the end of the arc wall A464 opposite to the transmission protrusion A463 after being displaced to the retracted position side. Depends on the operation mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the drive mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side is controlled by controlling the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 (which may be constant speed or variable speed) or the stop timing to be different. The deformed slide member A455 (irregularly transmitted portion A456) can be made different depending on whether it is in contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 or in contact with the transmission protrusion A463.

  Although it is assumed here that the deformed slide member A455 (the deformed transmitted portion A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 is in contact with at least one of the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463, it is not always necessary. It is not limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission projection portion A463 are arranged in a predetermined manner, a fixed wall portion that extends toward the odd-shaped slide member A455 (heteromorphic transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x is formed. It may be. In this case, the stop position after the first displacing member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side is brought into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 of the deformed slide member A455 and the transmission protrusion A463. The case and the case of abutting against the fixed wall can be made different.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is arranged on the outer side of the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating shaft of the reinforcing arm portion A518 may be formed in a tubular shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the inside of the tubular portion to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) through the cylinder.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a flexible member formed of a flexible material with the same shape as the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not have to be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the load generated on the wiring HC can be alleviated by the deformation of the flexible member.

  The wiring HC may be supported not by the fastening portion A475 but by a simple columnar portion (portion not used for fastening). In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. Alternatively, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixed portion separately formed on the main body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like may be used. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed by the binding band, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced.

  Further, the fastening portion A475 may not be fixed and may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified.

  Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering the eyes of the player by causing the second displacement member A490 to be displaced in the opposite direction as the second displacement member A490 comes closer to the extended position.

  As a method of displacing the fastening portion A475, the fastening portion A475 may be displaceably supported in the elongated hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to be tiltable with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that the rear plate portion A480 be formed with a guide groove, a notch or an interlocking portion so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

  Further, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, the fastening portion A475 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of support wall portions that are formed in a wall shape on the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC and that restrict the passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall portion.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the back side, and the other end is arranged on the front side of the board side connector A493c. The case where the third connector A416e3 is connected to the third connector A416e3 from the back side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be arranged inward on the side surface of the rear case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending the wiring HC to the side surface of the rear case A310, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

  Further, for example, the board to which the other end is connected may be arranged in the rear plate section A480 arranged on the back side of the board side connector A493c. In this case, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, it is configured to be recessed from the end surface of the detected plate portion A455e that abuts against the transmission protrusion A463 toward the facing arrangement portion A456b side, and the rotation angle of the pinned gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, the drive motor AMT1 is driven (excited) in one direction to move the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position. It is possible to displace to the overhang position, and further to return to the retracted position for displacement. Thus, by switching the length of driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 is changed from the retracted position to the extended position and the arrangement is maintained, and the displacement mode is extended from the retracted position. It is possible to switch to a mode in which after the displacement to the exit position, the displacement is further returned to the retracted position side.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as the paths through which the driving force is transmitted by the gears, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a cam, a gear belt, or a linear slider.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the decorative substrate A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed of a plate-shaped member has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sheet-shaped substrate formed in a sheet shape from a flexible material. In this case, the substrate having the light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is arranged at a position which can be always visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to a non-visible position invisible to the player. In this case, the first rotating member A721 is horizontally rotated with respect to the second rotating member A728 in the vertical direction in the state where the rotating body A720 is arranged at the invisible position (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), and By starting the synchronous rotation in the state and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing the rotation, the relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and second rotating member A728 can be noticed. .. As a result, the rotation of the rotating body A720 is continued during execution of an effect in which useful information (eg, jackpot expectation) for the player is associated with the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 when stopped. The attention of the rotating body A720 can be improved.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be capable of tilting forward from the lower end portion, and the effect unit A710 is moved up and down when the second displacement member A490 of the first operation unit A400 is in the projecting position to hit each other. The production unit A710 may be configured to change to an inclined posture by contacting and receiving a load. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the posture of the effect unit A710 by the arrangement of the second displacement member A490. It should be noted that the configuration in which the effect unit A710 can be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the effect unit A710 and the elevation unit may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevation unit.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 is made of an impermeable material and shields the light emitted toward the central rotating member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may have a light-transmitting portion. This makes it possible to finely adjust the relationship between the attitude of the first rotating member A721 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation shaft of the annular gear member A723 meshed with the fixed gear SG intersects the shaft of the fixed gear SG has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape that extends linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotation shaft of the gear member to be meshed may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. .. Combining a first effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG and a second effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. Thus, it is possible to execute complicated effects.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first region AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed on the outer side of the operation unit A300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inner side of the operation unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed by forming the decorative board A416 into a C-shape that is recessed from the outside toward the inside in a front view. It may be formed at a position closer to the outer side of A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position on the outer side of the operation unit A300.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotary member A728 is irradiated with light from the left and right and from above is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an electric circuit board is arranged below the rotating body A720, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the electric circuit board is conducted to the second supporting section A735, and the second supporting section A735 is conducted. The player may be seen by the player after reaching the second rotating member A728 supported by A735 and conducting the second rotating member A728. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first support portion A731 that supports the first rotation member A721 does not easily transmit light, so that the second rotation member A728 is illuminated without causing the first rotation member A721 to be illuminated. Can be performed.

  This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a is directed to the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728 that can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting unit A715a transmits the light. Therefore, it is difficult to control so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit A715a reaches only the second rotating member A728 and does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by making the second support portion A735 conductive and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 arranged on the inner side of the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting portion A735 arranged on the outer side of the rotating shaft. The case of being arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 is rotated so that the side opposite to the side supported by the first supporting portion A731 is extended to the outside of the rotating shaft and the extended end side covers the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. The extending portion may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected effect can be executed.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction view of the light emitting unit A715a changes due to the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the central rotating member A724 is configured to change its area when the central rotating member A724 expands in a state where the posture does not change, or the moving body projects from the inside so that the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction of the light emitting unit A715a changes. Good too.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to move back and forth between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by a linear movement (sliding movement). Further, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed to the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is configured not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be configured by a plate-shaped member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the rotation axis direction, and may be configured to generate a timing that overlaps all the optical axes. In this case, the influence of the posture of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 can be increased when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in front view is different, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be the same when viewed from the front when the posture changes by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A722.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ facing the virtual plane VS has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. Further, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes may not pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-rear direction, but a mixed displacement of front, rear, left, right, and top) However, the virtual plane VS may be changed. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 is changed when the light emitting means A715 is turned on while suppressing changes in the outer shapes (shapes) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in a front view. be able to.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, the case where a plurality of contact positions of the pinned gear A3462 with respect to the odd-shaped slide member A455 are arranged in the circumferential direction has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 is formed to have a large diameter, so that the transmission protrusion A463 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455, and the outer shape protrusion A3464 comes into contact with the deformed slide member A455. May be displaced in the front-back direction.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pinned gear A3462 contact the deformed slide member A455 at the same position has been described, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, the protruding plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the end portion on the inner side (opposite to the detected plate portion A455e) in the longitudinal direction (the direction orthogonal to the direction A416x in rear view), and the extension thereof is provided. A wall portion orthogonal to the side surface of the open portion in rear view may be configured to extend toward the pinned gear A3462 side.

  In this case, the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 are arranged so as not to contact the arc wall portion A464 but to contact the outer diameter protruding portion A3464. It is possible to generate a rotational load (load in the braking direction) on the pinned gear A3462 while suppressing the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 in the direction intersecting the direction A416x at the time of contact.

  Further, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the lateral direction at the end portion in the longitudinal direction (L-shaped), the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in the direction intersecting the direction A416x, and its displacement. The first displacing member A440 may be configured to be displaced in association with. That is, when the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion of the second guide hole A422b extending in the lateral direction, the transmission protrusion A455b intersects the direction A416x. The displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

  In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion of the second guide hole A422b extending in the lateral direction, the deformed shape is achieved by engaging the second guide hole A422b and the guided projection A455c in the direction A416x. The displacement of the slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted. Accordingly, even after the contact between the protruding plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted.

  Note that the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion of the second guide hole A422b extending in the lateral direction is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement may be generated along the direction A416x, or the displacement may be generated in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 has been described as a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 is configured so as to taper toward the radially outer side (the width does not increase).

  Note that this is also the case when a recess is formed instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, the shape may be any shape, but it is preferable that the shape is such that the diameter becomes smaller inward (the width does not increase).

  The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetric or asymmetric with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis. In this case, if the configuration is asymmetric, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

  For example, when viewed from the rear of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the side surface on the extending front end side of the arc wall portion A464 (opposite to the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464) is the extension base end side. The angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the arc wall portion A464 may be smaller than the side surface (on the side of the transmission projection portion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464).

  In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by the contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition where the gear with pin A3462 is rotated at a constant speed is the opposite side of the retracted position from the extended position (exceeding the extended position. It is possible to increase the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side as compared with the speed when displacing toward the retracted side). That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

  When the first displacing member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, it may be displaced beyond the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position if the outer diameter protruding portion A3464 has a protruding shape. For example, when a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the first displacement member A440 is moved to the retracted position side as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the recessed portion. The case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the projecting position as the deformed slide member A455 is pushed and slid on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 after the displacement is illustrated.

  Further, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position side, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a projecting shape, the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projecting dimension. After the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position, the abutment between the outer diameter projection A3464 and the odd-shaped slide member A455 is released, and the first-shaped displacement member A455 slides to move the first displacement. The case where the member A440 is displaced to the projecting position (retraction position side) is illustrated, and when a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer shape protrusion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 is formed by the dimension of the recessed portion. The case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side along with the displacement is illustrated.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged closer to the rear plate portion A480 side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (a position closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may be protruded toward the rear plate portion A480. .. Further, the main body plate portion A6561 may be configured to have a thin wall (for example, a sheet shape). In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

  Further, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is formed in the elongated shape has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, since a member can be arranged between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, the possibility that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 are displaced synchronously can suppress rubbing is increased. can do.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the protruding portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A is configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the protruding portion A6562 under the load received from the wiring HC. May be. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) displaces the protruding portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. In connection with this, the main body plate portion A6561 may be rotationally displaced. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so that the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560. Can be moderately reduced.

  Further, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported is described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path that combines rotation and slide.

  Although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotationally displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotation member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one rotation or more.

  In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged on the back surface side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, while the through long hole that guides the projecting portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470 (arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561). May be formed so that the projecting portion A6562 projects to the back surface side of the support box portion A6470 through the penetrating elongated hole. In this case, as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be opened. Accordingly, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, from the gap size between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480). Can also be configured as a thick member).

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. Referred to as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Points that push the player in from the back to the front>
In an operating device having operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state, and in a position in which the operating means extends beyond the first state with respect to the player. Two states can be configured, and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state is provided, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the rear side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed toward the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the effect is produced in the advance position in a manner that enhances the expectation of the jackpot for the player, it is easy for the player to operate the operating means in the advance position with a large acceleration. It was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large in size.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is set to the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player can move straight up and down. Then, by making a part that cannot be completely operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

  Also, from the player's playing posture, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders or elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the player should naturally weaken the force applied to the operation means. You can

  In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable about a shaft rod arranged on the back side for the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down about the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to the player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and by disposing the operating means in the direction opposite to the player in the second state, in the second state, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting the operation means.

  Also, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing-in method in which pushing acceleration is less likely to occur can be provided. It is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the player's pushing operation.

  The new pushing method is, for example, placing the outer side surface of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft rod, and placing the hand near the operating means in a posture in which the palm stands up and down, and turn the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the tip of the middle finger, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft rod and placing the palm so as to face the operating means, and then dropping the palm toward the operating means. To be done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the operability in the first state is ensured and the second state is achieved. It is possible to prevent the destruction due to the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is automatically operable, and includes drive means for generating a drive force for the automatic operation. The drive force of the drive device is pushed by a player. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the game machine A4 operates in a direction that does not work in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, with the configuration in which only the push-in operation of the button is possible, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintaining state in which the operating device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and a maintaining unit that operates by the driving unit is provided, and the driving unit is provided with an eccentric portion. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, and the rotating means is capable of changing the phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the movable range of the operating means is changed when the maintenance state is released, and the same rotation is performed in both the first phase and the second phase. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintaining state, and the movement for releasing the maintaining state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, it is possible to change the moving width of the operating device moved by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased/decreased according to the rotational speed of the rotating means. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the biasing means in the direction of the biasing force is caused only by the biasing force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintaining means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is provided with a light emitting means which is disposed inside the operation device and emits light toward the player, and which is in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded, and the gaming machine A7 is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a light emitting means, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the area of the operating means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light to be expanded is expanded, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the light and improve the effect of the effect, and it is difficult to push the operating means unless aiming. With this mode, the player's force during operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes when the operating means moves toward and away from the display means. Characteristic game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image on the display means difficult to see.

<The point that the repulsive force in normal times is small, while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which a movable range of the operation to the terminal position is wider than that in the first state. It is possible to form and, provided with a first drive means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a game with a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. The game machine B1 is provided with a second drive means for generating a drive force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operating motor is automatically operated by the drive motor. However, the lower the elastic constant of the spring is, the lower the drive motor is. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the operation of the player, which makes it difficult for the player to perform continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when moving the operating means by the first driving means, while the first driving means can be used when the return of the operating means is quick. By pushing back the operation means by the two drive means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous hit determination means for determining whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of the operating means for a stroke within a predetermined time, and the second drive means is determined by the detected value of the continuous hit determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined by the detection value of the continuous hit determination means, so that the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, single push operation or long press operation). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing back the hand even when the operation is performed).

  In the gaming machine B2, the end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means is arranged at the end position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position The moving direction determining means includes a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means based on the time relationship between the detection value of the end detecting means and the detected value of the position difference detecting means. The game machine B3, wherein the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction is a direction in which the pushing end returns to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction in which the pushing end returns to the first state, that is, the player's hand moves from the button. Since the second drive means is driven at the timing of moving in the separating direction, it is possible to generate a load for pushing back the operation means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that is oscillated and displaced along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to effectively utilize the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a driving force for moving the operating means from the position in the first state toward the position in the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight is in contact with the support frame to generate a driving force in a state where the operation means is arranged at the terminal position.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operating means can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control for starting or stopping the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight is moved closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame, so the repulsive force generated by the abutment is used. As a result, the drive motor can be moved in the moving direction of the operating means in the direction away from the support frame. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves together with the support means in a direction away from the support frame (a direction closer to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points to use VCM as a braking device and a vibration production device>
A measuring sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, and measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detecting sensor, and the measuring means. Threshold value determining means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by a predetermined threshold value or more, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic game machine C1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance will be low and the operating means may be damaged by the player's operation. Although it is possible to reduce the speed and reduce the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for a weak player. ..

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether or not the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is less than or equal to the threshold value, and to decelerate the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and when the threshold value measured by the threshold value judgment means is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold value. , The control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operation means is arranged at a position where it can abut the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be drive-controlled, the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before starting, it is possible to suppress the shock generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing to the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing to the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, it is possible to gradually improve the degree to which the operating means is braked, and to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during the operation.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be capable of contacting the operation means, and a spring force is used to generate a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount that is deformed by the movement of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by the spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even if the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the case where the value measured by the threshold value judging means is a predetermined threshold value or more with the case where the value measured by the threshold value judging means is a predetermined threshold value or less. And a movable area of an end of the repulsion means on the side opposite to the side abutting the operating means is narrowed, the gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end portion of the repulsion means on the side opposite to the side contacting the operation means is narrowed, thereby operating the operation means. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<Prevent damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with the clutch>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes drive means for generating drive force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means. A releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A game machine D1 characterized by releasing transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for effect, a large load may occur in the drive system when the operating means is operated during the automatic operation. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (discontinued), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction which is the opposite direction to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction, The game machine D2, wherein the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit, the operating unit is operated by the player when the driving unit is driven in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. Therefore, a large load may occur in the driving means. For this reason, the degree of freedom in producing when the operating means is operated to produce an effect is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction or the releasing direction is changed depending on whether the driving unit rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (two patterns, a release pattern and a pattern that does not release), but the drive force needs to be cut off in both of them.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (discontinued) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of movement in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

  As a method of canceling the transmission, it is exemplified that the clutch moves in a direction intersecting with the operation direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction means, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotational axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, an urging means for urging the drive means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted is provided, and the release means has a contact portion between the drive means and the transmission means. And engaging teeth for transmitting the driving force when they are in mesh with each other. Both sides of the engaging teeth facing the operating direction of the driving means are different from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the gaming machine D3 is configured to be inclined with respect to the abutting surface in such a manner that it taper as it goes away.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the releasing means applies the driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, while the transmission teeth are transmitted, both surfaces facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined in such a manner that they taper away from the abutment surface. They can be separated from each other, whereby the transmission of the driving force can be canceled.

  Further, the urging force of the urging means is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is exerted in the operation direction of the drive means via the engaging teeth. Loaded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

  The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means moves away from the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large.

  In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance periodically returns. With this, when the player releases the hand, the button can be activated within a short time.

  That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player holds the button, one phase of the operation of the button will be passed. Then, if the player releases his hand on the way, if the player moves from the end of the 1st phase, the button will be stopped for a longer period of time, and the feeling of "because the player's load has been released" has been eliminated. Get off.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player has started to move because the load on the player is released.

  The gaming machine D4 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the engaging surfaces of the transmitting means and the releasing means are formed in a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage. That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engaging surface, the transmitting means and the releasing means collide with each other in the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means is transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means from being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to start the operation of the operation means early after the load from the player is released.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation means is different between the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a plurality of operating modes of the operating means are prepared, and the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any operating mode. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation means is the operation mode of a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means when there is a difference in whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction. Similarly, the game machine D6, which is different in operation after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating manner of the operating means, the operating manner for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

  Here, by tying the difference in the operation mode of the operation means to the information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means to the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. Can be watched over.

  Further, since the difference in this operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation and the like without watching the operation of the operation means. You can However, normally, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance and the player The operation of the operation means can be monitored.

<Change the position of the cam protrusion based on the cam rotation>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device includes drive means for generating drive force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the operation means. First means configured to operate the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and which prevents the position of the operation means from changing from the first position. , An urging means for urging the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position, and an operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. And a terminating means for variably forming a movement terminating end of the moving means, wherein the first means suppresses a position change of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for applying to the first means a load for releasing the engagement of the one means with the operation means, the release of the engagement by the release load means, and the movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The game machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single drive means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means that is operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixation is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means causes the bulging operation. There is a game machine in which the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam when releasing the lock, the phase of the cam when releasing the lock is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing are operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the drive means for driving the operating means. Accordingly, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the releasing load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1, the change of the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means, the gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. Therefore, by detecting the operation amount of the transmission means, the release is released. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

  As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is formed of a cam and the release load means is formed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the protrusion or An example is a method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion in other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the operation of the release load means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that whether or not and are synchronously operated can be switched.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. And the transmission means are switched synchronously, it is possible to change the synchronous state of the release load means and the transmission means without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operation means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates the second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but since the rotation cycle is different, the second rotating means has a predetermined function. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by contacting the first means in phase.

  According to this configuration, when the operation means is maintained at the first position, the action of the first means is released, and the operation means moves toward the second position, it is possible to prepare a plurality of end positions. , The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually separating the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position at which the operating means and a second position at which the operating means reaches when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine that is configured to be movable between and that has a vibrating unit that has a vibrating unit that vibrates, and a receiving unit that is disposed so as to be able to contact the vibrating unit, the operating unit is disposed at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot contact the receiving means, while the vibrating portion is in contact with the receiving means when the operating means is arranged in the second position. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibrating means that transmits a vibration to the player through the operating means or a frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-242242 See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing the effect of transmitting the vibration immediately after operating the operating means, it is necessary to detect the operation of the operating means before operating the vibrating means. .. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operation means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operation means at the moment of pushing the operation means). Depending on the mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not be started before the hand is released, and the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether the vibrating portion abuts the receiving means or not depending on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Therefore, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, it is possible for the player to feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibrating means is arranged so as to overhang the occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means to change from the separated state to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means, The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity, a gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. This makes it possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means from each other, prevent the transmission of vibration, and suppress the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration.

  In the gaming machine F3, in the abutting state, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating section, the gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can provide momentum when the vibrating section moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

  In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the operation direction of the operation means set lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation means. ..

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means deforms can be set finely. it can.

  Thereby, even if the movement amount of the operating means is small, the expansion and contraction amount of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

  As a method of varying the deformation resistance, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means or a supporting means enclosing the vibrating means In the case of being composed of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction, and a rail for guiding the supporting means so that the operating means moves in the direction along the operation direction. , A coil spring for urging the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like.

  In the gaming machine F3, a portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to prevent the driving means from being loaded. As a result, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  Further, since it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

  As the receiving means, for example, in the frame portion of the gaming machine, in the vicinity of the upper plate where the game balls are supplied, the edge of the glass frame, etc. Examples thereof include a portion that may be touched by a hand and a housing portion that partially surrounds the operating means.

<One-touch installation of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the attachment part>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, A driving unit for generating a driving force for driving; and a transmitting unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the operating unit, wherein the transmitting unit includes a deforming portion that is elastically deformed by an overload. A gaming machine G1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, operating means operable by a player, driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means when the player holds and fixes the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, and the transmitting means. There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the drive means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deforming portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means, or the driving means and the transmitting means. It is possible to alleviate the load applied to the connecting portion of and.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deformable portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member with the rotation shaft, and the elasticity of the deformation portion causes the rotation shaft to move to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a part responsible for elastically deforming the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, and a part as a part for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, the structure of the transmission member can be simplified because the functions are shared. For example, an individual fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly arranged in parallel with the rotation axis, the convex portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is caused by the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and there is a risk that the number of members will increase.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is such that the rotating shaft is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is formed on the cam member. The cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified as compared with the case where the cam member is slidably moved.

  In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is compared with the rotating shaft as compared with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the protruding portion. A game machine characterized in that a deformation resistance becomes larger in a second rotation direction in which a straight line that is perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the convex portion and the extending direction of the rotating shaft is rotated. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the deformation resistance of the deforming portion is made different for each direction, so that the state after the deforming portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction view is Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the protruding portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the protruding portion moves, so that the load generated between the protruding portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformable portion is mitigated. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the cam member is provided with a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the posture of the cam member changes due to elastic deformation of the deformable portion, The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3 or G4, when the operating means is overloaded, the deformable portion elastically deforms to change the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member. The contact resistance can increase the operation resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a gaming machine G6 is provided with a detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis.

  Here, in a situation in which the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the expected displacement due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the drive unit for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means and the more expensive. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to inexpensively configure an early detection of the occurrence of overload.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means can detect whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the shaft. Thus, it is possible to determine that the overload is occurring at the same time when the detection unit detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the drive unit for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection units. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the drive unit when an overload occurs.

<A ball-got prevention structure with a thread. Gaming machine H>
In a gaming machine equipped with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows back toward the launching device can pass, out of the game balls that have been launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows passage of the flowing down game ball. A gaming machine H1 provided with a one-way blocking means for blocking the progress of an object flowing backward.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by placing a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area. There is a game machine having a function of preventing the above (cutting a thread) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-024179). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of launching and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time, when the launch strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball remains uncut It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. Therefore, for example, prepare a fraudulent tool that connects game balls to both ends of the thread, and shoot one of the game balls that is connected to one end of the thread with a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and return it to the player side. While holding the one game ball that has been held, by driving the other game ball that is connected to the other end of the thread into the game area, you can remove the thread from the guide path and pass it through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game sphere and the other game sphere are connected by a thread, the thread connected to the other game sphere is externally loaded and the other game sphere arranged in the game area. There is a problem in that there is a possibility that an illegal profit may be obtained by controlling the.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means is used even if an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball by using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by preventing the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate an illegal profit.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends a downward path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means that does not apply a load to a flowing down game ball and applies a load to the backward flowing object on the inner corner side of the bend.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backward flowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the load means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the load means is arranged in a recessed portion that is recessed with a width less than the diameter of the gaming ball, wherein the gaming machine H4 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid the load means and the game ball from colliding, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 characterized by comprising a regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the foul ball passage of the load means, so that the thread-shaped member and the load means are connected to each other. When the load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a foul ball is provided with a receiving tray that is the first tray to reach on the front side of the front door, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls delivered from the dispensing device. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes through the foul ball passage before the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. When an illegal act is performed in which a load is applied to the other game ball by using the yarn guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to give a load and the durability of the yarn is reduced. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a part for discharging the game ball paid out from the payout device, to the receiving tray which is the tray where the foul ball reaches first on the front side of the front door. A gaming machine H7, characterized in that the gaming machine H7 is positioned below a lower end of an outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act is performed in which the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage is used to load the other gaming ball. In this case, it is possible to easily give damage to the yarn by the game balls dispensed.

<Board holding structure. Amusement machine I>
The game means used during the game, and the one side which is the side facing the game means is opened, and the receiving means capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means. It is provided with state changing means for changing the game means from the unusable state, which is the unusable state, to the usable state, which is the usable state. In this case, the gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from the one side.

  In game machines such as pachinko machines, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state where the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state where the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means for doing so (for example, refer to JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, push it again. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means is provided with the approaching means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is in use, the game board can be pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board, and by applying a pushing force, there is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position of the used state.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is changed to the unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. There is an effect that the work efficiency of work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the gaming means unusable, and the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means. Gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing work of the gaming means can be improved, and that is Since it is carried out by making the means unusable, the work efficiency can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the abutting means receives a load from the gaming means, so that the state changing means changes to the usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the usable state is set as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

  In the gaming machine I4, the game means is configured so that one side of the receiving means is supported by the shaft and the other side is brought into proximity to be received by the receiving means, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the contact means via the gaming means by utilizing the width dimension of the gaming means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is unusable by the state changing means making the gaming means unusable. When maintaining the state, a gaming machine I6 is provided with a blockage restricting portion for blocking an opening on one side of the game means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means maintains the unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck. Amusement machine J>
The game means used during the game and the receiving means which is open on one side opposite to the game means and can receive the game means from the one side, and the receiving means are the game means and A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the gaming machine J1 is provided with a arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of locations.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud by inserting a piano wire from the rotary shaft side of the front frame (for example, see JP-A-2016-26573). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the fraud prevention section is only provided in one place, and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of positions, so that fraud prevention is prevented. The effect of can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is different from the first means for suppressing the entry of external members at the first location and the second means for suppressing the entry of external materials at the second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from the outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is different in the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside between the first location and the second location, so that the arrangement means is simply provided. It is possible to further suppress the entry of the member from the outside as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

  It should be noted that the method of suppressing entry from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking a route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means is provided with an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape that is open toward the outside of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent the intruding member from further intruding.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characteristic game machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, when a fraudulent penetration of the entry control section due to high heat occurs, a change (wiring due to heat, etc.) that occurs in the wiring due to the high heat is detected from the outside The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily produced.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, characterized in that the arranging means includes a canceling means for guiding a member that has entered from the outside to a canceling area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the member that has entered from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the elimination area that is far from the gaming means. Even if the degree becomes strong, it is possible to prevent a member that has entered from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of a decorative plate with a structure of 5 pieces Involve fraud prevention. Amusement machine K>
The first means and the second means are arranged to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. A gaming machine including a third means, and a connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized by the above.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means, which are arranged to face each other and are connected by at least one side, are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a game machine provided with a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, where each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being broken by the third means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion that connects the first means and the second means is set to the second direction that intersects the first direction, the third direction is the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2, wherein the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means is connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3, characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction that is close to each other, and the second means is connected by being fitted together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 is provided with a connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting that occurs by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction that is close to the connected means, so that The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Accordingly, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected more quickly.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction thereof is the same as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction of the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the first means and the second means, which irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means And a light guide means that is configured to be capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means into the inside thereof, and the gaming machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

  In the gaming machine K6, a gaming machine K7 is provided with an abutting means for making a surface abutment in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, in the opposing area of the light guide means and the other member of the first means or the second means, the space for the dimension of the contact means is maintained. You can This prevents the gap between the light guide means and the other member of the first means or the second means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. You can

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even when a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means is attempted to disassemble illegally. can do.

<Point L where the curved light guiding means is utilized. The point is not reached>
Light guide means formed in a curved wave shape as viewed in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and projection means arranged to face the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means. The projected means includes a concave surface facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guiding means, and a convex surface facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate that uniformly emits light incident from an end surface (for example, see JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are provided. The light emission intensity of the projection means can be changed by the section.

  In the gaming machine L1, in the projected means, the concave facing portion is made of a light transmissive material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion where the light emitted from the light guide means is condensed. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided an opposite projection means which is arranged on the opposite side of the projected means with the light guide means interposed therebetween and which projects the light passing through the light guide means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface portion and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface portion are formed of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L2, a portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means of the back projection means and a portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means Since the materials are formed of substantially the same transmissivity, the same light is made incident on the light guide means, so that the light is viewed through the projection means and the light is viewed through the back projection means. And can be different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout structure. Gaming machine M>
First means and second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other, and which form an internal space in a fixed state; acoustic means arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A game machine M1 comprising: a bending means that configures a bending path in an internal space.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame, and an effect is produced by a sound output from the speakers (for example, see JP-A-2016-16088). In such a gaming machine, a vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and sent out to the outside of the gaming machine, so that it is easy to produce a bass sound. However, there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the game machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means configures a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, The oscillating wave can be propagated at an arbitrary distance by canceling the regulation of the left-right width.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means and the second means toward the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a projecting portion that is projectingly provided, and a projecting tip of the projecting portion contacts the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means and the second means. By contacting and, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means as a result of performing fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as an oscillating wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening portion that connects the internal space and the outside, and the opening portion is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening portion and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by the.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, since the opening is closed by the passage member connected to the acoustic means, it is unnecessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall forming the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

  In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion is, the gaming machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is prevented that the wiring of the acoustic means is sandwiched between the protruding portions and is disconnected. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a production means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported from below by the production means, so that the weight of the support fastening means can be reduced without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, flower that rotates in reverse. Petals that stop on the way. Amusement machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state of displacement in the displacement direction of the first displacement means, In a gaming machine provided with a second displacing means that can be switched in a non-following state in which it is displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means, at least when the second displacing means is in the following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacing means that is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacing direction of the second displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacing means is displaced in a direction different from the extending/contracting operation direction of the first displacing means (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacing means, the third displacing means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacing direction of the second displacing means. , And can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacing means that the player feels as a sensation can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacing means is actually driven.

  The gaming machine N1 is provided with resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the follow-up state and the non-following state. A gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, by the action of the resistance means, a follow-up state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and a non-following state that deviates from the follow-up state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the number of types of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, and thus also serves as the driving means. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has the function of changing the state of the first displacement means and makes the player visually recognize it. It can also be used as a function as a production device.

  The gaming machine N4 includes rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, the first displacing means, the second displacing means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotating shafts of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of other members or means also follow and change, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. You can

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As a point, we have not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening that receives the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 provided with one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes operating means that a player can operate and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and in which the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, (See JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign matter remains inside and may cause a malfunction. ..

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 includes the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, so that the foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

  In the gaming machine O1, the accommodation means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting section.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the housing means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistance portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. In other words, it can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are formed in a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured to have a shape based on the shape of the solid object with different directions. The solid object can be easily removed through the part.

  The gaming machine O5 according to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object closes a part of the second opening. Can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the solid object will remain. ..

<Points for devising the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
In a gaming machine provided with a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, the first supporting means is provided with a projecting shape portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operation handle is arranged is detachable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-242242). (See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk of slipping when holding a finger on the bottom surface, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the projecting shape portion projecting from the bottom surface of the first supporting means functions as a portion on which the finger is hooked, so that the first supporting means is prevented from slipping out of the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the protruding shape portion is not limited at all, and any arrangement may be adopted as long as the protruding shape portion is provided outside the first supporting means. For example, it may be provided so as to project in the vertical direction or may be provided so as to project toward the front side.

  In the gaming machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A gaming machine P2 characterized by being arranged as follows.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1, the protruding shape portion is projected downward from the lower bottom surface at a position apart from a position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as a supporting position. Therefore, the first supporting means can be held more easily. This makes it easy to attach and detach the first supporting means to and from the second supporting means.

  The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example, it may be at a position closer to the front side when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or the other when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. The position may be close to the end, or may be a position opposite to the shaft support position with respect to the plate storing the game balls.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means is provided with a gap between the recessed shape portion and the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P3, which is arranged to face the recessed shape portion.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the supporting position between the first means and the first supporting means is made a gap due to the recessed shape portion, so that the first means is provided. It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaving powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub due to the positional deviation. That is, it is possible to prevent the powder from collecting and clogging the movable part to cause a malfunction, or the powder from being collected at the detection position of the detection device and being erroneously sensed.

  In this way, the recessed shape portion is not only in non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for releasing the error, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also during operation (for example, a game). The effect is exhibited even in the middle or in the game waiting state (display state of the demo screen).

  In the gaming machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside a range in which the protruding shape portion is provided in a protruding manner.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the place where the recessed shape portion is formed from being extremely thin as compared with other places and prevent the strength from becoming insufficient. it can. Further, since the recessed shape portion is formed on the back of the protruding shape portion, the protruding shape portion can be flexibly deformed inward and outward, so that even if a large load is applied to the protruding shape portion, It is possible to suppress cracking of the formed shape portion.

  The load applied to the projecting shape portion may be, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, or the first support means. An example is a load applied by collision of something (thousand boxes, etc.) moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

  In the gaming machine P4, the first means is supported in such a manner that the first means is a portion of the first supporting means outside the recessed shape portion and is in contact with an overlapping portion that overlaps the protruding shape portion in the inner and outer directions. A gaming machine P5, comprising: a contact means, and an operation section positioned by the contact means and configured to be operated by a player.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness at the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means. It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

  In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes a shock attenuating means which is continuously formed between the abutting means and the operating section and is configured to be capable of attenuating a shock, and the shock attenuating means is provided in the recessed shape portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized by being formed with a width shorter than the width.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P5, the shock transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means can be damped by the shock damping means, and the distance between the shock damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. As a result, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (flexure) of the contact means.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the shock damping means. For example, it may be a lump member made of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

  In any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means, and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of recess is formed to be larger than that of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared for the first portion where a large load is expected to be provided, and the space is compared with the first portion. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to have a small load applied thereto, to be small, it is possible to improve the design flexibility of the recessed shape portion while maintaining high durability.

  In addition, the recessed degree may be, for example, a recessed depth (the greater the recessed degree, the deeper), the recessed width (the greater the recessed degree, the wider).

  When the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portion, the recessed shape corresponding to the other portion is formed. The degree of recessed portions may be increased.

  The size of the load is not limited, and the recessed shape portion may be designed based on the size of the load occurrence frequency, for example. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game store, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined performance state, a game state such as a specific game state). The size of may be used as a reference.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed below the bottom surface portion of the first supporting means along the front-rear direction, and the forming range becomes wider toward the front. A gaming machine P8.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the withstand load of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means is erected alone. Even in the storage method in which one support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long period of time without the first support means falling over.

  It should be noted that what is considered when designing the protruding shape portion is not limited to the self-weight of the first supporting means. For example, the shape of the protruding shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated when the first means is operated and the frequency of the load generation.

  The gaming machine P9 according to any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, wherein the lower surface of the first supporting means is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined upward in a direction away from the second supporting means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first supporting means can be made easy to stand alone, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the protruding shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the parts other than the projecting shape part from being contaminated.

<Points regarding deformation structure based on the support structure and shape of the bobbin>
A gaming machine comprising: operating means operable by a player; first supporting means for supporting the operating means; and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means and the operating means, The first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction of narrowing a gap between the operation means and the second support means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which operating means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, JP-A-2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the countermeasure against the positional deviation that occurs in the area around the operating means due to the load when operating the operating means is insufficient, and the countermeasure against the positional deviation that occurs in the area around the operating means is insufficient. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

  For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered at the same time. At this time, the descending distance of the front side portion of the second supporting means tends to be longer than the descending distance of the operating means. At this time, there may be a gap between the operation means and the second support means in the front portion due to the difference in the descending distance.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second supporting means is lowered excessively, the deformation of the first supporting means prevents a gap from being generated between the operating means and the second supporting means. can do. That is, since it is possible to allow the operating means to further descend (sink), the supporting aspect of the operating means can be simplified.

  The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in the descending direction, may be in the ascending direction, may be pushed in along the front-rear direction, may be in the rotating (rotating) direction, or may be a combination thereof.

  In addition, as the mode of contacting from the operation direction, various modes are exemplified, in addition to the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be brought closer to the bottom center side of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and the reaction force becomes larger toward the bottom center side, so that the support of the operation means is effective. Can be done on a regular basis.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the common support means which supports a 1st support means and a 2nd support means in common. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled or fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, is configured to be able to hold a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball, and the operation means is provided via the first support means. A gaming machine Q2, which is provided with a gaming ball holding section connected to the gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the operating means and the game ball holding portion.

  Further, when the first support means is configured by a flexible member, or when it is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when operating the operating means is held as it is. Since it can be prevented from being transmitted to the part, it is possible to prevent the game ball held in the game ball holding part from being displaced each time the operating means is operated, thereby generating abnormal noise.

  Various modes are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, vibration transmission may be prevented in the first direction, while vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to perform the sound effect.

  In the gaming machine Q2, the operating means includes an operating portion configured to be operable by a player, and the first supporting means is more frontal as a connecting position with the game ball holding portion is farther from the operating portion. A gaming machine Q3, which is arranged on the side.

  In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation portion, which is a position that is easily displaced due to operation, the absolute amount of displacement is reduced by moving the connecting position to the back side. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding portion and the first supporting means, the connecting position is arranged on the front side (close to the player) at a position far from the operation portion, which is a position that is unlikely to be displaced due to operation. It is possible to improve the design.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first support means, the operation portion and the main body portion. A connecting portion for connecting the operating portion, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, the first supporting means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is attachable/detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. Even, a gaming machine Q4, characterized in that it is constructed in such a manner as to surround the connecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to easily assemble the first supporting means while sufficiently ensuring the size of the operating portion.

  Note that various methods are exemplified as the method of fixing the first supporting means formed of the divided body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be respectively connected to the operating means, and one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies and another divided body connected to the divided body are provided. You may let me.

  Further, various modes are exemplified as the fixing position and the fixing mode of the divided body. For example, fitting may be performed or fastening may be performed.

  In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, it is possible to disperse and handle the impact generated when the operation unit is operated, at a plurality of fixed positions. Since it is possible to improve the fixing durability of the divided body, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement of the first supporting means.

  Furthermore, since the fastening direction is set to intersect (for example, orthogonally) the operating direction of the operating portion, the load direction due to the operation of the operating portion and the tightening direction of the fastening screw can be made different, It is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to impact during operation.

  In the gaming machine Q4, a gaming machine Q5, wherein a fastening direction of fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects an operation direction of the operation portion.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied when the operating portion is operated in the fastening direction, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation, and the divided body is fixed. Can be prevented from being released.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the direction intersecting the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle about a predetermined rotation axis, a direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). The direction along the rotation axis) is illustrated.

  Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (in the case of pushing operation or pulling out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. The direction is illustrated.

  In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high ratio (frequency) in operation) are assumed during the game, at least of a plurality of planes intersecting each straight line The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in an intersecting portion of a plurality of planes, that is, in a direction intersecting with any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

  In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, a plurality of fastening points of the divided body are configured, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to another fastening point. Since it is possible to prevent the split body from being displaced at the same time, it is possible to prevent the divided bodies from being displaced simultaneously or from being loosened.

  In addition, the fastening position of the divided body may be arranged at a position where the load is concentrated when the operation unit is operated. Even in this case, another fastening point is arranged on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, so that the divided body may be displaced or the fastening may loosen due to the load during operation. Can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes a detection means configured to detect a predetermined operation of the operation section, and the detection means is arranged at a position apart from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being installed.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and the operation unit is moved when the operation unit is moved in accordance with the operation of the operation unit at the split position. Since the detection means is disposed away from the division position where there is a risk that the split body will rub against each other and powder (dust etc.) will be generated, it is possible to suppress detection of powder (dust etc.) by the detection means. can do. Thereby, the occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operation means is an interference means that interferes with the division body in the division direction view on the side separating from the division body in the division direction (approach direction) when the game is playable. A gaming machine Q8, characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction by the interference means.

  The interference means may interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but may not interfere with the operating means before the assembled state, for example, during the assembling work. For example, when the divided body is made of a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during the assembling work, so that interference with the interference means can be avoided easily and ease of assembly is maintained. can do.

  Further, for example, even when the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be configured so as not to interfere with the interference means in the assembly process. That is, it may be formed in a non-interfering shape when viewed in the assembly direction before fastening (for example, in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer to each other for assembly). In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided bodies when the game is possible while ensuring the ease of assembly.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second supporting means is provided with a receiving recessed portion that is recessed to receive the first supporting means.

  According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first supporting means is received in the receiving recessed portion, so that the first supporting means is affected by the displacement of the operating means. Even if the position is displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first supporting means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which a center of a radius of curvature is arranged on the operating portion side of the operating means. Q10.

  According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operation unit can be arranged, and in addition, the player feels cramped when holding the operation unit. You can prevent feeling. As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operation unit and the operability of the operation unit.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak portion that is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak portion is formed in a different direction for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streak portion is set to be different in each region, so that the first supporting means having anisotropy in rigidity. Can be configured.

  The design standard for the extending direction of the streak portion is not limited. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed to be an extension direction with a good yield, and when the load generated when the operation means is operated acts in a different manner for each region, it is the best way to cope with that load. You may design the extending direction of a streak part as a direction.

<Points regarding support structure between speaker and substrate>
In a gaming machine provided with a vibrating means and a light emitting means that is arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to emit light, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. A gaming machine R1.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (for example, see JP-A-2016-16088). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

  More specifically, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light emitting element (LED, fluorescent lamp, discharge tube, etc.) is arranged behind the speaker in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, and the speaker is arranged. Since it is not possible to produce light at the spots where it is illuminated, it becomes dark. In this case, in the front area in which the gaming machine is easily visible, the area in which glittering effects can be produced becomes narrow. In the first place, a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine or the like has a roughly determined size from the standard, so it is recognized that securing a light emitting effect area is an important issue.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device, and the light emitting means is arranged at the vibration generating point of the vibrating means. Can be approached to. This makes it possible to make the front area bright and visible regardless of the place where the vibrating means vibrates, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

  The mode of the vibrating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means capable of outputting a voice or an operating means having a vibrating device built therein. Further, the means is not limited to the actively vibrating means, but may be a means configured to vibrate (passively vibrate) with respect to an external load.

  Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in the speaker, a discharge port for discharging the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker found in, for example, a bass reflex type speaker, and a path connecting the vibration part to the discharge port are exemplified.

  The vibrating device may be a vibrating device driven by rotation (for example, a vibrator) or a vibrating device generating vibration by linear driving (for example, a voice coil motor).

  It should be noted that the mode of the close arrangement is not limited at all, and may be any mode as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be laminated on the vibrating means, and in that case, the laminating direction may be the front-back direction, the direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-back direction, and the left and right ends from the left and right ends. It may be inclined in the direction.

  The gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the light emitting substrates are stacked on the plurality of vibrating means. ..

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the light-emitting substrate is apt to be displaced (vibration, misalignment, etc.) due to the influence of the vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs the sound. Where the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be changed by changing the vibrating means for outputting the sound. ) Can be increased.

  The light emitting substrate may be one or plural. In the case of a plurality of substrates, at least one light emitting substrate may be laminated on the plurality of vibrating means. In this case, it is possible to provide a combination of the light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated by the vibrating means and the light emitting substrate that is not displaced, so that it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the presentation mode of the light emitting means.

  In the gaming machine R2, a holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, the light emitting substrate is not fixed in the stacking direction with respect to the holding means, and the holding means emits the light along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3, which is configured to generate a load in a direction in which the displacement of the circuit board is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting substrate and the displacement of the holding means.

  The non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simple retaining), it can be said that they are not fixed.

  Further, the expression “non-fixed” does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is defined (stable front-rear position, small vibration is allowed). Also, by enclosing the frame member having a slightly larger frame shape in the direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction, displacement in a direction different from the front-rear direction (upper, lower, left, and right) can be suppressed.

  This can reduce the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate as compared with the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means as in the vibrating means. Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and Regulating means for regulating the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, and the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A gaming machine R4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the traveling direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member are provided. Since the movement of the fixing means in the traveling direction is restricted, even if the fixing means is loosened (even if some fixing means are loosened), it is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect which advances. For example, the rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or the fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement region configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed as compared with the first displacement region. A gaming machine R5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change of the light emitting mode when the light emitting substrate is displaced by the influence of the vibration of the vibrating means is changed for each region of the light emitting substrate. Can be made.

  Accordingly, by designing the aspect of the light emission effect in the first displacement area and the aspect of the light emission effect in the second displacement area in different aspects, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface emitting means for uniformly emitting light by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement area. As the second refraction means to be held, an edge light emitting means for arranging the light incident from one end (edge) to be totally reflected and emitted from the other end (edge) to show the player high-luminance light is arranged. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel light emission effect in which the light emission mode (for example, the brightness) is different for each region.

  The mode of suppressing the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the suppression mode may be defined by the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or the mode defined by the holding mode of the light emitting substrate may be used.

  For example, as for the positional relationship between the plurality of vibrating means and the light-emitting substrate, in the region equidistant from each vibrating means, the influence from one vibrating means is canceled by the influence from the other vibrating means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and a facing portion arranged to face the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw. A gaming machine R6, characterized in that the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be capable of contacting each other.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R5, by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. Can be prevented.

  In addition, various modes are illustrated as a countermeasure after the loosening of the fastening screw occurs. For example, when the fastening screw is loosened, the looseness may be electrically detected, or the fastening screw may be loosened by forming the facing portion on the surface of the vibration device. If vibration occurs, abnormal noise may be generated and the looseness may be noticed, or the loosened portion may be corrected by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the substrate for light emission, and a connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the direction intersecting the connecting direction easily occurs as compared with the deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Gaming machine R7.

  Here, when the connecting means is configured in such a manner that the deformation in the connecting direction is easily caused, the distance between the connecting positions changes in both directions such that it extends or contracts, and the advantageous effect and the adverse effect are periodically generated. It is not preferable because it occurs spontaneously.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the connecting position is changed only to the side where the interval is shortened. Therefore, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be preferentially generated.

  Accordingly, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only in a situation where the connecting means is deformed (for example, a situation in which a load is generated in the connecting means), and thus the first member is usually used. The load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means while setting the load in the opposing direction of the member and the second member low. It is possible to suppress the shaking of the substrate for use.

  The mode in which the deformation easily occurs in the predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed such that the thickness differs in each direction, or the magnitude of the load generated in the connecting means may change in each direction.

  Further, the mode of switching the loads in the pressing directions is not limited at all. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. According to this, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured to be capable of changing a vibration direction between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine R8.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of action of the vibration of the vibrating means on the light emitting means.

<Technical idea of side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
A first light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first manner; and a light emitting means configured to emit light and a light guiding means capable of guiding light. A gaming machine S1 comprising: a light guide means and a second light guide means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is made incident from an end portion of the plate-shaped member and is emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). See the bulletin). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of light emission effect.

  To be more specific, like the conventional gaming machine described above, when performing a light emitting effect with an LED substrate formed of a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is a three-dimensional light emitting effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, the effect is apt to be lowered due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for presentation increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in an obstacle to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is unavoidable to choose between improving the effect and reducing the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, since the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in a different manner, the effect of production is lowered even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different. (Change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of the light guide means. For example, a light-transmissive member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member such as frosted glass that makes the surface emit light in a substantially uniform manner, or may be formed by curing a resin of a milky white material. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, or a member to which a display is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal. The member of the above aspect may be used.

  In the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured such that the way of lighting is changed stepwise in accordance with the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light guiding means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In this case, the effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly can be executed.

  The gaming machine S1 or S2 is provided with a housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, the housing means supporting the light emitting substrate, and the light guiding means. Is provided at least in a first position, and a shielding unit configured to shield the light guide unit and the player from each other, and the first position is outside the outline of the shielding unit. A gaming machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in one direction.

  In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guide means with respect to the support means can be easily adjusted. Can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

  The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, the player may be shielded from touching the light guide means while being visible, or the player may not touch or see the light guide means. You may.

  When the first positions are formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may be arranged. It may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

  In the gaming machine S3, the substrate for light emission is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has an elongated plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4, which is arranged at an end portion in the lengthwise direction.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S3, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is arranged at the end portion in the lengthwise direction. Therefore, the fixing of the first position is loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means, it is possible to easily correct the positional deviation of the light guide means.

  More specifically, by correcting the positional deviation of the light guide means by the deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction or by the slip due to giving a strong load, one of Even when the fixing is loosened only at the end and the fixing is maintained at the other end, the positional deviation of the light guide means can be easily repaired.

  Further, in the case of the supporting mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate by the supporting means can be weakened as the light guiding means bends and deforms. Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means. By giving, it is possible to correct the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

  The adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the design is mechanically regulated so that the portion of the light guide means to be irradiated from the outer shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate does not shift enough to be completely displaced in the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be such that the misalignment at the position is corrected (the adjustment width is small), and based on the design that secures a large adjustment width in advance, the part to be irradiated from the outer shape of the light emitting means to the light guide means The position of the light guide means may be adjustable so that it is completely out of sight (wide adjustment range).

  In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can have the same structure, and the aspect of the light emission effect visually recognized in the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when a game machine having the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with different game characteristics (for example, when configuring a game machine with different specifications), without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, Since it is possible to change the mode of the light emission effect by adjusting the position of the light guide means, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, cost) involved in manufacturing the gaming machine.

  Note that the non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, modes other than the case of being fixed by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixing. The term “edge” is an expression intended to avoid being limited to the edge. That is, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the lengthwise end.

  In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shield means is fixed to the support means, and the light guide means and the shield means are configured to be capable of reducing the displacement of their relative positions as the distance between them is shortened. A gaming machine S5, comprising: a portion, and the positional deviation prevention portion includes a fixing portion for fixing to the supporting means.

  Here, where it is necessary to connect a wiring that conducts electricity to the light-emitting substrate, the deviation or lack of the wiring directly affects the malfunction of the light-emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are not easily displaced from each other.

  Considering the effect, it is preferable that the light guide means is easy to be aligned when the positional deviation occurs, on the premise that the positional deviation from the light emitting substrate does not easily occur. It is considered that it is better to hold it on the support means side. On the other hand, if a positional deviation occurs between the light guide unit and the shield unit, the light guide unit and the shield unit may collide with each other and the appearance may be deteriorated.

  Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix the shielding means to the supporting means serving as the base in consideration of the strength. As described above, various modes of support expected for each means were varied.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S3 or S4, the operation of the positional deviation prevention portion facilitates the mutual alignment of the light guiding means and the shielding means at the time of assembly without directly fixing them. Not only can this be done, but the positional relationship between the light guide means and the shielding means during the game can be easily maintained.

  The mode of the position shift prevention unit is not limited at all. For example, concave and convex shapes that are similar to each other and that can be fitted may be used, and the concave and convex shapes that can be fitted may have a shape that does not change along the assembling direction. It may be composed of a shape and an enlarged concave shape.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body portion, a separation extension portion extending from the main body portion to a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension portion. A counter-extending portion having a cross-sectional shape extending toward the light-emitting means, wherein the light-emitting means is arranged so that light incident on the counter-extending portion is totally reflected. A gaming machine S6 characterized by comprising a section.

  According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting unit from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion, so that the separating extension portion and the facing extension portion, and the other portions. It is possible to clarify the boundary between and, and it is possible to execute an effect that changes the mode of light (separates light) at a boundary with a short width.

  The mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guide means and the light emitting means, the direction of the emitted light, the width of the emitted light, the material and shape of the light guide means, a combination thereof, and the like.

  In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means forms a cover portion that covers the light emitting substrate and an outer shape of the cover portion, and has a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, characterized in that the facing extension portion is extended from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

  According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S6, light can be made incident on the frame portion from the joint portion, so that the effect of the light emission effect of the frame portion can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be provided. By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide means can be improved.

  According to this, if the frame portion is extended to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the side opposite to the emitting direction.

  In the gaming machine S7, the facing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the cover portion, is coupled to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame portion at the other end. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being separated.

  According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension portion, an end portion where light can be incident on the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion where incidence is restricted are provided. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emission effect using the frame portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at a projection position of the facing extension portion and the separation extension portion, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension portion with respect to the light irradiation direction is set. The smaller the size, the closer to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension portion and the separating extension portion, the gaming machine S9.

  According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separating and extending portion is a shape inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means. It is possible to perform a light emission effect without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player, while keeping the uniform. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the spaced apart extension portion can emit light to the same degree.

<Technical idea of the top light emitting means. Points to change the way the light is emitted depending on the distance from the light emitting means>
A light-receiving means configured to emit light; and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, the light-receiving means receiving first the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode, A game machine T1 comprising: a second light receiving means for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that LED light is made incident from the edge of the planar member and emitted from the surface of the planar member (for example, JP-A-2015-159875). See). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of light emission effect.

  To be more specific, like the conventional gaming machine described above, when performing a light emitting effect with an LED substrate formed of a flat plate, the cost of the substrate can be reduced, which is useful for cost reduction, but as it is a three-dimensional light emitting effect. It was difficult to achieve both.

  That is, the effect is apt to be lowered due to the difference in the light emitting mode (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED, and in order to eliminate this, the light emitting mode is weak. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for presentation increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in an obstacle to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it is unavoidable to choose between improving the effect and reducing the cost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in a different mode, the effect is reduced (change) even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the mode of the light receiving means. For example, a light-transmissive member made of a colorless or colored transparent member may be used, or a member such as frosted glass that makes the surface emit light in a substantially uniform manner, or may be formed by curing a resin of a milky white material. It may be a white member, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji screen, or a member to which a display is projected (projected) similar to a transmissive liquid crystal. The member of the above aspect may be used.

  In the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured such that the way of lighting changes stepwise in response to a difference in distance from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to execute the effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly.

  The gaming machine T1 or T2 is provided with an accommodating means for accommodating the light emitting means and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the accommodating means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine T3, characterized in that it comprises partitioning means for partitioning an area to be illuminated, and the light receiving means is configured so that the way of lighting is changed for each area partitioned by the partitioning means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the frame of the partitioning means is arranged at the boundary where the way in which the light receiving means emits light changes, so that the way in which the light receiving means emits light changes rapidly. It is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player when the player is made to do so. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the effect of light emission effect using the light emitting substrates.

  In the gaming machine T3, the gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the emitting board is aligned by being supported by the partitioning means in a direction opposite to the biasing force applied to the emitting board.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, the assembly work can be facilitated by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting board and the partitioning means, and the light emitting board is used at the time of use. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation between the partition means and the partition means.

  In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion arranged on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A gaming machine T5, which is provided with a section.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting portion and the light receiving means can be narrowed without being influenced by the size of the partitioning means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be prevented. It is easy to totally reflect the light, and it is possible to prevent the intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting means from decreasing.

  In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that corresponds to the shape of the light emitting portion provided on the light emitting substrate and does not receive the insertion portion. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the opening is formed such that the opening is enlarged as the distance from the light emitting substrate is increased, and the surface is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T5, the through hole in which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting the light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means. Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between and.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is formed such that the side of the light receiving means is farther from the light emitting means than the side closer to the light emitting means has a larger cross-sectional outer shape. T7.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light through the light receiving means is made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. You can

  In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side and a cutout boundary surface portion intersecting with the light conducting portion, and the cutout boundary surface of the light conducting portion is A gaming machine T8, wherein the front-rear surface portion in the extending direction is arranged at a position shorter than the inclined surface portion.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger as it goes forward, it is possible to form the cutout boundary surface portion. However, it is possible to make the thickness of the light conducting portion uniform. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the total reflection along the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

  In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including a base end portion of the insertion portion. Characteristic gaming machine T9.

  According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T7 or T8, it is easy to visually recognize the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means as line-shaped light (light in which lights from point light sources are mixed with each other). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of a point light source without increasing the number of LEDs provided.

<Points composed of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
In a gaming machine provided with a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means includes a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction, and the first means. A second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction inclined with respect to the direction, and a gaming machine U1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (for example, see JP-A-2016-41185). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure is lowered.

  For example, when a fastening screw is inserted through the fixing means in the front-rear direction, the light emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where it interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the area in which the fixing means can be arranged substantially coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position in which the fixing means can be arranged.

  In other words, since the shape of the supporting plate that supports the light emitting substrate from the back side needs to be formed larger than the light emitting substrate by the amount of the fixing means, the size of the area where the supporting plate can be arranged is set. The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the inserting direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction inclined with respect to each other, all the fixing means are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is possible to secure a wider effect area on the side visually recognized by the player, as compared with the case where the player is inserted.

  In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes an outer surface having a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Gaming machine U2.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is exerted. A force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing unit that suppresses a decrease in the fixing force.

  Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are made of resin-molded products and the drawing direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction inclined with respect to each other and the drawing direction are Since it is inclined, the fixing force may be weakened by the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the fixing force by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part. can do.

  The configuration of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be loosening prevention means for preventing fixed loosening, or loosening regulation means for restricting further loosening when fixed loosening occurs.

  In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes a notifying means capable of notifying a fixing failure of the fixing means, the gaming machine U4.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, the notification means reports the improper fixing of the fixing means, so that it is possible to detect early that the fastening screw is loose.

  The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically informing like a detecting means such as a sensor, or may be a structural means for causing a change in appearance. As structural means, for example, a transmission changing means for changing the transmission strength of vibration generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, a light effect changing means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in the appearance, An example of such a vibration notification unit is that which causes the player to notice by abutting the vibrating portion of the vibrating device to generate abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration.

  Any one of the gaming machines U2 to U4 is provided with a third means arranged between the first means and the second means, and the third means includes the first surface and the second surface. A game machine U5, which is characterized in that it is arranged between them.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the directions in which the first means and the second means can generate the resistance force as the component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means are plural directions. Therefore, the third means can be easily held safely.

  The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured so that the player can visually recognize the first means side while the second means side is not visually recognized by the player. In this case, the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface widens is the first means side, and the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface widens is the second means side. The area occupied by the structure can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine U5, a fourth means is provided on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed, and the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U6.

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in the front view can be made to interfere with each other, so that the third means and the fourth means. It is possible to secure a large allocable area of.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged as a set with a predetermined gap, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are respectively arranged in a set with a predetermined gap, so that one of the fixing means is provided. It is possible to prevent the deformation along the generating direction of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being loosened.

<Rigidity of the game board helps reduce rigidity due to the notch (through hole) beside the rear case>
In a gaming machine provided with a game board and a facing means whose edge portion is arranged to face the game board, the facing means is provided with a proximity portion which is arranged close to the game board at the edge portion on the left and right sides. The gaming machine ZA1 is characterized in that the form of the adjacent portion is asymmetrical to the left and right.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a gaming board forming a gaming area and a rear case in which a movable unit and the like are arranged (for example, see JP-A-2016-77627). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the internal space of the rear case is eroded by the space occupied by the connecting position of the gaming board and the rear case, and therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for arranging the movable unit and the like. There was a problem that it would be difficult.

  In particular, in a right-handed machine that plays a right-handed game in a probability variation state (high probability state) or a big hit game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area, so the right It has been required to secure an internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game balls flow down.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, since the formation mode of the proximity portion is left-right asymmetrical, the arrangement of the left-right edge portions of the facing means with respect to the game board can be left-right asymmetrical. Instead of sacrificing the inner area of the facing means, it is possible to easily secure the inner area of the other facing means on the left or right side. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board can be improved, a sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like can be secured, and the degree of freedom in the effect of allowing the player to visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, it is possible to illuminate the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed flow path) with the light emitting means of the moving accessory or the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

  It should be noted that the mode of forming the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged apart from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

  It should be noted that the formation mode of the proximity portion is not limited at all. For example, a region in which the connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting to the game board is not formed in a wide range may be secured, or the connecting portion (contact portion) may be suppressed in area before being connected ( You may make it arrange|position a contact part.

  Further, the left-right asymmetrical mode is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction in which the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetrical, or the functional portion disposed in the proximity portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed is The formation position of the formed fastening portion or the like, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the fastening screw insertion direction is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations may be left-right asymmetric.

  In the gaming machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is disposed so as to face each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion has a formation direction with respect to the arrangement portion left and right. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by being configured asymmetrically.

  According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the gaming board. The form in which the forming direction is asymmetric is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetric direction (the same direction for both left and right), or may be the forming direction for intersecting left and right (for example, a direction orthogonal to each other).

  Examples of the forming direction include the extending direction in which the plate-shaped portion is extended (the direction in which it is provided), the recessed direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (the cutting direction), and the like.

  In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that is a surface that faces the game board and an facing side that is a side that faces the game board, and is compared with a portion for the left side portion of the game board. The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that the ratio of the facing side is larger than that of the facing surface in the portion to the right side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the lateral width occupied by the proximity portion can be made narrower in the right side portion of the gaming board than in the left side portion of the gaming board.

  In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, a gaming machine ZA4 is provided with a restraining means for restraining the displacement of the gaming board or the facing means in the facing direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the facing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. Note that the arrangement of the suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at a position distant from the game board (including a position abutting on the facing means) or may be arranged at a position distant from the facing means (including a position abutting on the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the facing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the game board and the facing means).

  In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side, the gaming machine ZA5.

  According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (securing the rigidity) without providing a special member in the facing means.

  In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost surface of the facing means in a front view, the gaming machine ZA6.

  According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the design freedom inside the gaming board, so that while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area, It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure rigidity) of the entire gaming unit.

  In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that is not in contact with the game board at an edge portion of the outermost surface in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic gaming machine ZA7.

  According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contact portion is set as the position for arranging the drive device of the variable winning a prize port or its drive device. It can be effectively used by setting it as a path for wiring connected to the prize winning sensor or the light emitting device or as a place where the light emitting device is arranged.

  In any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is made of a resin material, the facing means includes a production means arranged between the game machine and the front end of the production means. A gaming machine ZA8, which is configured to be arranged on the front side of the front end of the facing means.

  According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the effect means can be expanded to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable accessory>
A game that includes a light emitting unit that emits light to a predetermined light emitting region, and a displacement unit that is configured such that a first position that at least partially overlaps the light emitting region in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of the displacement section. In the machine, the light emitting area is provided with a possible area which is configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that the light emitting means and the displacing means overlap each other in a front view (for example, see JP-A-2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the light emitting means and the displacing means are visually recognized independently, and there is a problem that the effect of utilizing overlapping is insufficient. That is, since the displacement means is arranged on the front side of the light emission means, the light emission means is hidden by the displacement means, and there is a problem that the effect of the production becomes insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visible in a different light emitting manner due to the entanglement with the manner of the displacing means, it is possible to diversify the production aspect.

  The mode of the displacing means may be, for example, the arranging mode of the displacing means, the displacing mode of the displacing means, the orientation (posture) mode of the displacing means, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means arranged in the displacing means, or the like. It is illustrated. As an arrangement mode of the displacement means, a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps the light emitting means, a case where the entire displacement means overlaps the light emitting means, and the like are exemplified. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means side and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The direction (posture) of the displacing means may be that the surface of the displacing means faces the light emitting means, the back surface of the displacing means faces the light emitting means, or the surface between them faces the light emitting means. It is illustrated.

  The light emitting means emits light toward the displacing means, turns on, blinks, or goes out, or emits light toward the side away from the displacing means, turns on, blinks, or turns off. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine ZB1, the feasible area is in a first state in which the displacement means is arranged in the first position and in a second state in which the displacement means is arranged in a second position different from the first position, A gaming machine ZB2, which can be configured to have different light emission modes visually recognized from the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB1, it is possible to change the light emission mode by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player while keeping the same emission mode of the displacement means alone. Can be changed suddenly.

  In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting unit includes a substrate on which a light emitting unit is arranged, and a refracting unit arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting unit, and the substrate is the predetermined one. The gaming machine ZB3, which is arranged outside the feasible region when viewed in a direction, and wherein the refraction unit includes a first refraction portion that overlaps the feasible region when viewed in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refraction portion is a combination of the light emitted from the light emitting portion and the color or the light and shade based on the displacement means. Can be represented by.

  Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other constituent members, for example, a drive device that generates a driving force of the displacement means, and a space for displacing the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is characterized in that the displacement at a position overlapping the feasible region in the predetermined direction is larger than the displacements at other positions.

  According to the gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZB3, displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at a position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and displacement of the displacement means is increased at a position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means in common.

  It should be noted that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative directions may be provided in opposite directions for comparison, or the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component) may be compared. The comparison may be performed by including the number of members that are configured as the displacement means and that are displaced.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means that emits light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means that transmits light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmitting means has a shape in which a width changes in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the feasible region is determined at which position of the displacement section the displacement means is arranged. Can be changed by

  The gaming machine ZB6 according to any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, wherein the feasible area is arranged on a central side of a window portion which is opened so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

  According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emitting mode of the feasible region can be used to guide the player's line of sight to the liquid crystal display region side.

  The arrangement mode of the feasible region is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the mode may be scattered around the window (including the case where there is only one feasible region), or the mode may be a circle (arc) surrounding the window.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 is provided with a substrate on which the light emitting means is provided, and the substrate is not provided with fastening means for fastening at the end portion on the feasible region side. ZB7.

  According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the feasible area, and to make the shadow of the fastening means appear in the feasible area. It can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine ZB7, the gaming machine ZB8 is provided with a covering means that covers the space between the feasible region and the substrate in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the feasible region and the substrate is hidden by the covering means, the visibility of light is deteriorated near the edge of the substrate. Even if there is, it can be avoided to show it to the player.

  In the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, a substrate holding means for holding the substrate is provided, and the substrate holding means is provided with a gap forming portion for forming a gap to facilitate the assembly of the substrate, and the gap forming portion, A gaming machine ZB9, which is closed in an assembled state.

  According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience such as light leaking from the gap forming portion while achieving the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the gap forming portion. .. Further, the gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and may be used for alignment of the other member.

  In any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is arranged at a position apart from an end portion on the feasible region side. Amusement machine ZB10.

  According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, a load is applied to the wiring connected to the connector portion to generate a moment starting from the end on the feasible region side. Therefore, even if the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be taken out easily.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and driving force generated by the driving means can be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. In a gaming machine including a transmission unit, the transmission unit includes a transmission unit that transmits a driving force to a predetermined transmission unit of the displacement unit, and in the driving state of the drive unit, the transmission unit transmits the transmission force. A gaming machine ZC1 which is configured to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the displacement means when it is not in contact with the portion.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a columnar portion used for driving force transmission is configured to be guided in a recess of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the columnar portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by being supported by the columnar portion, it is difficult to perform another effect using the columnar portion while maintaining the posture of the displacement member. There was a problem that

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is not in contact, so that the transmission part can be used for other effects while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. Can be used.

  The mode of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a single or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the drive means, or may be a mode exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members influence each other.

  Note that the mode in which the displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, may be locked (engaged) with a claw-shaped member, or may be abutted against a member having a function as a stopper and suppressed. The embodiment may be performed. In addition, examples of possible suppression include a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, a mode in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (regulated), and the like.

  In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a forming portion formed along a movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is such that the transmission portion is non-moving with respect to the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC2, which is configured to be capable of abutting with the displacement means in the abutting state.

  According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against an external force is improved. be able to.

  In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion is extended from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means and the displacement portion is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A gaming machine ZC3 configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC2, a portion where a load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and a portion where a load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are partially disposed in the opposing direction of the displacement means and the transmission means. Can be shifted.

  In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacing means has one side functional portion formed on one side in the moving direction of the displacing means with respect to the transmitted portion, and the other moving direction side of the displacing means with respect to the transmitted portion. The other-side functional portion formed on the same side, the one-side functional portion is configured on the same plane as the movement locus of the forming portion, and the other-side functional portion is located outside the movement locus of the forming portion. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZC3, the movement direction in which the movement is suppressed by the forming unit can be set to one side direction.

  In any of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means includes the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5, characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means can be changed for each operation section.

  Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted, or it may be transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. It is also possible to change the ratio of the driving force applied.

  According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, it is possible to displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

  In the gaming machine ZC5, the first displacing means is arranged on one side of the transmitting means, and the second displacing means is arranged on the other side of the transmitting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC5, the degree of freedom in setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be improved.

  The combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include a timing at which the first displacing means and the second displacing means are displaced in synchronism with each other, or the transmission or interruption of the driving force to the first displacing means and the second displacing means is reversed and synchronized. It does not matter if it is not displaced.

  Further, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  The gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, wherein the displacement direction of the first displacement means and the displacement direction of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

  According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacing means and the second displacing means can be visually recognized in a common region, so that the first displacing means and the second displacing means Even if the effect area in which the means is displaced is small, an effective effect can be executed.

  The modes of the first displacing means and the second displacing means are not limited at all. For example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which a plurality of displacement means stacked in front and back are projected to a common region at different timings, and the initial arrangement is to stack the front and rear so that a plurality of movable members pass through a common range during movement. It may be configured.

<Prevention of shift of stop position by the load generating part catching up and abutting>
In a gaming machine provided with a first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement means configured to displace the first displacement means by displacing in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means includes: A load generating unit that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacing unit, the first displacing unit includes a loaded unit that receives a load from the load generating unit, and The part is separated from the loaded part during displacement along the predetermined direction, and is configured to be capable of contacting a predetermined part different from the loaded part of the first displacement means. ZD1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a columnar portion used for driving force transmission is configured to be guided in a recess of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the columnar portion and the posture of the displacement member correspond to each other (for example, (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the columnar portion excessively moves due to a drive transmission failure, the position of the displacement member may deviate from the moving end, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section separates from the loaded section during displacement and abuts against a predetermined section different from the loaded section, so that excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means. However, it can avoid that the 1st displacement means is arranged in an unintended position by it.

  In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side of the predetermined direction to the one side in a state where the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. A gaming machine ZD2, which is configured to be able to be given to.

  According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end portion in the predetermined direction, the load generation portion moves in the predetermined direction with respect to the first displacement means. Since the load is applied in the direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed by the load to the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction.

  In the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacing means is provided, and the load generating section hits the first displacing means on the other side in the predetermined direction with respect to the loaded section. A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by contact.

  According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generation section and the first displacement means, so that the driving force is stopped. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. With this, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being displaced from the end positions while rapidly setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

  Further, by providing a portion for taking measures against a rare event that the second displacement means excessively moves, at a location different from the loaded portion receiving the load by each driving force transmission, the loaded portion is Even if is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, a gaming machine ZD4 comprising a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end portion in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, the second displacing means is moved to the second displacing means while the first displacing means is regulated at one end portion in the predetermined direction by the regulating means. It can be displaced independently of one displacement means.

  The mode of the regulation means is not limited at all. For example, a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction intersecting with the displacement direction of the first displacement means may be engaged, or may be regulated by gravity or an urging force of an elastic member, or a part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detection means configured to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction is provided, and the first displacement means includes the detection means. A gaming machine ZD5, characterized in that the means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generation portion abuts the detected portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

  It should be noted that by linking the service life that can be calculated from the number of times of displacement (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine a detection failure based on damage to the detection piece, It is possible to grasp the replacement timing (maintenance timing) of the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generating unit to the predetermined unit intersects with the direction of the load applied from the load generating unit to the loaded unit. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, it is possible to facilitate a plurality of operating directions of the first displacement means.

  The gaming machine ZD7 according to any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, wherein the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at a predetermined distance in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction, so the loaded portion It is possible to narrow the area required for the arrangement of the predetermined portion.

<Technical idea to hold by utilizing the flexibility of the following means>
In a gaming machine including a displacement means configured to displace a predetermined area and a follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of a predetermined portion of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A gaming machine ZE1 comprising means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which flexible wiring is arranged along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, by setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the bending of the wiring does not easily occur when the displacement means is displaced, but the wiring is caught in the displacement means. In order to prevent the above, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring is not displaced relative to each other in each position of the displacing means, and the displacing means is arranged at a predetermined position while the wiring is laid along the temporary fixing portion. Assembling is done while doing so, so it usually takes time to assemble. As a result, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in design and the efficiency in assembly may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means prevents the following means exemplified by the wiring from being displaced toward the predetermined area side, so that the following means is rubbed against the displacement means and damaged. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improve the assembly efficiency.

  In the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the follower means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a distance from the displacement means changes with displacement of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the follower means in such a manner that it can be displaced in the direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes with the displacement of the displacement means. As compared with the case where the position of the tracking means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band, the load applied to the tracking means can be reduced.

  The mode of the prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the follow-up means can be wound, or a claw-like portion around which the follow-up means can be sandwiched. Further, when the preventing means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used for fastening and fixing the members to each other, or used for alignment when assembling the members. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

  Further, the mode of the tracking means is not limited at all. For example, electric wiring for supplying electricity to the displacing means may be used, or a strip-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacing means, a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player. It may be a band-shaped effect member for assisting the effect, or may be elastic means such as a coil spring for generating a biasing force for assisting the displacement of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means, a gaming machine ZE3.

  According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be satisfactorily supplied to the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting a direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the follow-up means is configured to surround the prevention means. Game machine ZE4.

  According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effect obtained by any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the follow-up means largely extends to one side. That is, since the range in which the follower is displaceable can be arranged on both sides of the preventer, the region where it is necessary to avoid interference between the follower and other members can be limited to the range around the preventer. .

  Further, it is not necessary to form an escape portion for allowing the follow-up means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a small space.

  In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means is provided, and the follow-up means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means. Game machine ZE5.

  According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the connecting portion of the follow-up means and the displacement means with the shielding means. The term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the edge portion in front view has an outer shape.

  In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable around a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at an outer edge portion of the shielding means, the gaming machine ZE6.

  According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of protrusion from the outer shape (outer edge portion) of the shielding means of the displacement means is secured while keeping the following means out of the player's view. be able to.

  In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that evenly divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means around the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line that passes through the first axis. A gaming machine ZE7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the follow-up means can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine ZE8 according to any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, wherein the displacement means includes a guide portion that guides the follow-up means in a direction away from a displacement locus.

  According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and improve the durability of the follow-up means.

  In the gaming machine ZE8, the guide portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined region, the gaming machine ZE9.

  According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the tracking means in the vicinity of the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the void through which the tracking means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved as compared with the case where the gap is large.

  In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follow-up means is formed in a string shape or a belt shape, one end portion is connected to the displacement means, the other end portion is connected to the game machine, and is directed to both end portions. A gaming machine ZE10, which is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

  According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a pulling direction from one side of a predetermined area can be applied to both ends of the tracking means. As a result, the tracking means as a whole can be balanced with the load applied from the guide portion.

  In any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

  According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the displacement of the displacement means is absorbed by the looseness of the following means, so that an excessive load is suppressed from occurring in the following means. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arrangement means for arranging the follow-up means with the displacement means is provided, and an alignment portion for aligning the arrangement means is provided, and the alignment portion is A gaming machine ZE12, which is arranged outside a movement locus of the following means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, it is possible to prevent the alignment section from eroding the displacement space of the following means, so that the following means is given to the following means as the displacement means is displaced. The load that is applied can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine ZE12, the follow-up means is configured to be wound around the prevention means, and the follow-up means is set with a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a displacement larger than that of the first displacement portion. A second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

  According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the location where it is likely to be damaged by coming into contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, it is possible to limit the places where reinforcement is required, so that durability can be improved at low cost.

  It should be noted that the mode of comparison of the displacements of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distances of the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacements occur in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

  In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the preventing means includes a protruding portion protruding from the arranging means, and the follow-up means is wound around the protruding portion, the gaming machine ZE14.

  According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means hanging by its own weight by the arranging means. And, the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical idea that displacement mode (transmission mode) changes with forward and reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine provided with a drive unit, a displacement unit configured to be displaceable by a drive force of the drive unit, and a transmission unit configured to transmit a drive force generated by the drive unit to the displacement unit, The drive means is configured to be operable in a first drive mode that generates a drive force in a first direction and a second drive mode that generates a drive force in a second direction different from the first direction, and the displacement means The game machine ZF1 is configured to be displaceable between a first displacement mode driven in the first drive mode and a second displacement mode driven in the second drive mode.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacing means and a second displacing means that are displaced by a driving force by a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in the forward and reverse directions. There is a gaming machine configured as described above (see, for example, JP-A-2013-146413). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is changed only by the length of driving the drive device in the forward direction, and the drive direction of the drive device is switched between the forward and reverse directions. Even if it is, the first displacing means and the second displacing means are both displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of improvement of the effect produced by adopting the device capable of driving in the forward and reverse directions as the driving device is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, since the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, a driving device in which a plurality of driving force generation directions can be set is provided. It is possible to sufficiently improve the effect of use.

  The gaming machine ZF1 is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacing means, and the displacing means is configured to be displaceable in such a manner that the light emitted from the light emitting means passes through an optical axis. Game machine ZF2.

  According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means, so the illuminated position of the displacement means. Can produce a gorgeous effect that changes over time.

  In the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, a displacement restraint means for restraining a displacement of at least a part of the transmission means is provided, and the transmission means has at least one of the first drive mode and the second drive mode, and A gaming machine ZF3, comprising: a suppression region in which transmission of a driving force is suppressed, and the displacement suppressing means is configured to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression region.

  According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement restraining means causes the transmitting means to unintentionally displace when the transmission of the driving force is restrained, thereby displacing in an unintended displacement mode. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

  Further, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained higher than in the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member. Therefore, the displacing means in an appropriate displacing mode can be configured to be easily seen by the player.

  It should be noted that the mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, an engaging device that generates viscous resistance represented by a damper device, a resistance device that generates a resistance force due to its own weight, or a case where the resistance force due to its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of the displacement means) In the case where the direction is along the horizontal direction), since the idling operation cannot be suppressed by the bias of gravity, for example, a device such as a torque limiter having a variable resistance according to the displacement mode may be used.

  The gaming machine ZF3 is provided with a detecting unit configured to detect the displacement of the displacement suppressing unit, and the displacement suppressing unit generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmitting unit in the suppressing region is lower than a predetermined speed. The detection means is configured to suppress resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means includes a detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance. A gaming machine ZF4, which is arranged so that it can be detected.

  According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZF3, is the detection means functioning well for detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing the displacement in the suppression area of the transmitting means of the displacement suppressing means? It can be used for both detection and.

  In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means is a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about a first axis, and a second displacement means that is rotationally displaced outside the first displacement means about the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5, comprising a displacing means, wherein the displacing of the second displacing means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

  According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode, so this suppression is achieved. In a state where the second displacing means is arranged between the player and the first displacing means to block the view, and when the second displacing means is arranged outside the player and the first displacing means. It is possible to configure two kinds of effect modes in the case of not interrupting, and in addition, since it is possible to displace even in the drive mode in which the displacement of the second displacement means is not suppressed, the effect by the displacement means is configured in three kinds of displacement modes in total. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmission means includes a light transmission means formed of a light transmission material on a side of a connecting position with the displacement means, the gaming machine ZF6.

  According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembling of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emission effect by conducting the light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of enabling.

  In any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means is a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about a first axis, and a transmission means of the first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about the first axis. A second displacing means connected to the transmitting means outside the connection position of the second displacing means, and the second displacing means overlaps the first displacing means in the first axial direction. Characteristic game machine ZF7.

  According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the first displacement means can prevent the second displacement means from coming off. This makes it unnecessary to dispose a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 policy 1)>
First operating means configured to be operable by the player, second operating means disposed at a position different from the first operating means and operable by the player, and the first operating means A game machine ZG1 provided with a load generating means arranged on the side of the second operating means and configured to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a plurality of operation devices and a drive device for producing an effect to drive the operation devices (see, for example, JP-A-2016-159178). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the vibration device is arranged in each operation device, the space required for arranging each operation device increases, and the number of operation devices that can be arranged is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is the first operating means and the second operating means (that is, the second operating means). , A plurality of operating means) can also be used for driving. As a result, the space required for disposing the first operating means and the second operating means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operable operating means can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for constructing the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  The mode of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means that can be vibrated (high-speed repeated displacement), a means that generates a load in a predetermined cycle such as a pump, or a means that is composed of an arm member that changes its posture due to displacement of a cam. good. Further, the mode of the load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in the contact state, or may be the load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) transmitted in the non-contact state.

  In the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means, the gaming machine ZG2.

  According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG1, it is possible to transfer the load to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

  In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to shoot a game ball toward a game area, and the load generating means covers the first operating means at least partially from a predetermined direction. A gaming machine ZG3, characterized in that the gaming machine ZG3 is provided in the installation means.

  According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the finger of the player operating the first operating means is sandwiched between the first operating means. The load generated by the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the player's finger.

  For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass in the process of moving the fingers of the player by moving the fingers closer to the first operating means and releasing the finger from the first operating means after the operation is completed. By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from the direction in which it easily interferes with the fingers, the load of the load generating means can be particularly easily transmitted to the player during the movement of the fingers.

  Further, for example, by disposing the covering means at a position where the player has high probability of touching the first operating means when operating the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is increased during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state in which it is easy to transmit to the player.

  It should be noted that this idea is different from the idea of disposing the load generating means in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from the first operating means.

  In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and configured to be able to transfer a load to the first operating means and the second operating means. The game machine ZG4 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the side of the first operating means.

  In the gaming machine ZG4, the intervening means is configured to be able to change the strength of load transmission by the displacement of the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

  According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted via the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven as compared with when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the degree of the operation (vibration) of the first operating means and the second operating means that are interlocked with each other due to the load or the like given to the pachinko machine by the player, and at the time of driving the load generating means, It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5 is provided with a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

  According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the player's safety can be secured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such that the displaced member that is displaced by the vibration of the load generating means unexpectedly collides with the player.

  Also, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding the load generating means in the desired direction, so the load generation adopted to realize the desired motion (vibration) effect The degree of freedom of the means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured in a mode that allows displacement of the load generating means in an intersecting direction intersecting with a direction guided by the guide portion, the gaming machine ZG7.

  According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the intersecting direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state, and at the time of switching, the driving state (stable state). The load generating means can be displaced in different modes. As a result, the effect produced by the load generating means can be improved.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the modes that allow the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided so that the guiding direction of the second holding means intersects the guiding direction of the guide portion, or the load generating means may be provided between the holding means and the holding means. It may be configured such that a flexible member is interposed, and the displacement is caused by the deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
The cover means includes a frame means configured in a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side, and a vibrating means arranged in the covering means and configured to vibrate. The means is provided with a permissible part that allows displacement, and the vibration of the vibrating means is configured to be transmitted through the permissible part. A gaming machine ZH1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a front frame and a vibrating means arranged on the front side of the front frame (for example, see JP-A-2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means to the extent that vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration performance. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, since the vibrating means is arranged in the covering means and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, the vibration can be transmitted to the player side through the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by the displacement of the covering means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the frame means side. As a result, the degree of vibration strength of the vibrating means can be increased.

  The mode of the permitting part is not limited at all. For example, the slide, phosphorus, or gear may be configured in a connection mode that is premised on the displacement, and the displacement may be caused by the operation of the slide, the link, the gear, or the like. It may be configured so as to be flexible and to be displaced by being given an overload.

  In the gaming machine ZH1, the covering means is configured such that the allowable displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable displacement in the horizontal direction. .

  According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the allowance portion is maintained by the displacement in the horizontal direction, while the player puts his hand on the covering means so that the direction of gravity with respect to the covering means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being excessively displaced and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by suppressing the allowable amount of vertical displacement, the structure of the product can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is configured in a bag shape in which the frame means side is opened, and the gaming machine ZH3.

  According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is formed into a bag shape, the edge portion of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other. It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means that come into contact with each other and transmit the vibration. Thus, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the frame means side, and thus it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the main board, the ball passage, and the main electrical structure arranged on the frame means side.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion that supports the arrangement portion, The game machine ZH4 is characterized in that the portion is configured to have a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

  According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of the vibration transmission to the frame means side. As compared with the case of being hard, biting can be caused by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibrating means toward the frame means can be secured. Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the covering means on which the vibrating means is disposed to a large extent.

  In any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering portion and a second covering portion having a deformation resistance lower than that of the first covering portion, and the vibrating means is A gaming machine ZH5, comprising: an abutting part connected to the first covering part and the second covering part and capable of locally contacting the first covering part.

  According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the first covering portion having a high deformation resistance and the contact portion are locally brought into contact with each other, so that the contact position thereof is increased. Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5 is provided with a ball launching operation means that is operated to launch a game ball toward a game area, and the covering means is at least between the cover launching means and the ball launching operation means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by passing through a predetermined member.

  According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacing the accessory>
In a gaming machine provided with a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, it is possible to change the appearance of the irradiated means while leaving the outer shape of the irradiated means in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine ZI1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is mounted on a movable accessory and is provided with a light emitting unit configured to execute a light emission effect (for example, see JP-A-2015-208360). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a member that displaces so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means is not provided, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emission effect. However, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding the method of realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is compressed due to the control and the substrate becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and when the displacement means is displaced, it may interfere with the light emitted from the light emitting means. With such a configuration, the mode of the light emission effect can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission effect without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for data for control and the elimination of the circuit for control. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

  The mode of displacement is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be rotated, linearly slid, or displaced along a predetermined curve. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the case where the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction is smaller than the case where the direction of the slide intersects the predetermined direction. It is possible to easily maintain the outer shape.

  The mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it is configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects with the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the posture, or even if the posture does not change, the member protrudes from the inside to enlarge or reduce the size. The relative projected area may be changed by the displacement.

  The mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may be slid on a flat surface so as to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

  Further, the mode of leaving the outer shape of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as if it is stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount is smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. The aspect may be sufficient.

  Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means side at any timing of the displacement.

  The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed or the position may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Further, the irradiation direction may be fixed or the irradiation direction may be variable.

  The light emitting means may be displaced in such a manner that the optical axis is directed toward the irradiated means and the light emitting means is slid so as to approach and separate from the irradiated means. Alternatively, the light emitting means may be moved around the irradiated means while the optical axis is directed toward the irradiated means. It may be a rotating one.

  The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that keeps the lighting state at all times, or one that can be turned on and off.

  In the gaming machine ZI1, a difference in appearance of the illuminated means is caused by the illuminated means reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means as soon as the light emitting means irradiates the light. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing of light irradiation. . According to this, the irradiated means may be a displaceable means or a non-displaceable means.

  In the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the attention to the irradiated means can be improved.

  It should be noted that the mode of displacement, which is the basis for the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means, is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or an irregular displacement. Further, it may be an instantaneous displacement, or a slow speed (a slow speed such that the player cannot grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

  The gaming machine ZI4 in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, wherein the irradiated means can be configured to change a direction in which light from the light emitting means is reflected.

  According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, it is possible to make different the spots illuminated by the light reflected through the irradiated means.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to configure such that the irradiation target means reflects light in the same direction, but at least one of the light quantity and the color of the light is different. .

  According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the attention to the light emission mode of the irradiated means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the optical axis is configured to be capable of irradiating the irradiated means with light in an irradiation mode that does not interfere with the movement locus of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means. A gaming machine ZI6, which is provided with a shield light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from the non-shielding light emitting means, it is possible to irradiate the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being viewed darker than necessary.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means can be arranged at a first irradiation means and a shielding position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means. Comprising a second irradiation means configured, the first irradiation means, the area of the light emitting means as viewed in the optical axis direction, as compared with the case where the second irradiation means is not arranged at the shielding position. The gaming machine ZI7 is configured such that it becomes smaller when the second irradiated means is arranged at the shielding position.

  According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of blocking light can be improved. The change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is emitted from the light emitting means.

  In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the irradiated means with a plurality of optical axes, and the irradiated means can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, increasing the number of LEDs), the amount of light received by the irradiated means is increased. Can be made.

  Any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8 is provided with a driving unit configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiation target unit and a displacement unit arranged around the irradiation target unit, and the irradiation target unit is being displaced. A predetermined first surface is directed to the same side, and the displacement means is configured to cyclically displace the first position and the second position. .

  According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means, the emission mode of the irradiated means caused by the disposition of the displacing means ( For example, the switching timing of (bright/dark) can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

  The displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, slide displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement generated on a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device or a rotational displacement generated on a rotation axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

  In any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. Accordingly, the game machine ZI10 is configured such that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side.

  According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light when the displacement means is arranged at the first position and when the displacement means is arranged at the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light that travels toward the player.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3. M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to In any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that the light emitting means and the displacing means are overlapped with each other when viewed from the front (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2016-159178).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the effect of the effect is insufficient. The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a staging effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 has at least a displacement section in which a light emitting unit that emits light to a predetermined light emitting area and a first position where the light emitting area at least partially overlaps with each other when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine comprising a displacement means configured to be included in a part, wherein the light emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visually recognizable in a plurality of types of light emission modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means. Prepare
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the feasible region has a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and the displacement means has the first position. It is possible to configure a case where the light emission mode visually recognized from the predetermined direction is different between the second state arranged at the different second position.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the light emitting means is arranged such that a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged and light emitted from the light emitting portion can be refracted. The refraction means is provided outside the feasible region when viewed in the predetermined direction, and the refraction unit includes a first refraction portion that overlaps the feasible region when viewed in the predetermined direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the effect of production can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the position of the displacement means and the light emission mode can be associated with each other.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the degree of freedom in arranging the substrates can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
11 Outer frame (second support means)
12 Inner frame (acceptance means)
13, A13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closure means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary convex portion (part of concave portion)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate, part of game ball holding part)
51 operation handle (part of first operation means, operation means for shooting a ball)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way blocking means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Fal ball passage (fal ball passage)
159 Opening/Closing Restriction Section (Blocking Restriction Section)
173 Long cover member (part of the solution)
178 Reverse cup part (a part of arranging means, a first means, an intrusion restricting part, a part of eliminating means)
180 Bundling movable member (part of arranging means, second means, supporting means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of the second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left detection piece (part of continuous hitting determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of moving direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hitting determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (a part of operation means)
314 Shaft part (shaft rod)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hitting determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right side detection sensor (part of continuous hitting judgment means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction judgment means)
330 Upper frame member (part of housing means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing portion (part of support portion)
340, 5340, 6340 Drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (a part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d Coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d Connection pin (protruding part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintaining means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of the maintaining means, part of the first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 Front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha Auxiliary convex part (a part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
500 Right panel unit (production means)
500L left double plate unit (first means)
500R Right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support Plate (Connected Means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support holes (part of the connecting part)
532 Inclined rib part (abutting means)
540 Light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Convex portion (part of connecting portion)
600 Board support device (state change means)
620 Rotating front claw member (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Support base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (driving means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintaining means)
2348 Slide claw member (a part of maintaining means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of housing means)
8326a First through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326b Second through hole (a part of the second opening)
8326c Third through hole (a part of the second opening)
9142a Right sloping surface (part of pay-out ball discharging portion)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way blocking means, loading means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed portion)
10014 Front frame (part of first supporting means, part of holding means)
10014a Metal main body (a part of holding means)
10145d Rolling plate part (regulating means)
10310 Pivoting operation member (part of operation means, part of operation unit)
10321 Left front cover (part of first supporting means)
10322 Right front cover (part of the first supporting means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
6400 Lower plate unit (part of the game ball holding part)
6411 Main body (allowable part)
6413 Projected shape portion 6414 Recessed shape portion 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 Main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 Right reinforcement rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 Left reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of connecting means)
6520 Optical transmission unit (a part of light receiving means)
6521b Light receiving projection (part of first light receiving means, part of insertion part)
6521d Light passing hole (part of second light receiving means)
6521e Main body cylinder part (a part of optical conduction part)
6522 Flange part (drawing boundary surface part)
6540 Partition unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 Guided fastening part (a part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Protruding rib (part of suppressing means)
6548 Transparent covering member (part of suppressing means)
6550 Plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 Extension plate part (part of external surface)
6554a Screw-in portion (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 Rear side fastening part (a part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 Light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Partitioning member (first member, part of first means, part of housing means, part of partitioning means)
6562a Expansion hole (a part of non-insertion through hole)
6562b Direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large-diameter cylindrical part (a part of regulation means)
6570 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate)
6574a Edge light emitting part (a part of light emitting means)
6574b Surface emitting part (a part of light emitting means)
6580 Back support member (second member, part of first means, part of accommodation means)
6610 Audio device (part of vibrating means, part of notifying means, part of fourth means)
6621 retaining plate part (a part of the facing part, a part of the suppressing means, a part of the notifying means)
6622 contact avoiding recess (part of facing part, part of suppressing means, part of informing means)
6710 Base member (part of housing means)
6720 Illuminated substrate (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting substrate, part of third means)
6730 Light receiving member (a part of light guiding means)
6731 Light-receiving surface portion (part of second light guide means, part of main body portion, cover portion)
6732 Inner extension (part of frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of frame)
6734 Long ribs (a part of the first light guide means, a facing extension portion)
6735 Fins (a part of the first light guide means, a separated extension portion)
6736 insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting part (a part of displacement prevention part)
6740 Flat plate member (part of housing means, part of shielding means)
6750 Curved plate member (part of housing means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative protrusion (a part of displacement prevention part)
6760 Cover member (part of housing means, part of shielding means)
6802L Fastening part (part of support part)
6802R insertion hole (part of support part)
18830 Illuminated substrate (a part of light emitting means)
D1a Edge light emitting part (a part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 Streak D24 End streak (part of streak)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a Deformation part (deformation part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 Terminal area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped route (folding part)
V13, V14 Gap 21051 Handle support plate (predetermined member)
21410 Covering base member (part of covering means, second covering portion)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering portion)
21500 Vibration device (part of vibration means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generation means)
21520 Covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 Ridge portion (a part of arrangement portion)
21530 Covering cover member (part of intervening means, holding means)
21534 Ridge (part of the guide)
21540 Opposing plate member (a part of interposing means)
21541 Shell-shaped overhanging part (contact part)
De3 overhanging part (supporting part)
A310 Back case (opposing means)
A312 Outer wall part (part of proximity part, arrangement part, facing side)
A312a Notch (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate part (part of edge part, part of proximity part, facing surface)
A73 outer edge member (a part of suppressing means)
75 Metal Plate Member (Part of Suppression Means)
A86 center frame (part of the window)
A400 First motion unit (a part of effect means)
A411 Main body (part of the covering means)
A415 Diffuser (Refraction means)
A416 Illuminated board (board)
A416a Light emitting means (light emitting unit)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 Board fixing plate (board holding means)
A417h Notch (gap forming part)
A426 Detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 First displacement member (a part of displacement means)
A444 Diffusion plate (transmission means)
A445b Light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission protrusion (part of predetermined part)
A455e Detected plate part (a part of detected part)
A456a Projection plate part (one side functional part, load part)
A456b Opposed arrangement part (other side functional part, part of predetermined part)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 pinned gear (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission projection (part of transmission means, transmission portion, load generation portion)
A464 Arc wall part (forming part, part of regulating means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 Support box part (a part of shielding means)
A475 Fastening part (part of preventive means, protruding part)
A480 Rear lid part (a part of placement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (positioning part)
A490 Second displacement member (a part of displacement means)
A491a Axis supported protrusion (1st axis)
A491d2 ridge (part of the guide)
A511 Slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a Light emitting means (non-shielding light emitting means)
A720 Rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 first rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 Shell (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 Central rotating member (a part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotation member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 Second support (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 First detection sensor (detection means)
A763 Detected piece (Detected part)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (a part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 Slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission portion, load generation portion)
A4550 Decoration member (part of displacement means)
A5001 Displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 Transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Shaft-supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 Thin part (part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 Projection (part of prevention means)
AC1 first area (a part of the light emitting area)
AC2 second region (part of light emitting region, first region, first refraction part)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa middle part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ Transmission path on optical axis UL1 (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

Claims (2)

A first light emitting means capable of irradiating light to be visible in a predetermined area of the transmitting member is fixed at a predetermined position than said transmitting member is arranged on the rear side, weight and the predetermined region in the predetermined direction when viewed And a displacement means configured such that the first position is included in at least a part of the displacement section,
The transmissive member is a plate-shaped member formed so as to diffuse the light from the first light emitting means in a direction intersecting the plate thickness direction and can diffuse the light, and can directly receive the light from the first light emitting means. A first region and a second region which does not overlap with the first light emitting means when viewed in the predetermined direction,
The first position is a position overlapping the second region when viewed in the predetermined direction,
The displacement means includes a second light emitting means capable of irradiating the predetermined area with light.
It is displaceable from the second position located outside the predetermined region in the predetermined direction to the first position by rotational movement and parallel movement ,
Wherein the predetermined region, game machine, characterized in that it comprises the possibility configured region visible at a plurality of types of state-like corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.